Fac 45 Handbook 2007

FACULTY OF HEALTH SCIENCES
Westville campus
Dean: Professor S Y Essack
Tel: 031- 260 8019

Fax: 031- 260 7872
E-mail: essacks@ukzn.ac.za
Dean’s Assistant: K E Holland
Tel: 031- 260 7402

Fax: 031- 260 7872
E-mail: hollandk@ukzn.ac.za
Secretary E Naidoo
Tel: 031 – 260 8019

Fax: 031 – 260 7872
E-mail: naidooe1@ukzn.ac.za
Principal Faculty Officer V. Govender
Tel: 031 – 260 7925

Fax: 031 – 260 7872
E-mail: govendervn@ukzn.ac.za
Principal Faculty Officer S. Reddy
Tel: 031 – 260 7209

Fax: 031 – 260 7872
E-mail: reddysu@ukzn.ac.za
Faculty Officer J Mey
Tel: 031 – 260 2375

Fax: 031 – 260 2458
E-mail: meyj@ukzn.ac.za
Admissions Officer V. Singh
Tel: 031 – 260 7933

Fax: 031 – 260 7872
E-mail: singhvr@ukzn.ac.za
The College of Health Sciences comprises two faculties: The Faculty of Health
Sciences, based on the Westville and Howard College campuses, and the Nelson R
Mandela School of Medicine, which has its campus in Umbilo Road, Durban. Each
Faculty is in turn organised into a number of Schools, and each School into a number
of Disciplines or Departments.
This handbook deals with the Faculty of Health Sciences. There is a separate
handbook for the Nelson R Mandela School of Medicine.
FACULTY OF HEALTH SCIENCES

UNIVERSITY OF KWAZULU-NATAL
PRIVATE BAG X54001
DURBAN
4000
Telephone: +27 33 260 8019
Fax: +27 33 2607872
E-mail: naidooe1@ukzn.ac.za
Web site: http://www.ukzn.ac.za
Note: The University reserves the right from time to time to add to, withdraw or
amend in any manner, its rules, and any such additions, withdrawals or
amendements shall become binding upon the date of publication or upon such
date as may be specified by the Senate and the Council.
CONTENTS
Dean’s Message to students ........................................................................................ 1

GENERAL RULES FOR THE COLLEGE OF HEALTH SCIENCES ..................... 9
GENERAL RULES OF THE FACULTY OF HEALTH SCIENCES...................... 19
School of Dentistry............................................................................................... 21
School of Medical Sciences.................................................................................. 25
Discipline: Clinical Anatomy ......................................................................... 25
Discipline: Medical Biochemistry ................................................................... 30
Discipline: Human Physiology ....................................................................... 32
School of Nursing................................................................................................. 37
School of Pharmacy and Pharmacology ............................................................... 54
Discipline: Pharmacy....................................................................................... 54
Discipline: Pharmacology................................................................................ 55
School of Physiotherapy, Sport Science & Optometry......................................... 59
Discipline: Physiotherapy ............................................................................... 59
Discipline: Sport Science................................................................................. 66
Discipline: Optometry...................................................................................... 73
School of Audiology, Occupational Therapy & Speech-Language Pathology..... 79
Discipline: Audio logy..................................................................................... 79
Discipline: Occupational Therapy ................................................................... 86
Discipline: Speech-Language Pathology ......................................................... 92
MODULES OFFERED IN THE FACULTY OF HEALTH SCIENCES ................. 98
MODULES FROM OTHER FACULTIES............................................................. 218
In the Faculty of Science & Agriculture............................................................. 218
In the NRM School of Medicine ........................................................................ 225
In the Faculty of Humanities, Development & Social Sciences ......................... 226
In the Faculty of Management Studies ............................................................... 229
Health Sciences 1
Dean’s Message to students
Dear Students
Welcome to the Faculty of Health Sciences. We trust that you will enjoy your
University career in a Faculty that is unequivocally committed to creating an
enabling, nurturing and supportive academic environment and has instituted the
following student support mechanisms, some in collaboration with other University
offices, to ensure student success:
• Consultation Times
Academic staff have consultation times for one-to-one tutoring/interaction with
students. Please enquire about consultation times and use them as necessary during
your time with us.
• Academic Development Programmes
Each discipline has dedicated Academic Development Programme (ADP) Officers
tasked with tutoring and/or monitoring student progress and referring students to the
appropriate offices. It is your right and responsibility to access the support the AD
office offers timeously. In certain instances individual students may be referred (by
the Discipline) to the ADP officer for assistance.
• Mentorship Opportunities
The Mentorship Office on the Westville campus trains and appoints senior student as
mentors. These mentors are available for consultation as per the Mentorship Office
programme. Mentors are senior students in your Discipline who have been through
many of the experiences you are probably having, and can assist with much insight
from a students’ perspective.
• Time Table Support
Each discipline has made available a dedicated timetable slot were all students are
free and thus able to interact with academic staff, ADP officers and mentors. Please
check the individual discipline timetables for this information and make use of that
which is on offer in these slots.
• Student Counselling Centre
The Student Counselling Centre on the Westville and Howard College campuses
offer a range of services including life skills, exam preparation, note-taking. These
services are free and available to students of al levels.
Students are requested to take cognisance of the following important rules in the
handbook:
Please note that the complete General Academic Rules and Rules or Students can be
found in the relevant University publication and on the UKZN Website.
2 Health Sciences
HS13 (See GR16 and GR17) – Duly Performed Certification

The DP requirements for each module shall be published in the Faculty handbook
and in any other manner deemed appropriate by the Faculty
FHEL3 Duly Performed requirements

Rules GR16 and GR17 shall apply. Specific Duly Performed (DP) requirements for
any module shall be published in the Module Guidelines within the Hand Book entry
for that Discipline, failing which, a Duly Performed (DP) certificate will be issued
provided that the Continuous Assessment Mark (CAM) is greater that or equal to
40%.
HS20 (see GR 30) Academic exclusion

Rule GR30
(a) The Council may, with the approval of Senate, after each examination session
exclude or refuse to renew or continue the registration of a student who has
failed to meet the academic requirements for continued registration.
(b) The Senate may cancel the registration of a student in all or one or more of the
modules for which the student is registered in a semester if, in the opinion of the
Senate, the academic achievement of the student is such that the student may not
at the end of the semester obtain credit in such module or modules.
(c) The Council may, with the approval of the Senate, refuse readmission to a
student who fails to satisfy the minimum requirements for readmission.
(d) Subject to Rule GR31, students excluded or refused re-registration may not be
readmitted to the University until they are able to demonstrate that they have
achieved a level of competence satisfactory to the relevant Faculty and the
Senate.
HS20 Academic Exclusion

(a) Except with the permission of Senate, a student who at any stage cannot propose
a curriculum acceptable to the Senate which will lead to the completion of the
qualification within the minimum prescribed period plus four semesters, shall be
excluded from the University in terms of rule GR30.
(b) The Senate may suspend such exclusion for a defined period subject to attainment
of certain specified goals.
HS21 (See GR 31) Academic exclusion – Right of Appeal

Students have the right to appeal against Academic exclusion in terms of Rule GR30.
(a) Such appeal shall be lodged in the Faculty of registration, in the prescribed
manner, within ten (1)) University working days of the release of the results, or
notification of the exclusion.
(b) The process for consideration of such an appeal shall be approved by the Senate.
Health Sciences 3
GR23 Special examinations

(a) A student who has not been able to attempt or complete the original final
examination by a reason of illness or any other reason deemed sufficient by
Senate, may on application be granted permission to sit a special examination,
normally during the next supplementary examination session.
(b) An application for special examination shall be made on the prescribed form,
accompanied by all relevant documentation, and lodged in the relevant Faculty
office within 5 working days of the date of the examination concerned.
(c) If the application for a special examination is approved, the examination result,
if any from the original examination shall be regarded as null and void. If such
an application is not approved, the original examination result shall stand.
HS23 Ethical approval

No experimental work or collection of data shall commence in any research project
in the College involving human or animal subjects, that has not received the approval
of the Senate as complying with the University guidelines for ethical research. Where
such a research project involves work at an institution or institutions other than the
University, the candidate shall not commence such work before proof of ethical
approval from the other institution or institutions concerned has been submitted.
HS22 Unacceptable Behaviour

Students who are required by their curricula to attend clinics and other facilities,
including those that are external to the College or University, shall comply with the
Codes of dress and behaviour of those clinics and other facilities. Infringements of
these cades shall be regarded as infringements of university rules of conduct.
Please take time to familiarize yourself with the University, Faculty, School and
Discipline rules. If you are unsure of anything please ask for assistance from the
Faculty Office, or Discipline staff.
The following are important dates and deadlines in 2007:
PRE-SEMESTER:
Tues, 02 – Fri, 05 Jan
Mon, 08 – Fri, 12 Jan Mon, 08 Jan Deadline for submission of Exclusion
Appeals to Faculty Offices (for November
Thurs, 11 Jan – Thurs, 18 2005 examinations)
Jan Supplementary Exams (except Medical
School)
Mon, 29 Jan – Fri, 02 Mon, 29 Jan – Sat, 03 Feb Orientation (HC, PMB, WV)
Feb Thurs, 01 Feb Release of Supp results
Mon, 05 – Fri, 09 Feb Mon, 05 Feb – Sat, 10 Registration (HC, PMB, WV, Edgewood)
Feb
4 Health Sciences
SEMESTER 1:
1 Mon, 12 – Fri, 16 Feb Mon, 12 Feb Lectures commence
Wed, 14 Feb Final date for registration for first semester
2 Mon, 19 – Fri, 23 Fri, 23 Feb Final date for curriculum changes
3 Mon, 26 Feb – Fri, 02
Mar
4 Mon, 05 – Fri, 9 Mar
5 Mon, 12 – Fri, 16 Mar
6 Mon, 19 – Fri, 23 Mar Wed, 21 Mar Human Rights Day (Public Holiday)
7 Mon, 26 – Fri, 30 Mar
8 Mon, 02 – Fri, 06 Apr Thurs, 05 Apr Lectures end
Fri, 06 Apr Good Friday (Public Holiday)
Mon 09 – Fri, 13 Apr Fri, 06 – Fri, 13 Apr STUDENT EASTER VACATION
9 Mon, 16 - Fri, 20 Apr Mon, 16 Apr Lectures commence, including Edgewood
10 Mon, 23 – Fri, 27 Apr Mon, 23 Apr Friday timetable to be followed
Fri, 27 Apr Freedom Day (Public Holiday)
11 Mon, 30 Apr – Fri, 4 Tues, 1 May Workers Day (Public Holiday)
May Wed, 02 May Final day for withdrawal from a module
12 Mon, 7 – Fri, 11 May
13 Mon, 14 – Fri, 18 May Fri, 18 May Final day for withdrawal from the University
14 Mon, 21 – Thurs, 24 Wed, 23 May Edgewood lectures end
May Wed, 23 May DP Refusals published and sent to Faculty
Thurs, 24 May Office
Thurs, 24 May Follow Friday timetable
Lectures end
15 Fri, 25 May – Fri, 01 Fri, 25 May – Tues, 29 Study period
Jun May Deadline for submission of DP Appeals to
Mon, 28 May Faculty Offices
Exams commence (incl. Saturdays)
Wed, 30 May
16 Mon, 04 – Sat, 09 Jun Exam week
17 Mon, 11 – Fri, 15 Jun Thurs, 14 June Exams and semester end
Sat, 16 Jun Youth Day (Public Holiday)
MID-YEAR BREAK:
Fri, 15 Jun – Sun, 29 STUDENT WINTER VACATION
Jul Wed, 04 July Release of Exam results
Tues, 17 July – Tues, 24 1st-semester Supplementary Exams
July Deadline for submission of Exclusion
Wed, 18 July Appeals and Applications for Remarks to
Faculty Offices
SEMESTER 2:
1 Mon, 30 Jul – Fri, 3 Mon, 30 July Lectures commence
Health Sciences 5
Aug Wed, 01 Aug Final date for registration for second

semester
2 Mon, 06 – Fri 10 Aug Tues, 07 Aug Release of Supp results (incl 1st-semester
exams for Continuing Education)
Thurs, 09 Aug National Women’s Day (Public Holiday)
Fri, 10 Aug Final date for curriculum changes
3 Mon, 13 – Fri, 17 Aug
4 Mon, 20 – Fri, 24 Aug
5 Mon, 27 – Fri, 31 Aug
6 Mon, 03 Sept - Fri, 07
Sept
7 Mon, 10 – Fri, 14 Thurs, 13 Sept Rosh Hashanah (day of condoned absence)
Sept
8 Mon, 17 – Fri, 21 Fri, 21 Sept Lectures end
Sept
Sat 22 – Sun 30 Sept Sat, 22 – Sun, 30 Sept STUDENT MID-TERM BREAK
Mon, 24 Sept Heritage Day (Public Holiday)
9 Mon, 01 Oct – Fri, 05 Mon, 01 October Lectures commence
Oct
10 Mon, 08 – Fri, 12 Oct
11 Mon, 15 – Fri, 19 Oct
12 Mon, 22 – Fri, 26 Oct Fri, 26 Oct Final date for withdrawal from a module
13 Mon, 29 Oct – Fri, 02 Thurs, 01 Nov DP Refusals published and sent to Faculty
Nov Fri, 02 Nov Office
Lecturers end
14 Sat, 03 – Fri, 09 Nov Sat, 03 – Wed, 07 Nov Study period
Tues, 06 Nov Final date for submission for DP Appeals to
Faculty Office
Thurs, 08 Nov Exams commence (incl. Saturdays)
Fri, 09 Nov Diwali/Deepavali (day of condoned
absence)
15 Mon, 12 – Sat, 17 Exam week
Nov
16 Mon, 19 – Sat, 24 Sat, 24 November Exams end and year end
Nov
YEAR-END BREAK:
Mon, 26 – Fri, 30 Nov
Mon, 03 – Fri, 07 Dec Tues, 03 Dec Exam marks to be captured
Mon, 10 – Fri, 14 Dec Thurs, 13 Dec Release of results
Mon, 17 – Fri, 21 Dec
6 Health Sciences
Very important exams results notice:
The onus is on you, the student, to access your examination results immediately after
their release . Results are available from:
1. The official printed result sheet sent to your registered address

2. Campus based Notice Boards
3. The Internet (via Stuent Central)
4. The phone service (082 236 3333 or 082 236 4444)
5. Via SMS from number 34763 – follow instructions below.
To initiate the SMS facility

All that is required is for the student to SMS (text) the characters “UKZN” (in
either upper or lower case), followed by their student number, and then the letter
“r” (for results) or “b” (for student fee account balance) to the number 34763.
For example, the message for exam results for student number 123456789
should read as follows: ukzn123456789r
Similarly the message for a fee balance enquiry for the same student should read
as follows: ukzn123456789b.
The reply received

The reply for exam results will then provide the course code, the mark, and a
description of the result. In some cases, depending on outstanding fees,
supplementary exam decisions etc. the resultant message could be as long as
four messages, e.g.
Results for Student 123456789 Year 2006 Month 11 : LLB301S : Results

withheld-financial reasons-supplementary exam granted;
LLB307S : Results withheld-financial reasons-supplementary exam granted;
PSYC201 : Results withheld-financial reasons;
PSYC302 : Results withheld-financial reasons; PSYC305 : Results withheld-
financial reasons;
PSYC334 : Results withheld-financial reasons-supplementary exam granted;
In the case of fee balances the reply will read as follows:

For students with a debit balance: Student 123456789 Balance Outstanding =
Rnn.nn
For students with a zero balance: Student 123456789 No amount owing
For students with a credit balance: Student 123456789 Balance = Rnn.nn Credit
Health Sciences 7
Costs
The cost for the provision of this service has been fixed at a market related fee of
R2,00 per SMS. This charge to the initiator (the student) will also cover the cost
of the reply irrespective of message size (i.e. number of messages).
An explanation of the Modules Codes

In the second line of each module entry will be found a string of numbers and letters,
for example: 20L-10T-13P-4S-17H-10R-3F-0G-3A-13W-8C, and these should be
interpreted as follows: approximately ‘20L’ indicates 20 hours spent by student in
lectures; approximately ‘10T’ = 10 hours in tutorials; ‘13P’ = approximately 13
hours spent in practical classes; ‘4S’ = approximately 4 hours in seminars; 17H =
approximately 17 hours spent on self study - working on assignments, research
projects, resource-based learning, and the like; ‘10R’ = approximately 10 hours spent
on revision and examination preparation; ‘3F’ = approximately 3 hours on field-
work; ‘0G’ = no group-based learning; ‘3A’ = approximately 3 hours on actual
examinations and assessment. ‘13W’ indicates that the duration of the module is 13
weeks, and ‘8C’ gives the credit-value of the module. The total (notional) hours
required of a student will always be ten times the credit-value of the module
(8creditp points = 80 notional study hours). Notional Hours are defined as the
number of hours an ‘average student’ would need to do and master the work required
for that module. For the example provided a student should expect to dedicate at least
80 hours. The total credits in the curriculum of a single level/year (undergraduate)
should be between 128 and 144. The minimum number of credits for a 4 year degree
are 512 credit points (128 x 4 = 512).
Special Events in the Faculty and University

The Faculty hosts, and supports a number of very special events during the year, and
students in the faculty are encouraged to attend and participate as requested and
applicable.
• Sports Day
This is an all day sports day, hosted by the Faculty Student Council, where teams
from the different Disciplines and Schools have an opportunity to compete against
other teams in a number of sport codes. The highlights of the day are the staff/student
exhibition matches. This is a great team building exercise, and an opportunity to
socialize with fellow Health Science students.
• Graduation
Graduation normally takes place in April of every year, and provides us with an
opportunity to welcome back our new graduates and formally award their degrees to
them.
• Pfizer College of Health Sciences Young Scientists Research Symposium
This prestigious day, to be hosted in October 2007, will see our best Honours level
researchers presenting their research together with ‘colleagues’ from other
Universities in South Africa. This event, to be hosted as a National event for the first
8 Health Sciences
time in 2007, has been made possible through generous sponsorship from Pfizer
South Africa. It is a first for the country also, and the College of Health Sciences at
UKZN is very proud of, and excited by this initiative.
• Oath taking and Awards Day
This event is scheduled for after the November exams every year. At this event, all
graduates in the Faculty take their respective Discipline Oaths, and prizes are
awarded to students who qualify.
We hope that your time with us will be exciting, challenging and rewarding!
Health Sciences 9
GENERAL RULES FOR THE COLLEGE OF HEALTH

SCIENCES
Preamble
The following rules shall apply to every student registered for a qualification in the
College of Health Sciences (hereinafter referred to as “the College”) of the
University of KwaZulu-Natal (hereinafter referred to as “the University”).
Except insofar as they are specifically modified, extended, restricted or otherwise
qualified by the general College rules HS1 to HS43 given below, or by the Rules for
particular qualifications offered within the College, the University’s General
Academic Rules for Degrees, Diplomas and Certificates shall apply to all students of
the College.
The Rules for various qualifications offered within the College, although appearing
separately in different parts of the College Handbook (hereinafter referred to as “the
handbook”), shall be regarded as part of the College rules and shall have equal force.
HS1 Changes in rules

The College may revise or add to its rules from time to time, and any such alteration
or addition shall become binding upon the date of publication or upon such date as
may be specified by the College and approved by the Council and the Senate,
provided that no change in rules shall be interpreted so as to operate retrospectively
to the prejudice of any currently registered student.
HS2 Approval of curricula (cf University Rules GR3, GR13 and GR14)
(a) The rules governing the curriculum of any qualification offered by the College
shall require the approval of the Senate and the Council.
(b) No student shall be registered for any module in the College unless the
curriculum of that student has been approved by the Senate. An approved
curriculum may be modified only with the consent of the Senate.
(c) Save by special permission of the Senate, no student may attend a module for
which he or she is not registered.
HS3 Matriculation (cf University Rule BR2)

(a) University Rule BR2 shall apply. All applicants for a first or primary degree in
the College shall be required, either (i) to have, from the Matriculation Board, a
Matriculation Certificate or a Certificate of Exemption or a Certificate of
Conditional Exemption for applicants from countries outside the Republic of
South Africa; or (ii) to have satisfied the conditions of an alternative admission
process approved by the Senate.
(b) In addition to the requirements of HS3 (a) above, the rules for a particular
programme or qualification may require that certain minimum requirements for
10 Health Sciences
admission, as set out in University Rule BR2 (b), be met. Such additional
requirements shall be set out in the handbook.
HS4 Eligibility (cf University Rule GR7)

An applicant shall not be eligible to apply to register for a qualification in the College
unless he or she
(a) Holds any prerequisite qualification that is required in terms of the rules for the
particular qualification concerned, or is admitted by the Senate to the status of
such prerequisite qualification in terms of Rule GR7(a), or has attained a level of
competence as defined in Rule GR7(b); and
(b) Complies with such further requirements as are stated in the rules for the
particular qualification concerned.
Note: A candidate who is eligible to apply for registration for a qualification
shall not thereby necessarily be entitled to be admitted thereto. (See Rule HS6 below)
HS5 Application to study (cf University Rule GR5)

(a) Applications to study must be made in the prescribed manner, and must include
presentation of the Matriculation Certificate where this is required.
(b) An applicant who has studied at any other tertiary education institution must, in
addition, present an academic record and a certificate of conduct from that
institution.
(c) Where, in terms of the rules of the relevant programme or qualification, further
conditions for registration have to be complied with, the applicant shall present
all supporting documentation requested by the University.
HS6 Selection (cf University Rules GR6, GR7)

Not every candidate who is eligible to apply to register for a particular qualification
in the College in terms of Rule HS4 will necessarily be admitted as a candidate for
that qualification. Applicants shall be subject to selection, in which any factors
deemed by the University to be relevant to the candidate’s prospects of successfully
completing the qualification, to the resources which are available within the
University, or to the University’s obligations in terms of government policies and
regulations, will be taken into account.
HS7 Selection for postgraduate studies (cf University Rule GR7)

a) Graduates of any other recognised university (whether in the Republic of South
Africa or elsewhere) may, for the purpose of proceeding to a postgraduate
qualification in the College, be admitted by the Senate to a status in the
University equivalent to that which they possess in their own university by
virtue of any degree held by them.
b) An applicant who has graduated from another tertiary institution or who has in
any other manner attained a level of competence which, in the opinion of the
Health Sciences 11
Senate, is adequate for the purpose of postgraduate studies or research, may be

admitted as a student in the College.
HS8 Exemption from a module (cf University Rules GR8, HR3, CR3)
Exemption from a module may be granted and credit may be awarded for a module
where an applicant has already obtained credit for an equivalent module or can
demonstrate an equivalent level of competence through prior learning. This shall be
subject to the provisions of University Rules, in particular HR3 and CR3.
HS9 Recognition of attendance (cf University Rules BR4, HR3, CR5)

Subject to the provisions and restrictions of Rule HS31 and University Rules BR4
and HR3, the Senate may accept as part of the attendance of a student, periods of
attendance as a registered matriculated student at any other university or tertiary
institution or in any other faculty in the University.
HS10 Payment of fees (this is University rule GR10)

a) Save by special permission of the Senate and the Council:
(i) An applicant shall not be registered until all relevant prescribed fees are paid;
(ii) A student shall not be entitled to admission to an examination, nor to receipt of
examination results, until all relevant prescribed fees are paid.
b) A student shall not be entitled to the conferral or award of a qualification until all
monies due to the University have been paid
HS11 Attendance and performance requirements (cf University Rules GR30,

GR31)
Every candidate for a qualification in the College shall meet the attendance and
performance requirements prescribed in the rules for the relevant Faculty or in the
rules of the programme or qualification concerned. A candidate who does not meet
these requirements may be excluded from the University in terms of Rule GR30.
HS12 Prerequisite and corequisite modules (cf University Rule GR14)

(a) The College may prescribe certain modules as being prerequisite or corequisite
to other modules offered in the College. All such requirements shall be
published in the relevant module entries in the handbook.
(b) The College may further require, as a condition of registration for a module, the
attainment of a specified minimum mark in a prerequisite module. Any such
requirement shall be published in the relevant module entry in the handbook.
(c) A student who for two semesters or more has undertaken no clinical work in a
prerequisite clinical module may be required to pass a test on the work of that
prerequisite module, or otherwise produce evidence of sustained competence in
the work of the prerequisite module, in order to register for the succeeding
module.
12 Health Sciences
HS13 Due-performance (DP) certification (cf University Rules GR16, GR17)

(a) No student shall be admitted to a final examination in a module, or deemed to
have completed that module, who does not hold a current Duly Performed
Certificate (hereinafter called a “DP certificate”) for the module issued by the
Head of the School in which the module was studied.
(b) A DP certificate shall be valid only for the examinations, including
supplementary and special examinations, of the semester in which it is issued;
save that the Board may, in exceptional circumstances, extend the certificate to
thje relevant subsequent semester, in which case the Board may also allow the
student to retain the relevant class mark.
(c) A condition for the award of a DP certificate shall be the attendance of
prescribed minimum proportions of lectures, tutorial classes, practical classes,
clinics, and other forms of attendance required for the module.
(d) With the approval of the Board, further conditions for the award of a DP
certificate may be specified for any module.
(e) The DP requirements for each module shall be published in the handbook and
shall be brought to the attention of students at the commencement of the module.
(f) Save as may otherwise be approved by the Board, for each module a list of those
students refused DP certification shall be published on or before the last day of
teaching.
HS14 External examination (this is University Rule GR19; see also Rules HS41
and HS42)
a) Except with the permission of the Senate, all modules, other than exit-level
modules, shall be subject to internal examination and independent moderation.
b) Except with the permission of the Senate, all exit-level modules shall be subject
to internal and external examination.
c) The portion of the total assessment subject to independent moderation or
external examination, in terms of (a) or (b) above, shall be at least 50%.
HS15 Examination scripts (this is University Rule GR20)

a) To aid academic development, students who are not in default of fees may view
their examination scripts under supervision.
b) (i) A student who has obtained a final mark of at least 45% for a module may,
on formal application and after payment of the applicable fee, have all their
examination scripts for the module re-marked, normally by the original
examiners, in accordance with the policies approved by the Senate and the
Council.
(ii) Such application shall be lodged in the relevant Faculty Office, in the
prescribed manner, within 10 University working days of the release of final
results.
(iii) The student’s final mark for the module shall be that determined by the re-
mark.
Health Sciences 13
(iv) The fee shall be refunded only if the re-mark causes an improvement in the
class of result as reflected in Rule GR29 (a).
c) Re-marking as contemplated in (b) above shall not be permitted for Honours
projects, Masters dissertations or Doctoral theses.
d) Examination scripts shall be stored by the University for a maximum period of
one (1) year or such longer period required by contractual or professional obligations.
HS16 Examination sessions (this is University Rule GR21)

All examinations conducted within the College shall be held in the prescribed
sessions approved by the Senate.
HS17 Supplementary examinations (cf University Rules GR22, GR24, GR25)

Unless the rules of the relevant Faculty, or of a programme or qualification, prohibits
this in the case of any particular module, and provided the module is not an Honours
project or a postgraduate degree research project,
(a) a student who fails a module with a mark of 40% or more shall be awarded a
supplementary examination in the module; and
(b) under exceptional circumstances, and with the permission of the Senate, a
student who fails a module with a mark less than 40% may be awarded a
supplementary examination.
(c) University General Rules GR22, GR24 and GR25 shall apply.
Special examinations
Special examinations may be awarded, subject to the provisions of University
General Rules GR23 and GR24.
HS18 Pass mark (this is University Rule GR27)

The pass mark for every module which is examined within the College shall be 50%,
provided that any sub-minima required in certain components of the Senate-approved
assessment have been met.
HS19 Award of Degree Cum Laude (cf University Rule BR6)

(a) A diploma or a degree of Bachelor shall be awarded cum laude if a candidate
obtains a credit-weighted average mark of 75% or more for all modules in the
programme, has passed every module in the programme at the first attempt
without recourse to supplementary examinations, and has completed the
programme in the specified minimum period of study.
(b) A degree of Bachelor shall be awarded summa cum laude if a candidate
obtains a weighted average mark of 80 % or more for all modules in the
programme, has passed every module in the programme at the first attempt
without recourse to supplementary examinations, and has completed the
programme in the specified minimum period of study.
14 Health Sciences
(c) The Senate may, on the recommendation of the Board of the Faculty, award a
diploma or degree cum laude for reasons that it considers adequate.
Notes: For the rule governing the award of an Honours degree cum laude or summa
cum laude, see HS28; for that governing the award of a masters degree cum
laude or summa cum laude, see H42.
HS20 Academic exclusion (cf University Rule GR30)

(a) Except with the permission of the Senate and subject to HS20(b) and HS36, a
student who, at any stage, cannot propose a curriculum acceptable to the Senate
which will lead to the completion of the qualification within the minimum
prescribed period plus four semesters, shall be excluded from the University in
terms of Rule GR30.
(b) The Senate may suspend such exclusion for a defined period subject to the
attainment of specified goals.
HS21 Academic exclusion - right of appeal (this is University Rule GR31)

(a) Students have the right to appeal against academic exclusion in terms of Rule
HS20 or GR30.
(b) Such appeal shall be lodged with the Faculty Office in the prescribed manner
within ten University working days of the release of final results or notification
of the exclusion, whichever was the later.
HS22 Unacceptable behaviour Students who are required by their curricula to

attend clinics and other facilities, including those that are external to the College or
University, shall comply with the codes of dress and behaviour of those clinics and
other facilities. Infringements of these codes shall be regarded as infringements of
University rules of conduct.
HS23 Ethical approval (cf University Rule CR7 (d))

No experimental work or collection of data shall commence in any research project
in the College involving human or animal subjects, that has not received the approval
of the Senate as complying with the University guidelines for ethical research. Where
such a research project involves work at an institution or institutions other than the
University, the candidate shall not commence such work before proof of ethical
approval from the other institution or institutions concerned has been submitted.
ADDITIONAL RULES FOR HONOURS DEGREES IN THE COLLEGE
HS24 Admission (cf University Rule HR2)

(a) To be eligible to apply to register for a degree of Honours, a candidate shall
i) hold a Bachelors degree of the University in an appropriate field, or be
admitted by the Senate to the status thereof in terms of Rule GR7(a), or have
attained a level of competence defined in Rule GR7(b); and
Health Sciences 15
ii) comply with such further requirements as are specified in the rules for the
particular Honours degree concerned.
(b) Eligible applicants shall be subject to selection based on the appropriateness of
their academic background, the strength of their previous academic record, the
availability of University resources, and University obligations in terms of University
or government policies. In general, candidates will be expected to have obtained a
credit-weighted average mark of at least 60% in the final examinations of their
previous degree.
HS25 Attendance (cf University Rule HR3)

a) A student for a degree of Honours shall attend as a registered student for a
period of at least two semesters after admission in terms of Rule HS24; and
b) unless the Senate determines otherwise, shall complete all modules at the
University.
HS26 Curriculum (cf University Rule HR4)

Unless the Senate determines otherwise, the curriculum for a degree of Honours shall
include a prescribed project with a credit value of no less than 32 points.
HS27 Re-examination of prescribed project (cf University Rule HR6)

A prescribed project that is failed may be referred back once for revision and
resubmission before the close of the applicable supplementary examination session.
HS28 Award of Honours degree cum laude (cf University Rule HR6)
(a) A degree of Honours shall be awarded cum laude if a candidate obtains a credit-
weighted average mark of 75% or more for all modules in the programme,
obtains a mark of 75% or more for the project module, has passed every module
in the programme at the first attempt without recourse to supplementary
examinations, and has completed the programme in the specified minimum
period of study.
(b) A degree of Honours shall be awarded summa cum laude if a candidate obtains a
credit-weighted average mark of 80% or more for all modules in the programme,
obtains a mark of 80% or more for the project module, has passed every module
in the programme at the first attempt without recourse to supplementary
examinations, and has completed the programme in the specified minimum
period of study.
ADDITIONAL RULES FOR MASTERS DEGREES BY COURSEWORK IN

THE COLLEGE OF HEALTH SCIENCES
HS29 Recognition of examinations

The Senate may accept examinations passed or certificates of proficiency completed
in any coursework module by a student in any faculty of the University or of any
16 Health Sciences
other university or institution recognised by the Senate for this purpose, or accept
demonstration of an equivalent level of competence through prior learning, in terms
of Rule GR7 (b), as exempting the student from examination in module(s) prescribed
for a degree of Master by coursework, provided that:
a) in a degree other than Master of Medicine, no more than 50% of the required
credits for the coursework degree may be so exempted, whilst in a degree of
Master of Medicine, the full coursework component of the degree may be so
exempted; and
b) at least 75% of the total number of credits required for the degree are at Masters
level and the remainder at Honours level or above; and
c) students shall not have the degree of Master conferred unless the conditions laid
down in Rules HS30 and HS31 are satisfied.
Note: The relevant rule governing degrees of Master of Medicine is FMED7.
HS30 Periods of attendance (University Rule CR4)

A student registered for the degree of Master by coursework shall be so registered for
a minimum period of two semesters for full-time students or four semesters for part-
time students before the degree may be conferred.
HS31 Recognition of attendance (University Rule CR5)
The Senate may accept as part of the attendance of a student for a degree of Master
by coursework, periods of attendance as a registered or graduated student at any
other university or institution or in any other faculty, provided that students shall not
have the degree of Master conferred unless:
a) their periods of attendance are together not less than the complete period
prescribed for conferral of the degree; and
b) the research component is completed at the University.
HS32 Curriculum (see University Rule CR6)

a) A student shall complete all prescribed modules, at least one of which shall
include a research component on a particular topic approved by the Senate, and
comply with such other conditions as are prescribed by the Senate and the rules
of the College.
b) The dissertation module shall comprise no less than 25% and no more than 50%
of the total credits for the degree.
HS33 Proposed research topic (see University Rule CR7)

(a) The topic of a dissertation shall be chosen in consultation with the Head or
designated representative of the School concerned, and shall require approval by
the Senate.
(b) The Senate may, at its discretion, decline to approve a research topic if in its
opinion:
i) it is unsuitable in itself; or
ii) it cannot effectively be undertaken under the supervision of the University; or
Health Sciences 17
iii) the conditions under which the student proposes to work are unsatisfactory; or
iv) it is considered to be unethical to pursue such research.
HS34 Supervision (University Rule CR8)

The Board of the Faculty shall, in terms of the policies of the Senate, appoint one or
more supervisors, at least one of whom shall be a member of the University staff, to
advise a student whose research topic is approved, and the student shall be required
to work in such association with the supervisor or supervisors as the Senate may
direct.
HS35 Failed modules (see University Rule CR10)

In degrees of Master by coursework other than Master of Medicine:
(a) supplementary examinations in failed modules shall be governed by Rule HS17;
(b) a student who, upon first registration for a coursework module, fails that module,
may with the permission of Senate repeat the module, but shall not be permitted
to repeat it more than once.
(c) failure of the dissertation shall be governed by rule HS42.
Note: The relevant rule governing degrees of Master of Medicine is FMED6.
HS36 Progression (University Rule CR10)

A student, who, in the judgment of the Board of the relevant faculty, has not made
adequate progress in both the coursework and research components of a degree of
Masters by coursework, may be requested to apply for re-registration and such re-
registration shall only be allowed upon receipt of a satisfactory motivation.
HS37 Format of dissertation (this is University Rule CR13)

a) Every dissertation submitted shall be in such format as prescribed by the Senate
and the rules of the relevant Faculty; provided that each dissertation shall include
an abstract in English not exceeding 350 words.
b) A dissertation may comprise one or more first-authored papers, published or in
press in peer-reviewed journals approved by the Board of the relevant Faculty,
accompanied by introductory and concluding material.
HS38 Submission of dissertation

At least three months before the dissertation is to be submitted for examination, a
student shall give notice, in writing, to the Dean of the faculty concerned of the
intention to submit such dissertation and the title thereof, provided that, in the event
of a student failing to submit the dissertation for examination within six months
thereafter, the notice will lapse and a further notice of intention shall be submitted.
18 Health Sciences
HS39 Supervisor’s report

Upon submission of the dissertation, the supervisor or supervisors shall furnish a
report on the conduct of the student's work; the report shall not include an evaluation
of the quality of the dissertation.
HS40 Declaration
Every dissertation submitted for examination shall be accompanied by a declaration
to the satisfaction of the Senate stating that it has not been submitted for a degree or
other qualification in this or any other tertiary institution, and that it is the candidate’s
own original work.
HS41 Examination of dissertation (cf University Rule CR12)

The Board of the Faculty shall appoint two appropriately qualified examiners, one
internal (not a supervisor) and one external to the university.
HS42 Re-examination of dissertation (cf University Rule CR13)

a) A failed dissertation may not be re-examined.
b) On the advice of the Board, the Senate may invite a student to re-submit a
dissertation in a revised or extended form.
HS43 Award of degree cum laude and summa cum laude (cf University Rule
CR14)
a) The degree of Master by coursework shall be awarded cum laude if:
(i) The student produces an outstanding dissertation and the examiners
recommend to the Board that the degree be awarded cum laude; and
(ii) the student obtains a weighted average mark of 75% or more in the c
oursework component of the degree at the first attempt and without recourse
to supplementary examinations.
b) The degree of Master by coursework shall be awarded summa cum laude if:
(i) the student produces a particularly outstanding dissertation and the
examiners recommend to the Board that the degree be awarded summa cum
laude; and
(ii) the student obtains a weighted average of 80% or more in the coursework
component of the degree at the first attempt and without recourse to
supplementary examinations.
RULES FOR DEGREES BY RESEARCH THESIS OR DISSERTATION
These degrees shall be governed by the General Rules of the University, MR1 –
MR13, DR1 – DR13 and DS1 as augmented or qualified by such rules as are given in
this handbook for the particular degrees involved.
Health Sciences 19
GENERAL RULES OF THE FACULTY OF HEALTH

SCIENCES
Preamble
The following rules shall apply to every student registered for a qualification in the
Faculty of Health Sciences (hereinafter referred to as “the Faculty”) of the
University.
Except insofar as they are specifically modified, extended, restricted or otherwise
qualified by the general rules of the College of Health Sciences (hereinafter referred
to as “the College”), or by the Rules of the Faculty, or by Rules for particular
qualifications offered within the Faculty, the University’s General Academic Rules
for Degrees, Diplomas and Certificates and the General Rules of the College shall
apply to all students of the Faculty.
The Rules for various qualifications offered within the Faculty, although appearing
separately in different parts of the handbook, shall be regarded as part of the College
rules and shall have equal force.
FHEL1 English Language Development

(a) Every candidate admitted to study for an entry-level degree in the Faculty shall,
before commencement of the academic programme, write a prescribed English
Language Placement Test;
(b) Candidates who fail the test shall include ELDV100WB: English Language
Development in their first-year curriculum, and
(c) Candidates who pass the test shall include such other module as is specified by
the rules/curriculum of the programme concerned.
FHEL 2 Professional registration

Where a Professional Body which is recognised by the Senate and the Council
requires professional registration of all students in its discipline, such registration
shall be condition of study and shall take place by such time and in such manner as
the relevant School directs.
FHEL 3 Attendance and performance requirements (‘DP’)

Rules GR16 and GR17 shall apply.
Specific Duly Performed (DP) requirements shall be published in the Module
Guidelines within the Hand Book entry for that Discipline, failing which, a Duly
Performed certificate will be issued provided that the Continuous Assessment Mark
(CAM) is greater than or equal to 40%.
FHEL 4 Subminimum in examinations

The required subminimum for an exam, or component of an exam, shall be published
in the Module Guidelines within the Hand Book entry for each Discipline. A student
20 Health Sciences
who does not achieve the required exam (or exam component) subminimum as
specified, and achieves a final mark of greater than or equal to 50% shall be eligible
for a supplementary examination in that module for the specific exam period only.
Where an exam component is specified, the supplementary examination shall be for
that component only.
FHEL 5 Hepatitis Vaccination

All students registering in the Faculty of Health Sciences for the first time shall
provide proof of successful vaccination against HEPB by the end of their first
semester on campus.
Health Sciences 21
School of Dentistry
Westville campus
Head of School:
Dr P K Singh
Secretary:
Mrs. S Pillay
Telephone: +27 33 209 5323

Fax: +27 33 209 0827
E-mail: pillaysu@ukzn.ac.za
Staff of the School of Dentistry
Senior Lecturer: MHE Laher, BSc (Hons)(England), BDS(London), MSc

(London)
Lecturers: P Kissoon-Singh, BDS (Mysore), Dip Odont Community
Dentistry (Pretoria), MSc Odont (Pretoria)
P Kandiah, BDS (Mysore), Dip Odont Restorative Dentistry
(Pretoria)
V Naiker, BDS (lndia), DHSM (NU)
Senior Tutors: S Gounden, BOH (UDW), Dip UPGDE (UKZN)
RS Singh, BDnTh (UDW), Hons (Medunsa)
I Moodley, BDnTh (UDW)
R Moodley, BDnTh (UDW),
M Reddy, BDnTh (UDW), Hons (Medunsa)
ND Masinga, Dip. Gen. Nur. & MWF, Comm Nur
Rules for programmes in the School of Dentistry

Note
The following rules must be read in conjunction with the general rules of the Faculty
of Health Sciences (see Appendix B), the general rules of the College of Health
Sciences (Appendix A), and the General Academic Rules for Degrees, Diplomas and
Certificates of the University.
It is also necessary to refer to the entries in this handbook for the individual modules
constituting the curriculum for a qualification, since these will contain essential
information concerning prerequisite requirements, DP requirements, examinations,
and the like.
22 Health Sciences
The Rules appearing below must be regarded as part of the College rules and have
equal force.
University Diploma in Oral Health

Note on Selection.
College Rules HS3 & HS6 shall apply in addition to - for South African matriculants,
Biology will be a required subject, with a pass of a D at the higher grade or a C at the
standard grade. For candidates with other forms of school-leaving certificate,
equivalent preparation to the above will be considered.
DENT1 English placement test (to be read with Faculty Rule FHEL1)
Candidates who pass the English placement test shall include in their first-year
curriculum any one of the following modules, timetable permitting:
DENT2 First-Aid Certificate

Every student shall present a certificate in first aid from an accredited provider before
being permitted to registration for the second year of the Programme.
DENT3 Due performance (to be read with Faculty Rule FHEL3)

Faculty Rule FHEL3 shall apply, the requirement shall be attendance of every class
or other meeting prescribed for any clinical module*, unless the student is
specifically excused by the Head of the School or an authorised member of staff from
a particular class or meeting.
Note: It should be noted that all attendance in community-based clinics arranged by

the programme, and participation in outreach activities, are compulsory.
DENT4 Curriculum for the University Diploma in Oral Health

The curriculum for the University Diploma in Oral Health comprises modules
approved by the Board taken over a period of four semesters and having a total credit
value of not less than 256 and not more than 288. Except as provided in Rule
DENT1, all modules in the curriculum shall be compulsory. (See Table DENT-A.)
DENT5 Sustained competence

A student who for a year or more has undertaken no clinical work in a prerequisite
clinical module, may be required to pass a test on the work of that prerequisite
module, or otherwise produce evidence of sustained competence in the work of the
prerequisite module, in order to register for the succeeding module.
Note: A student who is prevented from proceeding to level-2 or level-3 studies in a

module which has a clinical module as prerequisite may be advised to undertake
Health Sciences 23
clinical work to the satisfaction of the Head of School in that preceding clinical
module in order to maintain the necessary level of clinical competence.
Bachelor of Dental Therapy

Admission
College Rules HS3 & HS6 shall apply in addition to - f or South African
matriculants, Biology will be a required subject, with a pass of a D at the higher
grade or a C at the standard grade. For candidates with other forms of school-leaving
certificate, preparation equivalent to the above will be expected.
Furhter rules
Rules DENT1, DENT2 and DENT 3 shall apply to the Bachelor of Dental Therapy
programme as well.
DENT6 Curriculum for the Bachelor of Dental Therapy

The degree curriculum, which shall be approved by the Board from time to time,
shall extend over six semesters of full-time study, and shall comprise modules with a
total credit value of not less than 384 and not more than 432. Except as provided in
Rule DENT1, all modules in the curriculum shall be compulsory. (See Tables DENT-
A and DENT-B.)
Entry to year 3 of the programme shall be by selection, on the basis of academic

performance in years 1 and 2. Students who fail to be so selected shall not be
registered for any module of the curriculum at level 3.
Note: Students who have successfully completed years 1 and 2 but fail to be
selected to enter level 3 of the programme shall be advised to transfer to the
University Diploma in Oral Health and so qualify for that qualification.
The contraction OSCE stands for Objective Structured Clinical Examination.
CODE NAME OF MODULE CRD SEM

LEVEL 1
SOWK111WI Psychosocial Orientation for Health Care 16 1
ANAT105WI Introduction to Anatomy and Neuroanatomy 16 1
HPHS111WI General Basic Physiology 16 1
DENT113W1 Oral Biology – Structures 8 1
ANAT106W2 Anatomy of the Head, Neck and Back 8 2
DENT112W2 Oral Biology – Embryology and Physiology 8 2
DENT114W2 Cariology, Periodontology and Prevention - preclinical 16 2
HLSC116W2 Community Studies 16 2
DENT122W2 Radiography and Photography – Preclinical Practice 8 2
DENT110WY Academic Skills and Clinical Practice 8 Year
24 Health Sciences
for students who fail the English Placement Test – See FHEL2
ELDV100WB English Language Development * 16 1&2
for students who pass the English Placement Test ONE of the following:
ISTN100W2 End User Computing 16 2
ZULN101WB Basic isiZulu Communication Skills 16 1&2
ZULM103WB Intermediate Zulu 16 1&2
ELDV100WB English Language Development 16 1&2
TOTAL CREDITS FOR LEVEL 1 136
LEVEL 2
DENT213W1 Community Oral Health ( Epidemiology/Promotion) 8 1
DENT219W1 General Pathology and General Microbiology 8 1
DENT223W1 Radiography – Preclinical Practice 8 1
DENTT211WY Cariology, Periodontology and Prevention – Clinical Practice 24 Year
DENT228WY Diagnostics, Infection Control & Specialities 8 Year
DENT217WY General medicine and Special Patients 24 Year
DENT221WY Oral medicine, Oral Pathology and Clinical Pharmacology 24 Year
DENT214W2 Community Oral Health ( Ethics, Law, Practice) 8 2
DENT224WY Minor Oral Surgery – Theory and Local Anaesthesia 8 Year
DENT227WY Oral Hygiene Clinical Practice 8 Year
DENT 226W2 Radiography – Techniques and Clinical Practice 8 2
DENT 216WY Restorative Dentistry and Dental Materials – Preclinical 8 Year
TOTAL CREDITS FOR LEVEL II DENTAL THERAPY 136
DENT227WY Oral Hygiene Clinical Practice (ORAL HEALTH ONLY) 8 Year

COMPLETED DIPLOMA IN ORAL HEALTH 280
LEVEL 3
CURRICULUM FOR BACHELOR OF DENTAL THERAPY
DENT 313WY Restorative Dentistry and Dental Materials – Clinical 48 Year
DENT 315WY Diagnostics and Radiology 24 Year
DENT 317WY Minor Oral Surgery 48 Year
DENT 318WY Medical Emergencies and Clinical Pharmacology 8 Year
TOTAL CREDITS: 128
TOTAL CREDITS FOR BACHELOR OF DENTAL 400
THERAPY
Health Sciences 25
School of Medical Sciences

Westville campus
Acting Head of School

Professor C T Musabayane
Secretary
Mrs M Hurley
Telephone: 031 - 260 7976 / 4364 / 7975

Fax: 031 – 260 7123 / 4455
e-mail: hurley@ukzn.ac.za
Discipline: Clinical Anatomy

Acting Discipline Head: Professor GHM Vawda
Secretary
Ms N Hlongwa
Telephone: 031 - 260 7195/4270

Fax: 031 – 260 4252/7890
hlongwan@ukzn.ac.za
Senior Professors KS Satyapal, LM, LRCP, LRCS (lreland), MD (General

Surgery)(UND), FRCP, ( Ireland, Honorary), Fellow of
the University of Durban-Westvllle
Professors: MR Haffajee, MBChB (Natal), Dip PEC (SA), FRCS

(Edin), ATLS (AEMS Durban)
Associate Professors P Partab, MBChB, DA (SA), FCS (Part 1), Dip PEC
(SA), ATLS (UND)
GHM Vawda BSc MBChB ATLS ACLS PhD
Lecturers MAA Ebrahim, MBChB, FCS (Part 1) (UND),

UPGHDE, (UKZN)
ECS Naidu MBChB (Natal) M.Med.Sci (UDW)
26 Health Sciences
JS Naidu MBChB (Natal)

YM Omar, MBChB (UND), FRCS (Part 1)(Glasgow),
ATLS (UND)
L Lazarus, B.Med.Sc (Hons), M.Med.Sc (UDW)
Senior Technician K Naidoo
Technician S Gouden
HS Sosibo
S James
P Mohanlall
Programmes & qualifications:
Bachelor of Medical Science in Anatomy

Bachelor of Medical Science Honours in Anatomy
Master of Medical Science in Anatomy
Doctor of Philosophy

Program Description
The purpose of this degree is to offer a unique programme in health sciences that
allows a choice of career after graduation requiring core knowledge of anatomy.
Introductory courses in biochemistry and microbiology are also given, as well as
ancillary utility electives such as Mathematics, Psychology and Communication
skills. Opportunities for graduates exist in medical institutions, research units and
tertiary educational institutions and in the food and pharmaceutical industries.

Programme Description:
This one-year program is designed to equip graduates in Human Anatomy with
advanced knowledge and current trends in the Discipline. They also acquire training
and skills in specialised research techniques. The research project component of this
programme introduces the student to research methods and requires him/her to
conduct supervised research in selected specialities in the field of Human Anatomy.
Acquiring this qualification could enhance the employment opportunities of this
graduate.
Master of Medical Science in Anatomy

This programme leads to a masters degree by research dissertation under the
guidance of a supervisor. It will prepare a scientist and academic in the field of
Health Sciences 27
anatomy, with an integrated knowledge of the broad field of Anatomy or Physiology,

which can lead to career paths in industry, research or academic fields.
This is a programme leading to a doctoral degree by research thesis under the
guidance of a supervisor. It will prepare a scientist and academic who can initiate
and conduct independent research, write publications and supervise postgraduate
student in the field of specialisation.
Rules for programmes in the School of Medical Sciences

Note on Selection for the Bachelor of Medical Science in Anatomy.
College rule HS6 shall apply. For South African matriculants, Mathematics,
Biology/Physiology and Physical Science will be required subjects, with passes in
both subjects of an E at the higher grade or a D at the standard grade being minimum
requirements. A pass in a life science will be regarded as an advantage. For
candidates with other forms of school-leaving certificate, achievements equatable to
the above will be considered.
SCMS1 English placement test (to be read with Faculty Rule FHEL1)
Candidates who pass the English placement test shall include such other module or
modules with a total credit value of 16 as approved by the Board. (See Table SCMS-
C for presently approved electives)
SCMS2 Curriculum for the Bachelor of Medical Science in Anatomy (see Table
SCMS-A)
(a) The degree curriculum, which shall be approved by the Board from time to
time, shall extend over six semesters of full-time study and shall comprise
modules with a combined credit value of not less than 128 at each of levels 1, 2
and 3, and a total for the entire degree of not more than 432 credits.
(a) The curriculum of every student shall include modules of at least 112 credits in
anatomy at level 2 or above, of which at least 64 shall be at level 3.
SCMS3 Admission (to be read with College Rule HS24)
To be eligible to apply to register for the degree a candidate must either
(a) be in possession of a Bachelor of Science degree from the University with a life
science major or be admitted by the Senate to the status of such degrees in terms
of Rule GR7(a); or
28 Health Sciences
(b) be in possession of a Bachelor of Medical Science degree from the University

with a mark of 60% or better in a human anatomy module at level 3 or 4 or be
admitted by the Senate to the status of such degrees in terms of Rule GR7(a); or
(c) have attained a level of competence defined in Rule GR7(b).
Eligible applicants shall be subject to selection, and Rule HS24(b) shall apply.
SCMS4 Curriculum for the Bachelor of Medical Science Honours in Anatomy

(see Table SCMS-B)
shall extend over two semesters of full-time study, and shall comprise modules with
a total credit value of 128, and shall include a research project module with a credit
value of 48.
Curriculum
Curriculum for Bachelor of Medical Science in Anatomy

New Code Name of Module Cred Sem
CHEM110W1 General Principles of Chemistry 16 1
BILO103W1 Introductory Biology for Health Sciences 16 1
PHYS131W1 Intro Physics for Life Sciences & Agriculture 16 1
CHEM120W2 Chemical Reactivity 16 2
BIMI120W2 Introductory Biochemistry 16 2
PHYS132W2 Electro Magnetism & Modern Physics for Life Sciences 16 2
ELDV100WB English Language Development 1 16 1,2
or one of the following:
1
See Rule SCMS1. This module must be taken by students who have failed the
English Placement Test. Students who have passed the Test must choose one of the
modules Basic Zulu Communication Skills, Mathematics for Life Sciences or any
other module/s ,provided that there is an even spread of modules over the semesters
and the total credit points are 128, in the place of the English language development
module
Students who pass English Placement Test to select one of:

ZULN101WB Basic Zulu Communication Skills 16 1,2
MATH131W1 Mathematics for Life Sciences 1 16 1
PSYC101W1 Introduction to Psychology A 16 1
Total credits: level 1 128
Health Sciences 29
Level 2
BIOC201W1 Introduction to Biomolecules 16 1

ANAT213W1 Introduction to Anatomy & Neuroanatomy 24 1
ANAT212W2 Anatomy of the Head, Neck & Back 32 2
BIOC202W2 Bioenergetics and Integrated Metabolism 16 2
Elective module(s) at level 2(E.g. Microbiology, Physiology, Zoology, 48 1, 2
Pharmacology) chosen by student subject to approval by Programme Director.
Level 3
ANAT311W1 Anatomy of the Upper & Lower Limbs 32 1
ANAT312W2 Anatomy of the Trunk & Embryology 32 2

Elective module(s) at level 3 chosen by student subject to approval by Programme 64 1, 2
Director. Examples: Level 3 Biochemistry, Microbiology, Physiology, Zoology or
Pharmacology modules.
Total credits for degree 392
Curriculum for Bachelor of Medical Science Honours in Anatomy

ANAT711WY Anatomical Research Methodology and Specialised 32 year
Techniques
ANAT712WY Advanced Topics 1 16 year
ANAT713WY Advanced Topics 2 16 year
ANAT714WY Research Project 64 year
Total credits 128
30 Health Sciences
Discipline: Medical Biochemistry
Acting Discipline Head: Professor AA Chuturgoon
Secretary
Mrs M Hurley
Telephone: 031 – 260 4404/4364

Fax: 031 – 260 4455
hurley@ukzn.ac.za
Associate Professor AA Chuturgoon B.Sc. (Hons) M.Sc (Natal)
Lecturers: RB Myburg BSc (Hons) MMedSc(Natal)

MR Serumula BMedSci (Hons) (Natal)
Laboratory Technician N Needhi, BMedSc(Hons)

Bachelor of Medical Science Honours in Medical Biochemistry
Master of Medical Science in Medical Biochemistry

This one-year programme extends the knowledge and understanding of the graduate
learner in Medical Biochemistry to an advanced level and introduces him or her to
the research milieu in life sciences. The candidate must complete 3 modules and one
research project over 2 semesters of full time study.
Master of Medical Science in Biochemistry

guidance of a supervisor.

(a) be in possession of a Bachelor of Science degree from the University with a
credit-weighted average mark in the final year of 65% or more, and with majors in
Health Sciences 31
Cell Biology and one of Microbiology, Immunology, Biochemistry or Physiology;

or be admitted by the Senate to the status of such degree in terms of Rule GR7(a); or
with a credit-weighted average mark in the final year of 65% or better; or be admitted
by the Senate to the status of such degree in terms of Rule GR7(a); or
SCMS10 Curriculum for the Bachelor of Medical Science Honours in Medical

Biochemistry (see Table SCMS-E)
value of 48. (Table SCMS-F)
Table SCMS-F
Curriculum for BMedScHons in Medical Biochemistry (2007)
New Code Old Code Name of Module Cred Sem
HPHS7MB LES401T Molecular Biology and Research Methodology 32 1
HPHS7ET MPH7ET2 Environmental Toxicology 16 2
HPHS7PM MPH7PM2 Principles of Metabolism 16 2
HPHS7LP HPHS7LPY Laboratory-based Research Project 64 year
Total credits 128
32 Health Sciences
Discipline: Human Physiology
Acting Discipline Head : Professor CT Musabayane
Secretary
Mrs N Perumal
Telephone: 031 - 260 4218/7312

Fax: 031 – 260 4455/7132
perumaln@ukzn.ac.za
Professor: CT Musabayane, Bsc Hons (Herts), PhD (UZ)
Associate Professor: ML Channa, BSc (Hons) (UDW), HED (Unisa), MSc

(UDW), PhD (UDW), MDD (UDW)
EM Futre BSc(Hons) MSc(Natal) PhD(Strathclyde)
Senior Lecturers: SB Higgens-Opitz, BScHons(Cape Town), MSc (Natal)

PhD(Natal)
I Mackraj, BSc (Hons), MSc (UDW), PhD (UDW)
A Nadar, BSc (Hons)(UDW), HED (Unisa), MSc (UDW),
PhD (UDW)
SG Naidu, MSc, PhD(Witwatersrand)
Lecturers: R Harripersad, BScHons, (UDW) MBA, (UDW)

MSc(UDW)
A Marszalek MBBS(Poland)
MA Tufts, BScHons, MSc(Stell)
S Bux (BSc (UDW), Tech RMS (Royal Micro Soc),
MMedSc (Natal)
Principal Laboratory K Moodley, BSc (Hons), MSc (UDW)

Technicians: S Madikiza, BSc (Hons) (UDW)
HP Mbongwa National Diploma in Biotechnology BTech
(Natal Technikon) MMedSci (Natal)
A Ramautar MMedSci (Natal)
G Perumal
D Naicker
T Mkhabela
S Munshi
LJ Mahlamvu
Health Sciences 33

Bachelor of Medical Science in Human Physiology
Bachelor of Medical Science Honours in Human Physiology
Master of Medical Science in Human Physiology
Masters of Medical Science in Sports Medicine

Program Description
This three-year programme involves an in-depth study of how the human body
functions. The student will acquire knowledge in the sub-cellular, cellular and whole-
body mechanisms by which the human organism survives and interacts within its
environment, both in health and disease. The student will acquire skills that will
enable him or her to observe, investigate, demonstrate and report in accordance with
the scientific method, on aspects of body function using human, animal and computer
models. Career opportunities for graduates exist in medical, pharmaceutical and
biological research laboratories, the food and beverage industries and in the
education sector, including schools, technikons and universities.
Bachelor of Medical Science Honours in Human Physiology

This one-year programme introduces the graduate learner in Human Physiology to
the research milieu in life sciences and is designed to equip the student with
advanced knowledge and familiarity with current trends in the discipline. The
programme entails both advanced coursework and a research project. The research
component of this programme introduces the student to research methods and
requires him/her to conduct supervised research in selected specialities in the field of
Human Physiology. Acquiring this qualification could enhance the employment
opportunities of this graduate.
Master of Medical Science in Human Physiology

guidance of a supervisor. It will prepare a physiology scientist and academic with an
integrated knowledge of the broad field of physiology and pathophysiology which
can lead to career paths in industry, research or academic fields.
This is a programme leading to a doctoral degree by research thesis under the
guidance of a supervisor. It will prepare a scientist and academic who can initiate
34 Health Sciences
and conduct independent research, write publications and supervise postgraduate

student in the field of specialisation.
Rules for programmes in the School of Medical Sciences

Note on Selection for the Bachelor of Medical Science in Human Physiology.
College rules HS4 & HS6 shall apply. For South African matriculants, Mathematics
and Physical Science will be required subjects, with passes in both subjects of an E at
the higher grade or a D at the standard grade being minimum requirements. A pass in
a life science will be regarded as an advantage. For candidates with other forms of
school-leaving certificate, achievements equatable to the above will be considered.
SCMS5 English placement test (to be read with Faculty Rule FHEL1)
Candidates who pass the English placement test shall include such other module or
modules with a total credit value of 16 as approved by the Board.
SCMS6 Curriculum for the Bachelor of Medical Science in Human Physiology

(see Table SCMS-C)
(b) The degree curriculum, which shall be approved by the Board from time to time,
shall extend over six semesters and shall comprise modules with a total credit
value of not less than 384 and not more than 432.
(c) The curriculum of every student shall include modules of at least 112 credits in
physiology at level 2 or above, of which at least 64 shall be at level 3.
(d) Elective modules at level 3 shall be chosen, subject to the approval of the Board,
from subject areas which are regarded by the Board as being suitable for a
degree in physiology. (Microbiology, Biochemistry or Zoology, will be regarded
as suitable subject areas.)
Bachelor of Medical Science Honours in Physiology
(a) be in possession of a Bachelor of Science degree from the University with a life
science major with an average mark of 60% or better in level 3 physiology
modules or be admitted by the Senate to the status of such degrees in terms of
Rule GR7(a); or
with an average mark of 60% or better in a human physiology modules at level 3
or be admitted by the Senate to the status of such degrees in terms of Rule
GR7(a); or
Health Sciences 35

SCMS8 Curriculum for the Bachelor of Medical Science Honours in Human

Physiology (see Table SCMS-D)
value of 48.
Curricula
Table SCMS-D Core Curriculum for BMedSc in Physiology (2007)
Name of Module Cred Sem
Level 1
BILO103W1 Introductory Biology for Health Sciences 16 1
PHYS131W1 Intro Physics for Life Sciences & Agriculture 16 1
BIMI120W2 Introductory Biochemistry 16 2
PHYS132W2 Electro Magnetism & Modern Physics for Life Sciences 16 2
ELDV100WB English Language Development 2 16 1,2
1
This module must be taken by students who have failed the English Placement Test.
Students who have passed the English placement test may choose 2 electives to
the value of 16 credit points each.

Level 2
BIOC201W1 Introduction to Biomolecules 16 1
HPHS231W1 Foundations of Physiology 32 1
BIOC202W2 Bioenergetics and Integrated Metabolism 16 2
HPHS232W2 Cardiorespiratory and Renal Physiology 32 2
Elective module(s) at level 2(E.g. Microbiology or Zoology) 48 1,2
chosen by student subject to approval by Programme Director.
Level 3
HPHS331W1 Neuroendocrine Physiology 32 1
HPHS332W2 Human Genetics and Applied Physiology 32 2
36 Health Sciences
Elective module(s) at level 3 chosen by student subject to 64 1,2

approval by Programme Director. Examples: Level 3
Biochemistry, Microbiology or Zoology modules .
Curriculum for Bachelor of Medical Science – Honours (Physiology)

HPHS710W1 Ancillary Research Techniques in Physiology 16 1
HPHS701W1 Specialised Physiological Techniques 16 1
HPHS711W1 Integrative Physiology 16 1
HPHS721W2 Applied Physiology 16 2
HPHS731W2 Pathophysiology 16 2
HPHS741WY Physiology Honours Research Project 48 Year
Total credits 128
Health Sciences 37
School of Nursing
Howard College campus
Head of School: Professor O Adejumo
Secretary
S Maharaj
Telephone: +27 31 260 3316

Fax: +27 31 260 1543
E-mail: maharajs35@ukzn.ac.za
Staff of the School of Nursing
Associate Professors: O Adejumo, Dlitt et Phil (UNISA) MSc Clinical

Psychology (Ibadan) BSc Nursing (Ibadan) RN RPN RNE
M B Lee, PhD (Nursing) MN (Medical-Surgical) BSN
(General Nursing),
P McInerney, PhD (Wits) RN RM RNE
Senior Lecturers: B Bhengu, PhD (Natal); M Cur (RAU); B Cur Hons

(UNISA); RNE; RNA; BICN; RCHN; RM; RN
P Brysiewicz, PhD (UKZN) MCur(Natal) ,
BCur(Unisa),RN RMCHN RPN,RNE,RNA
N G Mtshali, ,Phd (Natal) MCur (Natal) RN RM RCHN
RNE RNA RORN
B Ncama, PhD (UKZN), MCur(Natal) RN RM RICN
RCHN RDN RNE
Lecturers: R Cassimjee, MCur(Natal) RN RM CHN RPN

J Chipps, MPH, BCur (Wits), RN
Charlotte Engelbrecht, M.Cur (RAU), B.Cur (UP), RN,
RM, RPN, CHN
S Majeke, BCur(Unisa)MCur(Natal) RNE RNA RMCHN
RADM&NN RM RN
G Mchunu, MN (Natal), BSocSc Nursing (Natal) RN RM
RPN RCHD RNE RNA
L Mkize, Mcur (Natal)RN RM RPN RCHN RNE
T Ndebele, MCur ( Natal), BCur (UNISA), RN, RM,
CHN, RNE, RNA,
38 Health Sciences
Z Z Nkosi, BCur(Unisa)MCur(Natal) RNE RPN RM RN
Senior Tutors: S Dlamini, BCur(Natal) RNO RM RN

L Middleton, BCur Hons(Natal) RN RNE RPN RCHN
C Mncanyangwa, BCur, RN,
S T Myeza, MCur(Unizul)RN RCHN
P Sapepa, MCur(Natal) RN RM RPN RCHN RNE
N Shangase, MCur (UniZul) RN RM RPN
Honorary Professors Professor U Archibong PhD (Hull), BSc Public Health

Nursing (UNN)
Professor M Chambers, PhD (Ulster) RGN, RMN, RNT
Honorary Snr Lecturers Janet A Fröhlich, DCur (RAU), BCur (RAU)
Honorary Lecturers Stacie C. Stander, MSc Nursing (JHU), BSN (UC, San
Diego)
Research Associates: M Lewis, PhD (Natal)

June Webber, PhD (Natal)
Clinical Associate: Christa Mary, RN RM RNE Dipl Adv Mid & Neonatal
Nursing Sc
Fellow Associates: I Corless, PhD (Mass)

M Habermann, PhD (Mass)
School of Nursing
The Schools in the Faculty offer integrated and highly structured undergraduate and
postgraduate programmes most of which lead to professional qualifications.
The School of Nursing offers a range of qualifications for the training of nurses,
nurse educators, and nurse administrators. Some of the programmes offered by the
School are available off-campus and are delivered in open-learning form.
Open Learning
Open Learning provides for flexible learning opportunities for people in full-time
employment or who live at a distance from the University campuses. Open Learning
is a study programme that combines study materials with tutor support sessions. This
means that study material for the course is given to the student who works at his or
her own time and place. The tutor supported class group sessions are held on
Saturdays or during other negotiated times, at the regional meeting venues, so even
rural students can participate. At these sessions the student has the opportunity to
Health Sciences 39
receive assistance from the tutors and to interact with other course participants. The
student can choose a study programme according to individual needs within a tutor
supported framework.
Rules for programmes in the School of Nursing

General Rules
NURS1 Practical Training
Candidates shall complete, within the specified time, the practical training as
prescribed by the School of Nursing to comply with the registration requirements of
the South African Nursing Council.
NURS2 Practical Examination

Practical examinations which are a part of nursing modules have to be passed
separately. If a candidate fails the practical part of the examination, a supplementary
examination may be allowed for this section.
NURS3 S A Nursing Council

The curriculum of candidates shall meet the requirements of the South African
Nursing Council.
NURS4 Due performance (cf College Rule HS13 & of Faculty Rule FHEL 3)
(a) For modules taken in the Nelson R Mandela School of Medicine, candidates
must obtain a class record mark of at least 40% to qualify for a DP certificate.
(b) For modules taken in the School of Nursing, candidates must attend at least
75% of all classes and 100% in the clinical setting (unless excused) in order to
qualify for a DP certificate.
NURS5 Examinations (cf College Rules HS17)

(a) An oral examination may form an integral part of the examination for all
candidates in any module in any subject.
(b) Supplementary examinations may be granted in all modules other than Honours
projects and postgraduate degree research reports failed with a mark between 40 -
48%.
(c) Students in a master’s degree who fail a coursework module on first registering
for it will have one further opportunity to repeat the module. Students, who fail a
module that is not compulsory, may register for an alternative module approved by
the Programme Director if such a module is available.
NURS6 Academic Exclusion (cf College RuleHS 20 &HS 21)

(a) Students who are considered by the Board to be unable to profit from continued
registration for a degree in the Faculty will not be allowed to re-register for that
degree.
40 Health Sciences
(b) Students in undergraduate programmes who do not maintain the rate of progress
reflected in the following table shall be excluded from the University in terms
of Rule GR30. The Senate may suspend such exclusion for a defined period
subject to the attainment of specified goals.
(c) In applying exclusion rules, only those modules prescribed for the curriculum
shall be considered when making decisions about exclusion.
Number of Number of credits towards degree

semesters Full-time students Full-time students
completed 3-year curriculum 4-year curriculum
2 64 64
4 128 128
6 224 224
8 320 320
10 Degree complete 384

12 Degree complete
NURS7 Other Exclusions (See also College Rule HS22)

(a) Candidates deemed by the Board to be unsafe practitioners based on repeated
(twice) failure of practical examinations or tests, or unreliability in the clinical
service settings, may, after a written warning, be excluded from the programme.
(b) A written warning shall be given to a candidate:
i)who is unable to be in a clinical setting at the stipulated time without
informing the relevant service and supervisor prior to the onset of this clinical
period or without an adequate reason.
ii)who is found to be inadequately prepared to render safe nursing care in a
clinical setting. The candidate shall be asked to leave the setting to obtain the
required knowledge and skills.
(c) Candidates will be required to complete all assignments and projects during their
clinical placements, whether these count towards a year or exam mark or not. If
all requirements are not met, students will get an ‘incomplete’ recorded against
this module.
Health Sciences 41
Bachelor of Nursing: BN
NURS8 Eligibility
Applicants must have matriculation exemption to be eligible for selection (College
Rule HS3).
Eligible applicants will be subject to selection.
Note: Applicants will normally need to have obtained at least 32 points on the
matriculation scale or as may be approved by the faculty, in order to be considered
for admission. They will also be required to complete a health questionnaire.
NURS9 Duration andCurriculum

(a) This degree shall extend over not less than 8 semesters or 4 years.
(b) Candidates shall obtain at least 512 credit points to qualify for the degree
provided that every candidate shall:
i) Complete the prescribed modules in Human Anatomy, Physiology, Special
Science and Pharmacology (96 credits). Candidates must pass the Physiology
modules in order to be admitted to the 4th year of the Programme;
ii) complete at least 128 credits from non-nursing modules, as approved by the
Head of the School, of which at least 32 credits shall be from level-2 social
science modules;
iii) complete a total of 40 hours learning Zulu in the language laboratory, by the
end of the second semester in first year, if the candidate's home language is not
from the Nguni group of languages;
iv) take Nursing 1, 2, 3 and 4, and Nursing Research, Unit Management and
Primary Health Care. (272 credits).
(c) Courses which fall outside of the prescribed curriculum may only be taken with
the permission of the Head of School.
The approved curriculum for the BN is given in Table NURS-A.
Table NURS-A: Approved curriculum for Bachelor of Nursing (2005) year 1

NURS100H0 Fundamental Nursing 32
MAN1NUY Human Anatomy 32
MPH1NUM Introductory Physiology for nursing 16
Special Science 16
Elective 1 (Soc Sc) 16
Elective 3 (Soc Sc)* 16
Total credits in year 1: 128 or 144
*Note: Students may do elective 3 in year 1 or leave it for year 2. By the end of their
second year, however, students must have done all eight electives, and two of them must
be at level 2.
42 Health Sciences
year 2
NURS230 Preventive & Promotive Health 32
MPH2NUM Physiology themes for nursing 16
Elective 3 (Soc Sc)* 16
Elective 7 (Soc Sc) level 200a 16
Elective 8 (Soc Sc)level 200b 16
Total credits in year 2: 144 or 128
year 3
NURS301 Nursing 301: General Nursing 48
NURS313 Administration in Nursing Units 8
NURS331 Nursing 302: General Nursing 40
NURS308 Research in Nursing 16
TAMM21N Pharmacology for Nurses 16
Total credits in year 3: 128
year 4
NURS401 Psychiatric Nursing 48
NURS403 Primary Health Care 16
NURS405 Midwifery 48
Total credits for the degree: 512
Bachelor of Nursing (Advanced Practice): BN (AdvPract)

(This degree is offered full time on campus, or through Open Learning - See Open
Learning section under 'Information for Students').
NURS10 Eligibility
The degree is offered in a number of specialised streams (see Rule NURS11 below).
Candidates must qualify to enter the degree programme, and also to enter the stream
of their choice. Candidates for all four streams must also meet the university’s
requirements for undergraduate study (Rule GR2 and also College Rules HS3, 4 –
Appendix A).
(a) Admission to the degree programme is only available to
i) nurses who are registered or enrolled with the SA Nursing Council and who
have had relevant post-registration experience;
ii) persons who have received a nursing qualification from another country who
are not registered or are not registrable by the SA Nursing Council, but who, in
Health Sciences 43
the opinion of the Senate, hold qualifications equivalent to those demanded from
general nurses in the Republic of South Africa.
(b) The requirements for entering the individual streams are as follows:
i) Advanced Clinical programmes: To qualify for entry into the advanced clinical
programmes, the candidate must be a registered nurse* with the appropriate basic
qualification. The candidate must also have completed a minimum of 3 months of
clinical experience in the selected field of study.
ii) Non-clinical Programmes: To qualify for entry into the non-clinical
programmes namely Nursing Education and Nursing Management, the candidate
must be a registered nurse* who is currently working or has previously worked
for a minimum period of two semesters.
iii) Comprehensive Clinical Programmes: To qualify for entry into the
comprehensive clinical programme only registration or enrolment as a nurse or
midwife* is required.
*but see (a) ii) above.
NURS11 Duration and Structure of Curriculum

(a) The degree shall extend over not less than 6 semesters or 3 years of full-time
study, or not less than 10 semesters or five years of part-time study.
(b) Candidates shall obtain at least 384 credit points to qualify for the degree.
(c) Candidate shall choose one of eight specialist streams and follow the approved
curriculum for that stream. The approved streams, and curricula for 2005 in
those eight streams are shown in Tables B1 – B8 below. The specialisation
modules, which are not common to all eight streams at any level, shall total at
least 64 credits in every specialised stream; they must be passed in order to have
a qualification in that stream.
The Streams and their specialisation modules:
Table NURS-B1:
Approved curriculum for Bachelor of Nursing (Advanced Practice) Stream 1: Nursing Education
year 1
NURS110 General Nursing 1a 32
NURS110 General Nursing 1b 32
Elective 1 16
Elective 2 16
Elective 3 16
Elective 4 16
year 2
44 Health Sciences
NURS102 Principles & Methods of Teaching & Evaluation 16

NURS103 Theories of Learning for Health Professional 16
Elective from inside or outside the school 32
year 3
NURS219 Nursing Philosophy 16
NURS217 Nursing Research Theory 16
NURS319 Nursing Research Project 32
NURS307 Facilitation of Recognition of Prior Learning 32
NURS221 Curriculum Development 16
NURS224 Issues in Health professional Education 16
Total credits in year 3 128
Total credits for the degree 384
Table NURS-B2:
Approved curriculum for Bachelor of Nursing (Advanced Practice) Stream 1: Nursing Management
year 1
Elective 1 16
Elective 2 16
Elective 3 16
Elective 4 16
year 2
NURS130 Nursing Management 1 32
year 3
NURS341 Managing Learning Organisations 16
NURS342 Evaluation of Health care programmes 16
Health Sciences 45
Table NURS-B3:
Approved curriculum for Bachelor of Nursing (Advanced Practice) Stream 3: Comprehensive
Practice
year 1
Elective 1 16
Elective 2 16
Elective 3 16
Elective 4 16
year 2
NURS120 Mental Health Nursing 1 32
NURS262 Community Health Nursing 1 32
Year 3
NURS200 Mental Health Nursing 2 32
NURS262 B Community Health Nursing 2 32
Table NURS-B4:
Approved curriculum for Bachelor of Nursing (Advanced Practice) Stream 4: Advanced Mental
Health
year 1
Elective 1 16
Elective 2 16
Elective 3 16
Elective 4 16
Year 2
NURS250 Advanced Mental Health Nursing 1 32
46 Health Sciences

Year 3
NURS310 Advanced Mental Health Nursing 2 32
NURS341 Managing Learning Organisations 16
NURS342 Evaluation of Health Programmes 16
Table NURS-B5:
Approved curriculum for Bachelor of Nursing (Advanced Practice) Stream 5: Oncology and
Palliative Care
year 1
Elective 1 16
Elective 2 16
Elective 3 16
Elective 4 16
Year 2
NURS205 Foundations of Oncology 16
NURS204 Oncological Conditions 16
Elective from inside or outside Nursing 32
year 3
NURS330 Oncological and Palliative Nursing 32
NURS342 Evaluation of Health Care Programmes 16
NURS341 Managing Learning Organizations 16
Health Sciences 47
Table NURS-B6:
Approved curriculum for Bachelor of Nursing (Advanced Practice) Stream 6 : Advanced Midwifery
and Neonatal Intensive-Care Nursing
year 1
Elective 1 16
Elective 2 16
Elective 3 16
Elective 4 16
year 2
NURS233 Foundations of Neonatology 16
NURS235 Neonatal Nursing 16
Elective from inside or outside Nursing 32
year 3
NURS300 Advanced Midwifery 32
NURS342 Evaluation of Health Services 16
Table NURS-B7:
Approved curriculum for Bachelor of Nursing (Advanced Practice) Stream 7: Critical Care and
Trauma nursing
year 1
Elective 1 16
Elective 2 16
Elective 3 16
Elective 4 16
year 2
48 Health Sciences

NURS234 Trauma Nursing 16
NURS211 Critical Care Nursing A 24
Elective 16
year 3
NURS212 Critical Care Nursing B 24
NURS303 Issues in Critical Care Nursing 16
NURS342 Evaluation of Health Systems 16
Table NURS-B8:
Approved curriculum for Bachelor of Nursing (Advanced Practice) Stream 8: Primary Health Care
Nursing
year 1
Elective 1 16
Elective 2 16
Elective 3 16
Elective 4 16
year 2
NURS231 Primary Care 1 32
Elective from inside or outside nursing 32
year 3
NURS23 Primary Care 2 32
NURS342 Evaluation of Health Systems 16
Health Sciences 49
Elective modules to compliment any of the eight Streams(tables B1 – B8)

NURS101 Portfolio Development 16
NURS223 Advanced Clinical Practice 16
NURS201 Service Learning in Nursing 16
NURS311 International Nursing 16
NURS342 Evaluation of Health Care Programmes 16
NURS341 Managing Health Care Organisations 16
NURS207 Unit Management and teaching 16
NURS12 Exit Certificate

Candidates may exit the programme after two semesters with 128 credits and be
awarded a Certificate in Nursing by the College, but must complete all the essential
modules in the identified stream for registration purposes to enable the field of
study/specialisation to be put in brackets. This is not a nationally registered
qualification.
NURS13 Exit Diploma

Similarly as in NURS12 above, candidates may exit the programme after four
semesters with 256 credits and be awarded a Diploma in Nursing by the College,
with the field of study in brackets. This is not a nationally registered qualification.
Bachelor of Nursing Honours: BNHons
The Honours programme is at the same level as the fourth year of the professional
degree. This programme will be maintained to cater for students from 3-year
programmes and our own graduates who completed the BSocSc degree before
Community Health and Psychiatric Nursing was incorporated. The programme
requires the completion of six approved courses. Nursing Education and
Administration is also offered at this level.
Entry requirements:
The course is open to students who have attained sufficiently high standard in the
final undergraduate course in Nursing. Candidates are advised that at least two
courses in two or more of the following are desirable prerequisites: Psychology,
Sociology, Social Anthropology; Industrial Sociology.
NURS14 Eligibility
College Rules HS4 and HS6 and General University Rule HR2 shall apply.
Candidates shall require a Bachelors degree in Nursing from the University, or
admission by the Senate to the status of such degree in terms of General University
Rule GR7 (a), or may be admitted in terms of General University Rule GR7 (b).
50 Health Sciences
Selection of eligible candidates shall require a high standard in the final

undergraduate course in Nursing.
Note: It will be regarded as an advantage for applicants to have had at least two
modules in at least two of the subject areas of Psychology, Sociology, Social
Anthropology; or Industrial Sociology in their undergraduate curricula.
NURS15 Duration and Structure of Curriculum

The programme shall extend over at least two semesters and consist of a total of
128C.
The approved curriculum for BN honors is given in Table NURS-C below.
Table NURS-C:
Approved curriculum for Bachelor of Nursing Honours (2005) year 1
NURS708 Nursing Research* 16
NURS701 Philosophy of Nursing 16
NURS703 Research Project 32
And choose modules for 64 credits from:
NURS720 Community Health Nursing 32
NURS704 Nursing Education 1 32
NURS709 Nursing Education 2 32
NURS712 Psychiatric Nursing 32

NURS705 Social Sciences Applied to Nursing 16
NURS707 Specialised Nursing 16
Approved postgraduate module from other school 16
Total credits: 128
* or approved research methods module from elsewhere
Master of Nursing: MN
NURS16 Eligibility (see also Faculty Rule FHEL3)
Candidates shall be eligible to apply to register for the degree of Master of Nursing
(a) if they hold a four-year Bachelors degree in Nursing from the University, and
achieved a credit-weighted average mark of 65% or more in that degree; or
(b) if they hold an Honours degree in Nursing from the University and achieved a
credit-weighted average mark of 60% or more in that degree; or
(c) if they are admitted by the Senate to the status of either such degree in terms
of Rule GR7 (a) and achieved marks in the appropriate range.
Eligible candidates shall be subject to selection, and may be required to take an
admission examination.
Health Sciences 51
NURS17 Duration
The programme takes at least two semesters for full time students, and four semesters
for part time students.
NURS18 Programme Options

A candidate for the degree of Master in Nursing - MN shall, subject to the approval
of Senate:
(a) prosecute an approved line of research and present a dissertation based on that
research, or
(b) attend, and by examination complete approved courses of advanced study
together with a Research Project in the area of specialisation.
NURS19 Degree Structure

(a) A candidate proceeding under Rule NURS18 (a) shall register for a research
project, namely: NURS8FY [F/T] or NURS8P1 [P/T] in year one, and
NURS8SY [F/T] or NURS8P2 [P/T] in year two.
(b) A candidate proceeding under rule NURS18 (b) shall register for a total of 160
credits as follows (see Table NURS-D):
One faculty research module (16 cred)
A research project (80 cred), in NURS850 (semester 1) and NURS851
(semester 2).
In case of a clinical Masters, for the core module (NURS822) (16 cred)
Electives for the remaining credits required.
NURS20 Award cum laude

The award of the degree cum laude or summa cum laude shall be governed by
College Rule HS28 (page..).
NURS21 Progression 1
Candidates failing modules with a combined credit rating of 32 or more shall be
excluded from the programme. In exceptional cases, the School may, on the
recommendation of the Programme Director and Head of School, allow such a
student to continue.
Education Programme:
The nursing education degree is offered on a full-time basis only, although some
modules can be taken on a part-time basis. Because the emphasis of this degree is
teaching, students will be expected to spend one semester in the clinical laboratory
teaching undergraduate nursing students and one semester will be spent facilitating
problem-based learning groups.
52 Health Sciences
All Programmes
Part-time students do two to three modules during the first year, and the remaining
one or two modules during the second year. The last six months should be spent on
the research project. The modules available at the school are listed here. However,
two modules may also be taken in another school in the Faculty of Human and Social
Sciences or in the Masters in Public Health.
Table NURS-D: Approved curriculum for Master of Nursing (2005)

Core modules- all streams:
NURS822 Advanced Practice Nurse Role 16
Research Project and dissertation 80
Further core modules: Critical Care and Trauma Nursing stream
NURS802 Applied Critical Care Nursing 16
NURS815 Essentials of Critical Care Nursing 16
NURS825 Trauma Nursing and Life Support 16
Further core modules: Psychiatric/Mental Health Nursing
NURS803 Advanced Psychiatric Skills 16
NURS809 Current Issues in Psychiatric Care 16
NURS814 Psychiatric Programme Management 16
Further core modules: Community Health Nursing
NURS806 Community Health Nursing 16
PBHL8J1 Health Measurement 1 & 2 16
NURS821 Primary Care 16
Further core modules: Advanced Midwifery & Women and Child Health
NURS801 Advanced Midwifery Skills 16
NURS804 Child and Adolescent Health 16
NURS827 Women's Health 16
Further core modules: Nursing Education
NURS805 Community- and Problem-Based Education 16
NURS811 Education Administration 16
NURS819 Fundamentals of Education 16
NURS823 Progressive Educ for Health Professionals 1 24
NURS824 Progressive Educ for Health Professionals 2 24
Further core modules: Health Service Administration
NURS807 Comparative Health Systems 16
NURS808 Evaluation of Health Care Systems 16
Further core modules: Nursing Research
NURS831 Nursing Research and Nursing Research Methods 16
NURS816 Qualitative Research 16
PBHL8J1 Health measurement 1 & 2 16
Health Sciences 53
Further (elective) modules(all streams):

NURS801 Advanced Midwifery Skills 16
NURS804 Child and Adolescent Health 16
NURS805 Community- and Problem-Based Education 16
NURS816 Qualitative Research 16
Total credits: 160
Nursing
DP Requirement: Rule NURS4(b) shall apply –candidates must attend at least 75%
of all classes and 100% in the clinical setting, not counting those from which they
have been officially excused.
54 Health Sciences
School of Pharmacy and Pharmacology

Westville campus
Acting Head of School

Professor J A O Ojewole
Secretary
Mrs. A Bagwandeen
Telephone: +27 33 260 7358

Fax: +27 33 260 7792
E-mail: bagwandeena@ukzn.ac.za
Discipline: Pharmacy
Associate Professor: T Govender, Bpharm (UDW), Mpharm (UDW), PhD
(Nottingham) MPS (SA)
Senior Lecturer: K du Toit, B. Pharm (PU for CHE), M.Sc (PU for CHE),
Ph.D (Applied Chemistry) (UKZN), MPS (SA)
Lecturers: KK Naidoo, BPharm (UDW), MBL (UNISA), MPS (SA)

T. Govender, B. Sc (UDW), B.Sc (Hons)(UDW), M.Sc
(UND), Ph.D (Chemistry)(UKZN)
P Naidoo, BPharm, MmedSc (Pharmacology) (UDW),
FPS
EB Ojewole, BPharm (OAU Ife), MSc Clinical
Pharmacy (Strathclyde, UK)
F Oosthuizen, Bpharm, MSc (Pharmacology), PhD (PU
for CHE)
F. Suleman, B.Pharm. (UDW), M.Pharm. (UDW), Ph.D
(USA)
Senior Tutor: U Govinden, MTech (Natal)
Technical Officers: S Chonco, National Diploma – Analytical Chemistry

(Mangosuthu)
A Govender, BSc (UDW)
Health Sciences 55
Principal Technician: C Mocktar, BSc (Hons), MMedSc (UDW)
Laboratory Assistant: L Murugan
General Assistant: Z Ntuli, BA (UDW) BA (Hons) (UKZN)
Discipline: Pharmacology
Senior Professor : JAO Ojewole BPharm (Hons)(Ife), MSc (Clin
Pharm)(London),
PhD (Pharmacology)(Strathclyde, UK), MPS (NG).
Associate Professor: V Ramblritch, BSc (Pharm)(UDW), MMedSc

(Pharmacology), (UDW), PhD(UKZN), MPS (SA).
Lecturers: J Bodenstein, BPharm (NWU-Potchefstroom), MSc

(NWU-Potchefstroom), PhD (NWU-Potchefstroom), MPS
(SA).
P M O Owira, BSc (Nairobi), BSc (Med Hons) (UCT),
MSc (Medicine) (UCT).
K Khoza, BPharm (UNIN), MSc (Pharmacology) (NWU-
Potchefstroom), MPS (SA).
Associate Laboratory V Gobind, BSc (UDW).

Technician:
Laboratory Assistant: COM Mthembu,
Rules for programmes in the School of Pharmacy & Pharmacology

Bachelor of Pharmacy
PHRM2 Curriculum for the Bachelor of Pharmacy
shall extend over eight semesters and shall comprise modules with a total credit value
of not less than 512 and not more than 576, of which at least 128 shall be at level 4.
(See table PHRM-A) The student shall complete these modules with due regard to
prerequisite and co-requisite requirements. The student shall also attend practicals,
wardrounds and externships to industry, community pharmacies, hospitals, primary
heath care clinics, mobile clinics and the health train, and other facilities as are
required by modules in the student’s curriculum.
PHRM3 Due performance (to be read with rules GR16, GR17 and FHEL3)
56 Health Sciences
Rules GR16, GR17 and FHEL3 shall apply, save that the attendance requirement for
all discipline specific l fieldwork, tutorial classes, practical classes, ward rounds and
externship visits shall be 100% except where the Head of School has specifically
excused the student from a particular session.
PHRM4 Sustained competence

A student who for two years or more has undertaken no clinical work in the relevant
previous modules in the same subject may be required to pass a test on the work of
such previous modules, or otherwise produce evidence of sustained competence in
the work of those modules, in order to register for the succeeding module.
Level 1
New Code Old Code Module Name Credit Semester
CHEM142W1 CHM101X & Chemistry for Health Sciences 16 1
CHM103X
BIOL103W1 LES 101S Introductory Biology for 16 1
Health Sciences
MATH133W1 MAT171S Mathematics & Statistics for 16 1
Natural Sciences
PHYS131W1 PHY171S Intro Physics for Life 16 1
Sciences & Agriculture
HLSC116W2 FSH116S Community Studies 16 2
ISTN100W2 FSH112X End User Computing 16 2
PSYC322W2 SWP101S Managing Health Behaviour 8 2
ZULN101WB LLC150S Basic Isizulu Language 16 1&2
Studies A
Total Credits : Level 1 120
1
Candidates who fail the English Placement Test will register for the English
Language Development Module (ELDV100WB) instead of ZULN101WB.
Candidates who pass the English Placement Test can register for ZULN101WB or
they can still register for ELDVI00WB or Advanced Zulu (ZULM103).
Level 2
HPHS221W1 HPH211S Homeostasis 16 1
ANAT101W1 ANA101S Introduction to Anatomy and Neuroanatomy 16 1
PHRM211W1 PCY211T Medicinal Chemistry I 8 1
PHRM241W1 PCY241T Pharmaceutical Calculations I 8 1
PHRM213W1 PCY213T Pharmaceutical Chemistry 8 1
PHRM221W1 PCY221T Physical Pharmacy 8 1
HPHS222W2 HPH222S Integration & Communication 16 2
PHRM232W2 PCY232T Introduction to Pathology 8 2
PHRM212W2 PCY212T Medicinal Chemistry II 8 2
Health Sciences 57
PHRM222W2 PCY222S Pharmaceutical Technology 16 2

PHRM202W2 PCY202S Pharmacology I 16 2
PHRM214W2 PCY214T Pharmaceutical Analysis I 8 2
Total credits: Level 2 136
Level 3
PHRM321W1 PCY321S Institutional Pharmaceutics 16 1
PHRM311W1 PCY311S Medicinal Chemistry III 16 1
PHRM313W1 PCY313T Pharmaceutical Analysis II 8 1
PHRM333W1 PCY333T Pharmaceutical Care I 8 1
PHRM301W1 PCY301S Pharmacology II 16 1
Pharmacy Logistics, Economics and
PHRM331W1 PCY331T 8 1
Management
PHRM314W2 PCY314T Applied Clinical Chemistry 8 2
PHRM332W2 PCY332T Health Law and Ethics 1 8 2
PHRM316W2 PCY312S Medicinal Chemistry IV 8 2
PHRM334W2 PCY334T Pharmaceutical Care II 8 2
PHRM302W2 PCY302S Pharmacology III 16 2
PHRM323W2 PCY322T Sterile Products 8 2
Level 4
PHRM421W1 PCY421S Biopharmaceutics 16 1
PHRM431W1 PCY431T Health Law and Ethics II 8 1
PHRM433W1 PCY433T Pharmaceutical Care III 8 1
PHRM401W1 PCY401S Pharmacology IV 16 1
PHRM422W2 PCY422T Advanced Drug Delivery 8 2
PHRM442W2 PCY442T Pharmaceutical Calculations II 8 2
PHRM434W2 PCY434Y Pharmaceutical Care IV 32 2
PHRM402W2 PCY402S Pharmacology V 16 2
PHRM441WY PCY441Y Research Project 16 year
Master of Medical Science in Clinical Pharmacology

Programme Description
This is a degree by coursework and minor research dissertation. The coursework
curriculum shall coincide with that of the Postgraduate Diploma in Clinical
Pharmacology.
Eligibility and selection

The provisions of Rule PHRM5, and of College Rules HS4 and HS6 shall apply.
58 Health Sciences
PHRM7 Curriculum and duration

The curriculum for the Degree shall be approved by the Board of the Faculty, and
shall comprise coursework modules with a combined credit value of 128 and a
dissertation with a credit value of 96 (see Table PHRM-C).
Note: A candidate who completes the required 3of the given 5 coursework modules
successfully (i.e. excluding the short dissertation) may apply to change registration to
the Postgraduate Diploma in Clinical Pharmacology, and to transfer the module
credits gained to this programme.
Master of Medical Science

Programme Description
This is a degree by research dissertation only. It is awarded in the fields of Clinical
Pharmacology and Health Systems Pharmacy. The relevant University Rules,
General College Rules and Rules PHRM5 to PHRM6 shall apply. The
guided/supervised research process involves the formulation of a research question
(related to one of the majors of the Pharmacy programme), literature review, the
development of a research proposal, application for ethical clearance, application for
funding, the research process using approved methodologies, the analyses of results
and the culmination of the process in the form of a dissertation/thesis which includes
an appropriate and relevant literature review, description of methodologies
employed, analyses and discussion of results, conclusions and recommendations
(where applicable).
Table PHRM-C: Curriculum for Coursework Master of Medical Science in Clinical Pharmacy
(2005)

Candidates to select four of the five modules:
PHRM801WY CPL501Y Basic Research Methodology 32 Year
PHRM802WY CPL502Y Basic Principles of Pharmacology 32 Year
PHRM803WY CPL503Y Neuropharmacology and Autocoid Pharmacology 32 Year
PHRM804WY CPL504Y Systematic Clinical Pharmacology 32 Year
PHRM805WY CPL505Y Therapeutic Drug Monitoring & Toxicology 32 Year
And in addition, complete the research module
PHRM806WY CPL506Y Short Dissertation 128 Year
Total credits for the Degree 256
2. Modules have Due-performance (DP) requirements, which, in all cases other

than research modules or projects, or when the contrary is stated in the entry
for the module concerned, is satisfactory attendance of lectures, tutorials and
other meetings, including clinical meetings, and a class mark of at least 40%.
Health Sciences 59
School of Physiotherapy, Sport Science &

Optometry
Westville campus
Head of School
Professor T Puckree
Telephone: 031 260 7977

Fax: 031 260 8106
E-mail: puckreet@ukzn.ac.za
Discipline: Physiotherapy
Academic Programme Co-ordinator: Dr SS Ramklass
Secretary
Mrs P Govender, BA (UKZN)
Telephone: 031 – 260 7817

Fax: 031 – 260 8106
govenderpr@ukzn.ac.za
Professor: P Gounden, Nat Dip in Physiotherapy (Pret), Cert

Inhalation Therapy, Dip TP, M Physiotherapy (UDW),
PhD (Medunsa), MHPCSA, MSGB Physiotherapy
Associate Professor: T Puckree, BSc (Physio)(UDW), DTE, MEd (Unisa), MS

Exercise Science, PhD (Exercise Physiology (SUNY at
Buffalo), Dip in HRM (S.A. Management School of
Business)
Lecturers T Nadasan, BPhysio (UDW), DOT, HED (Unisa),

M.Physio (UDW)
P Rangiah, Bphysio (UDW), HED (Unisa), MSASP,
MSAHTS, MPhysio,
(U.P): Orthopedics
60 Health Sciences
MN Rhode, BSc (Physio)(UDW), NDT (Stell), MSASP,

SANDTA, MSASMA. MMedSc (Sport Medicine)(Natal)
TV Simelane, Nat Dip In Physiotherapy (Pret), Cert
Inhalation Therapy, NDT (Stell), DTSE (Unisa), Cert
Hosp Admin NIPA (Pakistan)
N Naidoo, B.Sc (Physio)(UDW), M.Ed (Natal), MSASP,
MSASMA, SAHTS, IFHST
SS Maharaj, BPaed Sc, BPhysio (UDW), BEd (UNISA)
MMedSc (Sport Medicine) (Natal), Cert. Reboundology,
MSASP, MSASMA, DPhilM (UKZN)
LL. Godlwana, BSc. BPhysio (UCT)
SS Ramklass, BPhysio (UDW), M.Ed (Natal), D. Ed
(UKZN)
Technician L Chetty
Programmes in Physiotherapy
General information:
The School of Physiotherapy, Sport Science and Optometry provides the only
education and training facility for Physiotherapy in the provinces of Kwa-Zulu Natal
and the Eastern Cape. It offers programmes that are modularized and designed to
accommodate a range of learners with diverse backgrounds, interests and abilities.
The qualifications that it offers have both national relevance and international
recognition.
As the only education and training facility for Physiotherapy in the province, the
discipline has extensive access to clinical training facilities for general, specialized,
and community practice.
The discipline has a well-equipped fully computerized research laboratory allowing
for basic and clinical research in neuromuscular and cardiopulmonary fields.
Rules for programmes in Physiotherapy
Bachelor of Physiotherapy
Note on the rules
of Health Sciences, the general rules of the College of Health Sciences, and the
General Academic Rules for Degrees, Diplomas and Certificates of the University.
and the like.
Health Sciences 61
equal force.
Note on application for admission

Application for admission as a Physiotherapy student in the first year of study shall
be made on the prescribed university application form, obtainable from the
Academic Registrar. An additional discipline specific application form must be
completed.
Notes on Selection
College Rules HS3 & HS6 shall apply. Admission is by selection. To be eligible for
selection, South African matriculants must have obtained a pass mark of at least an
E on the higher grade or a D on the standard grade in the subjects Mathematics,
Physical Science, and Human Physiology / Biology. Selection shall be based on
academic achievement in the matriculation examinations and / or first year B. Sc
results, together with an interview conducted by the discipline.
Notes on Interrupted Studies

i. A student who wishes to re-enter the programme following a period of
absence of two semesters or more may be required to pass a test or otherwise
produce evidence of sustained competence in the work of pre-requisite
modules, in order to register for the succeeding module.
ii. Rule HS12 (c) applies to clinical modules.
iii. An applicant who fails this assessment at the first attempt, shall be given a
second assessment, which shall be final. Additional work may be prescribed
for the applicant before the second assessment is attempted.
Note on unacceptable behaviour

College Rule HS22 places an obligation of acceptable behaviour on all students in
the Faculty. A student may be excluded from the programme at any time on the
grounds of unacceptable behaviour, which is considered by the Faculty Professional
Conduct Committee to be inappropriate for Professional Practice.
Note on English placement test

Faculty rule FHEL1 shall apply. Candidates who pass the English Placement Test
shall, in consultation with the designated representative of the school, select a
module or modules with a total credit value of 16 points to include in his/her first
year curriculum.
SCPS9 Due performance

To be read with Faculty Rule FHEL3 & College Rule HS13
Faculty Rule FHEL3 shall apply, in addition to the requirements specified by
individual module entries in the programme.
62 Health Sciences
SCPS10 Curriculum for the Bachelor of Physiotherapy

i. The degree curriculum, which shall be approved by the Board from time to
time, shall extend over eight semesters and shall comprise modules with a total
credit value of not less than 512 and not more than 576, of which at least 128 shall
be at level 4. (See table PHTH-A)
ii. If a student has failed one or more module(s), constraints may be placed on
the number and choice of modules taken in subsequent semesters.
SCPS12 Examination
i. The form of the final examination in a module shall be specified in the relevant
module entry in the handbook.
ii. Rules FHEL 4, GR 27 and HS 18 applies.
iii. Each examination component (theory / practical/ clinical/ oral) of any
physiotherapy examination must have a sub-minimum mark of 40%.
SCPS13 Clinical work

i. Registration with the Health Professions Council of South Africa (HPCSA) is
compulsory from the first year of study.
ii. A student is required to have completed at least 1000 hours of recorded service
learning in the treatment of patients before being awarded the degree.
Table PHTH-A Curriculum for Bachelor of Physiotherapy – 2007

Level 1
PHTH101W1 PHT101T Introduction to Physiotherapy Science 8 1
PHTH111W1 PHT101S Kinesiology for Physiotherapy 16 1
BIOL103W1 LES101S Introductory Biology 16 1
PSYC101W1 PSA101S Introduction to Psychology A 16 1
PHYS131W1 PHY171S Physics for Life Sciences 1 16 1
PHYS132W2 PHY172S Physics for Life Sciences 2 16 2
PHTH102W2 PHT102S Massage and Manipulation 16 2
PSYC102W2 PSA102S Introduction to Psychology B 16 2
PHTH104W2 PHT104T Physiotherapy Selected Competency Skills 8 2
ELDV100WB UDW100S English Language Development 3 16 Both
ELECTIVE 4 Choose one of.
ZULN101W1 LLC150S Basic isiZulu Communication skills 16 Both
Health Sciences 63
ISTN100W2 HLSC112W2 End User Computing 16 2

Level 2
ANAT101W1 ANA101S Introduction to Anatomy & Neuroanatomy 16 1
ANAT109W1 ANA109S Anatomy of the Upper Lower Limbs 16 1
PHTH201W1 PHT201T Kinesiology for Physiotherapy 8 1
PHTH203W1 PHT203T Massage & Manipulation 8 1
PHTH212W2 PHT212T Electrotherapy for Physiotherapy 8 2
PHTH211W2 PHT211T Selected Competency Skills 8 2
PHTH207W2 PHT207T Kinesiology for Neurology 8 2
PHTH208W2 PHT208T Community Rehabilitation & Development 8 2
Physiotherapy
HPHS221W1 HPH211S Homeostatic Mechanisms in Human Body 16 1
ANA102W2 ANA102S Anatomy of the Head, Neck and Back 16 2
ANA104W2 ANA104S Anatomy of the Trunk and Embryology 16 2
Level 3
HLSC301W1 FHS301T Clinical Sciences, (Medicine, Microbiology, 8 1

Paediatrics, Neurology)
HLSC303W1 FHS303T Clinical Sciences, (Medicine, General Surgery, 8 1
Obstetrics & Gynaecology)
PHTH321W1 PHT321T Electrotherapy for Physiotherapy 8 1
PHTH322W2 PHT322T Physiotherapy in Orthopaedics and Sport 8 2
PHTH323W1 PHT323T Kinesiology for Physiotherapy 8 1
PHTH361W2 PHT361T Research Design 8 2
PHTH343WY PHT343Y Physiotherapy Clinical Practice 24 Year

(Cardiopulmonary & Orthopaedic Conditions)
PHTH345WY PHT345Y Physiotherapy Clinical Practice (Neurological 24 Year
Conditions & Community Physiotherapy)
PHTH326W1 PHT326T Principles of Physiotherapy Practice in 8 1
Rheumatology, Respiratory, Surgery &
Gerontology
HLSC302W2 FHS302T Clinical Sciences (Orthopaedics) 8 2
HLSC304W2 FHS304T Clinical Sciences (Rheumatology, Occupational 8 2

64 Health Sciences
Health, Pharmacology & First Aid, CPR)

PYSC332W2 PSD306S Managing Health Behaviour 8 2
PHTH327W1 PHT325T Peripheral Manipulations for Physiotherapy 8 1
PHTH324W2 Principles of Physiotherapy Practice for 8 2

Neurology
Level 4
PHTH401WY PHT401Y Principles of Physiotherapy 16 Year

PHTH400WY PHT400Y Physiotherapy Clinical Practice A 32 Year
PHTH410WY PHT410Y Physiotherapy Clinical Practice B 32 Year
PHTH403W2 PHT403T Physiotherapy Ethics & Practice Management 8 1
HLSC401W1 FHS401T Clinical Science (Orthopaedics + Cardiothoracic 8 1
Surgery)
HLSC402W2 FHS402T Clinical Science (Pharmacology, ENT, 8 2
Dermatology & Plastic Surgery)
PHTH404W2 PHT404S Physiotherapy Clinical Elective 16 2
PHTH405WY PHT405Y Physiotherapy Research 16 Year
Master of Physiotherapy (coursework)
Description of Degree Programme:

This is a masters degree by coursework and minor dissertation. It is taken over at
least two years of part-time study.
Rules for the degree
SCPS14 Admission
a) The following shall be eligible to apply for admission to the programme of
study:
(i) A Bachelor of Physiotherapy of the University or an applicant who has been
admitted by the Senate to the status of this degree in terms of general College rule
HS7(a)
(ii) An applicant in terms of general College rule HS7(b).
b) Applicants who are eligible in terms of a) shall be subject to selection.
c) The admission of a candidate to the degree programme may be conditional upon
certain prescribed modules being passed, prior to admission, in addition to the
modules forming the normal curriculum for the degree.
Health Sciences 65
SCPS15 Curriculum A candidate shall be registered for a minimum of two years,

during the first of which he or she shall complete compulsory and elective
coursework modules with a total credit value of 96, (Table PHTH-B), and complete
a year of postgraduate clinical work in Physiotherapy; in the second year, he or she
shall successfully complete a dissertation on a topic approved by the Senate, under
the guidance of a supervisor approved by the Senate.
Table PHTH-B
Curriculum for Master of Physiotherapy – Coursework 2007
New Code New Code Name of Module Cred Sem
Core modules
PHTH807W1 PHT507S Elements of Research 16 1
PHTH805W1 PHT505S Principles of Measurement and Evaluation 16 1
PHTH800WY PHT500Y Mini Thesis 96 year 2
And one of the two modules:
PHTH803W1 PHT503S Biofunctional Analysis: Cardiopulmonary or 16 1
PHTH801W1 PHT501S Biofunctional Analysis: Neuromuscular 16 1
Elective modules: Candidates to choose two of the following and one further module at masters level from
the Faculty of Health Sciences.
PHTH808W2 PHT508S Directed Reading 16 2
PHTH810W2 PHT510S Contemporary issues in Geriatric Populations 16 2
PHTH802W2 PHT502S Functional Assessment 16 2
PHTH804W2 PHT504S Critical Analysis of Physical Agents 16 2
PHTH806W2 PHT506S Independent Study 16 2
Total credits: 192
Master of Physiotherapy (Research dissertation)

Description of Degree Programme:
This is a research degree taken over a minimum period of two years of part-time
study.
Admission The provisions of Rule SCPS14 shall apply.
SCPS16 Examination
The final assessment of the degree shall be the examination of a dissertation
embodying the results of research conducted by the candidate. It may, at the
discretion of the examiners, also include an oral examination.
66 Health Sciences
Discipline: Sport Science
Academic Programme Co-ordinator

Mr. M.J. Azmuth
Administrative Assistant
Mrs.A. Pillay
Telephone: (031) 2607394

Fax: (031) 2607903
pillayal@ukzn.ac.za
Lecturers : PD Ramiah, BA (Hons). UHDE, MA, MDD (UDW)

MJ Azmuth, BA (Hons)(Biokinetics), MA (Biokinetics)
(UDW), registered with HPCSA as Biokineticist,
Tutors: BM Peters, BA (Hon)(Biokinetics), UHDE, (UDW),

Registered with HPCSA as Biokineticist,
R Naicker, BA (Hons)(Recreation)(UDW)
P Doyle, BA (Hons) (Biokinetics)(UDW), Registered
with HPCSA as Biokineticist,
Part-Time Lectures M Marshall, MBCHB (Wits), BSc (Sport Science

Hons)(UCT
K Subban, MBCHB, MMedSc (Sport Medicine)(UND)
MZ.Azmuth, BA (Hons) (Biokinetics) (UDW)
W. Minnie BA of Didactics (Nutritionist)
Rules for programmes in Sport Science
Bachelor of Sport Science
The completion of this undergraduate programme leads to many specialized fields of

study at the postgraduate level. Fields of specialization offered at this School are
Exercise Science, Biokinetics, Recreation Management, Coaching and Sport
Psychology. These programmes are taught and researched at the Honours, Masters
and Doctoral Levels.
Graduates from the programme will have opportunities in the fields of personal
training, sports coaching, and management of health and wellness centres, as medical
representatives for pharmaceutical companies and as recreation officers in the private
and government sectors.
Health Sciences 67
SCPS17 Admission General Faculty requirements shall apply. Eligible applicants

shall be subject to selection, for which their performance in the matriculation
examinations will be taken into account.
Note: For selection in 2007, applicants will be expected to have achieved at least 32
matriculation points.
SCPS18 English placement test Faculty Rule FHEL1 (qv) shall apply. Candidates
who pass the English placement test shall include ZULN101WB Basic Zulu
Communication Skills in their first-year curriculum or in the case of students who are
fluent in isiZulu advanced Zulu. Candidates who fail the English placement test shall
include ELDV100WB and English Language Development in their first year
curriculum.
SCPS19 Due performance

Faculty Rule FHEL3 and College Rules HS11 and HS13 shall apply.
SCPS20 Curriculum
The degree curriculum, which shall be approved by the Board, shall extend over six
semesters and shall comprise modules with a total credit value of not less than 384
and not more than 476, with at least 128 credits at exit level. (See table SPSC-A)
The curriculum of every student shall include any two elective modules, either both
be at level 1, or one at level 1 and the other a continuation of the first at level 2.
These elective modules shall be chosen by the student and approved by the Head of
the School. These modules must not clash with the Sport Science Modules.
Psychology may be taken at level 3 as an optional elective, provided the prerequisite
modules in Psychology at levels 1 and 2 have been passed.
Note: The approved curriculum for 2007 is given in Table SPSC-A.
Table SPSC-A Curriculum for Bachelor of Sport Science (2007)

Level 1
SSBR111W1 DSS111S History & Adapted Physical Education 16 1
SSBR112W2 DSS112S Elements of Human Anatomy 16 2
SSBR113W1 DSS113S Principles of Coaching & Conditioning 16 1
SSBR114W2 DSS114S Kinesiology & Health Education 16 2
SSBR115W1 DSS115S Practical Component level 1A 8 1
SSBR116W2 DSS116S Practical Component 1B 8 2
HPHS111W1 HPB111S General Basic Physiology 16 1
HPHS112W2 HPB122S Life Support Functions & Interactions with the 16 2
Environment
68 Health Sciences
ZULN101W1 LLC150S Basic Zulu Communication Skills 5 16 Both

ELDV100WB UDW100S English Language Development1 16 Both
Level2
SSBR211W1 DSS211S Evaluation, Statistics & Measurement of Sport Science 16 1
SSBR212W2 DSS212S Sport Organisation & Management. Legal Aspects 16 2
SSBR213W1 DSS213S Biomechanical Principles of Sport Science 16 1
SSBR214W2 DSS214S Exercise Biochemistry, Sport Injuries & First Aid 16 2
SSBR216W2 DSS216S Practical Component level 2B 8 2
- and ANY TWO 16 Credit modules provided they do not clash with Sport Science Modules
Total Credits: level 2 144
Level 3
SSBR311W1 DSS311S Sport Psychology 16 1

SSBR312W2 DSS312S Recreation 16 2
SSBR313W1 DSS313S Applied Exercise Physiology 16 1
SSBR314W2 DSS314S Rehabilitation Science 16 2
SSBR316W2 DSS316S Practical Component level 3B 16 2
HLSC300W2 FHS312S Applied Research Methods 8 2
PSYC210W2 PSA222T Neuropsychology & Cognition 8 2
PSYC211W2 PSA232T Health Psychology 8 2
Total credits at level 3 120
Bachelor of Sport Science Honours
The purpose of this one-year post-Bachelor’s programme in Sport Science is to

provide learners with greater understanding of the scientific basis for human
performance. The programme is offered in four streams: in Biokinetics, in
Recreation, in Exercise Science and in Sport Psychology. The curricula of the four
streams have a common core content.
Health Sciences 69
SCPS21 Eligibility and selection (cf College general rule HS24)

(a) To be eligible to apply to register for the degree, a candidate must hold a
Bachelors degree of the University in an appropriate field, or be admitted by the
Senate to the status of such degree in terms of Rule GR7(a), or have attained a level
of competence defined in Rule GR7(b).
(b) Eligible applicants shall be subject to selection based on the appropriateness of
their academic background, the strength of their previous academic record, the
availability of University resources, and University obligations in terms of University
or government policies.
SCPS22 Curriculum and rules of combination

(a) The curriculum shall occupy one year of full-time study.
(b) There are four defined streams in the curriculum, and every student shall register
for one of these:
Biokinetics,
Exercise Science,
Leisure Management and
Sport Psychology.
(c) The modules SSBR701W1: Research Methods & Statistics and SSBR702W2:
Research Project and the internship module SSBR712WY Internship are compulsory
modules in every student’s curriculum, regardless of the stream.
(d) Each stream has further modules which are compulsory for that stream. They are:
For Biokinetics: SSBR703W1, SSBR704W2, SSBR708W1 and SSBR709W2.
For Exercise Science: SSBR703W1 and SSBR704W2.
For Leisure Management: SSBR710W1 and SSBR711W2.
For Sport Psychology: SSBR707W1 and SSBR705W2.
(e) In the Exercise Science, Leisure Management and Sport Psychology streams, the
curriculum includes a single elective module which may be chosen from a specified
set of modules. These are:
For Exercise Science, one of: SSBR711W2, SSBR706W2, SSBR707W1 or
SSBR710W1
For Leisure Management, one of: SSBR703W1, SSBR706W2, SSBR707W1 or
SSBR704W2
For Sport Psychology, one of: SSBR703W1, SSBR706W2, SSBR711W2,
SSBR704W2 or SSBR710W1
Note: The modules listed in (c) to (e) above are those that have been approved for
the curriculum in 2007, which is summarised in Table SPSC-B. The Board may,
from time to time make changes to this combination of modules.
70 Health Sciences
Table SPSC-B Curriculum for Bachelor of Sport Science Honours (2005)
STREAMS
New Code Old Code Module Cred Sem
BK ES LM SP
SSBR701W1 DSS401S Research Methods & Statistics 16 1 yes yes yes Yes
SSBR702W2 DSS402S Research Project 32 2 yes yes yes Yes
SSBR703W1 DSS403S Exercise Science 16 1 yes yes elect Elect
SSBR704W2 DSS404S Exercise Physiology 16 2 yes yes elect Elect
SSBR705W2 DSS405S Motor Learning 16 2 Yes
SSBR706W2 DSS406S Adapted Physical Activity 16 2 elect elect Elect
SSBR707W1 DSS407S Sport Psychology 16 1 elect elect Yes
SSBR708W1 DSS408S Biokinetics 1 16 1 yes
SSBR709W2 DSS409S Biokinetics 2 16 2 yes
SSBR710W2 DSS410S Leisure Services 16 2 elect yes Elect
SSBR711W1 DSS411S Leisure Management 16 1 elect yes Elect
SSBR712WY DSS412Y Internship 32 year yes yes yes Yes
Total credits for degree 144 128 128 128
Abbreviations: BK: Biokinetics stream, ES: Exercise Science stream; LM: Leisure
Management stream; Passport Psychology stream. In the cross-table ‘ yes’ indicates that the
module is compulsory for the stream concerned, and ‘elect’ indicates that it is available to be
chosen as the (single) elective module in that stream.
Total credits will be 128 for each stream, except for Biokinetics, for which the total is 144.
Master of Sport Science

(Degree by coursework)
This is a masters degree by coursework and minor dissertation for those who wish to
extend their qualification skills and expertise, or have an interest in research. It is
offered in two specialist directions - Exercise Science and Biokinetics. Half of the
coursework is common to the two specialised curricula, and the research topic
leading to the dissertation must be chosen from the specialist direction involved.
SCPS23 Eligibility and selection: To be eligible to apply for admission to the

programme, an applicant must hold a Bachelor of Sport Science Honours degree
from the University with specialisation appropriate to the chosen stream, or be
admitted to the status of such degree by the Senate in terms of Rule RG7 (a), or be an
applicant in terms of rule RG7 (b). Eligible applicants shall be subject to selection.
Health Sciences 71
SCPS24 Curriculum and rules of combination

The degree shall occupy a minimum of two and a maximum of three years of part-
time study and research.
The degree shall be offered in two streams, these being Biokinetics and Exercise
Science.
Students in either stream shall be required to have appropriate specialisation in their
previous degree.
The research topic for the dissertation shall be chosen from the relevant area of
specialisation.
Specialisation will occur in the second year of study.
Table SPSC-C: Curriculum for Master of Sport Science (Exercise Science stream) (2005)

SSBR811WY Research Project 64/96 1&2
SSBR819W1 Research Methodology and Statistics 16 1
HPHS814W1 Capita Selecta Physiology 16 1
Speciality credit 1 (see specialization)
SSBR812W2 Nutrition, Drugs and Ergogenic Aids 16 2
SSBR813W2 Wellness, Healing and Rehabilitation Science 16 2
Speciality Credit 2 (see specialization) 16 1
16 2
Specialization:
Sport Performance
SSBR801W1 Exercise Testing and Sport Performance 16 1
SSBR816W2 Advanced coaching and Sport Psychology 16 2
Prevention and Promotion
SSBR815W1 Occupational Health and Health Promotion 16 1
SSBR817W2 Exercise for specific populations 16 2
Notes:
(i) 32 credit points of an area of specialization must be selected in the first year of
study.
(ii) 32 credit points of another area of specialization can be selected in the second
year of study or alternatively 96 credit point research project can be done.
(iii) Students who opt for the second specialization do a 64 credit point research
project.
72 Health Sciences
Table SPSC-D: Curriculum for Master of Sport Science (Biokinetics stream) (2005)

SSBR811WY Research Project 64/96 1&2
SSBR819W1 Research Methodology and Statistics 16 1
Speciality credit 1 (See specialization) 16 1
SSBR812W2 Nutrition, Drugs and ergogenic aids 16 2
SSBR813W2 Wellness, Healing and Rehabilitation Science 16 2
SSBR814W1 Capita selecta Physiology 16 1
Speciality credit 2 (See specialization) 16 2
Specialization:
Sport Performance
SSBR801W1 Exercise testing and exercise principles 16 1
SSBR816W2 Advanced coaching and sport psychology 16 2
SSBR815W1 Occupational health and health promotion 16 1
SSBR817W2 Exercise for specific populations 16 2
Sport Injuries
SSBR818W1 Management of upper body injuries 16 1
SSBR821W2 Management of lower body injuries 16 2

SSBR822W1 Orthopaedic rehabilitation 16 1
SSBR823W2 Chronic Disease Rehabilitation 16 2
Notes:
(i) 32 credit points of an area of specialization must be selected in the first year of
study.
(ii) 32 credit points of another area of specialization can be selected in the second
year of
or alternatively a 96 credit point research project can be done.
(iii) Students who opt for the second specialization do a 64 credit point research
project.
Health Sciences 73
Discipline: Optometry
Secretary
Ms I S Venkatas
Telephone : 031 – 260 7352
Fax: 031 – 260 7666
venkatasi@ukzn.ac.za
Associate Professor KS Naidoo, BSc, Optom (UDW), MPH (Temple Univ.

USA), OD (PCO, USA), FOA (SA)
Senior Lecturers VR Moodley, BOptom, MOptom (UDW), FOA (SA),

CAS (NEWENCO)
R Hansraj, BOptom, MOptom (UDW), PhD (UKZN)
CAS (Newenco), Neurotract (NEWENCO)
Lecturers S Naidu, BOptom (UDW), CAS (NEWENCO),

FOA (SA), PGDE (UKZN)
KP Mashige, BOptom (UDW), BMedSc (WITS), CAS
(NEWENCO), FOA (SA)
Department Secretary Ms IS Venkatas, Public Relations (Dip) (UNatal),

PrivSecr (MLSultan)
Technical Officer Mr S Govender
Snr Technical Assistant Mr GM Cele, BA, HDE (UDW),

BAdmin(Hons) (UKZN)
Clinic Administrator Mrs P Sewambar
Rules for programmes in Optometry
Note
of Health Sciences, the general rules of the College of Health Sciences, and the
General Academic Rules for Degrees, Diplomas and Certificates of the University.
74 Health Sciences
and the like.
equal force.
Bachelor of Optometry
Note on Selection.
College Rules HS4 & HS6 shall apply. For South African matriculants, the subjects
Mathematics, and Physical Science or Biology, with passes in both subjects, with at
least a D if passed at the standard grade will be regarded as normal requirements.
For candidates with other forms of school-leaving certificate, achievements
comparable to the above will be considered. For the purposes of selection, candidates
will be short-listed based on academic merit. Preference will be given to candidates
who have obtained better grades in Mathematics and Physical Science. Due
consideration will also be given to those applicants with experience in a related field.
An interview will only be conducted when necessary before final selection.
Note on unacceptable behaviour:

College Rule HS22 places an obligation of acceptable behaviour on all students in
the Faculty. A student may be excluded from the programme at any time on the
grounds of unacceptable behaviour, which is considered by the responsible Faculty
Committee to be inappropriate to Professional Practice.
Note on maximum loads:

If a student fails one or more modules in any semester, the total number of modules
shall be restricted in subsequent semesters. The total number of modules taken shall
not exceed the number of modules prescribed in the curriculum for that particular
semester.
SCPS1 English placement test (to be read with Faculty Rule FHEL1)
Candidates who fail the English Placement Test shall include ELDV100WB English
Language Development in their first-year curriculum.
SCPS2 Curriculum for the Bachelor of Optometry

of not less than 512 and not more than 576, of which at least 128 shall be at level 4.
(See table CLOP-A)
Health Sciences 75
SCPS3 Due performance (to be read with College Rule HS13)

The requirement for clinical modules* shall be attendance of every class or other
meeting prescribed for such module, unless the student is specifically excused by the
Head of the School or an authorised member of staff from a particular class or
meeting.
Notes:
(a) Further information on the requirements of individual modules will be found in
the handbook entries for those modules, which should be consulted.
(b) The clinical modules are OPTM231W1, OPTM232W1, OPTM351WY,
OPTM334WY, OPTM353WY, OPTM451WY, OPTM452W2, OPTM454W2,
OPTM456W2, OPTM435W1, OPTM431W1, OPTM433W1, OPTM437W1 and
OPTM458W2.
(c) All attendance in community-based clinics arranged by the programme, and
participation in outreach activities, are compulsory.
SCPS4 Clinical experience

(a) All final year students shall be required to produce verified records (by
approved clinical supervisors) of their personal performance of a minimum of 100
supervised optometric examinations of patients in the internal and external clinics,
before the end of the academic year. This will include patients seen in the 3rd year
internal and external clinics.
(b) Any student who has been absent for more than 14 days in a semester shall be
required to pass a standard test of clinical competence and his or her level of
knowledge before continuing to see patients in the clinic.
SCPS4 Sustained competence (See also College Rule HS12(c))

A student who for a year or more has undertaken no clinical work in a prerequisite
clinical module may be required to pass a test on the work of that prerequisite
module, or otherwise produce evidence of sustained competence in the work of the
prerequisite module, in order to register for the succeeding module.
Note on availability of modules

The listing of a particular elective module in this handbook or the prospectus does
not imply that it will necessarily be offered each year. In general, such modules will
be offered only if an acceptable number of candidates wish to register for it, if
sufficient clinical training venues are available and if the required lecturers are
available. The School reserves the right to alter the times of presentation of modules
or to cancel such modules for the reasons given.
76 Health Sciences
Curriculum for Bachelor of Optometry (2007)
Code Name of Module Cred Sem

Level 1
BIOL103W1 Introductory Biology 16 1
MATH131W1 Mathematics for Life Sciences 16 1
PHYS139W1 Physics for Optometry 16 1
ISTN100W2 Computer Literacy 16 2
OPTM114W2 Introductory Optometry 8 2
OPTM112W2 Physical & Geometric Optics 8 2
and ONE of the following three modules (see Rule SCPS1)
ELDV100WB English Language Development 16 1or 2
ZULN101WB Basic Zulu Communication Skills 16 1or 2
ZULM103WB Advanced Zulu 16 1 or 2
Level 2
BIOC200W1 Biochemistry for Optometry 8 1
OPTM231W1 Clinical Techniques I 16 1
HPHS221W1 Homeostasis 16 1
ANAT103W1 Introduction to Anatomy & Neuroanatomy 8 1
OPTM241W1 Ocular Anatomy and Physiology 8 1
OPTM221W1 Ophthalmic Optics I 8 1
PSYC332W2 Managing Health Behaviour 8 2
ANAT108W2 Anatomy of the Head, Neck & Back 8 2
OPTM232W2 Clinical Techniques 2 16 2
HPHS222W2 Integration and Communication 16 2
MICR182W2 Microbiology for Optometry 8 2
OPTM222W2 Ophthalmic Optics 2 8 2
OPTM234W2 Optical Dispensing 8 2
Level 3
OPTM353WY Contact Lens Clinic I 16 Year
OPTM331W1 Contact Lenses I 8 1
OPTM351WY General Clinic 16 Year
OPTM333W1 General Pathology & Clinical Medicine 8 1
OPTM321W1 Physiological Optics I 16 1
Health Sciences 77
OPTM311W1 Public Health 8 1

Applied Research Methods for Health Sciences 8 2
OPTM334WY Diagnosis and Management of Ocular Disease 24 Year
PHRM344W2 General and Ocular Pharmacology 8 2
OPTM322W2 Physiological Optics 2 16 2
OPTM435W1 Binocular Vision 16 1

OPTM431W1 Contact Lenses II 16 1
OPTM437W1 Low Vision 16 1
OPTM421W1 Neuro-Physiology of vision 8 1
OPTM433W1 Paediatric Optometry 16 1
OPTM451WY General Clinics/Grand Rounds 24 year
OPTM413WY Optometric Management & Jurisprudence 8 year
OPTM412WY Research Publication 8 year
OPTM456W2 Binocular Vision Clinic 8 2
OPTM452W2 Contact Lenses Clinic II 8 2
OPTM458W2 Low Vision Clinic 8 2
OPTM454W2 Paediatric Vision Clinic 8 2
Complete degree 536
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES IN OPTOMETRY
Master of Optometry (Research) : Students may elect to enrol on a part time or full
time basis
Doctor of Philosophy in Health Sciences (Research) : Students may elect to enrol

on a part time or full time basis
Purpose:
To facilitate and provide an opportunity for postgraduate study, research skills
development, and life-long learning.
SCPS6 Eligibility and selection

a) The following shall be eligible to apply for admission to the programme of study:
(i) For the Masters degree programme, a Bachelor of Optometry of the University
or an applicant who has been admitted by the Senate to the status of this degree in
terms of general College rule HS7 (a)
(ii) An applicant in terms of general College rule HS7 (b).
b) Applicants who are eligible in terms of a) shall be subject to selection.
78 Health Sciences
SCPS7 Professional registration

Every candidate shall, prior to commencement of studies, show proof of registration
with the Health Professions Council of South Africa as an optometrist
Explanatory Notes:
1. Rule SCPS3 lays down a general due-performance requirement applicable

to all modules in the School. This should be consulted, and also the
individual module entries that follow, which in some cases state further DP
requirements.
2. Students should be careful to inform themselves of all prerequisite and

corequisite requirements for modules they may wish to register for in the
present or future years. The module entries below contain such information.
In a number of cases a prerequisite is given as “Pass-proceed concession:”
followed by the name of a module. This means that the latter module need
only be passed to allow registration for the present module, but must
eventually be passed at the ‘proceed level’ before the degree can be
awarded.
Health Sciences 79
School of Audiology, Occupational Therapy &

Speech-Language Pathology
Westville Campus
Head of School
Dain van der Reyden
Secretary
Mrs S Dhasiar
Telephone: 031 260 7310

Fax: 031 260 7227
e-mail: dhasiars@ukzn.ac.za
Discipline: Audio logy

Ms F. Khan
Secretary
R Naidoo
Telephone: 031 – 260 7438

Fax: 031 – 260 7202
naidoor1@ukzn.ac.za
Senior Lecturer: CD Govender, BA (Speech and Hearing

Therapy) (Witwatersrand), DOT (Unisa),
MAudiology (UDW), MA (Audiology &
Speech Sciences) (MSU)
Lecturers: F Khan, BSpeech and Hearing Therapy

(UDW), MCommunication Pathology (UP)
L Joseph, BSpeech and Hearing Therapy
(UDW), MCommunication Pathology (UP)
Tutor: S Panday, BSpeech and Hearing Therapy

(UDW)
80 Health Sciences
Part Time Tutor: J Paken, B (Communication Pathology)

(Audiology) (UDW)
Senior Technician: K Legari, B Paed (UDW), B. Ed (Hons)

(UDW), M Ed (Science Educ.) (UKZN)
(shared with Speech Language Pathology)
Principal Secretary: R Naidoo Dip. in Computer Operation; Dip.

in Information Systems (UN), Dip. in Advance
Information Systems (UN), Dip. in
Bookkeeping (Damelin), Dip. in Computerised
Pastel Accounting (Damelin) (shared with
Speech Language Pathology)
RULES FOR PROGRAMMES IN AUDIOLOGY

1. BACHELOR DEGREES - Bachelor of Communication Pathology
(Audiology)
Note on Selection.
College Rule HS6 applies. South African matriculants will be expected to have
passed at least two of the three matric subjects Mathematics, Physical Science or
Biology to be eligible to apply for registration, with a minimum of a D-symbol if
passed at the Standard Grade. Applicants will be subject to selection, which will be
based on their academic and experiential background, special abilities, and the
University’s resources and obligations (see Rule HS6). Applicants from whom
applications have been accepted will be screened and those placed on a short list will
be interviewed.
Note on uunacceptable behaviour:

Rule HS22 places an obligation of acceptable behaviour on all students in the
Faculty. A student may be excluded from the programme at any time on the grounds
of unacceptable behaviour, which is considered by the responsible Faculty
Committee to be inappropriate to professional practice.
SCAOTS 1 - ASSESSMENT
a. Assessment for clinical modules at levels 2 and 3 shall be by continuous
assessment only.
b. Assessment for clinical modules at level 4 shall be by continuous
assessment and an examination. The year mark will contribute 75% and
the examination 25% to the final mark for the module.
Health Sciences 81
c. Assessment of modules other than clinical modules shall be by continuous

d. A sub minimum mark of 40% will be required for all theory and clinical
module examinations, or for sections of examinations in CPAU104W2,
CPSL403W1 and CPSL321W1. (See also Rule FHEL3 Duly Performed
Requirement. Rules GR16 and GR17 shall apply. See individual module
entries for information on assessment methods).
SCAOTS 2 - PROFESSIONAL REGISTRATION

Every student shall register with the Health Professions Council of South Africa
(HPCSA) before the end of May in his or her first year of registration.
SCAOTS 3 - DUE PERFORMANCE (to be read with College Rule FHEL3)

a. The requirement shall be attendance of all scheduled contact periods in clinical
modules except where the student has been specifically excused from a
particular session by the academic coordinator or his or her authorised
representative.
b. A minimum mark of 45% for the year mark, based on continuous assessment, is
required in order for a student to qualify for entry into the level 4 oral
examinations. (See individual module entries).
c. A minimum 75% lecture attendance, with a CAM of ≥40% for theory modules is
required in order for a student to qualify for entry into examinations.
College Rule FHEL3 shall apply.
SCAOTS 4 - CURRICULUM
of not less than 512 and not more than 576. Save as provided for in Rule FHEL1, all
modules of the curriculum shall be obligatory.
SCAOTS 5 - PROGRESSION
No student shall be allowed to proceed to any Level 3 modules that have not passed
all Level 2 modules of the Curriculum.
Students who fail year long clinical modules OR a semester long clinical
module, may be required to repeat a minimum of one semester of that module,
at the discretion of the Academic Coordinator and Head of School, and
pending availability of resources.
SCAOTS 6 - INTERRUPTED STUDIES

College Rule HS12(c) shall apply: A student who for two semesters or more has
undertaken no clinical work in a prerequisite clinical module, may be required to
pass a test on the work of that prerequisite module, or otherwise produce evidence
82 Health Sciences
of sustained competence in the work of the prerequisite module, in order to register

for the succeeding module.
SCAOTS 7 - WITHDRAWAL FROM A CLINICAL MODULE.

A student may not withdraw from a clinical module without the signature of the
Academic coordinator or an authorised member of the academic staff after
completion of all clinical responsibilities.
SCAOTS 8 - CLINICAL PRACTICE

No student shall qualify unless the prescribed hours for clinical practice have been
completed.
Note: If necessary, clinical practice must be undertaken during university vacation
periods.
Table SCAOT A: Curriculum for Bachelor of Communication Pathology (Audiology) (2007)

Level 1
CPSL101W1 Introduction to Communication Pathology 8 1
CPSL111W1 Clinical Phonetics 8 1
ANAT117W1 ANA117S Introduction to Anatomy, Head and Neck 16 1
HPHS111W1 Basic Human Physiology 16 1
CPSL124W2 Clinical Linguistics 8 2
CPAU102W2 Introduction to Audiology and Assessment 8 2
CPAU104W2 Hearing Sciences 8 2
CPSL112W2 Speech Sound System Disorders 8 2
HLSC116W2 FHS116S Community Studies 16
PSYC102W2 PSA102S Introduction to Psychology B 16
One of the modules (see Rule FHEL1)
ELDV100WB UDW100S English Language Development 16 both
ZULN101WB LLC150S Basic Zulu Communication Skills 16 both
ZULM103WB Bridging IsiZulu 1A 16 both
Level2
CPAU211W1 Diagnostic Audiology 8 1
CPAU221W1 Clinical Practice: Initial Audiological Assessment 16 1
CPSL201WY Clinical Practice: Speech Sound System Disorders 24 year
PSYC203W1 PSA221T Developmental Psychology 8
Psychology 8
Health Sciences 83
CPSL201W1 Developmental Language Disorders 8 1

ANAT111W1 Neuroanatomy 8 1
CPAU202W2 Paediatric Audiological Assessment 8 2
CPAU212W2 Clinical Practice: Audiological Assessment: Initial 16 2
and Diagnostic
CPSL214W2 Introduction to Severe Developmental 8 2
Communication Disorders
PSYC332W2 PSD306S Managing Health Behaviour 8 2
Level 3
CPAU301W1 Rehabilitation Technology 8 1
CPAU311W1 Aural Rehabilitation: Children 8 1
CPAU321W1 Clinical Practice: Paediatric & Special Populations 16 1
CPSL301WB Clinical Practice: Developmental Language 24 both
Disorders
CPSL321W1 Augmentative and Alternative Communication & 8 1
Early Intervention RP
HLSC301W1 FHS301T Applied Clinical Sciences 8 1
CPAU303W2 Auditory Processing Disorders 8 2
CPAU313W2 Sign Language and Deaf Culture 8 2
CPAU342W2 Auditory Evoked Potentials: Early Responses 8 2
CPAU322W2 Clinical Practice: Rehabilitation Technology 16 2
CPAU304W2 Aural Rehabilitation: Adults 8 2
PSYC331W2 FHS312S Applied research methods for Health Sciences 8
Level 4
CPAU403WY Clinical Practice: Auditory Evoked Potentials & 24 Year
Vestibular Assessment
CPAU402WY Clinical Practice: Aural Rehabilitation 24 Year
CPAU431WY Clinical Practice: Community Based Rehabilitation 16 Year
CPAU421WY Clinical Practice: General and Advanced 24 Year
CPAU441W1 Auditory Evoked Potentials: Late Responses and 8 1
Vestibular Assessment
CPAU401W1 Industrial Audiology 8 1
CPAU411WY Research Practice 16 Year
CPSL403W1 Service delivery models and professional practice 8 1
CPAU402W2 Clinical Practice: Industrial Audiology 8 2
CPAU404W2 Special topics in Audiology 8 2
Total credits at Level 4 144

84 Health Sciences
2. MASTERS BY COURSEWORK AND MINOR DISSERTATION

2.1 Master of Communication Pathology (Audiology)
SCAOTS 9 – ELIGIBILITY AND SELECTION

The relevant General Academic University Rules (specifically GR7 and CR1-17)
apply. In addition, a candidate shall:
a. hold a four-year degree of the University in the field of Audio logy or
Speech-Language Pathology, or be admitted by the Senate to the status of
such degree in terms of Common Rule GR7(a); or
b. be deemed by the Senate to be eligible in terms of University Rule GR7 (b).
c. be subject to selection, in which previous academic performance will be taken
into account. The selection process may include an interview.
Note: A person who holds a four-year degree in an allied professional discipline, or

any other suitable qualification, may be considered in terms of (a) or (b), and if
deemed eligible, shall be interviewed.
See also the general College Rules HS30 – HS42, which shall be applicable.
shall extend over not less than two semesters. (See table SCAOT B)
Table SCRT-F: Curriculum for Master of Communication Pathology (Audiology) (2007)

Core modules
CPAU 801W1 Diversity in practice of communication pathology 32 1
(Audiology)
CPAU803W1 Research Methodology 16 1
CPAU811WB Short Dissertation 80 year
Elective modules – candidate to choose one:
CPUA 802W2 Advanced studies in diagnostic audiology 32 2
CPAU804W2 Advanced studies in industrial audiology 32 2
CPAU806W2 Advanced studies in deafness 32 2
CPAU808W2 Advanced studies in Audiological management 32 2
Health Sciences 85
3. MASTERS BY FULL RESEARCH DISSERTATION
Masters in Communication Pathology (Audiology)
The relevant General Academic University Rules (specifically GR7 and MR1-13)
(a) hold a four-year degree of the University in the field of Audiology or
Speech-Language Pathology, or be admitted by the Senate to the status of
such a degree in terms of Rule GR7 (a); or
(b) Be deemed by the Senate to be eligible in terms of University Rule GR7 (b).
(c) Be subject to selection, in which previous academic performance will be
taken into account. The selection process may include an interview.
86 Health Sciences
Discipline: Occupational Therapy

R W E Joubert
Secretary
S Dhasiar
Telephone: 031 – 260 7310

Fax: 031 – 260 7227
dhasiars@ukzn.ac.za
Senior Lecturers: RWE Joubert, Nat Dip Occ. Ther. (Pret); BA (Unisa);
M Occ. Ther. (UDW)
KE Holland, Nat Dip Occ. Ther. (Pret); B(Hons) Occ.
Ther. (UP); M Ed. (Higher Education). (UND).
D van der Reyden, Nat Dip Occ. Ther. (Pret); BA
(Unisa); Dip Educ. Voc. Ther. (Pret); LLM( Medical
Law)(UKZN)
Lecturers: T Lingah, B Occ. Ther. (UDW); MBA (U.Wales)

SM Phehlukwayo, Dip Occ. Ther. (Medunsa); B Occ.
Ther. (Hons) (Medunsa)
Associate Lecturers: A.T.Hargreaves B.Occ.Ther (UDW);M(ECI)(UP)

P. Mdlokolo. BSc.Occ.Ther. (UCT).
P. Naidoo. B.Occ.Ther (UDW)
Principal Technician: M Muller-Nedebock, HDE (Industrial Arts) (UND)

Senior Technician: Vacant
Rules for programmes in Occupational Therapy

Bachelor of Occupational Therapy
Note on Selection.
College Rule HS4 & HS6 shall apply. For South African matriculants, the subjects
Mathematics, and Physical Science or Biology, with passes in both subjects of an E at
Health Sciences 87
the higher grade or a D at the standard grade, will be regarded as normal

requirements. For candidates with other forms of school-leaving certificate,
achievements equitable to the above will be considered.
Note on unacceptable behaviour:

SCTR1 English placement test (to be read with Faculty Rule FHEL1)
SCTR2 Curriculum for the Bachelor of Occupational Therapy

(e) The degree curriculum, which shall be approved by the Board from time to
time, shall extend over eight semesters and shall comprise modules with a total credit
value of not less than 512 and not more than 576, of which at least 128 shall be at
level 4. (See table SCTR-A)
Note: The curriculum of every student must be approved by Senate (Rule HS2 (b)).
No student shall normally, in any semester, be permitted to register for more than one
module in excess of those prescribed in the curriculum of the semester concerned.
(b) Students from designated groups for whom it is considered desirable to correct
past inequities in the profession, and who have between 30 and 36 matriculation
points as calculated by the University, may be selected to an extended programme.
Their programme for the first two years is outlined in table SCTR-B. From their third
year of study they follow the usual level-2 curriculum.
SCTR3 Due performance (to be read with College Rule HS13)
College Rule HS13 shall apply, save that in HS13(c) (v), the requirement shall be
attendance of all fieldwork except where the Head of School has specifically excused
the candidate from a particular session.
SCTR4 Fieldwork Modules
(a) Registration for particular fieldwork modules will be limited depending on the
fieldwork placement areas available from year to year.
(b) There shall be no supplementary examinations in failed fieldwork modules and
all such modules must be repeated.
SCTR5 Mandatory clinical fieldwork

No student shall qualify for the degree that has not completed at least one thousand
hours of prescribed fieldwork.
Note: If necessary, fieldwork must be undertaken during University vacation periods.
88 Health Sciences
SCTR6 Progression
No student shall be allowed to proceed to any third-year module who has not passed
all second-year modules in the curriculum.
SCTR7 Interrupted studies

pass a test on the work of that prerequisite module, or otherwise produce evidence of
sustained competence in the work of the prerequisite module in order to register for
the succeeding module.
SCTR8 Withdrawal from a fieldwork module

A student may not withdraw from a fieldwork module without the signature of an
authorised member of the academic staff.
Table SCRT-A: Curriculum for Bachelor of Occupational Therapy (2007)

Level 1
ANAT109W1 ANA109S Anatomy of the Upper & Lower Limbs 16 1
ZULN101WB LLC150S Basic Zulu Communication Skills 6 16 1
ELDV100WB UDW100S English Language Development 7 16 1
ANAT101W1 ANA101S Introduction to Anatomy & Neuroanatomy 16 1
OCTH151W1 OCC151T OT: Fundamentals 1 8 1
OCTH131W1 OCC131T OT: Procedures: (Assessment) 8 1
PYSC101W1 PSA101S Introduction to Psychology A 16 1
ANAT102W2 ANA102S Anatomy of the Head, Neck & Back 8 2
ANAT104W2 ANA104S Anatomy of the Trunk & Embryology 8 2
HLSC116W2 FHS116S Community Studies 16 2
OCTH122W2 OCC122S OT: Methods: An Introduction 8 2
OCTH132W2 OCC132S OT: Procedures: (Planning) 8 2
PYSC102W2 PSA102S Introduction to Psychology B 16 2
Level2
OCTH221W1 OCC221S OT Methods 1 8 1
6
The module Basic Zulu Communication Skills is done if, and only if the candidate (i) passes
the English placement test, and (ii) is adjudged not fluent in isiZulu. See Rule SCTR1
7
The module English Language Development is done if, and only if the Student Fails the
English Placement Test. See Rule SCTR1.
Health Sciences 89
OCTH251W1 OCC251S OT: Fundamentals 2 8 1

OCTH231W1 OCC233S OT: Procedures (Performance Areas) 8 1
OCTH211W1 OCC213S OT: Psychosocial Theory & Fieldwork 2 24 1
PSYC203W1 PSA221T Development Psychology 8 1
PSYC332W2 PSD306S Managing Health Behavior 8 2
HPHS221W1 HPH211S Homeostatic Mechanisms in the Human Body 16 1
OCTH222W2 OCC222S OT: Methods 2 8 2
OCTH232W2 OCC234S OT: Procedures (Performance Areas) 8 2
OCTH214W2 OCC214S Physical Theory & Fieldwork 2 24 2
Level3
HLSC305W1 FHS305T Clinical Sciences (Psychiatry) 8 1
HLSC303W1 FHS303T Clinical Sciences: (Medicine, Surgery) 8 1
HLSC301W1 FHS301T Clinical Sciences: (Path, Micro, Paeds) 8 1
OCTH351W OCC351S OT: Fundamentals 3 16 1
OCTH321W1 OCC321S OT: Methods 3 16 1
OCTH312W1 OCC313S OT: Physical Theory & Fieldwork 3 24 1
HLSC304W2 FHS304T Clinical Sciences: (Rheum. Occ. Health) 8 2
HLSC302W2 FHS302T Clinical Sciences: (Orthop. Ortho. Trauma) 8 2
PSYC335H1 PSA321T Psychopathology 8 2
PSYC313W1 Community Psychology 8 1
OCTH311W2 OCC314S Psychosocial Theory & Fieldwork 3 24 2
HLSC300W2 FHS312S Applied Research Methods for Health Sciences 8 2
Level 4
OCTH441WY OCC441Y Research Project 24 year
OCTH451WY OCC451Y OT: Fundamentals 4 8 year
OCTH412WY OCC411Y OT: Physical Theory & Fieldwork 4 32 year
OCTH411WY OCC413Y OT: Psychosocial Theory & Fieldwork 4 32 Year
OCTH413WY OCC415Y OT: Community Theory & Fieldwork 4 24 Year
OCTH414WB OCC417S OT: Paediatric Theory & Fieldwork 24 1,2
Master of Hand Rehabilitation
This is a course-work master’s programme

90 Health Sciences
This programme is aimed at enabling graduate health care workers to develop and
advance their professional knowledge, skills and expertise in the expanding and
specialized field of hand and upper extremity injury, recovery and management.
FIRST YEAR OF STUDY

New Code Old Code Module Name CP Notes
OCTH801W1 HAN501T Applied Upper Limb Anatomy 40 Pre-Req for
OCTH806WY
OCTH802W1 HAN502T Advanced therapeutic practice 40 Pre-Req for
OCTH806WY
OCTH803W2 HAN503T Managing Health Behaviour 16 Pre-Req for
OCTH806WY
OCTH804W2 HAN54T Research proposal 32 Pre-Req for
OCTH505WY
SECOND YEAR OF STUDY
OCTH805WY HAN505S Research methods 32 Co-Req for
OCTH806WY
OCTH806WY HAN506Y Mini-dissertation 96
QUALIFICATION: Masters in Hand Rehabilitation (240 CP)
SCTR10 Admission
(a) Entry to the qualification is limited to graduates with either:
(1) A basic degree in occupational therapy, physiotherapy, medicine or other
related field.
(2) A health-related qualification (eg a Diploma in occupational therapy or
Physiotherapy0 with a minimum of two (2) years full-time work experience
in the rehabilitation of hand and upper extremity dysfunction.
(b) Eligible applicants shall be subjected to selection based on the strength of their
previous academic and experiential record, the availability of University resources
and University obligations in terms of University and/or government policies.
SCTR11 Progression
Modules in the first year of study must be completed sequentially, viz.
HAND510W1, HAND502W1, HAND503W2 then HAND504W2.
Master of Occupational Therapy

This is a masters degree by research dissertation.
SCTR9 Admission
(a) To be eligible to apply to register for the degree a candidate must either
Health Sciences 91
(d) be in possession of a Bachelor of Occupational Therapy of the University or

be admitted by the Senate to the status of the degrees in terms of Rule
GR7(a), and have at least one year of experience as a practising registered
occupational therapist; or
(e) be in possession of a three-year diploma in Occupational Therapy
acceptable to the Senate, and have at least two years of experience as a
practising registered occupational therapy clinician or as a lecturer in
occupational therapy, and have passed an entrance examination prescribed
by the School; or
(f) have in some other way attained a level of competence defined in Rule GR7
(b).
(b) Eligible applicants shall be subject to selection based on the strength of their
previous academic and experiencial record, the availability of University
resources, and University obligations in terms of University or government
policies.
92 Health Sciences
Discipline: Speech-Language Pathology

J A H Pahl
Secretary
R Naidoo
Telephone: 031 – 260 7438

Fax: 031 – 260 7202
naidoor1@ukzn.ac.za
Senior Lecturer: JAH Pahl, BSc (Log)(Cape Town), MA (Gen.

Ling)(Stell) Dip in Educ (Educ Studies)(UN)
Lecturers RA Bailey, BA (Hons) (Witwatersrand), MA

(UND) (position shared with Audiology)
P Flack, BA (Speech and Hearing Therapy)
(Witwatersrand), MA (Gen Ling) (Stell)
D John, B Speech and Hearing Therapy
(UDW), M Comm Path (UP) (position shared
with Audiology)
S B Karrim B Communication Pathology
(Speech-Language Pathology) (UDW)
L Moodley, B Speech and Hearing Therapy
(UDW), BA (Hons in Psych)(Unisa), M Comm
Path (UP)
Senior Technician: K Legari, B Paed (UDW), B. Ed (hons)

(UDW), M Ed (Science Educ) (UKZN)
(position shared with Audiology)
Principal Secretary: R Naidoo Dip. in Computer Operation; Dip.

in Information Systems (UN), Dip. in
Advanced Information Systems (UN), Dip. in
Bookkeeping (Damelin), Dip. in Computerised
Pastel Accounting (Damelin) (position shared
with Audiology)
Health Sciences 93
RULES FOR PROGRAMMES IN SPEECH-LANGUAGE

PATHOLOGY
1. BACHELOR DEGREES - Bachelor of Communication Pathology (Speech-
Language Pathology)
Note on Selection.
College Rule HS6 applies. South African matriculants will be expected to have
passed at least two of the three matric subjects Mathematics, Physical Science or
Biology to be eligible to apply for registration, with a minimum of a D-symbol if
passed at the Standard Grade. Applicants will be subject to selection, which will be
based on their academic and experiential background, special abilities, and the
University’s resources and obligations (see Rule HS6). Applicants from whom
applications have been accepted will be screened and those placed on a short list will
be interviewed.
Note on uunacceptable behaviour:

SCAOTS 1 - ASSESSMENT
a. Assessment for clinical modules at levels 2 and 3 shall be by continuous
assessment only.
b. Assessment for clinical modules at level 4 shall be by continuous
c. Assessment of modules other than clinical modules shall be by continuous
d. A sub minimum mark of 40% will be required for all theory and clinical
module examinations, or for sections of examinations in CPSL203W2,
CPSL321W1 and CPSL403W1. (See also Rule FHEL3 Duly Performed
Requirement. Rules GR16 and GR17 shall apply. See individual module
entries for information on assessment methods).
SCAOTS 2 - PROFESSIONAL REGISTRATION

Every student shall register with the Health Professions Council of South Africa
(HPCSA) before the end of May in his or her first year of registration.
SCAOTS 3 - DUE PERFORMANCE (to be read with Faculty Rule FHEL3)

94 Health Sciences
a. The requirement shall be attendance of all scheduled contact periods in

clinical modules except where the student has been specifically excused from a
particular session by the academic coordinator or his or her authorised
representative.
b. A minimum mark of 45% for the year mark, based on continuous
assessment, is required in order for a student to qualify for entry into the level 4
oral examinations. (See individual module entries).
c. A minimum 75% lecture attendance, with a CAM of ≥40% for theory
modules is required in order for a student to qualify for entry into examinations.
College Rule FHEL3 shall apply.
of not less than 512 and not more than 576. Save as provided for in Rule FHEL1, all
modules of the curriculum shall be obligatory.
SCAOTS 5 - PROGRESSION
No student shall be allowed to proceed to any Level 3 modules who has not passed
all Level 2 modules of the Curriculum.
Students who fail year long clinical modules OR a semester long clinical module,
may be required to repeat a minimum of one semester of that module, at the
discretion of the Academic Coordinator and Head of School, and pending
availability of resources.
SCAOTS 6 - INTERRUPTED STUDIES

pass a test on the work of that prerequisite module, or otherwise produce evidence
of sustained competence in the work of the prerequisite module, in order to register
for the succeeding module.
SCAOTS 7 - WITHDRAWAL FROM A CLINICAL MODULE.

A student may not withdraw from a clinical module without the signature of the
Academic Coordinator or his or her authorised representative after completion of all
clinical responsibilities.
SCAOTS 8 - CLINICAL PRACTICE

No student shall qualify unless the prescribed hours for clinical practice have been
completed.
Note: If necessary, clinical practice must be undertaken during university vacation
periods.
Health Sciences 95
Table SCAOT-E: Curriculum for Bachelor of Communication Pathology (Speech-Language

Pathology)

Level 1
HPHS111W1 HPB111S Basic Human Physiology 16 1
CPSL111W1 CPC111S Clinical Phonetics 8 1
ANAT117W1 ANA117S Introduction to Anatomy, Head and Neck 16 1
CPSL101W1 CPC101S Introduction to Communication Pathology 8 1
CPSL124W2 CPC122S Clinical Linguistics 8 2
HLSC116W2 FHS116S Community Studies 16 2
CPAU104W2 CPC101T & Hearing Sciences 8 2
CPC104T
CPAU102W2 CPC102S Introduction to Audiology and Assessment 8 2
CPSL112W2 CPC112S Speech Sound System Disorders 8 2
One of the modules (see Rule FHEL1)
ELDV100WB UDW100S English Language Development 16 1
ZULN101WB LLC150S Basic IsiZulu Language Studies A 16 both
ZULM103WB Bridging IsiZulu A 16 both
Level 2
CPAU201WY CPC253S & Clinical Practice: Behavioural Screening 16 year
CPC254S Audiometry for the Speech-Language Therapist
CPAU231WY
CPSL 201WY CPC251Y Clinical Practice: Speech Sound System Disorders 24 year
CPSL211W1 CPC225S Developmental Language Disorders 8 1
CPAU213W1 CPC227T Behavioural Screening Audiometry for the 8 1
CPAU211W1 Speech-Language Therapist
ANAT111W1 Neuroanatomy 8 1
PSYC332W2 PSD306S Managing Health Behaviour 8 2
CPSL203W2 CPC222T & Speech Disorders: Cleft Palate and Voice 16 2
CPS335T
CPSL214W2 Intro to Severe Developmental Communication 8 2
Disorders
CPAU202W2 CPC224S Paediatric Audiological Assessment 8 2
PSYC203W1 PSA221T Developmental Psychology 8 1
Level 3
96 Health Sciences
CPSL356WY CPS356T Clinical Practice: Cranio-Facial Disorders 8 year

CPSL301WY CPC351Y Clinical Practice: Developmental Language 24 year
Disorders
CPSL352WY CPS352T Clinical Practice: Voice Disorders 8 year
CPSL351WY CPS351S Clinical Practice: Fluency Disorders 16 year
CPSL333W1 CPS333S Aphasia & Motor Speech Disorders 8 1
CPSL326W1 CPC226T Fluency Disorders 8 1
CPSL331W1 CPS331S Severe Developmental Communication Disorders 8 1
HLSC301W1 FHS301T Applied Clinical Sciences 8 1
HLSC312W2 FHS312S Applied Research Methods 8 2
CPSL321W1 CPC321T Augmentative and Alternative Communication & 8 1
Early Communication Intervention
CPSL332W2 CPS332T Neurologically Acquired Communication 8 2
Disorders & Dysphagia
CPAU313W2 CPA348T Sign Language and Deaf Culture 8 2
CPAU303W2 CPC322T Auditory Processing Disorders 8 2

Level 4
CPSL451WY CPS451Y Clinical Practice: Language Learning Disability 24 year
CPSL453WY CPS453Y Clinical Practice: Severe Developmental 24 year
CPSL455WY CPS455Y Clinical Practice: Neurologically Acquired 24 year
CPSL457W1 CPS457S Clinical Practice: Initial Assessment 16 1
CPSL401WY CPC457Y Clinical Practice: Community Based Rehabilitation 16 year
CPSL411WY CPC421S Research Practice 16 year
CPSL 403W1 CPC221T & Service Delivery Models and Professional Practice 8 1
CPC423T
2.1 MASTERS BY COURSEWORK AND MINOR DISSERTATION

Master of Communication Pathology (Speech-Language Pathology)
SCAOTS 9 – ELIGIBILITY AND SELECTION

The relevant General Academic University Rules (specifically GR7 and CR1-17)
apply. In addition, a candidate shall
a. hold a four-year degree of the University in the field of Audiology or Speech-
Language Pathology, or be admitted by the Senate to the status of such degree
in terms of Common Rule GR7(a); or
b. be deemed by the Senate to be eligible in terms of University Rule GR7 (b).
Health Sciences 97
c. be subject to selection, in which previous academic performance will be taken

Note: A person who holds a four-year degree in an allied professional discipline, or
any other suitable qualification, may be considered in terms of (a) or (b), and if
deemed eligible, shall be interviewed.
See also the general College Rules HS30 – HS42, which shall be applicable.
shall extend over not less than two semesters. (See table SCAOTS F)
Table SCRT-E: Curriculum for Master of Communication Pathology (Speech-Language Pathology)

(2007)

Core modules
CPSL801W1 Diversity in the practice of Communication 32 1
Pathology (Speech -Language Pathology)
CPSL803W1 Research Methodology 16 1
CPSL811WY Short dissertation 80 year
Elective modules – candidate to choose one:
CPSL802W2 Advanced studies in Bi/Multilingualism 32 2
CPSL804W2 Advanced studies in Speech, Voice &Fluency 32 2
CPSL806W2 Advanced studies in Neurologically Acquired 32 2
Speech- Language Disorders
CPSL808W2 Advanced studies in Developmental Language 32 2
CPSL810W1 Advanced studies in Severe Developmental 32 2
2.2 MASTERS BY FULL RESEARCH DISSERTATION
Masters in Communication Pathology (Speech-Language Pathology)

The relevant General Academic University Rules (specifically GR7, and MR1-13)
(d) hold a four-year degree of the University in the field of Audiology or Speech-
Language Pathology, or be admitted by the Senate to the status of such a
degree in terms of Rule GR7 (a); or
(e) be deemed by the Senate to be eligible in terms of University Rule GR7(b).
(f) be subject to selection, in which previous academic performance will be taken
98 Health Sciences
MODULES OFFERED IN THE FACULTY OF HEALTH

SCIENCES
Clinical Sciences
Offered in the School of Audiology, Occupational Therapy & Speech Language Pathology
HLSC401 - Clinical Sciences: (Orthopaedics & Cardiothor

(50L-0T-0P-0S-28H-0R-0F-0G-2A-14W-8C)
Prerequisite: Anatomy and Physiology Modules for Physiotherapy programme
Aim: This module provides students with a theoretical framework of specific conditions in orthopaedic and
cardiothoracic surgery
Content: Orthopaedics: Congenital talipes equino varus, genu valgus, genu varum, Blount’s disease, CDH,
Perthe’s disease, coxa vara, Hallux valgus, hallux rigidus, flat feet, pes cavus, claw toes, metatarsalgia,
calcanea spur, plantar fasciitis, Paget’s disease, osteomyelitis (acute and chronic), acute septic arthritis,
osteoarthrosis of the hip and knee. Surgical procedures on joints( osteotomy,arthrodesis, arthroplasty).
Degenerative disease of joints ( OA, AVN, Neuropathic), injuries involving the knee joint ( menisci,
ligamentous, bony injury, haemarthrosis, traumatic synovitis, injuries of the patella, rupture of quadriceps
mechanism). Fractures and injuries of the pelvis. Peri-articular disorders of the upper limb (rotator cuff,
tennis elbow, tenosynovitis). chronic back and neck pain, other spinal deformities Cardiothoracic surgery:
thoracic surgical methods ( thoracotomy, lobectomy, pneumonectomy); thoracic surgery associated with
(pulmonary TB, carcinoma of the bronchus / lung, decortication, hiatus hernia, achalasia, sub-phrenic
abscess, retro-sternal goiter, oesophagectomy, plication of emphysematous bullae); cardiac conditions and
the surgical management where necessary for ( congential heart disease, atrial septal defects, ventricular
septal defect, pulmonary stenosis, myocarditis, pericarditis, coarctation of the aorta, patent ductus
arteriosis, tetralogy of fallot), pulmonary emboli, ischaemic heart disease, nutritional heart disease,
bacterial endocarditis, cor pulmonale
Assessment: Formative: a minimum of 2 theory tests The average of the 2 theory tests will constitute the
CAM which will contribute 50% toward the final examination mark. Summative: 1x 2 hour theory paper
which will be moderated by an external examiner. The weighting of the paper should constitute at least the
following: Orthopaedic surgery : 35 marks; cardiothoracic surgery ; 35 marks Final Mark = 50% ( CAM)
+ 50% (exam mark) If a student obtains between 40% to 49% in the exam then he/she qualifies for a
supplementary exam
DP Requirement: 75% attendance. Semester mark (CAM) of 40%
HLSC402 W2 - Clinical Sciences: (Pharmacology, ENT & Plas

(50L-0T-10P-0S-14H-4R-0F-0G-2A-0W-8C)
Prerequisite: Anatomy and Physiology Modules for the Physiotherapy programme
Aim: This module provides students with a theoretical framework of specific conditions in plastic surgery,
dermatology and otorhinolaryngology and clinical pharmacology
Content: Pharmacology : cardiovascular drugs, allergy, histamine and antihistamine; drugs used in
respiratory and gastrointestinal conditions; drugs used in chemotherapy and burns; analgesics, anti-
inflammatories, muscle relaxants; handling, storage, and labelling of drugs; prescription writing. Ear, Nose
and Throat Surgery: middle ear infections; Menieres disease; sinusitis; rhinitis / hay fever; carcinoma of
the larynx; pre and post operative treatment. Plastic Surgery: skin grafts and flaps, reconstructive surgery,
eg. mastectomy; burns. Dermatology: acne; psoriasis; alopecia; boils, carbuncles; pressure sores
Assessment: Formative: a minimum of 2 theory tests The average of the 2 theory tests will constitute the
CAM which will contribute 50% toward the final examination mark. Summative: 1x 2 hour theory paper
Health Sciences 99
which will be moderated by an external examiner. The weighting of the paper should constitute at least the
following: Pharmacology : 30 marks; plastic and reconstructive surgery: 15 marks; otorhinolaryngology :
15 marks; dermatology :10 marks Final Mark = 50% ( CAM) + 50% (exam mark) If a student obtains
between 40% to 49% in the exam then he/she qualifies for a supplementary exam
DP Requirement: 75% attendance. Semester mark (CAM) of 40%
Communication Pathology - Audiology
CPAU102 W2 - Introduction to Audiology and Assessment

(59L-0T-12P-0S-4H-4R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: for CPAU221W1
Corequisite: for CPAU104W2
Aim: To provide students with learning opportunities to facilitate an understanding of Hearing assessment
using basic audiometric procedures with specific emphasis on quantifying and describing hearing loss.
Content: : Introduction to Audiology and Audiometry, otological assessment, tuning fork tests, case
interview, pure tone air- and bone conduction Audiometry, speech Audiometry, immitance Audiometry,
test battery approach, test administration and equipment, analysis and interpretation of results
Practicals: Department practical to develop testing skill and hospital observations
Assessment: 2 tests; 1 practical test;1 resource file (60%),1 x 2hr examination, which equals 40%of the
final mark
DP Requirement: A minimum 75% lecture attendance, with a CAM of ≥ 40% for the semester mark.
CPAU104 W2 - Hearing Sciences

(32L-0T-18P-0S-18H-10R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: CPAU221W1, CPAU202W2, CPAU211W1
Corequisite: CPAU102W2
Aim: To introduce students to the fundamental concepts relating to acoustics and psychoacoustics and to
facilitate an understanding of the nature and management of disorders/pathology affecting the auditory
system and audiological sequelae.
Content: Nature and measurement of sound, complex waveforms, resonance and filtering, distortion,
sound transmission, absorption and reflection. Psychoacoustics, auditory response area, auditory threshold,
audiogram, frequency, intensity, sound discrimination, monaural and binaural hearing. Classification of
auditory disorders; physiology of the ear and hearing, etiology, pathology, otologic treatment, and
management of congenital and acquired disorders affecting the outer, middle and inner ear, and auditory
nerve and central auditory pathways; audiological manifestation, tinnitus, introduction to functional
hearing loss.
Practicals: the course includes one field trip to observe an E.N.T. specialist.
Assessment: 2 tests (2 x 25%), 2 assignments (2 x 25%). The examination comprises of 2x 1 hour written
examination papers with a sub minimum of 40% for each paper. Each examination paper will contribute
50% toward the exam mark.
DP Requirement: Attendance at 100% of the practical sessions and a minimum of 75% of the lectures and
obtain a CAM of ≥40%.
CPAU201 - Clin Prac: Behavioural Screening Audiometry

(0L-20T-6P-0S-29H-5R-85F-0G-15A-18W-16C)
Prerequisite: For CPSL301WY,CPSL351W2,CPAU313W2,CPAU303W2
Corequisite: CPAU213
100 Health Sciences
Aim: The aim of this module is to enable the SLP to screen the hearing of clients who present with SLP
problems by means of behavioural screening techniques. This includes all clients that comprise the SLP
case load and includes clients across the age spectrum and in various clinical contexts.
Content: Plan, initiate and conduct a needs analysis of clients requiring audiometric screening, plan
identification programmes, to execute identification programmes, to manage and monitor the identification
programmes. Make appropriate referrals, compile and maintain records.
Assessment: This entails observation which allows the tutor to determine the degree to which you the
student knows or is able to do a given learning task and which identifies the part of the task that the
student does not know or is unable to do. This enables providing prescriptive feedback on the task to the
student. Assessment is via continuous assessment and shall contribute 100% toward the final mark.
Assessment will comprise clinical evaluations, reports, case presentations, lab/paper cases, clinical tests.
Calculation formula of CAM: Assessment will comprise clinical evaluations, reports, case presentations,
lab/paper cases, clinical tests. The year mark shall contribute 100% toward the final mark.
DP Requirement: Assessment is via continuous assessment and no DP is required however, with regard to
Due performance (DP) (to be read with College Rule HS13)College Rule HS13 shall apply, save that in
HS13(c)(v), The requirement shall be attendance of all scheduled co
CPAU202 W2 - Paediatric Audiological Assessment

(59L-0T-9P-0S-5H-5R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: For CPAU321W1, CPAU301W1, CPAU342W2, CPAU311W1
Corequisite:
Aim: To provide learning opportunities to understand the types of procedures utilized in the auditory
assessment of infants and young children (0-5 years), as well as the difficult to test population. To help
students understand the philosophy and approach to paediatric hearing assessment and the issues involved.
Content: Development of the auditory mechanism, auditory development, hearing disorders in children,
paediatric hearing screening, intervention issues, behavioural hearing testing with children, physiological
testing, the difficult to test/multiply handicapped child.
Practicals: Exposure to and orientation to test equipment and test procedures.
Assessment: tests, assignment (60%), and a two-hour written examination (40%)
DP Requirement: 100% attendance at practicals and 75% lectures
CPAU211 W2 - Diagnostic Audiology

(39L-0T-20P-0S-10H-9R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: for CPAU303W2, CPAU311W1, CPAU321W1, CPAU342W2, CPAU304W2
Aim: To facilitate an understanding of principles underlying various special audiometric tests, to critically
discuss testing procedure and interpret the special test battery results. This theoretical knowledge is
essential to the differential diagnosis of clients presenting with an organic or non-organic hearing
impairment.
Content: Historical perspective of special tests, diagnostic implementation of immitance measures, tests of
cochlear function, tests of retro-cochlear function, tests of central auditory function, special test battery.
Practicals: Department Practical for developing testing skills.
Assessment: Two written tests and one practical test. The tests are each weighted at 45% and the practical
test is 10% to make up 100%. 1x2 hour exam (40%)
DP Requirement: Attend 100% of their practical sessions and a minimum of 75% of the lectures and
obtain a CAM of ≥40%.
CPAU212 W2 - Clinical Practice: Audiological Assessment: I

(0L-20T-6P-0S-29H-5R-100F-0G-0A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: for CPAU301W1, CPAU311W1, CPAU342W2
Corequisite: CPAU221W1, CPAU211W1
Aim: To develop clinical skills in the initial evaluation of hearing disorders using conventional
audiometry, including site-of- lesion tests.
Content: Obtaining and conducting a case interview, selecting and administering a basic audiometric test
battery and special test battery for site-of -lesion, analysing and interpreting test results, determining
Health Sciences 101
appropriate intervention strategies, making appropriate referral, compiling accurate assessment reports.
Practicals: Client observation and clinical testing at university and hospital clinics.
Assessment: Clinical evaluations, reports, case presentations, clinical test, observation reports. 100%
continuos assessment
DP Requirement: Attendance at all scheduled contact periods in clinical modules except where the student
has been specifically excused from a particular session by the Head of School or his or her authorised
representative.
CPAU213 - Behavioural Screening Audiometry

(39L-0T-20P-0S-10H-9R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: for CPAU303W2,CPSL301WB
Corequisite: CPAU201
Aim: The aim of the this module is to facilitate an understanding of the procedures utilized in the screening
audiometric assessment of selected populations, for the purposes of enhancing the Speech-language
pathologists management of their clients, and to expedite referrals to the audiologist for further diagnostic
assessment.
Content: The module will comprise of the following content areas: Auditory development, audiological
manifestations in different disorders/syndromes, principles of screening, behavioural screening test
procedures, hearing screening guidelines, decision making with regard to choice of behavioural tests and
their criteria, instrumentation, record keeping.
Assessment: Assessments shall contribute 60% of the final mark. Assessments shall comprise 2 tests and
one assignement to make up 100% The examination mark will contribute 40% to the final mark. The
Examination is: 1X2 hour written examination The exam will comprise of short questions A sub minimum
mark of 40% on the examination is required in order to pass the module. There is an internal examiner and
an internal moderator for this. Calculation formula of CAM: - The tests will be weighted 60% and the
assignment 40%, as contribution to the 100% CAM. Calculation formula of exam mark: The examination
mark will contribute 100% for the paper. Calculation formula of the final mark: The year mark shall
contribute 60%, and the exam mark 40% toward the final mark. Minimum mark required to qualify for
supplementary examination A mark of 40 - 49% is required to qualify for a supplementary examination.
Rules in terms of supplementary As per faculty requirements
DP Requirement: In order to gain entry to the exam, students must; Attend 100% of their practical sessions
and a minimum of 75% of the lectures and obtain a CAM of ≥40%.
CPAU221 W1 - Clinical Practice:Initial Audiological Asses

(0L-20T-6P-0S-28H-6R-100F-0G-0A-13W-16C)
Corequisite: CPAU212W2, CPAU202W2
Aim: To develop clinical skills in the initial evaluation of hearing disorders using conventional audiometry
Content: Interviewing, test battery administration (Otoscopic evaluation; tuning fork tests pure tone air-
and bone-conduction; speech audiometry; immitance test battery;) masking principles, equipment
calibration and maintenance, troubleshooting, interpretation of audiometric results, feedback, clinical
communication skills, resource development, Case studies
Practicals: Clinic observation, hospital observation, Lab/paper cases.
Assessment: Clinical evaluation (x2), Reports (x2), case presentation, lab/paper cases, clinical test. 100%
continuous assessment
DP Requirement: Attendance at all scheduled contact periods in clinical modules except where the student
has been specifically excused from a particular session by the Head of School or his or her authorised
representative.
CPAU301 W1 - Rehabilitation Technology

(59L-0T-9P-0S-5H-5R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: for CPAU404W2, CPAU401WB, CPAU421WY, CPAU402WY, CPAU411WY
Aim: To facilitate an understanding of the communicative needs of the hearing impaired and deaf
population, to select, evaluate and monitor the use of rehabilitative technology.
102 Health Sciences
Content: Basic components of amplification devices, electro-acoustic characteristics, modification of

amplification devices and the coupling system, psychoacoustics and rehabilitation technology,
amplification device sound measurement, selection and evaluation methodologies, special applications,
assistive technology, orientation and counselling, amplification devices in South Africa, cochlear implants,
recent devices, research.
Practicals: orientation to hearing aids, associated technology and equipment
Assessment: 2 tests, 1assignment (60%), and one 2-hour exam (40%)
and a minimum of 75% of the lectures and obtain a CAM of ≥40%
CPAU303 W2 - Auditory Processing Disorders

(27L-0T-6P-0S-26H-20R-0F-0G-1A-7W-8C)
Prerequisite: CPAU401WY, CPAU421WY, CPAU402WY, CPAU404W2, CPAU411W1, CPSL451Y
Corequisite:
Aim: To provide learning opportunities to facilitate a theoretical understanding of the nature and
management of auditory processing disorders in children.
Content: Perspectives on auditory processing, neuroanatomy and physiology of the central auditory
system, auditory processing of speech, definition of auditory processing and auditory processing disorders,
auditory processing & attention deficit, auditory processing and speech-language disorders, assessment
and management of auditory processing disorders
Practicals: orientation to audiologist and speech-language therapists’ assessment tools.
Assessment: 1test, 1assignment, and one 1-hour exam
DP Requirement: In order to gain entry to the exam, students must; Attend a minimum of 75% of the
lectures and obtain a CAM of ≥40%.
CPAU304 W2 - Aural Rehabilitation:Adults

(20L-0T-13P-0S-26H-20R-0F-0G-1A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: for CPAU402WY,CPAU401WY,CPAU411W1,CPAU404W2,CPAU421WY
Aim: TO provide learning opportunities to facilitate understanding of assessment and management issues
and methodologies pertaining to aural rehabilitation of the adult and older adult.
Content: degeneration of the auditory System, pathology : presbycusis and central auditory pathology,
modification of conventional test battery, counselling, evaluation and benefit of amplification devices;
group and individual management strategies; speech conservation.
Practicals: Exposure to and orientation to test procedures and intervention strategies.
Assessment: tests, assignment (60%), and a one -hour written examination (40%).
DP Requirement: A minimum of 75% lecture attendance is required and compulsory attendance at
practicals and obtain a CAM of ≥40%.
CPAU311 W1 - Aural Rehabilitation:Children

(59L-0T-9P-0S-5H-5R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: for CPAU404W2, CPAU402WB, CPAU411W1
Aim: To provide learning opportunities to facilitate understanding of assessment and management issues
and methodologies pertaining to aural rehabilitation of the preschool and school aged hearing impaired
child.
Content: communication model, early intervention with young hearing impaired children, role and
responsibility of parents, family - centred intervention, communication options, oralism, total
communication, bilingualism-biculturalism, assessment and intervention of communication function
pertaining to speech development, language development, sensory information (speech reading, audition)
in of hearing impaired children of all ages
Practicals: Visit to school for the deaf, practice and observation of procedures
Assessment: tests, assignment (60%), and a two-hour written examination (40%)
DP Requirement: 100% attendance at practicals and 75% lecture attendance and obtain a CAM of ≥40%.
Health Sciences 103
CPAU313 W2 - Sign Language and Deaf Culture

(29L-0T-30P-0S-10H-10R-0F-0G-1A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: For CPAU402WY,CPAU404W2
Aim: To facilitate an understanding of sign language from a linguistic / socio-linguistic perspective, and an
awareness of deafness as a cultural phenomenon.
Content: nature of sign language, history of sign language, myths and misconceptions, acquisition of sign
language, Structure of sign language, Deaf culture, human rights issues.
Practicals: Weekly sign language lessons offered by a Deaf tutor over 13 weeks
Assessment: 1theory test, 1theory assignment, 1 practical test- (60%), and a 1-hour examination (40%)
DP Requirement: 100% attendance at practicals and 75% attendance at lectures and obtain a CAM of
≥40%.
CPAU321 W1 - Clinical Practice:Paediatric & Special Popul

(0L-20T-39P-0S-29H-20R-52F-0G-0A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: for CPAU402WY, CPAU403WY, CPAU421WY, CPAU404W2, CPAU411W1
Aim: To provide clinical opportunity and supervision to develop clinical skills/ competencies in the
assessment of the paediatric and difficult-to-test client
Content: Case history taking, modification of conventional test battery including PCA, VRA, TROCA,
BOA, and WIPI; categories of difficult-to-test clientele, speech audiometry, modification of masking
techniques, test interpretation, test methodologies and equipment, objective and subjective measures for
paediatric and difficult-to-test clients, reliability and validity issues, early identification and screening,
communication of results, evaluation of procedures, report writing, special tests for functional hearing
loss, early identification of hearing loss.
Practicals: Exposure to test equipment and a variety of clients in the paediatric clients
Assessment: 100% continuous assessment, clinical evaluation (x2), reports (x2), clinical test, case
presentation (x1).
DP Requirement: The requirement shall be: Attendance of all scheduled contact periods in clinical
modules except where the student has been specifically excused from a particular session by the Head of
School or his or her authorized representative, and Submission of a
CPAU322 W2 - Clinical Practice:Rehabilitation Technology

(0L-26T-26P-0S-30H-15R-62F-0G-1A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: for CPAU402WY, CPAU421WY, CPAU411W1, CPAU404W2
Aim: To develop clinical competencies in the selection, evaluating, and monitoring of rehabilitation
technology, especially hearing aids, and counselling for the hearing impaired population.
Content: Electro-acoustics and hearing aids, assistive devices, technological advances earmould
impression taking and modification, case interview and needs analysis; hearing instrument selection and
evaluation methodologies, counselling and orientation, procurement options of instruments, ethical issues,
special applications of amplification, clinical research in the S. A. context, report writing and
administration
Practicals: orientation to hearing aids, associated technology and equipment
Assessment: Continuous assessment =1 X Oral clinical practical test (30%), 1 X clinical case presentation
(5%), 1 X clinical evaluation (50%), 1 X written clinic test (10%), Report writing (5%).
DP Requirement: The requirement shall be attendance of all scheduled contact periods in clinical modules
except where the student has been specifically excused from a particular session by the Head of School or
his or her authorised representative.
CPAU342 W2 - Auditory Evoked Potentials: Early Responses

(59L-5T-4P-0S-5H-5R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: for CPAU411W1,CPAU441W1,CPAU403WY,CPAU404W2
Aim: to provide learning opportunities for students in order to define, describe and explain the concepts
and theories that underlie auditory evoked potential testing, and advanced objective testing procedures
based on electrophysiological principles.
104 Health Sciences
Content: anatomical and physiological background, acoustic signal generation and selection, computer
averaging, instrumentation,auditory evoked potentials ( electro-cochleography,auditory brainstem testing,
event-related 40Hz technique, middle latency response) description of test procedures, test parameters,
description of response patterns for normal and pathological cases, clinical applications, evaluation of test,
research trends.
Practicals: exposure to and orientation to test equipment and test procedures.
Assessment: Tests and assignments (60%) and Final Exams (40%) constitute the final mark. A student
must earn a sub-minimum of 40% in the final examination to qualify for a pass or supplementary
examination. A final mark of 50% constitutes a pass.
DP Requirement: 100% attendance at practicals and 75% coursework lectures and obtain a CAM of ≥40%.
CPAU401 W1 - Industrial Audiology

(27L-0T-6P-0S-26H-20R-0F-0G-1A-7W-8C)
Aim: To provide learning opportunities to facilitate understanding of noise, its measurement, effect and
control.
Content: PArameters of noise, instrumentation and measurement of noise, effect of noise exposure, and
susceptibility to noise- induced hearing loss, damage risk criteria, and diagnosis of noise induced hearing
loss and differential diagnosis, principles and implementation of a comprehensive industrial hearing
conservation program, legislation relating to noise control.
Practicals: practical orientation to policy, equipment, and hearing conservation standards.
Assessment: MARKS are equally weighted=1 test, 1 assignment, and one 1 hour exam.
and a minimum of 75% of the lectures and obtain a CAM of ≥40%.
CPAU402 W2 - Clinical Practice: Aural Rehabilitation

(0L-14T-0P-0S-7H-6R-52F-0G-1A-13W-8C)
Aim: To develop competencies necessary to plan and implement an Industrial hearing conservation
Programme in a selected industrial setting.
Content: Noise, types of noise, noise measurement instrumentation, noise survey, legal aspects and
legislation. Industrial conservation programme management. Selection, fitting and evaluation of hearing
protection devices.
Assessment: clinical assignment (15%), clinical practice and oral review (60%) – constitutes 75% of year
mark, oral examination –25%. Continuous assessment, semester mark shall contribute to 100% of the final
mark
DP Requirement: 100% attendance at all scheduled sessions. Submission of a clinical portfolio.
Compliance with all clinical requirements before completion of clinic (eg. Records/reports). Compliance
with ethical/professional conduct requirements.
CPAU403 W1 - Service Delivery Models and Professional Issu

(22L-0T-0P-40S-5H-9R-2F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Aim: To facilitate learners understanding of models of service delivery and professional management
issues within the discipline of audiology.
Content: (1) Professional issues: Health and education legislation and policy guidelines governing
professional practice; Professional Ethics and practice; Interdisciplinary team practice; Continuing
professional development; Conflict resolution (2) Models of service delivery: Health promotion and
prevention; primary health care policy and application in the management of communication disorders
emanating from audiological disorders (in terms of assessment, treatment, education and counselling);
professional knowledge, skills and attitudes for implementing a primary health model of service delivery
Practicals: field trips to sites utilizing different models of service delivery
Assessment: 100% - comprising: Oral presentation (20%), Written presentations (70%), Chairing session
(5%), Participation in seminars (5%).50% test + 50% (oral presentation + written presentation + chairing
session + participation) = CAM. (Paper 1 + Paper 2) x ½ = 100% exam mark
Health Sciences 105
DP Requirement: Attend a minimum of 75% of lectures and seminars, and obtain a CAM of ≥ 40%.
CPAU404 W2 - Special topics in Audiology

(0L-0T-0P-11S-53H-15R-0F-0G-1A-7W-8C)
Aim: To develop an understanding of recent advances in the areas of assessment, management, and
research in the discipline of Audiology. This course is seen as an exciting challenge to the senior student in
the Audiology programme. It addresses areas not extensively probed and addressed in the programme. It
encourages critical appraisal of new approaches, and systems in the practice of Audiology. Discussions
that ensue in the presentations are in keeping with the specialist qualification of Audiology.
Content: Recent advances in assessment, treatment/management and research in Audiology.
Assessment: For individual presentations, the student will be allocated 70% for the written presentation,
and 30% for the oral presentation; the latter includes participation and discussion. 1X1 hour examinations
shall contribute to 40% of the final mark
DP Requirement: 100% attendance at all scheduled sessions.
CPAU411 W1 - Research Practice

(8L-20T-0P-6S-65H-0R-40F-0G-21A-26W-16C)
Aim: To familiarize students with basic research principles and methods so as to conduct research in the
disciplines of Audiology.
Content: Identification of research needs, protocol development, practical aspects of research
methodology, literature surveys, methods of data analysis, interpretation and discussion, report writing,
editorial care and presentation skills.
Assessment: Evaluation of a written research report.
DP Requirement: As per faculty rules.
CPAU412 - Clinical Practice:Industrial Audiology

(0L-14T-0P-0S-7H-6R-52F-0G-1A-13W-8C)
Aim: To develop competencies necessary to plan and implement an Industrial Hearing Conservation
Programme in a selected industrial setting.
Content: Noise, types of noise, noise measurement instrumentation, noise survey, legal aspects and
legislation. Industrial conservation programme management. Selection, fitting and evaluation of hearing
protection devices.
Assessment: clinical assignment (15%), clinical practice and oral review (60%) – constitutes 75% of year
mark, oral examination –25%. Continuous assessment, semester mark shall contribute to 100% of the final
mark
CPAU421 WY - Clinical Practice:General and Advanced

(0L-55T-2P-0S-52H-13R-117F-0G-1A-26W-24C)
Aim: TO facilitate development of competencies in preparation for indepedent practice in audiology.
Content: Case interviews, test modification, management of children and difficult-to-test, advanced
electrophysiological testing, advanced rehabilitation technology, promotion and prevention of hearing
disorders, aural rehabilitation of the adult and child, programme management, resourse development,
central auditory function test, clinical research- identification of need, management of hearing loss in
adulthood, counselling ,training parents, teachers, and co-workers, interdisciplinary management.
Assessment: 100% Continuous assessment = 2Xclinical evaluation, 2Xclinical tests, 1X case presentation,
1Xgroup presentation (75%), oral examination (25%). A sub minimum mark of 45% on the examination is
required in order to pass the module
106 Health Sciences
CPAU431 WY - Clinical Practice: Community Based Rehabilita

(0L-16T-0P-25S-48H-6R-63F-0G-2A-26W-16C)
Aim: TO develop skills: in working within a community-based rehabilitation context and at a household
level, with individuals with severe and multiple handicapes, within a transdisciplinary model of service
delivery.
Content: Community access; the facilitation and running of support groups for children with severe
disability, involving caregiver, child and CHW; Issues related to learning disability and disadvantage in
relation to school readiness; Policy around disability; advocacy.
Practicals: 23 weeks engagement at community level; 1 week orientation;1week case presentation;1 week
handover presentation.
Assessment: Group mark: case presentation; hand over presentation Individual assessment: clinical
intervention; Oral exam
DP Requirement: 75% attendance required; total year mark includes groups and individual assessment as
described above. submission of a clinical portfolio.
CPAU441 W1 - Auditory Evoked Potentials: Late Responses an

(39L-20T-4P-5S-5H-5R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Corequisite: CPAU403WY, CPAU404W2
Aim: TO provide learning opportunities to extend the application of electrophysiological testing principles
to cortical response audiometry and the assessment of the vestibular system.
Content: Cortical evoked response measures-late and very late response (P300 and contingent negative
variation): vestibular assessment-case history, interdisciplinary assessment, principles underlying ENG
examination, test procedures for central and peripheral test batteries, test parameters, normal and
pathological response patterns, clinical application, test evaluation, research needs.
Practicals: Exposure and orientation test equipment and test procedures.
Assessment: Tests and assignments (60%) and a 1hour final exam. (40%).
DP Requirement: Attendance at 75% of the lectures, 100% at the tutorials and obtain a CAM of ≥40% will
be considered in the final granting of a DP.
CPAU801 W1 - Diversity in practice of communication pathol

(6L-10T-0P-0S-304H-0R-0F-0G-6A-13W-33C)
Prerequisite: CPA810WB,CPAU810WY
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To facilitate learners’ understanding & critical reflection of practice in Communication Pathology
within a diverse context.
Content: Critical study of the concept of diversity logy. Emphasis is placed on the following: evaluation of
current assessment and management tools; principles of resource development; modification/development
of culturally and linguistically appropriate resources.
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: assignment outline (20%); assignment (80%)
DP Requirement: 90% attendance at tutorials
CPAU802 W2 - Advanced studies in diagnostic audiology

(0L-10T-0P-0S-304H-0R-0F-0G-6A-0W-32C)
Prerequisite: CPAU810WB,CPAU810WY
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To facilitate learners’ critical study of recent and relevant literature in a selected theme within the
broad field of diagnostic audiology
Content: Critical review of theoretical assumptions underlying diagnostic audiometric procedures;
relevance of current behavioural and electro-physiological measures; recent advances in the field of
diagnostic audiology; assessment issues with culturally diverse populations; hearing assessment across the
Health Sciences 107
age range
Practicals: NONE
A LABORATORY FEE IS PAYABLE FOR THIS MODULE.
CPAU803 W1 - Research Methodology

(6L-10T-0P-0S-138H-0R-0F-0G-6A-0W-16C)
Prerequisite: CPA810WB,CPAU810WY
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To facilitate the learner’s understanding of the research process & development of a research
proposal.
Content: What is research, identifying the research problem, ethics in research, critical review of the
literature & development of rationale, research designs (quantitative & qualitative), data analysis and
interpretation, research proposal, research report
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: Research proposal (100%)
CPAU804 W2 - Advanced studies in Industrial Audiology

(0L-10T-0P-0S-304H-0R-0F-0G-6A-13W-32C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To facilitate learners’ critical study of the recent and relevant literature in a selected theme within the
broad field of industrial audiology
Content: Critical evaluation of health care in industry; promotion; survey; development, implementation
and evaluation of hearing conservation programmes in industry.
Practicals: NONE
A LABORATORY FEE IS PAYABLE FOR THIS MODULE.
CPAU806 W2 - Advanced studies in deafness

(0L-10T-0P-0S-304H-0R-0F-0G-6A-13W-32C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To facilitate learners’ critical study of recent and relevant literature in the field of sign language and
deaf issues as applied to the profession of communication pathology and deaf education.
Content: Debates surrounding the cultural view of deafness; status of sign language; critical evaluation of
educational options in deaf education; implications of the bilingual-bicultural view on deafness for the
profession of audiology
Practicals: NONE
CPAU808 W2 - Advanced studies in Audiological management

(0L-10T-0P-0S-304H-0R-0F-0G-6A-13W-32C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To facilitate learners’ critical study of recent and relevant literature in a selected theme within the
broad field of audiological management
Content: Critical review of the management of the hearing impaired population (infant to geriatric);
strategies and implications in managing congenital and acquired hearing loss; critical evaluation of
communication methods/philosophies in managing hearing impairment; educational audiology; recent
108 Health Sciences
advances in rehabilitation technology.

Practicals: NONE
A LABORATORY FEE IS PAYABLE FOR THIS MODULE
CPAU811 WY - Short Dissertation

(0L-10T-0P-1S-621H-0R-160F-0G-8A-13W-80C)
Prerequisite: CPA810W1; CPA803W1,CPAU810WY,CPAU803W1
Corequisite: nil
Aim: To facilitate the learner’s ability to conduct research & submit a short-dissertation on an approved
topic.
Content: Planning the research process, developing data collection instruments, obtaining ethical
clearance, implementing data collection, analysis and interpretation of findings, & writing a research
report.
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: Research report (100%)
DP Requirement: 90% attendance at tutorials and presentations at seminar
Communication Pathology - Speech Language Pathology
CPSL101 - Introduction to Communication Pathology

(52L-0T-6P-0S-14H-6R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: CPSL201W2, CPAU231WB
Aim: To introduce the professions of Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology ;to provide an
understanding of normal communication within the framework of cultural and communication models; to
provide a life-span view of communication development; to introduce principles and ethical issues relating
to assessment and therapy.
Content: Process of normal communication and communication breakdown, introductory physiology of
speech and hearing, culture and language, models of classification of communication disorders,
developmental aspects of communication and norms development, scope and background to the
profession, ethical considerations
Assessment: Summative assessment: 1x 2 hour written exam which will cover content of the entire
module. Questions will require short paragraphs or short essay answers. Subminimum for the exam : 40%
A student who achieves an exam mark above 40% and an overall final mark of between 40 and 49% will
qualify for a supplementary exam. The final mark is calculated by weighting the semester mark (CAM)
60% and the exam mark 40% 4 equally weighted tasks, each to contribute to 25% of CAM 2 x
assignments - the first on the professions and the second on normal development. 2 x 1 hour tests;
DP Requirement: Minimum attendance: 75% of lectures ; and minimum of 40% for CAM
CPSL111 W1 - Clinical Phonetics

(49L-0T-11P-0S-10H-8R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: CPSL211, CPSL201
Aim: To provide a theoretical introduction to and practical skills and transcribing and reading the
international Phonetic Alphabet, and to provide a foundation of key concepts and skills in phonology,
syntax (Functional Grammar), morphology, semantics, and of understanding the acoustic properties of
speech sounds, all for the purposes of application to normal and disordered communication, with specific
reference to the English and Zulu Languages.
Health Sciences 109
Content: Phonetics, Phonology, Morphology, Functional Grammar, Physics of Speech

Practicals: Phonetics, Phonology, Functional Grammar, Morphology
Assessment: Summative Assessment: One 2-hour exam of short questions Formative assessment: Three
written tests and perhaps an assignment. All formative assessments are weighted equally. Each test and/or
assignment is calculated as a percentage. Exam mark: One written paper as a percentage. Final mark: is by
formula Final mark calculation formula: 60% of CAM + 40% of Exam Mark. Subminimum required in the
exam: 40% Rules in terms of supplementary exam: As per faculty rule
DP Requirement: Students must both attend at least 75% of lectures and obtain a CAM of at least 40%.
CPSL112 - Speech Sound System Disorders

(48L-2T-2P-0S-16H-10R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: for CPSL201WY, CPSL211W1, CPSL203W2, CPSL214W2
Corequisite: CPSL101W1, CPSL111W1
Aim: To provide learning opportunities so that students are able to understand the nature of developmental
speech sound system disorders, the assessment and treatment principles and methodologies, with specific
focus on English and Zulu sound systems.
Content: General signs of articulatory/phonetic, and phonological speech sound system disorders,
physiological aspects of speech production, description of speech sound system disorders, assessment
using formal and informal procedures, approaches to intervention including articulatory and phonological
approaches.
Practicals: Observation visits to SSSD clinic
Assessment: Formative Assessment will comprise: Two tests, short questions. Sample work. Informal
assessment procedure work Assessment and therapy plans Observation reports from your two clinic
observations Mark calculation: The formula for working out the CAM will be: Tests 42%, samples work
32%, assessment and therapy plans 12%, observation reports 12%, informal assessment procedure work
2%. Summative Assessment: One 2-hour exam of short questions. The exam is moderated internally.
Subminimum required in the exam: 40% Final mark: is by formula Final mark calculation formula: 60% of
CAM + 40% of Exam Mark. Rules in terms of supplementary exam: As per faculty rule.
DP Requirement: Students must both attend at least 75% of contact periods and obtain a CAM of at least
40%.
CPSL124 - Clinical Linguistics

(49L-0T-11P-0S-10H-8R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: for CPSL211W2, CPSL301WB
Corequisite: CPSL111W1
Aim: To provide theoretical and practical capability in clinical aspects of language analysis and use.
Introduce the theoretical and practical basis to genre and register theory in the clinical context. To
introduce theoretical, practical and clinical aspects of sociolinguistics. functional grammar, with specific
application to the practice of speech-language therapists and audiologists, especially in South
Africa/Kwazulu-Natal for application with normal and disordered communication.
Content: Genre & register theory (clinical genres, orature genres) advanced clinical linguistics, clinical
phonetics, language & dialect and change quantitative approaches to the analysis of linguistic variation
cognitive linguistics, social aspects (politeness, power, professional discourse)
Assessment: Summative Assessment: 1x 2-hr exam of short questionsExamination Guidelines: Summative
Assessment. One written examination paper of 2 hours of short questions. Phonetic transcription is marked
negatively. Calculation of marks: Formative assessment: Three written tests and perhaps an assignment.
All formative assessments are weighted equally. Each test and/or assignment is calculated as a percentage.
Exam mark: one written paper as a percentage. Final mark: is by formula Final mark calculation formula:
60% of CAM + 40% of Exam Mark. Subminimum mark required in the exam: 40% Rules in terms of
supplementary exam: As per faculty rule
DP Requirement: Both a minimum 75% lecture attendance and a CAM of at least 40%
110 Health Sciences
CPSL201 - Clinical Practice:Speech Sound System Disord

(0L-54T-0P-0S-95H-5R-86F-0G-0A-26W-24C)
Prerequisite: FOR CPSL301WY, CPSL356WY, CPSL352WY
Aim: To facilitate an understanding of the nature of developmental language disorders, Assessment, and
intervention, within a framework of cultural, linguistic, and communicative diversity. Specific reference to
the English and Zulu languages.
Content: Theories of language acquisition. Theories of disordered language. Assessment principles and
methodologies. Differential diagnosis. Prevention, promotion, and early intervention. Theories, principles,
and methodologies of language intervention. Service delivery models.
Practicals: Assessment and intervention methods
Assessment: Formative Assessment: 100% year mark, comprised of evaluations for the following:
assessment report/s, progress/final reports, daynotes, therapy marks, presentations, production of home
programmes, assessment resource development, therapy resource development, Record keeping,
observation reports and other tasks which may arise Calculation of marks: 100% continuous assessment
mark constitutes final mark as there is no examination for this module. See module descriptor for details.
DP Requirement: 100% attendance at all scheduled sessions (tutorials and clinic)
CPSL203 - Speech Disorders:Cleft Palate and Voice

(54L-0T-6P-0S-16H-2R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: for CPSL352WY, CPSL356WY
Aim: To provide learning opportunities to facilitate understanding of the nature, assessment and treatment
of functional and organic voice disorders. To develop an understanding of the nature of craniofacial
disorders in general, and the assessment and management of cleft lip and palate in particular
Content: The nature of voice disorders, incidence, functional disorders, organic voice disorders,
assessment, and management approaches to functional and organic voice disorders including
laryngectomee rehabilitation. The nature of cleft lip and palate, clinical features, problems in oral
communication, subjective and objective assessment methods; surgical and therapeutic management
Assessment: Formative Assessment, The following will constitute the CAM for the module: 2 assignment,
2 oral presentations and 2 tests Summative Assessment -Examination Guidelines: 2 x 1 hour exams. Paper
1 will be Cleft Palate and Paper 2 Voice Disorders Each paper will contribute 50% to the exam mark Both
sections will comprise short questions There is a subminimum of 40% for each paper/sectionCalculation of
marks Formative assessment: to be calculated based on a combination of test, presentation and assignment
marks (see module descriptor) Summative assessment: Each paper will contribute 50% to the exam mark.
The student has to obtain a subminimum of 40% in each paper Calculation formula of the final mark: the
examination mark will constitute 40% of the final mark and the formative assessment mark 60% of the
final mark Rules in terms of supplementary exam: as per discipline rules on supplementary examinations.
Student will write a supplementary exam in the paper/section failed only
DP Requirement: In order to gain entry to the exam, students must have attended at least 75% of lectures,
and obtained a CAM of at least 40%.
CPSL211 - Developmental Language Disorders

(45L-0T-10P-0S-10H-13R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: for CPSL301WY
Aim: The module is aimed at facilitating an understanding of the nature of developmental language
disorders, assessment and intervention, within a framework of cultural, linguistic and communicative
diversity (English and IsiZulu).
Content: The content covered in this module will include theories of language acquisition, bilingual
language development, theories of disordered language, assessment principles and methodologies,
differential diagnosis, prevention, promotion and early intervention, theories, principles and methodologies
of language intervention, service delivery models
Assessment: Formative Assessment: Students will write two tests (short questions) and submit one
assignment. Each test is conducted at the end of each term. The assignment is submitted in the middle of
term two. Detailed information regarding each task will be provided during lectures Summative
Assessment: Students will write one two-hour examination. The paper will consist of short questions.
Health Sciences 111
There is a subminimum of 40% for the exam. Calculation of marks: Each component of the formative
assessment will be weighted equally. The final mark will consist of 60% of the semester mark and 40% of
the examination mark.
DP Requirement: Minimum of 75% lecture attendance and CAM of at least 40%
CPSL214 - Intro to Severe Developmental Communication D

(39L-0T-13P-0S-10H-16R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: for CPSL331W1, CPAU303W2
Aim: To introduce students to severe communication disorders which are frequent in the South African
context or which fall into the workload and clinical expertise of audiologists and speech-language
therapists
Content: An overview of each severe developmental disorder disorder will be presented, including
general, communication, language speech and auditory characteristics. Associated problems will be
highlighted. Areas to be covered will be: autistic spectrum disorders, cerebral palsy, and developmental
dysarthria, Cognitive impairment, with unidentified form, as well as Down Syndrome, Fragile X, Foetal
Alcohol Syndrome; Language Learning Disability; Attention Deficit Disorder. The importance of ruling
out hearing loss as a contributory factor in disorders such as developmental apraxia of speech and in
specific language impairment will be raised.
Assessment: Formative Assessment: Two tests (essay type questions), and one assignment, written in the
latter half of the module and equally weighted Summative Assessment: 1x two hour paper comprising two
50 mark essay questions Sub-minimum for exam is 40% The exam is internally moderated.Calculation of
marks Calculation formula of CAM Test 1 (33.3%) + Test 2 (33.3%) + assignment (33.3%) Calculation
formula of exam mark Q1 + Q2 =100% Calculation formula of the final mark CAM: exam weighting is
60%/40%. Faculty rules apply for supplementary examination
DP Requirement: Minimum CAM of 40% and minimum 75% contact period attendance
CPSL301 - Clinical Practice:Developmental Language Dis

(20L-26T-0P-0S-60H-16R-118F-0G-0A-26W-24C)
Aim: To develop clinic competencies related to the management of developmental language disorders
within a framework of linguistic diversity. To develop critical evaluation skills of clinical intervention.
Content: Developmental, and ecological language assessment. Development of appropriate assessment test
materials. Treatment planning and execution, clinical evaluation of progress, report writing. Working with
a diversity of children, focus on bilingual and multilingual clients. Working with interpreters. Prevention
and promotion based strategies at institutional level. Clinical intervention at an appropriate setting in the
community. Practical sessions once weekly over the academic year.
Assessment: 100% continuous assessment Evaluation of therapy, reports, case presentation, group project
and clinical observation. Calculation of marks: Assessment work makes up 50% of the CAM: 10% from
client evaluation; 30% from the assessment report (First Draft-60 Second Draft-40 ); 5% from the case
presentation on assessment; 5% from observation of assessment Intervention work makes up 50% of the
CAM: 30% from client intervention (First session-40/ Second session-60); 10% from progress report; 5%
from the Group Project on intervention and 5% from Clinical Observation of intervention
CPSL321 - Augmentative and Alternative Communication

(39L-0T-3P-0S-26H-10R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: FOR CPAU402WY, CPAU404W2, CPAU431WY, CPSL453WY, CPSL455WY,
CPSL457W1, CPSL401WY, CPSL411W1
Aim: to provide learning opportunities to facilitate understanding of assessment and management issues
and methodologies pertaining to those with little or no functional speech to facilitate an understanding of
the identification and management of infants and toddlers presenting with communication disorders.
Content: What is AAC, Who uses AAC, communication symbols, encoding, access, message input and
output, aided and unaided communication, AAC service delivery, assessment models and phases, decision
112 Health Sciences
making and intervention. Please refer to the module descriptor for further details. Introduction to ECI-
History and the role of the SLP and Audiologist, populations at risk for communication disorder-
established versus at risk, review of normal development, Assessment: definitions, family-centred
approaches, the SA context, family focused intervention programmes, resources for therapy, culturally
sensitive intervention, working with special populations, efficacy of ECI, future ECI trends. Refer to
lecture schedule and content areas below.
Assessment: Formative Assessment: The following will constitute the CAM for the module: AAC: 1
assignment, development of a therapy activity using a communication board, critical evaluation of site
visit and 1 test ECI: 1 test and 1 assignment to be equally weightedExamination Guidelines: Summative
Assessment: 2 x1 hour exam papers – AAC and ECI Both sections will comprise short questions Student
has to obtain a sub minimum of 40% in each paper. Calculation of marks: Summative assessment: Each
paper will contribute 50% to the exam mark. The student has to obtain a sub minimum of 40% in each
paper Calculation formula of the final mark: the examination mark will constitute 40% of the final mark
and the formative assessment mark 60% of the final mark Rules in terms of supplementary exam as
discipline rules on supplementary examinations. A supplementary examination will be done in the failed
section only.
DP Requirement: In order to gain entry to the exam, students must have attended at least 75% of lectures,
and have a CAM of at least 40%
CPSL326 W1 - Fluency Disorders

(39L-0T-13P-0S-16H-10R-0F-0G-2A-6W-8C)
Prerequisite: for CPSL457W1
Corequisite: CPSL351WY
Aim: To provide learning opportunities to describe and define the nature of fluency disorders with specific
reference to developmental stuttering within a theoretical framework of culture and communication;
review the assessment parameters and protocols, and to provide an overview of the intervention
methodologies used in the management of stuttering (all developmental levels i.e. beginning, intermediate
and advanced); raise awareness of research and management issues in the South African context.
Content: Definition of stuttering, nature of stuttering, types of fluency disorders; theoretical perspectives
on etiology and nature stuttering, assessment methods for the child and adult stutterer, assessment
parameters, intervention issues, therapy approaches for the beginning, intermediate and adult stutterer,
management of stuttering in the South African context, research needs.
Practicals: To provide learning opportunities for the development of clinical skills in preparation for the
management of fluency. Fluency assessment and intervention methodologies. Counseling skills.
Assessment: Formative Assessment: This entails observation which allows the tutor to determine the
degree to which you the student knows or is able to do a given learning task and which identifies the part
of the task that the student does not know or is unable to do. This enables providing prescriptive feedback
on the task to the student. The CAM is comprised of 2x tests and 1x assignment. Examination Guidelines:
Summative assessment entails an assessment where the primary purpose is to give a quantitative grading
and make a judgment about the student’s achievement. 1x 2 hour examination is conducted for this
module, comprising of essay and/or short questions. A subminimum of 40% is required in the
examination. Supplementary examination- as per Faculty rules As this module is a prerequisite for Clinical
Practice: Fluency Disorders, if a student does not pass the module in the examination period, they will be
required to deregister from CPSL351WY at the beginning of semester 2. Calculation of marks Calculation
formula of CAM: 2x tests and 1x assignment equally weighted Calculation for examination: one mark of
100% Calculation formula of the final mark: CAM:examination = 60:40
DP Requirement: Minimum 75% attendance at all scheduled periods and a CAM of at least 40%
CPSL331 - Severe Developmental Communication Disorders

(48L-0T-10P-0S-10H-10R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: FOR CPSL451WY, CPS453WY,CPSL457W1, CPSL401WY, CPSL411W1
Aim: To revisit the notions of developmental and categorical views of speech and language disorders, to
describe selected severe communication disorders in terms of general and specific characteristics and to
discuss specific assessment and intervention issues.
Health Sciences 113
Content: Developmental and categorical views of speech and language disorders, cause, diagnosis,
contributory and maintaining factors. General and specific characteristics of SDCDs, of speech disorders,
developmental dysarthria and developmental apraxia of speech, of language disorders; learning disabilities
(including attention deficit disorder, oral and written language), cognitive impairment (including severe
handicap, multiple handicap, and example types, Down Syndrome, Foetal Alcohol Syndrome, Fragile X),
autism, specific language impairment, and areas of overlap; general and specific assessment and
management for SDCDs including prevention, early identification and intervention, life span management
issues, systems approach, literacy and written language, alternative and augmentative communication,
consultation, collaboration, educational implications and options, public policy and rulings, etc.
Practicals: supervised visit to centre(s) providing services to children with SDCDs
Assessment: Formative Assessment: Two tests (essay type questions), and one assignment, written in the
latter half of the module and equally weightedSummative Assessment. 1x two hour paper comprising two
50 mark essay questions Sub-minimum for exam is 40% The exam is externally examined. Calculation of
marks: Calculation formula of CAM Test 1 (33.3%) + Test 2 (33.3%) + assignment (33.3%) Calculation
formula of exam mark Q1 + Q2 =100% Calculation formula of the final mark CAM: exam weighting is
60/40. Faculty rules apply for supplementary examination
DP Requirement: Minimum CAM of 40% and minimum 75% contact period attendance
CPSL332 - Neurologically Acquired Communication Disorde

(54L-0T-0P-1S-10H-13R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: FOR CPSL411WY, CPSL455WY, CPSL457W1
Aim: To facilitate learners understanding of the nature, assessment and rehabilitation of adults with Head
Injury, Dementia, Right hemisphere disorders and Dysphagia
Content: Nature, theoretical perspectives, assessment and treatment of each disorder
Assessment: Formative Assessment : 2 tests; 2 x oral presentations; 1 x assignment = 100% CAM
Summative Assessment: 2hr exam = 100% Examination Guidelines: entails an assessment where the
primary purpose is to give a quantitative grading and make a judgment about the student’s achievement. 1
written paper 2 hours in duration = 100% exam mark A sub minimum mark of 40% is required Questions:
essay/short questions There is an internal examiner and a faculty approved external examiner for this
module Calculation of marks Formative assessment: 2 x tests; 2 x oral presentations; 1 x assignment =
100% CAM Exam mark: 100% Calculation formula of the final mark: 60% of CAM + 40% of exam mark
Minimum mark required to qualify for supplementary examination: A final mark of 40 - 49% is required
to qualify for a supplementary examination Rules in terms of supplementary: as per faculty rule
DP Requirement: Attend a minimum of 75% of lectures, tutorials and obtain a CAM of at least 40%
CPSL333 W1 - Aphasia & Motor Speech Disorders

(47L-2T-4P-4S-9H-9R-0F-3G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: for CPSL332W2; CPSL455WY
Aim: To facilitate learners understanding of the nature, assessment and rehabilitation of adults presenting
with aphasia, dysarthria and apraxia of speech
Content: Nature, theoretical perspectives, assessment & treatment for aphasia, dysarthria & apraxia of
speech
Assessment: Formative Assessment: entails observation which allows the tutor to determine the degree to
which you the student knows or is able to do a given learning task and which identifies the part of the task
that the student does not know or is unable to do. This enables providing prescriptive feedback on the task
to the student. 2 tests; 2 x oral presentations; 1 x assignment = 100% CAM Summative Assessment: 2hr
exam = 100% Examination Guidelines: an assessment where the primary purpose is to give a quantitative
grading and make a judgment about the student’s achievement. 1 written paper 2 hours in duration = 100%
exam mark A sub minimum mark of 40% is required Questions: essay/short questions There is an internal
examiner and a faculty approved external examiner for this module Calculation of marks Minimum mark
required to qualify for supplementary examination: A final mark of 40 - 49% is required to qualify for a
supplementary examination Rules in terms of supplementary: as per faculty rule
DP Requirement: Attend a minimum of 75% of scheduled periods and obtain a CAM of at least 40%
114 Health Sciences
CPSL351 - Clinical Practice:Fluency Disorders

(0L-26T-0P-0S-60H-12R-62F-0G-0A-20W-16C)
Prerequisite: FOR CPSL457W1
Aim: To provide learning opportunities to develop clinical skills/competencies necessary for effective
management of clients (all ages) who present with fluency and related communication problems.
Content: Assessment protocols, management programmes for children and adults, stuttering modification
therapy, fluency shaping therapy, integrated approach to treatment, group therapy, intervention with
teachers, and parents, stuttering support group, local needs, cross-cultural (crosslinguistic therapy,
community based intervention).
Practicals: Clinical sessions in educational, and other settings. Clinical intervention with adults and
children
Assessment: Formative Assessment: This entails observation which allows the tutor to determine the
degree to which you the student knows or is able to do a given learning task and which identifies the part
of the task that the student does not know or is unable to do. This enables providing prescriptive feedback
on the task to the student. Students will be evaluated throughout the module for: 1. Clinical work,
including direct therapy (x 3 sessions) and support group (x 1 session). 2. Assessment reports 3. Progress/
termination reports (For details of mark allocation see module descriptor) Examination Guidelines:
Summative Assessment. No examination is conducted for this module. Assessment is via continuous
assessment. Calculation of marks & Calculation formula of CAM: Marks will be allocated and calculated
as follows (at least): 3 X clinical evaluation 1 X support group session 1 X assessment reports 1 X
progress report Calculation formula of the final mark: The CAM shall contribute 100% toward the final
mark.
DP Requirement: Assessment is via continuous assessment and no DP is required
CPSL352 - Clinical Practice:Voice Disorders

(0L-12T-0P-0S-22H-0R-46F-0G-0A-13W-8C)
Aim: To develop clinical competencies and provide experience necessary for the basic management of
voice disorders.
Content: Voice assessment and technology in assessment and treatment, laryngeal and a laryngeal speech,
interdisciplinary context, administration and report writing, common voice problems, management options
and approaches. One term of hospital – based observation, ward rounds and clinical intervention ; one term
of campus based clinic direct client contact under supervision
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks: Includes independent resource development (file and
pamphlet), pamphlet presentation, assessment and intervention, and report writing/record keeping.
Continuous assessment of clinical practice to generate 60% of year mark. This includes: • 1x Assessment
plan per pair of students per patient. This plan will be marked twice, when handed in and when it appears
in the final assessment report. A mark will be deducted for every correction not completed in your final
submission. • 1x Assessment Report per pair of students per patient including proposed therapy plan • 1x
Progress/termination report per pair per patient. • 2x evaluations of clinical practice for each clinician per
patient- First evaluation (mock) Second (clinic mark).Examination Guidelines: Summative Assessment.
There is no examination for this module Calculation of marks: Continuous assessment of clinical practice
to generate 60% of year mark. 40% of mark to come from resource and materials development.
Calculation formula of CAM will be negotiated with students at the outset of the module.
CPSL356 - Clinical Practice:Cranio-Facial Disorders

(0L-12T-0P-0S-18H-0R-46F-0G-4A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: FOR CPSL457W1
Aim: To develop clinical competencies and provide clinical experience in the management of clients with
craniofacial disorders
Content: Assessment methodology, craniofacial disorders treatment planning for clients with
interdisciplinary team management. One term of hospital – based observation, ward rounds and clinical
intervention ; one term of campus based clinic direct client contact under supervision weighted
Health Sciences 115
Assessment: Formative Assessment: 100% year mark, with no final examination, comprised of: individual
therapy, observation, speech and language screening, presentations, resource development. 100%
attendance at all scheduled sessions (tutorials and clinic) is required Examination Guidelines: Summative
Assessment. There is no examination for this module. Calculation of marks: 100% continuous assessment
mark, as outlined in formative assessment
CPSL401 - Clinical Practice:Community Based Rehabilita

(0L-16T-0P-25S-48H-6R-63F-0G-2A-26W-16C)
Aim: To develop skills :in working within a community-based rehabilitation context and at a household
level, with individuals with severe and multiple handicap, within a transdisciplinary model of service
delivery.
Content: Community access; The facilitation and running of support groups for children with severe
disability, involving caregiver, child and CHW; Issues related to learning disability and disadvantage in
relation to school readiness; Policy around disability; advocacy . 23 weeks engagement at community
level; 1 week orientation; 1 week case presentation; 1 week handover presentation
Assessment: Formative Assessment: 2 x oral presentations for a group mark which will include a case
presentation in the first semester and a handover presentation in the second semester Individual clinical
mark. This will be determined by continuous assessment of individual clinical practice with clients and
team work with groups. Individual assessment of reflective journal Examination Guidelines: Summative
Assessment: 1 oral exam which will include an external examiner approved by Faculty Calculation of
marks Case presentation (group mark) 15% Handover presentation (group mark) 25% Individual clinical
mark 50% Journal 5% Peer evaluation 5% Calculation formula of the final mark: CAM weighted 75% and
oral exam weighted 25% Rules in terms of supplementary: there is no supplementary examination for this
module
DP Requirement: 100% attendance at all scheduled periods and a CAM of at least 45%. Compliance with
all clinical requirements before completion of clinic (eg. Records/reports). Compliance with
ethical/professional conduct requirements.
CPSL403 - Service Delivery Models and Professional Prac

(22L-0T-0P-40S-5H-9R-2F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Aim: To facilitate learners understanding of models of service delivery and professional management
issues within the discipline of speech-language pathology
Content: (1) Models of service delivery (theory & application to the management of communication
disorders within the South African context); (2) Health and Education legislation and policy guidelines
governing professional practice; Professional Ethics and practice; Interdisciplinary team practice;
Continuing professional development
Practicals: Field trips to sites utilizing different models of service delivery
Assessment: Formative Assessment entails observation which allows the tutor to determine the degree to
which you the student knows or is able to do a given learning task and which identifies the part of the task
that the student does not know or is unable to do. This enables providing prescriptive feedback on the task
to the student 100% CAM shall constitute the following : Models of service delivery: 1 test = 100%
Professional Issues: 100% - comprising: Oral presentation (20%) Written presentations (70%) Chairing
session (5%) Participation in seminars (5%) Summative Assessment: 2x1 hour written examinations.
Summative assessment entails an assessment where the primary purpose is to give a quantitative grading
and make a judgment about the student’s achievement Paper 1 (Models of service delivery) = 100% exam
mark Paper 2 (Professional Issues) = 100% exam mark A subminimum mark of 40% is required in each
paper/section Questions: essay/short questions Calculation of marks Formative assessment: 50% test +
50% (oral presentation + written presentation + chairing session + participation) = 100% CAM Exam
mark: (Paper 1 + Paper 2) x ½ = 100% exam mark Calculation formula of the final mark: 60% of CAM +
40% of exam mark Minimum mark required to qualify for supplementary examination: A final mark of 40
- 49% is required to qualify for a supplementary examination Rules in terms of supplementary: the student
may write a supplementary in the failed paper/section only
DP Requirement: Attend a minimum of 75% of scheduled periods, and obtain a CAM of at least 40%
116 Health Sciences
CPSL411 - Research Practice

(8L-20T-0P-6S-105H-0R-0F-0G-21A-26W-16C)
Aim: To familiarize students with basic research principles and methods so as to conduct research in the
disciplines of Speech-Language Pathology
Content: Identification of research needs, protocol development, practical aspects of research
methodology, literature surveys, methods of data analysis, interpretation and discussion, report writing,
editorial care and presentation skills.
Assessment: The written report is assessed. Calculation of marks The final mark is determined by the
average of the internal mark and external mark. Supplementary examination: As per Faculty rule
CPSL451 - Clinical Practice:Language Learning Disabili

(0L-25T-0P-6S-68H-34R-78F-25G-4A-34W-24C)
Aim: To facilitate development of clinical competencies in assessing and managing the severe
developmental communication disorders particularly the language learning disabled student; in assessing
and treating higher language function, reading ability, written language ability
Content: Issues related to severe developmental communication disorders, written language, higher
language function. Language learning disability, bilingualism and multicultural issues, report writing,
current issues and development, independence in assessment and therapy, clinical practice issues.
Management of clients at university based clinic and in school setting under supervision
Assessment: Formative Assessment : Clinical year mark allocated as follows: -Full Assessment report (one
client) 20 % of CAM; average of other reports 7.5% of CAM -Termination/progress reports ( all clients)-
average of all 7.5% of CAM -Therapy mark: at least 2 evaluations for one client, , third mark to come
from group therapy; all 3 marks equally weighted: total 50% of CAM The therapy mark will be allocated
as follows: daynotes 20% ; aims (as per daynotes) achieved/ adequate explanation if not achieved 20%;
relevance of materials used and activities selected 20%; behaviour management of child /group 20%; self-
evaluation 20% Summative Assessment: There will be an oral exam. An external examiner approved by
Faculty will be present. There is a subminimum of 45% in the examination. Calculation formula of the
final mark: CAM weighted 75% and exam mark weighted 25% Rules in terms of supplementary: No
supplementary examination as per discipline rule
DP Requirement: Full attendance at all scheduled sessions and CAM of at least 45%. Compliance with all
clinical requirements before completion of clinic (eg. Records/reports). Compliance with
ethical/professional conduct requirements.
CPSL453 - Clinical Practice:Severe Developmental Commu

(0L-56T-0P-0S-50H-16R-117F-0G-1A-26W-24C)
Aim: To develop clinical competencies necessary for the management of complex communication
disorders associated with cerebral palsy, cognitive impairment, autism and other problems.
Content: Assessment protocols, treatment issues, AAC, educational issues, programme planning,
implementation, classroom based intervention, bilingual and multilingual clients, training assistants,
teachers, parents, administrative supervised assessment, management, services and observation of children
with CDCDs at schools and units
Assessment: Evaluations during the course of the module will constitute 75% of the final mark. The year
mark shall be determined by continuous evaluation of individual clinical practice including therapy,
reports, projects at the venue, and by the evaluation of a portfolio to be submitted with final reports.
Examination Guidelines: Summative Assessment. Each student will have an oral exam lasting
approximately 30 minutes. An external examiner will be present All questions will be focussed on clinical
practice There is a subminimum of 45% for the examination There is no supplementary examination.
Calculation of marks: 75% continuous assessment mark (reports, therapy, projects, record keeping,
professionalism, etc.) & 25% oral exam Supplementary exam procedures as per discipline/faculty
supplementary examination rules
DP Requirement: 100% attendance at all scheduled sessions (tutorials and clinic) and minimum 45%
CAM Compliance with all clinical requirements before completion of clinic (eg. Records/reports).
Health Sciences 117
Compliance with ethical/professional conduct requirements.
CPSL455 - Clinical Practice:Neurologically Acquired Co

(0L-26T-0P-0S-67H-29R-117F-0G-1A-26W-24C)
Aim: To develop clinical competencies in the management of clients with neurologically acquired
communication disorders and dysphagia
Content: case interview, assessment, treatment, interdisciplinary team management, group facilitation,
workshop planning & implementation
Practicals: Fieldwork: assessment and therapy planning & implementation; observation of barium
swallow & videofluoroscopic studies; group facilitation, reflective practice
Assessment: Formative Assessment: This entails observation of the student to determine attitude.
knowledge and clinical skills development with respect to required learning outcomes, for the purpose of
providing prescriptive feedback to facilitate learning. Reports; Therapy; Project; Resource File = 100%
CAM Summative assessment: Oral examination = 100%Examination Guidelines: Summative Assessment
oral examination = 100% Questions: case studies; all neurologically acquired communication disorders
and dysphagia clients assessed, treated and observed; journal articles discussed at tutorials;
videofluoroscopic studies observed. A subminimum mark of 45% is required as per discipline rule. The
examination is conducted by internal examiner/s and a faculty approved external examiner Calculation of
marks Formative assessment: Reports (25%)+Therapy (60%)+ Project (5%) + Resource File (10%) =
100% CAM Exam mark: oral examination = 100% Calculation formula of the final mark: 75% CAM +
25% exam mark Supplementary examination: none as per discipline rule
DP Requirement: Attend 100% of clinics and tutorials and obtain a CAM of at least 45% as per discipline
rule; submit all clinical reports and client files. Compliance with all clinical requirements before
completion of clinic (eg. Records/reports). Compliance with ethical/professional conduct requirements.
CPSL457 - Clinical Practice:Initial Assessment

(0L-15T-0P-0S-20H-5R-39F-0G-1A-13W-8C)
Aim: To develop clinical competencies in initial assessment of clients with communication disorders.
Content: Initial assessment, case interview, planning, selection of test material, resource development and
information gathering for assessment, counselling, feedback. Clinical Practical & Supervision: supervised
assessment and observation of varying cases
Assessment: Formative assessment: This will be determined by continuous assessment of individual
clinical practice with clients. For each client seen, the mark is out of 200. The report is out of 100 marks,
and the preplanning, assessment and feedback is out of 100. Tasks may be set for any student at any IA
and will be allocated a percentage mark. Summative assessment: Oral examination = 100% Examination
Guidelines: Summative Assessment The format of the examination is questions about all clients seen in
and tasks relating to the IA clinic, and possible questions about paper cases, speech-language assessment
tools and interpretation of results. A subminimum mark of 45% is required as per discipline rule. The
examination is conducted by internal examiner/s and a faculty approved external examiner. Calculation of
marks Formative assessment: The CAM is comprised of each assessment mark (count 23% each), each
report mark (count 23% each) and an average task mark (counts 8%) for two initial assessments; or of each
Assessment mark (count 16% each), each report mark (count 16% each) and an average task mark (counts
4%) for three initial assessments = 100% CAM Strict and severe penalties apply for any lack of fulfillment
of clinical and professional responsibilities. Any unscheduled absence or failure to make arrangements will
result in a non-negotiable 0% for that IA. See module descriptor for details. Calculation formula of the
final mark: 75% CAM + 25% exam mark Supplementary examination: none as per discipline rule
Feedback is provided verbally and in writing for the IA and in writing for the report.
DP Requirement: Attend 100% of clinics and tutorials and obtain a CAM of at least 45% as per discipline
rule; submit all clinical reports and client files. Compliance with all clinical requirements before
completion of clinic (eg. Records/reports). Compliance with ethical/professional conduct requirements.
CPSL802 - Advanced studies in Bi/multilingualism

(0L-10T-0P-0S-304H-0R-0F-0G-6A-13W-32C)
Prerequisite: CPSL811WB
118 Health Sciences
Corequisite: nil
Aim: To facilitate learners’ critical study of the acquisition of a second or third language in the socio-
political context of South Africa
Content: Theories of bilingual development, assessment and intervention with the bilingual child,
typologies of bilingual education, positioning the profession in relation to language and education, national
and educational language policies, critical sociolinguistics and SLP.
Assessment: Assignment outline (20%); Assignment (80%)
CPSL803 - Research methodology

(6L-10T-0P-0S-138H-0R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Corequisite: nil
Aim: To facilitate learners’ understanding of the research process & development of a research proposal.
Content: What is research, identifying the research problem, ethics in research, critical review of the
literature & development of rationale, research designs (quantitative & qualitative), data analysis and
interpretation, research proposal, research report.
Assessment: Research proposal (100%)
CPSL804 - Advanced studies in speech, Voice & Fluency

(0L-10T-0P-0S-304H-0R-0F-0G-6A-13W-32C)
Corequisite: nil
Aim: To facilitate learners’ critical study of recent and relevant literature within a selected theme.
Content: The nature, assessment, treatment of normal and disordered speech, voice and fluency across the
age range, implications of multicultural and multilingual factors in management.
CPSL806 - Advanced studies in neurologically acquired S

(0L-10T-0P-0S-304H-0R-0F-0G-6A-13W-32C)
Corequisite: nil
Aim: To facilitate learners’ critical study of recent and relevant literature within a selected disorder.
Content: Current advances in the nature, assessment and treatment of neurologically acquired
communication disorders (including aphasia, dysarthria, apraxia of speech, head injury, dysphagia, right
hemisphere & dementia) within a multicultural / multilingual context.
CPSL808 - Advanced studies in developmental language

(0L-10T-0P-0S-304H-0R-0F-0G-6A-13W-32C)
Corequisite: Nil
Aim: To facilitate learners’ understanding and critical evaluation of recent and relevant literature in the
area of developmental language.
Content: The focus is on monolingual development, within a framework of cultural and linguistic
diversity, with specific reference to Zulu and/or English. The course covers developmental language and
language disorders from infancy to the pre-school years. Language development and disorders is studied
within a broader socio-linguistic framework, including the field of critical linguistics
Health Sciences 119
CPSL810 - Advanced studies in severe developmental comm

(0L-10T-0P-0S-304H-0R-0F-0G-6A-13W-32C)
Aim: To facilitate learners’ study of current trends relevant to the South African context in the field of
severe developmental communication disorders.
Content: Advanced issues pertaining to communication disorders across the age range, associated with
cognitive impairment, learning disability, cerebral palsy, & autism. Current trends in assessment & service
delivery models, management tools, programmes & strategies, with particular reference to secondary &
tertiary levels of intervention.
CPSL811 - Short dissertation

(0L-10T-0P-1S-621H-0R-160F-0G-8A-13W-80C)
Prerequisite: nil
Corequisite: nil
Aim: To facilitate the learner’s ability to conduct research and submit a short dissertation on an approved
topic
Content: Planning the research process, developing data collection instruments, obtaining ethical
clearance, implementing data collection, analysis and interpretation of findings, & writing a research
report
Assessment: Research report (100%)
DP Requirement: 90% attendance at tutorials & seminars
Occupational Therapy
HLSC116 W2 - Community Studies

(0L-0T-0P-0S-60H-23R-15F-60G-2A-13W-16C)
Corequisite:
Aim: To facilitate the development of knowledge of and attitudes and skills appropriate for comprehensive
primary health care and community based health care To train graduates who will function competently,
sensitively and compassionately in response to national need and to be agents of change To educate health
professionals through early socialisation to the principles, processes and values of community-based
primary health care
Content: This interdisciplinary Faculty module introduces students to the concepts of primary health care,
community based health care, health promotion The module is designed around the implementation of an
awareness creation workshop in selected schools within the identified community with the theme “
creating supportive environments for health.” The content focus is on health care, particularly a changing
model of health care delivery shifting from the medical, curative model to a promotive, preventive and
social development model. Lecture, tutorial and practical periods run sequentially on one morning per
week to integrate theory with practice. The methodological focus is on learning and teaching through
dialogue. Teaching teams comprising academic, service and community partners facilitate each session.
The following content is covered: 1. What is health: 2. What is community: 3. Health and development: 4.
The National Health System :
Practicals:
Assessment: Individual marks 5% of CAM for full attendance Students are required to submit 4 x logs, 3
of which contribute 20% to the year mark (CAM) An assignment contributes 50% to the CAM Group
mark: A group mark is awarded for conducting a community meeting; this mark contributes 25% to CAM
DP Requirement: As per Faculty rule
120 Health Sciences
HLSC301 W1 - Clinical Sciences (Medicine, Microbiology, Pe

(30L-0T-10P-0S-18H-20R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: Anatomy and Physiology as done per Discipline
Aim: To introduce health science students to relevant terminology, diagnostic and pathophysiological
foundations of disease/disorder; and a range of paediatric and neurological conditions and their medical
management
Content: Path: Intro and general principles; fluid and electrolyte balance; oedema and haemorrhage;
shock; acute and chronic inflammation; auto-immunity, healing and repair; infections including HIV; cell
death and gangrene; thrombosis and embolism; ischemia and infarction; disorders of growth (tumours);
metabolism and disorders. MicroBio: Overview; nutrition and cultivation of micro-organisms (viruses,
bacteria, fungi, protozoa, algae); control of micro-organisms (disinfection, sterilization); antibiotics and
other chemotherapeutic agents; immunity; wound and skin infections; reading of test results. Neuro:
Infection and inflammation (polio, GBS, cerebral abscess, Meningitis Encephalitis); Demyelinative
disease (MS, transverse myelitis); Degenerative Disease (Parkinson’s, UMN- and LMN disease, cerebral
atrophy, chorea, muscular dystrophy); CVA; Tumours; metabolic and toxic disorders (polyneuritis,
peripheral neuropathy, porphyria); pain management (e.g. chemotherapy); other (epilepsy, Myasthenia
Gravis, syringomyelia). Paeds: growth and development; the newborn; infections; intellectual impairment;
Cerebral Palsy; Floppy infants; Hydrocephalus; Spina Bifida.
Assessment: 4 Written tests, one per section of 45 minute duration each One written exam of 2 hours
duration. A subminimum of 40% will apply.
DP Requirement: 75% attendance all lectures CAM of 40%
HLSC302 W2 - Clinical Sciences (Orthopedics)

(30L-0T-10P-0S-18H-20R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: Anatomy and Physiology as done per Discipline.
Aim: To introduce health science students to relevant terminology, diseases/conditions, aetiology,
pathology, clinical features, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, medical treatment/management and
prognosis within the field of orthopaedics and orthopaedics trauma
Content: Fractures : classification/types, causes, treatment, complications; injuries around shoulder joint;
dislocation of AC joint, fractures of clavicle, scapula and elbow joint; fractures of shaft humerus, radius
and ulnar; fractures/injuries of wrist, fingers and hand Infections of joints and management’ surgical
procedures on joints (arthoplasty, arthpdesis etc.) Degenerative diseases of joints (OA, AVN) Fractures of
spine and their management Causes and management of sprains, strains, dislocation and subluxation of
joints Peripheral nerve injuries Contractures and compartment tunnel syndromes Soft tissue release
procedures Tendon injury and management with special reference to hand Fractures of shaft of femur;
fractures and injuries around hip, neck of femur and slipped epiphysis
Assessment: Formative (50%) minimum of 2 tests. Summative (50%) 1 x 2 hour paper.
DP Requirement: Sub-minimum rule of Faculty applies 75% attendance all lectures
HLSC303 W1 - Clinical Sciences (Medicine, General Surgery)

(30L-0T-10P-0S-18H-20R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Aim: To introduce health science students to relevant terminology, diagnostic and pathophysiological
foundations of disease/disorder; and a range of paediatric and neurological conditions and their medical
management
Content: Surgery: Head injury; thoracic trauma; peritonitis / acute abdomen; peripheral arterial disease /
amputations; burns; urology; diabetic foot. Medicine: cardiology (includes congenital heart disease, Rh
heart disease, Myocardial infarct, hypertension, congestive heart failure); respiratory tract (includes TB,
tumours, pneumo-thorax, lung abscess, bronchial asthma); endocrine system (diabetes, pituitary and
thyroid gland)
Assessment: 4 Written tests, one per section of 45 minute duration each One written exam of 2 hours
duration. A subminimum of 40% will apply. CAM and final examination mark will be averaged out
DP Requirement: 75% attendance all lectures CAM of 40%
Health Sciences 121
HLSC304 W2 - Clinical Sciences: Rheumatology, Occupational

(30L-0T-10P-0S-18H-20R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: Anatomy and Physiology as done per Discipline.
Aim: To introduce health sciences students to Pharmacology, pharmokynetics and pharmo-dynamics, and
drug transmission To introduce health sciences students to relevant terminology, aetiology, pathology,
prognosis, clinical features, diagnosis/differential diagnosis, and medical treatment/management of
inflammatory conditions To introduce students to the field of occupational/public health
Content: Pharmacology : Introduction to Pharmacology. Intro to Pharmaco-Kinetics and Pharmaco-
Dynamics. Neurotransmission. Drugs acting at the neuromuscular junction. Intro to ANS pharmacology.
Intro to CNS pharmacology Rheumatology : Including Rheumatoid Arthritis, other inflammatory
conditions, SLE, Scleroderma, Polimyositis and Dermatomyositis, Ser.; negative Arthritis, Gout, OA,
PMS, PSS, DMA, Lumbar spondylosis, soft tissue lesions, psychogenic rheumatism, haemophilia, regional
pain syndromes Occupational/public health – an introduction : Primary health Care, health promotions
principles, health management systems
Assessment: 2 Written tests of 45 minute duration each. (1 x Pharmacology, 1 x Rheumatology and
Occupational/Public Health) One written exam of 2 hours duration covering all sections
HLSC305 W1 - Clinical Sciences (Psychiatry)

(30L-0T-10P-0S-18H-20R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Aim: To introduce health science students to relevant terminology, diseases/conditions, aetiology,
pathology, clinical features, diagnosis, prognosis and medical treatment/management applicable to
psychiatric conditions.
Content: Signs and symptoms; schizophrenia; other psychotic disorders; mood disorders; depressive and
bipolar spectrum; anxiety disorders; dementia; alcohol related disorders; psychiatric manifestations of
HIV; disorders of childhood; personality disorders; psychosomatic disorders; Mental Health Act; cultural
psychiatry; psychogeriatrics
Practicals: Attendance of at least one teaching ward round, this may be done on a rotation basis/may form
part of fieldwork placement requirements
Assessment: 2 Written tests of 45 minutes duration One written exam of 2 hours duration.
OCTH122 W2 - OT Methods Introduction

(14L-0T-50P-0S-8H-4R-0F-0G-4A-13W-8C)
Aim: To provide students with knowledge and appreciation of ‘Activity’ / ‘Occupation’ in OT and activity
/ occupation in daily life.
Content: Performance areas – characteristics, unique features, categorization. Performance contexts.
Activity selection principles, activity analysis, adaptation and grading. Knowledge and skill in a number of
selected leisure, play, work and personal management activities. Appropriate paper technology – design
principles and manufacture. Assessment of the Individual, objects and facilities.
Practicals: This includes ALL activity teaching and practicals as identified above in the lecture content.
Assessment: One (1) written theory exam of 2 hours duration. Submission of three (3) activity files. Design
and Drawing, Appropriate Paper Technology (APT), and Sport and Leisure. Manufacture of APT table
with decorated top. All other articles as made during activity teaching labs downstairs. Games assignment,
including rules of game, and a basic analysis of the game. Two (2) theory tests. Faculty-wide Formative
Assessment policy guideline to inform all test management. Assessment weighting: CAM Activity files:
30% Articles: 30% Games Assignment: 10% Tests: 30% Semester mark contributes 80%, and exam mark
20% to final mark. No subminimum for exam. Pass mark for exam 50%. (ie final mark must be 50% and
above)
DP Requirement: In order to gain entry to the exam, students must; Attend 80% of all lectures and
practicals (activity labs).
122 Health Sciences
OCTH131 W1 - OT Procedures Assessment

(38L-0T-8P-0S-10H-20R-0F-0G-4A-6.5W-8C)
Aim: To introduce students to Occupational Therapy assessment procedures and fundamental skills in
terms of person, object and facility assessment
Content: OT assessment and assessment in the OT process. Assessment process and purpose, classifying
data, data collection means, data recording methods, and data interpretation. Assessment of the Individual,
objects and facilities
Practicals: To gain hands on experience assessing a facility and an object
Assessment: Formative (50%) - One (1) group assignment (15%) related to assessment and two (2) (15%)
assingnments related to facility & object. Summative: One (1) written exam paper of 2 hours duration. The
Semester mark contributes 50% and the Exam mark 50% to the Final Mark. There is no exam
subminimum. To pass the module students must achieve a Final Mark of at least 50%.
DP Requirement: Students must attend 80% of all theory lectures.
OCTH132 W2 - OT Procedures Planning

(16L-0T-30P-0S-13H-10R-6F-0G-5A-13W-8C)
Aim: To introduce students to OT planning procedures and fundamental skills in OT planning
Content: THEORY: Introduction to the module. 1 lecture. Mrs A. Moosa Value and purpose of planning,
planning context and principles. 4 lectures. Mrs A. Moosa Introduction to performance areas, components
and contexts. 4 periods. Mrs A. Moosa Principles of treatment. 4 periods. A. Moosa Different programmes
(Prom, Prev, Rem, Reh etc) and approaches to treatment. 4 periods. Mrs A. Moosa
Assessment: Two (2) written theory tests. One halfway through and the other before mock practicals. One
(1) case write-up to be handed in by end of mock practical. One (1) group presentation.as part of mock
practical- see schedule Feedback to be expected within 2 weeks of completing tasks. An opportunity to
discuss feedback will be given in class Formative assessment is out of 100 with each task carrying an
equal weighting.. an aggrotat option will be available to those 1 written exam paper 2 hrs duration (100
marks) Content covered will include planning and programme course pack notes as well as case studies
and programme planning scenarios similar to those done in class.
DP Requirement: Attend 80% of lectures Attend 100% of all practicals and fieldwork
OCTH151 W1 - OT Fundamentals 1
(30L-8T-8P-0S-10H-20R-0F-0G-4A-6.5W-8C)
Aim: This Module is designed to provide essential foundation concepts for the OT profession and
introduction to health care in general. The main aim for this Module therefore provide students with
insight to historical and philosophical development of the profession; orientation to OT practice and
related terminology and orientation to OT as a health care profession.
Content: An orientation to OT- history,definitions,aims,policy and philosophy,areas of practice and roles
of the OT. An introduction to OT Theory and Practice- the person, environment,occupational and therapist
interaction. Understanding OT in the context of health care and health team. OT in Health Care- an
introduction to human development,health,illness and disability. Development and control of the
Profession (HPCSA,OTASA,WFOT).
Practicals: A day long visit to two (2) OT sites that will illustrate the role and scope of OT practice
currently. These visits will take place during the orientation week, prior to the official commencement of
Semester 1.
Assessment: Two (2) written theory tests. One (1) orientation visit report. One (1) written exam paper of 2
hours duration. The Semester mark contributes 50% and the Exam mark 50% to the Final Mark. There is
no exam subminimum. To pass the module students must achieve a Final Mark of at least 50%.
DP Requirement: In order to gain entry to the exam, students must; Attend at least 80% of the theory
lectures.
OCTH211 W1 - Psychosocial Theory and Fieldwork 2

(75L-0T-30P-0S-30H-19R-78F-0G-8A-13W-24C)
Aim: To provide students with theory, principles and practice of assessment in relation to specific
Health Sciences 123
symptomotology as applied to the psychosocial field.

Content: Theory: Introduction to psychiatry, 3 lectures: Mrs Lingah Theory: Introduction to psychosocial
assessment, 1 lecture: Mrs Lingah Practical demonstration: Psychiatric interview, Mini-Mental and Mental
Status Examination, 5 lectures: Mrs Lingah Theory: Introduction to formal and informal assessment
methods, 1 lecture: Mrs Lingah Practical demonstration: 3 selected formal assessments, Informal
assessment areas of work, personal maintenance, leisure and socialisation using activity, 15 periods: Mrs
Lingah Theory: Psychosocial symptoms in Occupational Therapy, 50 lectures: Mrs van der Reyden & Ms
Holland
Practicals: Fieldwork & supervision: 1 morning per week (6 hours) for the duration of the semester, at a
site dependent on the fieldwork placement areas available from year to year. Full-time on-site clinical
teaching and supervision by a university appointed supervisor.
Assessment: 2 written tests, Fieldwork midterm treatment demonstration of individual patient treatment,
Midterm verbal presentation of individual case. 1 written case study and fieldwork(clinical) performance
mark CAM: 100% - made up of Tests 43% (Tests count for equal value within this %), Case Study 7%,
Clinical Performance 50%. Written exams – 3 hours Final case presentation and final treatment
demonstration EXAM: 100% - made up of exam paper 33%, Oral presentation 27%, Demo and evaluation
27%, Demo of assessment 13%. The Semester mark contributes 70% and the Exam mark 30% to the Final
Mark. There is no exam subminimum. To pass the module students must achieve a Final Mark of at least
50%.
DP Requirement: Attend at least 80% of the theory lectures, attend 100% of all practical demonstrations,
mock practicals and fieldwork, achieve 45% average on all theory tests and a minimum of 55% in their
fieldwork clinical performance
OCTH212 W2 - Physical Theory & Fieldwork 2

(54L-10T-30P-0S-41H-19R-78F-0G-8A-13W-24C)
Aim: To provide students with the theory, principles and practice of assessment in relation to specific
symptomatology as applied to the physical field of OT practice. It provides students with assessment skills
that are required in the clinical field when one has to treat individuals or groups of patients. The practical
component of the module gives students an opportunity to assess patients in hospital settings and thus
exposes them to a variety of patients with physical conditions.
Content: General principles of assessment procedures and precautions related to sensory motor
performance components. Assessment of occupational performance components, with particular emphasis
on the sensory motor components.
Practicals: Some class room one-on-one practice will occur with some of the signs/symptoms described
above. There will be a hand assessment practical where students will visit a unit where hands are treated
and be expected to do a full assessment of an individual with a hand injury. This can be any other morning
other than a Tuesday. This practical should happen after the students have had lectures on hand
assessment.
Assessment: CAM (100%): Test 1 = 21.5%, Test 2 = 21.5%, Case Study = 7%, Clinical Performance =
50%. EXAM (100%): Exam Paper = 33%, Oral Presentation = 27%, Demo & Evaluation = 27%, Demo of
Assessment = 13% FINAL MARK: 70% CAM, 30% EXAM
DP Requirement: Attend 80% of lectures/seminars, attend 100% of practicals and fieldwork, achieve 45%
average on all tests, assignments and seminars, Attain 55% for their fieldwork performance assessment.
Comply with professional ethical requirements
OCTH221 W1 - OT Methods 1
(14L-0T-38P-0S-15H-8R-0F-0G-5A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: OCTH122W2
Aim: To provide students with knowledge and skill in activity analysis and the use of activity as an
assessment tool. Knowledge and skill in a number of activities/occupations and media, including
woodwork, macramé.
Content: Theory: An introduction to the module. 1 lecture. Theory: Activity analysis. 14 lectures. (Ms P
Mdlokolo) Practical: Woodwork. 18 periods. (Mr Muller) Practical: Yarn crafts. 26 periods. (Mrs
McIntyre)
124 Health Sciences
Assessment: Activity files. Woodwork and Yarn Crafts, including activity analysis. (30%) Finished articles
as manufactured during the module. (20%) OSPE (40%) One (1) written test on activity analysis.
(10%)One (1) OSPE exam. Semester mark contributes 67%, and exam mark 33% to final mark. No sub-
minimum for exam. Pass mark for exam 50%. (i.e. final mark must be 50% and above)
(0L-0T-50P-0S-18H-8R-0F-0G-4A-13W-8C)
Aim: To provide students with further knowledge and skill in activity analysis and the use of activity as an
assessment tool. Knowledge and skill in a number of activities/occupations and media, including sewing,
wire work, leatherwork, shoe repairs, gardening and bead work.
Content: 50 hours on activity teaching offered by Mr Muller-Nedebock and Mrs McIntyre. The pace of
skill development indicating progress onto new topics.
Assessment: Activity file to include: Sewing, beadwork, wirework, shoe repairs, and activity analysis
(30% ) Finished articles (as manufactured during the module) (20% ) OSPE (test) (50%) One (1) exam
OSPE Semester mark contributes 67%, and exam mark 33% to final mark. No sub minimum for exam.
Pass mark for exam 50%. (i.e. final mark must be 50% and above)
OCTH231 W1 - OT Procedures Performance Areas 1

(43L-0T-10P-0S-10H-11R-0F-0G-6A-13W-8C)
Aim: This module is the constitutes the core components for OT practice. The aim of this module is
therefore provide students with knowledge, skill and appropriate behaviours regarding the application of
various techniques / methods / tests / procedures and /or principles commonly used in OT for the
assessment and treatment of occupational performance in context.
Content: General introduction to theoretical constructs as related to human occupational performance.
Human Development. Home Management. leisure. Socialisation.
Practicals: Practicals for this module form part of the theory teaching, and are slotted in as necessary and
appropriate. Students can expect to spend about 10 hours on these aspects.
Assessment: 1x assignments (1x assignment Home Management, Leisure and Play) 2x Combined Theory
Tests (Human Development, Socialisation, Leisure and Play) 1x Theory Test (Home Management) 1x
combined written paper of 3 hours duration. (Human Development, Socialisation, Leisure, Play and Home
Management) The semester mark contributes 50% and the exam mark 50% of the final mark. No
subminimum set for the paper. Pass mark for the module is 50%.
DP Requirement: In order to gain entry to the exam, students must; Attend 80% of all lectures and 100%
of all fieldtrips. Attain a semester mark of 45% for work marked to date.
OCTH232 W2 - OT: Procedures (Performance Areas)

(40L-0T-10P-0S-10H-14R-0F-0G-6A-13W-8C)
Aim: To provide students with knowledge, skill and appropriate behaviours regarding the application of
various techniques / methods / tests / procedures and /or principles commonly used in OT for the
assessment and treatment of occupational performance.
Content: Personal management, work-related activities, play.
Practicals: Practicals for this module form part of the theory teaching, and are slotted in as necessary and
appropriate. Students can expect to spend about 10 hours on these aspects.
Assessment: Two (2) written theory test (Personal Management and Vocational Rehabilitation) 2x
assignments (1x Vocational Rehabilitation and 1x Personal Management) ( Manufacture of 1x assistive
device during fieldwork, Organisation of one outreach leisure event as a group, Adaptation of one leisure
activity, Manufacture of one toy or adaptation of leisure activity ) One (1) written paper of Three (3) hours
Health Sciences 125
duration. The semester mark contributes 50% and the exam mark 50% of the final mark. No subminimum
set for the paper. Pass mark for the module is 50%.
DP Requirement: In order to gain entry to the exam, students must; Attend 80% of all lectures and 100%
of all fieldtrips. Attain a semester mark of 45% for work marked to date.
(47L-0T-0P-0S-17H-10R-0F-0G-6A-13W-8C)
Aim: To equip students with knowledge base, insight and fundamental approaches necessary for patient
treatment in Occupational Therapy.
Content: Kinesiology. Introduction, biomechanical and kinesiological analysis. Groupwork. Classification
of groups and theoretical constructs. Group dynamics, process, principles and procedures for the
management of groups. The role of group therapy within OT programmes. Selected Models of Practice in
OT. Introduction, fundamental concepts and general application of the Model of Creative Participations
(du Toit) and Model of Human Development (Kielhofner).
Assessment: Two (2) theory tests structured as follows: 15% Human Development 30% Kinesiology 30%
Group work 12,5% Model of Human Occupation 12,5% Model of Creative One (1) written theory
examination of 3 hours duration CAM mark: 50% Exam mark: 50% Overall pass mark: 50% No sub-
minimum for examination
DP Requirement: In order to gain entry to the exam, students must; Attend 80% of all lectures
OCTH311 W2 - Psychosocial Theory and Fieldwork 3

(57L-0T-12P-6S-40H-19R-100F-0G-6A-13W-24C)
Prerequisite: ALL Level 2 modules.
Aim: To provide students with the theory and application of relevant approaches to intervention, applicable
principles and methods as these relate to different age groups, stages of recovery, and or phases of
intervention as applied to psychosocial conditions.
Content: The OT specific assessment and treatment of a variety of psychiatric conditions(but not limited
to), as well as psychosocial techniques:
Assessment: 2 written tests and 1 homework assignment Fieldwork midterm treatment demonstration of
individual patient treatment, Midterm verbal presentation of individual case. 1 written case study,
fieldwork project allocated during fieldwork, generation of fieldwork(clinical) performance mark CAM:
100% - made up of test 38% (tests and assignments count equal value within this %), Case study 7%, Clin
Perf 55%.Written exams – 3 hours Final case presentation and final treatment demonstration EXAM:
100% - made up of exam paper 33%, Final fieldwork: Oral present 27%, Demo and evaluation 40%. The
semester mark contributes 70% and the exam mark 30% to the final mark. There is no exam sub minimum.
To pass the module students must achieve a final mark of at least 50%
DP Requirement: Attend 80% of all lectures, attend 100% of fieldwork hours and mock practicals, attain
55% for fieldwork (clinical) performance assessment, comply with professional and ethical requirements
and attain 45% average for all test, assignments and seminars to
OCTH312 W1 - Physical Theory & Fieldwork 3

(57L-0T-12P-6S-40H-19R-100F-0G-6A-13W-24C)
Prerequisite: Successful completion of ALL level 2 OT modules
Corequisite: OCTH 321W1, OCTH 351W1
Aim: To enable students to attain the necessary theory and practical intervention skills for planning and
implementing assessment and treatment in different Physical Health Care settings.
Content: THEORY: Introduction to the module. 1 lecture. Ms P Naidoo THEORY: Introduction to
conditions in physical heath care settings Spinal cord injuries: 5 periods Ms R. Joubert CVA/head injuries:
5 periods Ms R. Joubert GBS: 2 periods Ms P. Naidoo Arthritis: 2 periods Ms R. Joubert Psychological
implications of physical d/o’s: 2 periods Ms Joubert HIV/Aids in physical care settings: 5 periods Ms P
Naidoo Burns in adults and children: 10 periods-Ms P Naidoo TB: 2 periods – Part-timer Cerebral palsy:
10 periods- Part-timer Hip replacements-1 seminar: student driven Renal disorders – 1 seminar –student
driven Fractures – 1 seminar- student driven Oncology- 1 seminar –student driven Neuromuscular
Disorders – 1 seminar-student driven
126 Health Sciences
Practicals: Different types of cerebral palsy and management: Local school therapists : Half day
Assessment: THEORY FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT (¬38%) Two (2) written theory tests. (March/April
2007) One (1) small group seminar presentation. (March 2007) Submission of (1) small group assignment-
Back ergonomics (April 2007) PRACTICAL FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT 7% - Case study write-up
55% - Clinical Performance 33% - One (1) written theory examination of 3 hours duration. 27% - Oral
Presentation 40% - Treatment Demonstration and Evaluation 70% - Formative (CAM) 30% - Examination
Pass mark for exam 50%. (i.e. final mark must be 50% and above) University Rules in terms of
supplementary exams apply. Sub-minimum : 40% in each component
DP Requirement: Attend 80% of lectures and seminars, Attend 100% of Practicals, Attain 55% for
Clinical Performance on practical block, Comply with professional ethical requirements, Attain 45%
average on all tests, assignments and seminars.
(50L-0T-60P-0S-17H-25R-0F-0G-8A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: All Level 2 OT modules.
Corequisite: OCTH351W1 (Fundamentals 3) and OCTH312W1 (Physical Th & FW)
Aim: To develop comprehensive knowledge and skill in planning and implementing appropriate treatment
methods/techniques/apparatus as this applies in different fields of practice for various contexts
Content: Pressure therapy: An introduction to burn injuries and pressure therapy. Management of; burn
and other scars, oedema and abnormal sensation using a variety of pressure therapy techniques. Principles
of, and practical construction and fitting of pressure garments for the hand, foot, limb and face. 20
lectures: Mrs J McIntyre Therapeutic apparatus: Introduction to therapeutic apparatus, historical
perspectives, component parts and functions, operation of, recording of, conditions indicated for,
therapeutic benefit of, gradable component for MMTA, Electronic/electric cycle, suspension – axial and
pendular, FEPS, Thames wire twister, Tilt table, Standing frame and suspension apparatus – OB help arm
and SA Mobile Arm Support. 20 lectures: Ms P Naidoo Splinting: An introduction to splinting theory and
principles, introduction to materials, techniques and design, manufacture of static splints for a variety of
hand conditions and injuries and treatment protocols, compliance and splinting regime management 20
lectures: Ms P Naidoo
Practicals: Visit(s) to identified clinical settings in terms of experiential learning in the application of
therapeutic apparatus. Manufacture of identified static splints and review of such Manufacture of identified
pressure garments and review of such
Assessment: Manufacture of at least 2 static hand splints, (30%) Manufacture of at least 2 pressure
garments (or parts thereof) (30%) 2 written tests (40%)One written paper, 3 hours duration. The semester
mark contributes 67% and the exam mark 33% to the final mark. An exam subminimum of 40% will
apply. To pass the module the student must achieve a final mark of 50%
DP Requirement: In order to gain entry to the exam, students must: Attend 80% of the lectures, and 100%
of the practicals. And / or Attain a CAM of 50%
(70L-0T-45P-0S-19H-20R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Corequisite: OCTH321W1, OCTH312W1, OCTH311W2
Aim: To provide students with background knowledge and skills on specific treatment techniques used in
Occupational Therapy
Content: Client/Patient Management and therapeutic helping relationships. Paediatric and Adult Neuro-
Developmental Techniques. Ethics and Etiquette.
Practicals: NDT: Paediatrics at OT department and clinical venues as arranged by the lecturer : 36 hours
NDT: Adults at the OT department : 8 hours
Assessment: 3 written tests (contribution 33.3 %) Weighting : 50% towards Final Mark. Feedback will be
provided as per OT Discipline Policy1 written paper (3 Hours) Weighting : 50 % of Final Mark The
semester mark contributes 50% and the exam mark 50% of the final mark. Exam Sub minimum : 40% The
student must achieve a final mark of 50% to pass the module. University Rules for Supplementary
Examinations apply. DP Requirement: In order to gain entry to the exam, students must: Attend at least
Health Sciences 127
80% of the lectures and 100% of the practicals Compliance with professional ethical requirements
OCTH411 WY - Psychosocial Theory and Fieldwork 4

(40L-0T-0P-10S-30H-20R-210F-0G-10A-26W-32C)
Prerequisite: All Level 3 fieldwork modules
Aim: To enable students to attain the necessary advanced assessment, intervention planning and
implementation, knowledge and skills to practice effectively in Mental Health Care settings and with
persons with mental illness, or those at risk of developing such illness.
Content: Policy and procedure issues in Mental Health; review of psychiatric disorders with emphasis on
the OT role and contribution. Includes : Mental illness and the Law (2p) Programmes for different settings
including : psychogeriatrics, forensic, long term units, crises intervention, substance abuse, day care
centres, abused/abandoned children, elderly, displaced and the poor (22p) Issues/trends in mental health
and psychiatry such as dual diagnosis/revolving door, transcultural psychiatry (4p) Care provider
training/relapse prevention (3p) Welfare issues (grants) (3p) HIV and psychiatry (2p) Child and adolescent
psychiatry (6p) Psychosocial techniques (special programmes, advanced groups) (22p)
Assessment: (70%) 2 Tests written, 1 assignment written, 1 seminar. Fieldwork : Mid-term in group and 1
x case presentation and treatment demo; 1 mid term and 1 final case write up; one project (of value to
fieldwork site); generation of fieldwork performance mark (appraised by clinical supervisor) (100%) this
is comprised of : tests 30% (equal value for tests and assignments), written case study 10%, Clinical
performance 55%, Project 5%, (100%) made up of: Exam paper 50% FW final group presentation and
demo (12.5%) + FW final individual presentation and demo (12.5%) = 25% and exam group presentation
(12.5%) and exam demo (12.5%) =25% (Total = 50%). DP Requirement: 80% Attendance of all
lectures/seminars, 100% attendance of fieldwork hours, 55% for fieldwork (clinical) performance
appraisal, as well as compliance with all fieldwork requirements before termination of placement (eg.
Records/reports), Compliance with ethical/professional conduct requirements. Attain average of 45% for
tests/assignments done up to elective placement
OCTH412 WY - Physical Theory and Fieldwork 4

(40L-0T-0P-10S-30H-20R-210F-0G-10A-26W-32C)
Prerequisite: All level-3 OT modules.
Aim: To train students in the principles and practice of the integrated programme management of
individuals and/or groups in different settings catering for persons with physical disease, trauma, disability
or at risk of these. ( i.e. Institutional and Community-Based)
Content: An overview of integrated programme management for individuals/groups and settings, including
the role and function of the OT within such settings. Departmental procedures/policy and management,
including setting up a new department. Advanced therapeutic equipment and dynamic splinting and
advanced assistive devices
Practicals: Fieldwork & supervision: 4 days per week for approximately 6-7 weeks, at a site dependent on
the fieldwork placement areas available from year to year with a minimum of 1.5 hours per week on site
clinical teaching and supervision by a University appointed supervisor. Additional clinical teaching and
supervision provided by clinicians (where available) on site.
Assessment: CAM: 100% - made up of tests 30 ( tests and assignments equal value); Written case study
10%; Clinical Performance 55%; projects 5% Exam 100%: - made up of final presentation and demo on
FW 25% ( 12.5% each); paper 50%; exam demo and presentation 25% (12.5% each) The year mark
(CAM) contributes 70% and the exam mark 30% of the total mark for this module. 1X written paper (3hrs)
subminimum of 40% 1X Practical exam (4 days) culminating in verbal case presentation, treatment
demonstration and evaluation thereof by internal and external examination panel. The exam prac. Covers
both the physical and psychosocial fields of OT concurrently, and both presentations are done within the
same oral exam session.
DP Requirement: attend 80% of all lectures; 100% of fieldwork hours ( time must be made up if
absent);55% for fieldwork ( clinical) performance assessment; and clinical performance requirements must
be met before termination of fieldwork (i.e. all required reports, assignments etc must be handed in) and
comply with the professional ethical requirements and attain an average of at least 45% for all
assignments/ tests completed up to the elective placement.
128 Health Sciences
OCTH413 WY - Community Theory and Fieldwork

(48L-8T-0P-8S-36H-10R-120F-0G-10A-26W-24C)
Prerequisite: All Level 3 Fieldwork Modules.
Corequisite: All Level 4 OT modules
Aim: To equip students with the necessary knowledge, skills, and appropriate attitude to practice
occupational therapy within different cultural and community settings.
Content: This content varies according to the health trends and needs at the time. 1.Theory: Revision of
concepts PHC, CBR, Alma Ata declaration etc 2. Theory and Practical: Screening Communities and
needs/assets analysis: Participatory Rural appraisal 3.Theory: Review of relevant policies 4. Theory:
Intervention programmes, ethics of intervention, family model intervention, transdisciplinary models 5.
Theory and Practical: Children with Multiple Disabilities 6.Theory: Established risk, environmental risk
and Biological risk 7. Theory and Practical: Working with interpreters 8. Theory and Practical: Care
Provider training 9.Theory: Introduction to alternative augmentative communication (AAC). 10. Theory
and practical: Income generating Programmes 11. Theory and Practical: Feeding and positioning of
children with severe disabilities 12. Theory: Reflections of disabled people including mothers of disabled
children 13.Theory: Debate on the medical model versus the social model
Practicals: Approximately 26 days i.e. a 3 day orientation and theoretical programme followed by one day
a week 8h30 to 12h30 in practical rural site and 13h30 to 15h00 tutorial on campus and preparation for
following week, journal write-up etc.
Assessment: written/ oral tests and practical assignments (15%) Team/ transdiciplinary presentation of a
case study (25%) Submission of weekly reflective journals ( contributes to prac. performance mark, see
below) Practical performance ( throughout prac) 50%Exam 100% One written examination (60%) one
handover presentation (40%)(interdisciplinary)This examination is done together with an external
examiner. The year mark (CAM) contributes 70% and the exam mark 30% of the total mark for this
module. There is a subminimum of 45%
DP Requirement: In order to gain entry to the exam, students must; -attend 80% of all lectures; -100% of
fieldwork hours (time to be made up if absent), -55% for fieldwork (clinical) performance assessment; -
clinical performance requirements must be met before termination of fieldwork (i.e. all required reports,
assignments etc must be handed in) -comply with the professional ethical requirements - attain an average
of at least 45% for all assignments/ tests completed up to the elective placement.
OCTH414 WB - Paediatric Theory and Fieldwork

(68L-0T-16P-0S-19H-10R-120F-0G-7A-13W-24C)
Prerequisite: All Level 3 OT modules
Aim: To enable students to attain the necessary knowledge and skills for advanced assessment,
intervention planning and implementation of therapy within different paediatric settings.
Content: THEORY: Overview of occupational therapy for children- 3 periods. Development of childhood
occupations- 3 periods. Child handling – 1 period Purpose, process and methods of assessment – 3 periods.
Psychosocial and emotional domains in Paediatrics – 5 periods. The multiple disabled child – 2 lectures
Child in special focus (death and dying) – 2 periods. PRACTICAL: Pediatric standardized tests - 16
periods. Pediatric non-standardized tests- 6 periods. Paediatric activities workshop – 1 day Screening day
Practicals: One (1) practical screening day in February 2006.
Assessment: CAM =100%, Submission of one (1) pediatric portfolio (10%), One student directed seminar.
(10%), Two (2) theory tests (20%), Clinical Performance Mark generated on Fieldwork (60%) Each
student will present a midterm case as part of formative assessment, but will not carry a mark.Exam
=100% • One case study presentation (15% towards Exam Mark) One verbal presentation (15% towards
Exam Mark), One treatment demonstration (10% towards Exam Mark), One written theory exam of 3
hours duration. (60% towards Exam Mark) CAM mark forms 70% and Examination mark forms 30% -
Exam: Sub-minimum of 40% for Written Exam paper Pass mark for Module – 50%.
seminars Attend 100% of the practical block Attain 55% for clinical performance for the fieldwork
Comply with all practical block requirements. Comply with professional ethical requirement on practical
blocks.
Health Sciences 129
OCTH441 WY - OT Research Project

(24L-0T-0P-30S-184H-0R-0F-0G-2A-26W-24C)
Prerequisite: All level-3 OT modules
Corequisite: All Level-4 OT modules
Aim: To enable students to attain the appropriate knowledge, skill and attitudes to undertake research
under guidance and supervision at an honors level.
Content: Lecture Content THEORY: Introduction to the module. 1 lecture. Ms Joubert THEORY:
Introduction to quantitative research Quantitative designs- 2 periods Ms Naidoo Quantitative data analysis
–external –4 periods Applications and statistics –external –4 periods THEORY: Introduction to qualitative
research Qualitative designs-Ms Joubert 2 periods Qualitative data analysis –Ms Joubert –4 periods Focus
group training – Ms Joubert – 6 periods THEORY: Referencing –Ms Holland –2 periods THEORY:
Research ethics-Ms van der Reyden – 2 periods THEORY: Scientific report writing- -2 periods – Mrs
Holland Podium and poster presentations –- Ms Joubert /Mrs v d Reyden 2 periods
Assessment: Written research project – to be completed by August of every year. Research presentation- at
an appointed date (usually between August and October of every year)This does not carry a mark but
consists of ongoing presentations to supervisors, presentation of proposal to class and ongoing consultation
and feedback. This is 100% Exam made up of the following: Research written project: 70% Research
presentation: 30%
DP Requirement: The following apply: 100% attendance at all lectures Approval by the Department and
the University ethics committee of a research proposal showing rigor of processes and procedures.
OCTH451 WY - OT Fundamentals 4
(40L-0T-0P-3S-14H-20R-0F-0G-3A-26W-8C)
Aim: To enable students to understand and integrate theoretical constructs and models of OT into everyday
practice and equip students to appropriately apply relevant legislation/policy in practice and develop
appropriate professional ethical behaviour and attitudes. Professional management practice
(departmental/solus practice), supervision of auxiliary staff and service development, including Quality
Assurance.
Content: Models of Occupational Therapy – Creative Ability and Human Occupational – critical review,
application to populations; approaches to treatment; programmes (10p) Policies, Acts and regulations
within the Health, Welfare, Education and Labour. Implications for occupational therapy practice
Assessment: (50%) Tests written x 2, written assignment x 1 ; OSPE Student performance and attitude will
be assessed throughout all clinical placements as regards professional, ethical conduct, organisational and
management skills. This is reflected in the clinical appraisal reportWritten examination 3 Hour written
paper Subminimum of 45% required for exam paper External examiners appointed to conduct examination
together with internal examiners and moderator
DP Requirement: In order to gain entry to the exam, students must : Attend 80% of all lectures Class mark
of 50% or higher
OCTH8FY - Masters Researh in Occupational Therapy
OCTH8SY - Masters Research in Occupational Thrpy Sub Yr

130 Health Sciences
Dentistry
Offered in the School of Dentistry
DENT110 W2 - Academic Skills & Clinical Practice

(0L-35T-35P-0S-10H-0R-0F-0G-0A-10W-8C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: At the end of the module students should • Have developed additional skills in negotiating the
academic environment in a tertiary institute. • Have an understanding of the functioning of a dental
surgery/clinic.
Content: Note-taking skills, speed writing, critical reading skills, paragraph writing, speed reading,
listening skills, communication, logic, expression, essay writing. Assisting in sterilization and chair-side
procedures.
Practicals: Clinical Attendance and Assisting.
Assessment: Purely formative (class mark).
DP Requirement: Attendance of all scheduled meetings unless excused by authorised member of staff.
DENT112 W2 - Oral Biology Embryology and Physiology

(25L-0T-10P-0S-37H-5R-0F-0G-3A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To provide students with knowledge of the oral biology, development and functions of oral, dental
and facial tissues, as a basis for their clinical practice. To provide insight into the relevant gross &
microscopic anatomy, biochemistry, physiology, microbiology,. pathology and pharmacology.
Content: Dental and oral tissues, oral physiology, biochemistry and embryology. The development,
structures, functions & inter-relationship of these tissues.
Practicals: Identifying tooth structures macroscopically and microscopically.
Assessment: Class record (formative written tests and assignements) (40%); final examination - written 2-
hour theory paper (48%) and an OSCE (12%).
DP Requirement: Attend lectures and practical sessions to the satisfaction of the School; at least 50% for
the theoretical and practical work in the module
DENT113 W1 - Oral Biology - Structures

(25L-0T-10P-0S-37H-5R-0F-0G-3A-13W-8C)
Aim: To provide students with knowledge of the oral biology of the macroscopic and microscopic
structures of the oral, dental and facial tissues as a basis for their clinical practice courses.
Content: Tooth morphology, histology of the hard and soft tissues. Scientific knowledge that deals broadly
with the oral tissues, their development & structures, functions & inter-relationship; introductory insight
into gross & microscopic anatomy, biochemistry, physiology, microbiology, pathology and pharmacology.
Practicals: Identifying tooth structures macroscopically and microscopically.
Assessment: Class record (40%) - formative written semester tests and assignments. Final examinations – a
written 2-hour theory paper (48%) and an OSCE (12%). the tests and examination will comprise multiple
choice questions, slide identification, short note and essay-type questions.
DP Requirement: Aattendance of lectures and practical sessions to the satisfaction of the School; at least
50% for the theoretical and practical work in the module.
DENT114 W1 - Cariology,Periodontology & Prevention

(40L-5T-10P-0S-20H-5R-0F-0G-0A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: DENT113W1
Corequisite: NONE
Health Sciences 131
Aim: Classification, epidemiology and aetiology of dental diseases; examination, diagnosis, treatment
planning, mechanical and chemical removal of plaque and principles of instrumentation, evaluation and
maintenance. Have a comprehensive knowledge of the most common diseases affecting the oral cavity i.e.
dental caries and periodontal diseases; and relate their effects on surrounding tissues. Be able to complete
a thorough examination and diagnosis to the two disease processes; and to formulate an appropriate
treatment plan. Have a working knowledge of all methods of prevention; and be able to utilize the most
effective method to prevent these diseases in the clinical situation.
Content: Periodontology The biology, clinical, radiological and pathological features of periodontal and
caries diseases. Preventive treatment and the maintenance and recall of patients. The inter-relationships of
periodontal diseases with the other disciplines of dentistry. Cariology Microbiology, diagnosis,
management and prevention of dental caries. Management of the patient. Prevention Medical History,
Scaling, Root planning, Tobacco cessation, implanatology.
Practicals: This training is acquired through the treatment of patients at the Oral and Dental Training
Hospital, other hospitals and community clinics. In addition the students will attend the specialist
periodontic clinic where advanced cases of periodontal disease are managed. Each Oral Hygiene student
will provide a portfolio of 3 cases each in Cariology and Periodontology. This will include clinical
examination, radiological surveys, special tests, study models and photographs. These will be written up in
abooklet form.
Assessment: TESTS Cariology 25% Periodontology 30% Prevention 30% Nutrition 15% 50% of test mark
will contribute to year mark. CONTINUOUS CLINICAL ASSESSMENT 50% of assessment will
contribute to year mark. 40% of the year mark contributes to final mark
DP Requirement: Attendance of lectures and clinical and practical sessions to the satisfaction of the Head
of School and Course Coordinator; classmark of at least 50% for the clinical or practical work.
DENT122 W2 - Radiophysics,Techniques & Preclinical Prac

(20L-10T-30P-0S-10H-6R-0F-0G-4A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To provide students with the following knowledge and competencies: radiophysics and its
application in a preclinical situation; the indications for a radiological examination; carrying out
radiological examinations on a phantom head; manual film processing procedures; the basic principles and
techniques of photography including camera, lens,film and picture types; to take close-up photographs in
the dental situation and present them for evaluation at the end of the module.
Content: The module comprises intraoral radiographic techniques, radiation physics & technique &
processing errors, close-up photography.
Practicals: In addition to attending lectures, Students are required to attend practical sessions on a
phantom head at the Oral & Dental Training Hospital.
Assessment: FINAL EXAMINATION1 x 2 hr Theory Paper: 50%, Practical Examination: 25%, OSCE:
25% FINAL MARK:Year Mark : 40%, Exam Mark : 60%, Final Mark : 100%
DP Requirement: Tests (written, OSCE, oral) 40% Assignments & Projects 10% Practical Work 50%
Attendance of lectures and practical sessions to the satisfaction of the School; at least 75% for the
theoretical and practical work in the module. Attendance of each practical is compulsory. A register will
be kept.
DENT211 WY - Cariology,Periodontology & Prevention

(50L-10T-52P-3S-27H-5R-10F-0G-3A-26W-16C)
Prerequisite: ANAT105; ANAT106; HPHS111; DENT114; DENT113; DENT112
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: Have a comprehensive knowledge of the most common diseases affecting the oral cavity i.e. dental
caries and periodontal diseases; and relate their effects on surrounding tissues. Be able to complete a
thorough examination and diagnosis to the two disease processes; and to formulate an appropriate
treatment plan, Have a working knowledge of all methods of prevention; and be able to utilize the most
effective method to prevent these diseases in the clinical situation.
Content: Periodontology - the biology, clinical, radiological and pathological features of periodontal and
132 Health Sciences
caries diseases. Preventive treatment and the maintenance and recall of patients. The inter-relationships of
periodontal diseases with the other disciplines of dentistry. Cariology - microbiology, diagnosis,
management and prevention of dental caries. Management of the patient.
Practicals: Treatment of patients at the Oral and Dental Training Hospital, other hospitals and community
clinics. Students will attend the specialist periodontic clinic where advanced cases of periodontal disease
are managed.
Assessment: To be admitted to the examination, a student must attend lectures and clinical/ practical
sessions to the satisfaction of the head of Department and must obtain a mark of at least 50% for the
clinical/practical work done during the year. Examinations will be assessed in conjunction with an external
examiner determined by the School. Examinations will comprise all work done in the first and second
years of work. 1 x 2 hr Theory Paper 60% OSCE 40% Oral examination with external examiner. THE
FINAL MARK IS CALCULATED AS FOLLOWS: Year Mark : 40% Exam Mark : 60% Final Mark
100%
DP Requirement: Year marks will be calculated 50% from the tests and 50% from a continuous clinical
assessment.
DENT213 W1 - Community Oral Health (epi/prevention/promoti

(50L-10T-0P-0S-18H-0R-0F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: FHS116S,HLSC116W2
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: At the termination of module ODH 213S, the student should be able to understand the basic concepts
in Community Health, To obtain a basic knowledge in general epidemiology, have an in-depth
understanding of Dental Epidemiology, understand the basic principles and methods of oral health
prevention, promotion and education, and have a basic understanding in research methodology and
biostatistics.
Content: This course aims at making the student aware of the communities with which they work, and to
provide a foundation for building attitudes to, and compassion for patients. It is designed to provide the
student with a basic working knowledge of the principles and practice of Community Dentistry both
globally and from the South African perspective. Measurement of disease and intervention in the
community
Practicals: Epidemiological studies will be carried out among the students, and within the community.
Assessment: Class record comprises tests 60% (six minor tests on theory and practical aspects on each
section covered - 6 X 10% each, and one major test on the entire syllabus 40%).; and research seminars
40%. The final Mark is made up of class record 40% and examination mark 60%.
DP Requirement: A student shall attend lectures and practical sessions to the satisfaction of the school and
must obtain a mark of at least 50% for the theoretical and practical work in the module
DENT214 W2 - Community Oral health (Ethics,Law,Practice

(50L-10T-0P-0S-18H-0R-0F-0G-0A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: HLSC116W2
Aim: At the termination of module ODH 214S, the student should be able to understand the basic concepts
in Public Health Management; obtain a basic knowledge in Practice Management, and have a basic
understanding of Ethics and Law with special emphasis on Dentistry.
Content: At the end of the module, the student should be able to understand the organization of health
services and functioning of the health system in South Africa, and the ethical and legal implications of
practising within the private and public sectors; practice management,
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT 2 Theory tests. 2 Assignments. SUMMATIVE
ASSESSMENT 1 x 2 hour Theory Paper 100%
DP Requirement: A student shall attend lectures and practical sessions to the satisfaction of the school and
must obtain a mark of at least 50% for the theoretical and practical work in the module 40% of test mark
will contribute to year mark.
Health Sciences 133
DENT216 W2 - Restorative Dentistry & Dental Materials-prec

(40L-10T-10P-0S-17H-0R-0F-0G-3A-13W-8C)
Aim: Have knowledge about the properties chemical components of restorative dental materials; Know
why it functions as it does physically and mechanically Know how its is manipulated technically to
develop most satisfactory properties; handling; Have an understanding of the prevention, initiation and
progression and treatment of the carious process
Content: Properties and manipulation techniques of restorative dental materials that are used by dental
therapists and oral hygienists. Basic treatment of carious process and the instruments and materials used in
restorative dentistry.
Practicals: Demonstration of Direct Restorative Filling Materials. Practical and demonstrations in the
phantom head laboratory. 10 X 1-hour
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT 3 theory tests 1 practical test (OSCE) SUMMATIVE
ASSESSMENT One 2hr Theory Paper 90% Practical (Osce) Examination (1hr) 10%. Oral Examination
May Be Required. EXAM DETAILS Paper 1: 1x 2hr Theory Paper 90% Paper 2: Practical (Osce)
Examination (1hr):10% Oral Examination May Be Required. THE FINAL MARK IS CALCULATED AS
FOLLOWS: Year Mark: 40% Exam Mark: 60% Final Mark: 100%
DP Requirement: Attendance of lectures and clinical and practical sessions to the satisfaction of the
Programme Director and Course Leader and a class mark of at least 50% for clinical or practical work in
the module.
DENT217 WY - General Medicine and Special Patients

(70L-20T-20P-0S-38H-9R-0F-0G-3A-26W-16C)
Prerequisite: ANAT105W1, ANAT106W2, HPHS111W1
Aim: To provide an understanding of major physical and mental disorders which impair patients’ capacity
to perform normally, and an ability to manage such patients, and provide preventive, emergency and basic
dental care.
Content: Theoretical knowledge and management techniques related to the practice of Oral Hygiene and
Dental Therapy of: neurological, neuromuscular, musculoskeletal, dermatological, sensory and mental
disorders. The adolescent, geriatric, pregnant patients and patients with oral cancer, cleft lip and/or cleft
palate, and blood disorders. Basic medical knowledge of headaches, hypertension, diabetes, kwashiorkor,
tuberculosis, oedema, blood pressure and the pulse, and water balance and nutrition. The management of
common medical emergencies.
Practicals: Practical demonstrations on patients.
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT Theory Tests Oral Test Assignments/Reports
SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT Paper I 1 x 2 hr Theory Paper An oral examination with the external
examiner is required. FINAL EXAMINATION Paper I 1 x 2 hr Theory Paper An oral examination with
the external examiner is required. The final mark is calculated as follows: Year Mark 40% Exam Mark
60% Final Mark 100%
DP Requirement: practical sessions to the satisfaction of the Head of School and Course Coordinator and a
class mark of at least 50% for clinical or practical work in the module. Ward rounds - students will provide
written reports of their observations during the ward r
DENT219 W1 - General Pathology and general Microbiology

(30L-10T-10P-0S-18H-9R-0F-0G-3A-13W-8C)
Aim: To provide an understanding of the principles of the causes of diseases and the body’s reaction and
its sequelae; with a view to applying this knowledge to dental diseases.
Content: Causes of diseases, characteristics and classification of diseases and the body’s responses.
Specific focus on the types of microorganisms and their role in the disease process.
Practicals: To be advised.
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT Theory Tests SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT 1x1 x 2 hr
Theory Paper 100% An oral examination may be required. EXAM DETAILS Paper 1:1 x 2 hr Theory
Paper 100% An oral examination may be required. THE FINAL MARK IS CALCULATED AS
FOLLOWS: Year Mark : 40% Exam Mark : 60% Final Mark: 100%
DP Requirement: 40% of test mark will contribute to year mark.
134 Health Sciences
DENT221 WY - Oral med,oral path,and clinical pharm

(72L-20T-26P-0S-100H-19R-0F-0G-3A-26W-24C)
Prerequisite: ANAT105, ANAT106, HPHS111, DENT114, DENT113, DENT112
Aim: A basic knowledge of the clinical features, provisional and differential diagnosis (including the
specialized areas) and the management of diseases affecting the soft tissues and surrounding areas of the
oral cavity
Content: The clinical features, diagnosis and management of diseases affecting the soft tissues and
surrounding areas of the oral cavity. Clinical diagnosis, recognition of common oral pathological lesions,
and referral of patient to the appropriate practitioner. Informing patients about principles of biopsy,
histopathology and definite diagnosis. Patient education. Principles and practice of the drug management
of patients with acute and chronic conditions.
Practicals: Students gain practical and clinical experience at the Oral and Dental Training Hospital and
satellite clinics. Practicals/seminars/assignments - 25hrs Practicals: Small group teaching: Students are
assigned to the specialist oral medicine Clinical Pharmacology: Tutorials 5 hrs, assignments 5 hrs.
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT 6 Theory tests, (four in Oral Medicine and Pathology
contributing to 80% of the year mark, and two in the first semester in Clinical Pharmacology contributing
to 20% of the year mark, i.e. 2x10%), Spot tests conducted at the discretion of the lecturer. In addition
assignments are given at the discretion of the lecturer. SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT Paper 1 Theory
Paper 2 OSCE Paper 3 Oral Examinations will be assessed in conjunction with an external examiner
determined by the School. Examinations will comprise all work done in the first and second years of work.
DP Requirement: Attendance of lectures and clinical and practical sessions in accordance with the Faculty
Rule FHEL 3 and to the satisfaction of the Programme Director and Course Leader and a class mark of at
least 50% for clinical or practical work in the module
DENT223 W1 - Radiography-techniques and pre-clinical prac

(20L-10T-20P-10S-17H-0R-0F-0G-3A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: ANAT105, DENT122
Aim: To provide students with the following competences: To inform medical and dental personnel and
the public of the indications for radiological examinations and the dangers of radiation if x-rays are used
indiscriminately; to take the precautions necessary to protect both the operator and the patient during
radiological examinations; to carry out radiological examinations of the teeth and jaws including film
processing procedures; to recognise radiological features of the various diseases (including features)
affecting the teeth and jaw and to make correct diagnoses. To gain the knowledge and skills of oral
radiography and photography and to be able to distinguish abnormal from normal structures on a
radiograph.
Content: Intraoral radiographic techniques, radiation safety protection, effects of radiation and
radiography. Identifying normal and abnormal areas on radiographs dental anatomy, caries, periodontal
disease and dental anomalies.
Practicals: Working under simulated conditions. Followed by an introduction to work with patients.
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT • 2 theory tests • One OSCE • Continuous practical
assessment • Seminars, Assignments, projects and Case reports. • Spot tests conducted at the discretion of
the lecturer. • Students are also evaluated on the following aspects: I. Punctuality ii. Theoretical
knowledge iii. Clinical competence SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT EXAMINATIONS: One 2hr Theory
Paper 50% Practical Examination 25% OSCE 25% Oral Examination may be required
EXAMINATIONS: Paper 1: 1 x 2hr Theory Paper 50% Paper 2: Practical Examination 25% Paper 3:
OSCE 25% Oral Examination may be required THE FINAL MARK IS CALCULATED AS FOLLOWS:
Year Mark: 40% Exam Mark: 60% Final Mark: 100%
the module.
Health Sciences 135
DENT224 W2 - Minor Oral Surgery - theory and local anaesth

(58L-2T-16P-0S-0H-0R-0F-0G-4A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: ANAT105, ANAT106, HPHS111S, DENT114W2, DENT113W1, DENT112W2
Aim: take a comprehensive medical history; make diagnosis and plan treatment accordingly, identify vital
signs and refer accordingly for special investigations, be familiar with procedures such as biopsies,
suturing, perform local analgesia and have a thorough knowledge of the technique of local anaesthesia,
signs, symptoms and complications of local anaesthesia.
Content: The assessment, diagnosis and treatment of oral conditions and related parts requiring mainly
exodontia or other minor surgical or medical intervention. Oral surgical procedures, management of
patients requiring exodontia, including instruments used and local anaesthesia.
Practicals: 2½ hours of clinical/practical sessions per week at the Oral and Dental Training Hospital and
satellite clinics. (For Oral Hygiene Students only).
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT 2 Theory tests 1 Practical Test 1 OSCE. SUMMATIVE
ASSESSMENT 1 x 2 hours theory paper Clinical examination – Objective subjected Clinical
Examination Oral examination FINAL EXAMINATION Paper 1: 1 x 2hour theory paper Paper 2:
Clinical examination – Objective subjected Clinical Examination Paper 3: Oral examination THE FINAL
MARK IS CALCULATED AS FOLLOWS: Year Mark: 40% Exam Mark: 60% Final Mark: 100%
the module.
DENT226 W2 - Radiography-techniques and clinical practice

(20L-10T-20P-10S-17H-0R-0F-0G-3A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: DENT223W1
Aim: To provide students with the following competencies: Informing medical and dental personnel and
the public on the indications for radiological examinations and the dangers of radiation if x-rays are used
indiscriminately; taking the necessary precautions to protect both the operator and the patient during
radiological examinations; carrying out radiological examinations of the teeth and jaws including film
processing procedures; to recognise radiological features of the various diseases affecting the teeth and
jaw, and making correct diagnosis; to carry out extraoral radiographic examination on patients in order to
supplement diagnostic procedures. To gain the knowledge and skills of oral radiography and photography
and to be able to distinguish abnormal from normal structures clinically on a radiograph .
Content: Intraoral and extra oral radiographic techniques, radiographic interpretation, specialized
radiographic procedures.
Practicals: Students are required to take intra oral and extra –oral radiographs on patients. Students are
assessed continuously according to their technique, patient positioning and patient management.
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT • 2 theory tests • One OSCE • Continuous practical
assessment • Seminars, Assignments, projects and Case reports. • Spot tests conducted at the discretion of
the lecturer. • Students are also evaluated on the following aspects: I. Punctuality ii. Theoretical
knowledge iii. Clinical competence SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT EXAMINATIONS: Paper 1 : 1x 2hr
Theory Paper 50% Paper 2: Practical Examination 25% Paper 3: OSCE 25% Oral Examination may be
required Examinations will be assessed in conjunction with an external examiner determined by the
School. Examinations will comprise all work done in the first and second years of work. THE FINAL
MARK IS CALCULATED AS FOLLOWS: Year Mark: 40% Exam Mark: 60% Final Mark: 100%
the module.
DENT227 W2 - Oral Hygiene Clinical Practice

(8L-5T-48P-2S-5H-2R-0F-0G-10A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: All Level 1 modules
Corequisite: All Level 2 modules
Aim: This is a capstone module for Oral Hygiene practice, at the completion of which a learner should be
able to demonstrate sufficient competence in all aspects of the discipline to practice & to register with the
136 Health Sciences
HPCSA
Content: aspects on the scope of practice not included in other modules in level 1 & 2. viz., Orthodontics,
expanded functions & root planing
Practicals: Four hours of clinical work per week in specialist facilities. Root planning : At least 3 patients
Impressions 3 study models Temporary fillings: At least 3 patients Class V restorations :(10 teeth) At least
3 patients Local anaesthetics: 30 blocks, 30 infiltrations Soft linings & tissue conditioners Temporary
cementing of inlays, crowns & bridges Polishing of restorations;At least 3 patients Perio packs:1 case
Cytological smears: 1 case Cephalometric Tracing
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT 2 x 1-hour tests 1 x 1-hour clinical test 1 x 1-hour
practical/OSCE test Evaluation of portfolio of cases. SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT Paper 1: 1 x 2-hour
written examination Paper 2: 1 x 3-hour practical examination or OSCE. THE FINAL MARK IS
CALCULATED AS FOLLOWS: Year Mark: 40% Exam Mark: 60% Final Mark: 100%
DP Requirement: 100% attendance unless a valid reason given for any absences; a mark of at least 50%
for the theoretical and practical work in the module.
Final details to be announced before the first registration of students for the module in 2006.
DENT228 WY - Diagnostics,Infection Control & Dental Spec.

(40L-5T-5P-0S-25H-2R-0F-0G-3A-26W-8C)
Prerequisite: ANAT105, ANAT106, HPHS111
Aim: Make diagnosis and plan appropriate treatment. Treat patients holistically. Practice proper infection
control procedures while treating patients. Refer patients to the appropriate dental specialists.
Content: This module deals with diagnosis, treatment planning, infection control and dental specialities.
Practicals: In addition to attending lectures and seminars students gain practical and clinical experience at
the Oral and Dental Training Hospital Dental Specialities: 1 X 1 hour in each speciality Demonstration of
appliances and cases. Infection Control: 2 x 1 hour • Demonstration of packing of instruments •
Demonstration on the use of ultrasonic washer • Demonstration on the use of different types of autoclaves
• Demonstration on methods of disinfection • Handwashing • Handscrubbing • Gowning • Demonstration
on recapping needle and its disposal Diagnostics: 5 x 2 hour clinical
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT Dental Specialties: 4 theory tests 1 OSCE Infection Control:
1 theory test 1 assignment Diagnostics: 1 clinical test SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT 1 x 2 hour Theory
paper OSCE An oral examination may be required. THE FINAL MARK IS CALCULATED AS
FOLLOWS: Year Mark: 40% Exam Mark: 60% Final Mark: 100%
the module. 40% of Year mark contributes to final mark
DENT313 WY - Restorative Dentistry and Dental Materials

(30L-50T-300P-0S-97H-0R-0F-0G-3A-26W-48C)
Prerequisite: All level-1 and level-2 modules in the curriculum.
Aim: To manage a patient requiring restorative procedures including the intervention as defined in the
scope of practice for dental therapists; to diagnose, treat and determine the prognosis pertaining to the
treatment of teeth with both vital and non vital pulps as they relate to other hard and soft tissue structures
of the oral cavity. To provide them with a thorough knowledge of restorative materials and their failures,
and of all disciplines of dentistry in order to be able to refer patients appropriately.
Content: Patient management, techniques of cavity preparation and restorations of the different restorative
materials, treatment of /and an approach to emergencies, urgencies and post operative complications in
operative dentistry.
Practicals: Students gain clinical experience at the Oral and Dental Training Hospital and at satellite
clinics and clinical work in specified sites. Phantom head practical, clinical work – 10 hours per week for 5
weeks. Students must obtain a mark of al least 50% for the phantom head test to continue with the clinical
component. Clinicals on patients – four 3-hr clinics per week. Each student shall provide a portfolio of one
completed case which will include a full history, clinical findings, radiological survey, special tests and
photographs that are pertinent to the case. This must be presented to the internal as well as external
examiners.
Health Sciences 137
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT 3 theory tests 1 practical phantom-head test 3 clinical tests
on patients oral test (Clinical tests consist of case presentation and the technique of cavity preparation,
lining and restoration of teeth.) SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT One 2hr Theory Paper: 40 % Clinical
Examination Practical: 40% Orals and case presentation: 20% THE FINAL MARK IS CALCULATED
AS FOLLOWS: Year Mark: 40% Exam Mark: 60% Final Mark: 100%
the module.
DENT315 WY - Diagnostics and Radiology (Dental Therapy Pra

(20L-80T-0P-40S-98H-0R-0F-0G-2A-26W-24C)
Prerequisite: All level-1 and level-2 modules in the curriculum.
Aim: Be able to examine and treat patients holistically in all aspects of the scope of the profession, in both
the private and public sectors.
Content: The course is mainly clinical in orientation, and will comprise: clinical sessions; pre-operative
assessment for theatre and theatre assisting; routine and specialized radiology, oral medicine and
pathology, basic research.
Practicals: Clinical sessions, which will take the form of: Patient examination and case presentation in the
clinical setting. A minimum of 4 fully-documented cases comprising case histories, photographs,
radiographs, and other relevant diagnostic aids are required. • Pre-operative assessment for theatre, consent
& theatre assisting • Routine and specialized radiology • Medical waste disposal, & sterilization
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT 6 Tests Test 1 - April, on completion of the lectures. Test 2 -
June, a chairside clinical examination will be conducted. Test 3 - September, testing clinical slides and
case history examinations Test 4 - October, includes all clinical components, and the ability to holistically
manage a patient. SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT There will be no written examination at the end of the
year. An oral examination will be conducted during the examination period. To be admitted to the
examination, a student must attend lectures/ seminars/ clinical sessions to the satisfaction of the Head of
School and Course Co-ordinator. The student must obtain a mark of at least 50% in all work done for the
year. EXAM DETAILS Year Mark 50% Final examination 50% To be admitted to the examination, a
student must attend lectures/ seminars/ clinical sessions to the satisfaction of the Head of School and
Course Coordinator. The student must obtain a mark of at least 50% in all work done for the year. The
student must present a detailed portfolio of all clinical cases, seminars, outreach programmes, theatre
sessions, written assignments, tests and a completed portfolio sheet, at least one week before the final
examination, for appraisal by the external examiner. 1. An oral examination will be conducted by internal
and external examiners. 2. The final examination mark will be calculated as follows: Examination mark:
50% DP mark: 50% Final mark: 100%
of School and Course Coordinator. A Year mark of 50%.
DENT317 WY - Minor Oral Surgery-clinical practice

(72L-0T-234P-0S-30H-10R-130F-0G-4A-26W-48C)
Prerequisite: All 1st and 2nd level modules
Aim: Have a knowledge of all anatomic landmarks associated with the oral cavity Be familiar with the
instrumentation associated with exodontias Have a sound knowledge of the management indications,
contraindications, and complications with exodontias. Be able to treat the patient undergoing minor oral
surgery procedures and refer appropriately.
Content: Clinical procedures in minor oral surgery, management of complications of exodontias, theatre
attendance and assistance in oral surgery procedures.
Practicals: 2½ hours of clinical / practical session per week. Students must be familiar with the procedure
of asepsis in theatre. Each student is required to have assisted a dentist/specialist with at least one minor
oral surgical procedure. Students will assist on a rotation basis at one of the regional hospitals. Suturing –
Practical demonstration. Attendance of each practical is compulsory. A register will be kept. Every lecture
is regarded as preparation for clinical or practical work which is to follow. Students who fail to comply
with a satisfactory attendance figure will be allocated an incomplete year mark.
138 Health Sciences
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT 2 theory tests (one per semester) 2 practical/clinical tests
(one per semester) projects and reports. Each student will be required to present a thoroughly researched
seminar Spot tests conducted at the discretion of the lecturer. SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT 1 X 3hour
Theory Paper An oral examination, on the diagnosis and treatment of an appropriate clinical problem.
Clinical examination – OSCE. EXAM DETAILS Paper 1: 1 X 3hour Theory Paper Paper 2: Clinical
examination – OSCE. Paper 3: An oral examination, on the diagnosis and treatment of an appropriate
clinical problem. THE FINAL MARK IS CALCULATED AS FOLLOWS: Year Mark: 40% Exam Mark:
60% Final Mark: 100% Please note : that students would not be permitted to write the final examination
should you have a clinical/practical year mark (ie. excludes written tests) of less than 50%.
the module.
DENT318 WY - Medical Emergencies and Clinical Pharmacolog

(40L-20T-0P-0S-18H-0R-0F-0G-2A-26W-8C)
Prerequisite: All 1st and 2nd Year Modules
Aim: manage the patient at the dental chairside in an emergency be able to prescribe basic medication in
the management of common oral and dental disorders
Content: Medical history taking, vital signs, first aid management. Basic principles, absorption,
distribution, excretion, toxicity of drugs Update of medications that are to be prescribed for common
conditions within the scope of the practising dental therapist.
Practicals: Ward rounds.
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT 2 Theory Tests 1 Practical Test SUMMATIVE
ASSESSMENT 1 x 2 hour Theory Paper An Oral Examination THE FINAL MARK IS
CALCULATED AS FOLLOWS: Year Mark: 40% Exam Mark: 60% Final Mark: 100%
of School and Course Coordinator and a class mark of at least 50% for clinical or practical work in the
module.
Anatomy
Offered in the School of Medical Sciences
ANAT101 W1 - Introduction to Anatomy & Neuroanatomy

(36L-32T-32P-12S-22H-22R-0F-0G-4A-12W-16C)
Aim: The student will be able to identify structures in the following systems: nervous, cardiovascular,
musculoskeletal, respiratory, gastrointestinal, endocrine and urogenital. In addition, he/she will be able to
identify the following neuroanatomical structures viz. skull, meninges, venous sinuses, spinal cord, cranial
nerves, ventricles, cerebellum, brainstem
Content: Lectures : There are 24 lectures on Introduction to Anatomy and 24 lectures on Neuroanatomy
Practicals : Study of prosections supplemented by relevant lectures, reinforcing and integrating
theorectical and practical knowledge
Assessment: Class tests are in the form written papers, practicals (spotters) and orals (viva voce). Tests are
generally scheduled in the middle of, and at the end of a module. Tests assess all anatomy completed up to
that stage in the module. A seminar test in the form of a written paper is held on completion of all the
seminars at the end of the semester
DP Requirement: For students to sit for the final examination in the module, a CAM of 40% or more is
required
This module has a lecture, practical, tutorial and seminar content that is specially designed for
BPhysio,BOccTh & BPharm. A laboratory fee is payable for this module.
Health Sciences 139
ANAT102 W2 - Head,Neck & Back

(3L-10T-29P-5S-13H-17R-0F-0G-3A-12W-8C)
Aim: On completion of the module, the learner will be able to know the detailed anatomy of the back
(including the suboccipital region) and have a fair understanding of the anatomy of structures in the head
and neck
Content: Head and Neck: To expose students to structures in the region - it includes arteries, nerves, veins,
lymphatics and muscles in the region, the mouth, tongue, palate, pharynx, larynx, the orbit and structures
within, the nose and paranasal air sinuses, the ear and glandular structures. Back: A detailed study of back
muscles, and of bones, joints and ligaments of the vertebral column and a detailed study of the suboccipital
triangle.
Practicals: Study of prosected material
Assessment: Class tests are in the form of written papers, practicals (spotters) and orals (viva voce). Tests
are generally scheduled in the middle of, and at the end of, a module. Tests assess all anatomy completed
up to that stage in the module. A seminar test in the form of a written paper is held on completion of all
seminars at the end of the semester. Procedure for missed tests: A student who misses a schedule test/s is
required, on returning to Anatomy teaching sessions, to produce a medical certificate /other documention
to explain the reason for his/her absenteeism. All make up tests are in an oral (viva voce) format with two
examiners. Examination guidelines: Summative Assessment Examinations are conducted in the written
format, as well as a practical and/or oral format. Each component of the examination carries an equal
percentage of the marks. An additional examination in the oral format may be held for students who obtain
an overall mark (Final Mark) which is below the pass mark, and who, in the opinion of the examiners,
would benefit from an oral examination to enable them to pass. The format of the written paper may be a
combination of mcq/essays/short questions/fill in the blanks or exclusively in one of those forms. No
subminimum applies to any of the papers Calculation of marks: CAM: An average of all marks of all class
tests Exam marks: An average of all the marks of the different components of that exam Final marks: ¼ of
CAM + ¾ of Exam Mark Minimum mark required to qualify for supplementary examinations: CAM
greater than 60 or Final Mark equal to or greater than 40
DP Requirement: CAM of 40 or more is required.
Physiotherapy & Occupational Therapy. A laboratory fee is payable for this module.

(36L-32T-32P-12S-22H-22R-0F-0G-4A-12W-16C)
Aim: The learner will have knowledge of the subject matter contained in the syllabus. He/she will be able
to identify structures in the following systems: nervous, cardiovascular, musculoskeletal, respiratory,
gastrointestinal, endocrine and urogenital. In addition, he/she will be able to identify the following
neuroanatomical structures viz. skull, meninges, venous sinuses, spinal cord, cranial nerves, ventricles,
cerebellum, brainstem
Content: Lectures : There are 24 lectures on Introduction to Anatomy and 24 lectures on Neuroanatomy
Practicals : Study of prosections supplemented by relevant lectures, reinforcing and integrating
Assessment: Class tests are in the form written papers, practicals (spotters) and orals (viva voce). Tests are
generally scheduled in the middle of, and at the end of a module. Tests assess all anatomy completed up to
that stage in the module. A seminar test in the form of a written paper is held on completion of all the
seminars at the end of the semester
DP Requirement: CAM of 40 or more is required.
This module has a lecture , practical, tutorial and seminar content that is specially designed for BOptom.
A laboratory fee is payable for this module.
ANAT104 W2 - Trunk & Embryology

(18L-4T-18P-4S-16H-18R-0F-0G-2A-12W-8C)
Aim: The learner will have knowledge of the subject matter contained in the syllabus. He/she will be able
to dissect, identify and display the wall of the trunk and the anatomy of all the relevant viscera contained
140 Health Sciences
within
Content: There are 24 lectures in the module, 16 on the trunk and 6 on embryology. They are scheduled to
synchronise with dissection of the cadaver. In addition tutorials and seminars clarify the subject
DP Requirement: CAM of 40% or more is required
Physiotherapy & Occuptional Therapy. A laboratory fee is payable for this module.

(40L-18T-26P-10S-32H-32R-0F-0G-2A-12W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To introduce students to the structure of body systems, the brain and spinal cord.
Content: Anatomical terminology; tissues & structures; the various organ systems; cranium, the central &
peripheral parts of the nervous system; neuronal pathways and embryology of the brain.
Practicals: 1 x 3 hours weekly
Assessment: CAM 25%; 1 x 2hr Written paper + 1 x 45min Practical and/or oral examination (75% of
Final mark)
DP Requirement: 40%
This module has a lecture, practical, tutorial and seminar content that is specially designed for B DenTh
& Oral Health. A laboratory fee is payable for this module.

(30L-16T-22P-10S-0H-0R-0F-0G-2A-12W-8C)
Prerequisite: ANAT105W1
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To expose students to the structures of the head and axial structures.
Content: Nerves, Arteries, Veins, Lymphatic Drainage, Glands, Muscles and Bones of the Head, Neck and
Back; Oral Cavity; Pharynx; Larynx; The Eye; The Ear; The Nose; The Back.
Final mark)
DP Requirement: 40%
This module has a lecture, practical, tutorial and seminar content that is specially designed for Dental
Therapy & Oral Health. A laboratory fee is payable for this module.

(24L-9T-26P-10S-4H-5R-0F-0G-2A-12W-8C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Final mark)
DP Requirement: 40%
This module has a lecture, practical, tutorial and seminar content that is specially designed for BOptom. A
laboratory fee is payable for this module.
ANAT109 W1 - Upper & Lower Limbs

(48L-0T-76P-9S-8H-16R-0F-0G-3A-12W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To expose students to the detailed anatomy of the limbs.
Health Sciences 141
Content: Osteology; Breast; Brachial Plexus; Dermatomes & Myotomes; Lymphatic Drainage; venous
Drainage; Arterial Supply; Nerves; Gluteal Region; Muscles; joints.
Practicals: 2 x 3 hours weekly.
Assessment: CAM 25%; 1x 2hr Written paper + 1 x 45min practical and/or oral examination (75% of Final
mark).
DP Requirement: 40%
Physiotherapy & Occupational therapy. A laboratory fee is payable for this module.
ANAT111 W2 - Neuroanatomy
(24L-17T-14P-13S-13H-13R-0F-0G-2A-12W-10C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To introduce students to the structure of the brain and spinal cord, cranium, the central & peripheral
parts of the nervous system; neuronal pathways and embryology of the brain
Content: NONE
Practicals: 1 X 3 hours weekly
Assessment: CAM 25% ; 1 x 2hr Written paper + 1 x 45min Practical and/or oral examination (75% of
Final mark)
DP Requirement: 40%
This module has a lecture, practical, tutorial and seminar content that is specially designed for Audiology
and Speech Language Pathology. A laboratory fee is payable for this module.
ANAT117 W1 - Introduction to Anatomy,Head and Neck

(48L-27T-27P-16S-20H-20R-0F-0G-2A-12W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To introduce students to the structure of body systems, the brain and spinal cord and the structures of
the head and axial structures.
Content: NONE
Final mark)
DP Requirement: 40%
This module has a lecture, practical, tutorial and seminar content that is specially designed for Audiology
and Speech Language Pathology. A laboratory fee is payable for this module.
ANAT212 W2 - Anatomy of the Head,Neck & Back

(48L-54T-76P-8S-25H-26R-0F-0G-3A-12W-24C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Assessment: CAM 25%; 1 x 2hr Written paper + 1 x 45min Practical and/or oral examination (75% of final
mark)
DP Requirement: 40%
This module has a lecture, practical, tutorial and seminar content that is specially designed for Medical
Science. A laboratory fee is payable for this module.
ANAT213 - Introduction to Anatomy and Neuroanatomy

(36L-32T-32P-12S-62H-62R-0F-0G-4A-14W-24C)
Aim: A study of an Introduction to Anatomy and Neuroanatomy
142 Health Sciences
Content: There are 24 lectures on Introduction to Anatomy and 24 lectures on Neuroanatomy

Practicals: Study of prosections supplemented by relevant lectures, reinforcing and integrating
Assessment: Assessments: Class tests are in the form of written papers, practicals (spotters) and orals (viva
voce). Tests are generally scheduled in the middle of, and at the end of, a module. Tests assess all anatomy
completed up to that stage in the module. A seminar test in the form of a written paper is held on
completion of all seminars at the end of the semester. On-going viva assessments of cadaveric dissections
are carried out throughout the semester. Summative Assessment: Examinations are conducted in the
written format, as well as a practical and/or oral format. Each component of the examination carries an
equal percentage of the marks. An additional examination in the oral format may be held for students who
obtain an overall mark (Final Mark) which is below the pass mark, and who, in the opinion of the
examiners, would benefit from an oral examination to enable them to pass. The format of the written paper
may be a combination of mcq/essays/short questions/fill in the blanks or exclusively in one of those forms.
No subminimum applies to any of the papers Calculation of marks: CAM: An average of all marks of all
class tests Exam marks: An average of all the marks of the different components of that exam Final marks:
¼ of CAM + ¾ of Exam Mark Minimum mark required to qualify for supplementary examinations: CAM
greater than 60 or Final Mark equal to or greater than 40
DP Requirement: For students to sit for the final examination in the module, a CAM of 40% or more is
required
ANAT311 W1 - Anatomy of the Upper & Lower Limbs

(48L-48T-72P-12S-68H-68R-0F-0G-4A-12W-32C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To expose students to the detailed anatomy of the limbs.
Content: Osteology; Breast; Brachial Plexus; Dermatomes & Myotomes; Lymphatic Drainage; Venous
Drainage; Arterial Supply; Nerves; Gluteal Region; Muscles; Joints.
Final mark)
DP Requirement: 40%
ANAT312 W2 - Anatomy of the Trunk & Embryology

(48L-48T-72P-12S-68H-68R-0F-0G-4A-12W-32C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To expose students to the thorax and abdomen and to introduce students to the early embryonic and
foetal development of the human anatomy.
Content: Elementary anatomy: identification of surface anatomy; classification of joints, muscle
movements; nervous system.
Final mark).
DP Requirement: 40%
ANAT711 WY - Anatomical Research Methodology and Specialis

(12L-12T-96P-0S-168H-19R-0F-0G-1A-12W-31C)
Prerequisite: B Med Sc degree with minimum 60% pass in level 3 anatomy
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To introduce selected research methodologies and techniques involved/ used in undertaking
Health Sciences 143
anatomical research
Content: Latex impregnation, micro-dissection techniques, use of light dissecting microscope. use of
digital equipment. Lectures on each sub-section of thesis writing.
Assessment: Production of abstract of research project (ANAT 714 WY)
DP Requirement: Research Protocol By June; presentation of Thesis by September
ANAT712 WY - Advanced Topics 1

(0L-4T-120P-0S-56H-56R-0F-0G-4A-12W-24C)
Prerequisite: B Med Sc degree with minimum 60% pass in level 3 Anatomy
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To undertake an examination of specialized areas in Limb and Neuroanatomy
Content: Dissection of regional anatomy
Final mark)
DP Requirement: 80% of module attendance
A laboratory fee is payable for this module
ANAT713 WY - Advanced Topics 2

(0L-4T-120P-0S-56H-56R-0F-0G-4A-12W-24C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To undertake an examination of specialized areas in Head & Neck & Trunk Anatomy
Content: Dissection of regional anatomy
Final mark)
DP Requirement: 80% of module attendance
ANAT714 WY - Research Project

(0L-0T-199P-0S-200H-200R-40F-0G-1A-12W-64C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To expose students to research methodology with the ultimate aim of producing a mini-dissertation
Content: Individually conducted research in Anatomy
Assessment: Approximately 1-hour oral examination
DP Requirement: 100% Practical attendance; internal monthly assessments
none
ANAT8FY - Masters Research in Anatomy
ANAT8SY - Masters Research in Anatomy Subseq Yr
ANAT9FY - PhD Research in Anatomy
ANAT9SY - PhD Research in Anatomy Subseq Yr
MAN1NUY M1 - Human Anatomy

(60L-0T-60P-30S-167H-0R-0F-0G-3A-30W-32C)
Prerequisite: NONE
144 Health Sciences
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To expose students to human anatomy concentrating on gross morphology, osteology, embroyology,
neuro-anatomy and clinically applied anatomy.
Content: Anatomical positions, planes, and basic terminology; overview of the nervous system;
embroyology and teratogens, overview of osteology with reference to radiology; the lymphatic system;
arthrology; the upper limbs & pectoral girgle; thorax; abdoman; pelvis and perineum; lower limbs and
pelvic girgle; neuro-anatomy; head and neck; vertebral column.
Practicals: 1 x 2 hour session each week.
Assessment: Theory Test, Practical Spotter Test, Vivas; and 1 examination.
DP Requirement: Rule NURS4 (b) shall apply -candidates must attend at least 75% of all classes,100% in
the clinical setting, save those from which they have been officially excused.
Medical Biochemistry
HMBC3EB H2 M2 - Bioenergetics & Exercise Physiology

(14L-5T-18P-0S-37H-0R-0F-0G-6A-0W-8C)
Prerequisite: Biol2C1, MedS2G2, MedS2C1, MedS2N1, MedS2E2
Aim: Students will be introduced to differences in metabolism at rest and following exercise
Content: Topics to be covered include: introduction to energy transfer, oxidative phosphorylation,
metabolism of macronutrients during physical activity. Different types of muscle fibres with emphasis on
their energy metabolism. Lactate metabolism and the metabolic basis of fatigue in humans. The effect of
exercise training on metabolic disorders such as diabetes (I & II), hypertension and hyperlipidemia are
discussed. Various methods are employed to assess the effect of exercise on the human body. Student
volunteers will perform different types of endurance exercises; a blood sample will be extracted before and
after the exercise routine. Lymphocytes and serum (Histopaque 1077) will be isolated from the blood and
the following methods will be performed, viz., Single Cell Gel Electrophoresis, protein isolation and SDS-
PAGE. Other biochemical assays that utilise spectrophotometry may be employed, viz., creatine kinase
and lactate dehydrogenase assays.
Assessment: Final mark consists of 40% formative and 60% summative marks Formative: 60% tests and
40% classwork Summative: 100% exam mark
DP Requirement: Attendance at 80% total module time. Attendance at all tests and practicals.
Achievement of 40% classmark.
HMBC3ET H1 M1 - Environmental Toxicology

(14L-5T-18P-0S-37H-0R-0F-0G-6A-13W-8C)
Aim: Students will develop an understanding of the basic principles of toxicology and diseases associated
with hazardous environmental substances.
Content: The following topics are covered: Basic principles of toxicology with emphasis on the
biochemical, cellular and organ system basis of intoxication including biotransformation of toxicants,
biochemical mechanisms underlying toxicity and biomarkers of exposure will be covered. Various classes
of toxicants will also be studied including heavy metals, pesticides and mycotoxins. Specific organ
systems susceptible to toxicant exposure will also be introduced (these include pulmonary, hepatic and
renal toxicity). The course includes five 3-hour practical sessions. These aim to introduce students to the
different methods used in toxicology. The impact the toxicant has at cellular and molecular level will be
studied using tissue culture, cytotoxicity tests such as MTT and JC-1 and the comet assay.
Assessment: Final mark consists of 40% formative and 60% summative marks Formative: 60% tests and
40% classwork Summative: 100% exam mark
Health Sciences 145
HMBC3MD H2 M2 - Metabolic Diseases

(32L-10T-36P-0S-50H-0R-0F-20G-12A-13W-16C)
Aim: Knowledge of the advanced theory of molecular biology and how this relates to various genetic
defects that impact human health.This course will explore the molecular/genetic mechanisms of non-
infectious and non-cancerous diseases.
Content: Lecture topics include: Biochemistry/mechanisms of the disorders associated carbohydrate, lipid,
protein, purine and pyrimidine metabolism. Inborn errors of metabolism and recombinant DNA
technology will also be discussed. Practicals or case studies will be used to facilitate application of
knowledge gained.
Assessment: Final mark consists of 40% formative and 60% summative marks Formative: 60% tests
(equally weighted) and 40% classmark Summative: 100% exam mark
HMBC3RP H1 H2 M1 M2 - Medical Biochemistry Research Project

(8L-12T-72P-8S-60H-0R-0F-0G-0A-15W-16C)
Prerequisite: 128 credit points at level II from the modules in the Biomedical Sciences Programme
Aim: To introduce students to the research milieu in the field of Medical Science and expose them to other
‘working scientists’.
Content: Designing, undertaking, interpretation and reporting on a small independent research project
Practicals: Relevant laboratory-based techniques
Assessment: A written project motivation (15%), oral presentation of results (10%) and a formal written
project report (75%).
DP Requirement: Attendance at all laboratory sessions.
HMBC3WH H2 M2 - Wound Healing

(14L-5T-18P-0S-37H-0R-0F-0G-6A-15W-8C)
Aim: Students will be introduced to the basics of wound healing, as well as the modern developments in
the understanding of wound healing
Content: Topics to be covered include: Introduction to the basic and biochemical principles involved in
wound healing. Factors regulating wound healing, with emphasis on the role of growth factors, cytokines
and various nutrients. Cell cycle, apoptosis (as they relate to wound repair). Complicating factors
(diabetes, scars, keloids and wound infection) Healing in specialised tissues (GIT, bone, skin)
Practicals: Practicals include: Wound care and basic first aid (sprains, fractures, burns). In vitro testing
models are used to assess the bodies response to different types of injury (mechanichal, thermal, chemical,
radiation). Cells are exposed to the above stresses and proteins (SDS-PAGE) and DNA (SCGE) are
analysed.
Assessment: A written test covering the content covered during the semester. Practicals will be assessed by
a comprehensive practical report at the end of the practical block. Assignments as determined by lecturer
HMBC7ET M2 - Environmental Toxicology

(32L-10T-36P-7S-60H-0R-0F-5G-10A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce students to naturally occurring and/or potentially hazardous environmental substances
and their harmful effects on biological systems.
Content: Topics covered include: fungal toxins and mycotoxicoses, plant toxins, animal toxins, drugs in
foods, pesticides and organ toxicology. The student will develop an understanding of the diseases
associated with exposure to certain substances, and the mechanisms by which these substances induce
146 Health Sciences
diseases.
Assessment: (60%), Year Mark (40%)
DP Requirement: Attendance at 80% total module time.
HMBC7LP MY - Lab-Based Research Project

(20L-0T-440P-32S-132H-0R-0F-0G-16A-26W-64C)
Aim: To improve the initiative, problem-solving ability, communication skills and technical expertise of
the candidate.
Content: The candidate, guided by experienced and productive scientists, will work on a laboratory-based
research project that is part of a larger integrated program.
Practicals: Laboratory-based module – will depend on research project allocated.
Assessment: Based largely on the compilation of a scientific paper and an oral presentation of the
experimental work done during the year on the research project. Your research potential (based on skill in
laboratory procedures, comprehension of and contribution to the project, and motivation towards advanced
studies) will be assessed. Evaluation of a mini-dissertation, literature review and preliminary presentations
will form part of the final mark.
DP Requirement: 100% attendance at seminars, Laboratory time at 50% total course time.
HMBC7MB M1 - Molecular Biol & Res Methodology

(64L-20T-80P-26S-120H-0R-0F-0G-10A-13W-32C)
Aim: To develop an understanding of biochemical processes involved in the pathogenesis of various
diseases, to ensure good and safe laboratory practice and to develop competence in carrying out
experimental work, recording and evaluating results.
Content: This module comprises a comprehensive biochemical techniques and applications course,
advanced molecular biology theory and presentation of journal articles. The biochemical techniques and
applications covered include the principles and practice of tissue culture, flow cytometry, HPLC,
microscopy (with special emphasis on immunochemical techniques), electrophoresis and western blotting
and PCR. Topics covered in Advanced Molecular Biology Theory include cell death mechanisms –
apoptosis/necrosis, mutagenesis, carcinogenesis and toxicology. Candidates will also present 2 recent
journal articles per year.
Practicals: Practicals will be run for each of the techniques taught.
Assessment: Exam 60%, Year Mark 40%
DP Requirement: 100% attendance at journal clubs and practicals, 80% attendance at lectures.
HMBC7PM M2 - Principles of Metabolism

(32L-10T-36P-7S-60H-0R-0F-5G-10A-13W-16C)
Aim: To develop an understanding of the integrated metabolic pathways in humans, their regulation and
the principles of enzyme control.
Content: The candidate will become familiar with the following topics: integrated metabolism, metabolism
in disease eg. diabetes, regulatory enzymes, metabolism in exercise and endocrine control of metabolism.
Assessment: Exam 60%, Year Mark 40%
DP Requirement: Attendance at 80% total module time.
HMBC8F1 - M Thesis Medical Biochemistry Full Time
HMBC8FS - M Thesis Medical Biochemistry Subseq Yr
HMBC8P1 - M Thesis Medical Biochemistry P/T Yr1
HMBC8PS - M Thesis Medical Biochemistry P/T Subseq Yr
HMBC9DY - PhD in Medical Biochemistry
HMBC9F1 - PhD in Medical Biochemistry Full-Time

Health Sciences 147
HMBC9FS - PhD in Medical Biochemistry Subseq Yr
HMBC9P1 - PhD in Medical Biochemistry P/T Yr1
HMBC9PS - PhD in Medical Biochemistry P/T Subseq Yr
HMBC9SY - PhD in Medical Biochemistry Subseq Yr
Physiology
HPHS111 W1 - Basic Human Physiology

(52L-4T-33P-0S-42H-21R-0F-0G-8A-15W-16C)
Aim: The student must demonstrate an understanding of the structure and function of the various organ
systems in the human body including their role in maintaining homoestatis.
Content: Introduction to basic and physical and chemical concepts; Introduction to cells, tissues,
homeostatic control mechanisms, nutrition, blood, metabolism and the basic structure and function of the
nervous, cardiovascular, respiratory, renal, gastrointestinal, endocrine and reproductive systems.
Practicals: Practicals: 11x3hrs weekly
Assessment: Continuous assessment (generated from assessment of practical reports, tutorials and theory
tests), 40%; one two-hour written paper, 60% of final mark If a student is absent from a test, a medical
certificate must be produced immediately on return to enable the student to be retested. A zero mark will
be otherwise allocated. The make-up test will be in the form of a viva.
DP Requirement: 90% practical, 100% test attendance. 40% achieved in the semester mark
HPHS112 W2 - Physiological Changes in Exercise & Training

(52L-4T-33P-0S-41H-22R-0F-0G-8A-15W-16C)
Aim: An integrated understanding of the role of the cardiorespiratory and muscular systems in exercise and
training.
Content: A study of different types of muscles and their role and changes during exercise and training;
Nerve cells and their function; The central nervous system; The autonomic nervous system and the special
senses with special reference to exercise and training,; A study of the heart, the major blood vessels and
blood circulation and regulation of cardiovascular function during rest, exercise and training; The
components and functions of the digestive system; The metabolic processes; nutrition and training.
Practicals: 8x3 hrs weekly
Assessment: Assessment: Continuous assessment (generated from assessment of practical reports, tutorials
and theory tests), l), 40%; one two-hour written paper, 60% of final mark. If a student is absent from a test,
a medical certificate must be produced immediately on return to enable the student to be retested. A zero
mark will be otherwise allocated. The make-up test will be in the form of a viva.
DP Requirement: 90% practical, 100% test attendance. 40% obtained for semester mark.
HPHS1NU - Physiology 1
(52L-0T-0P-0S-102H-0R-0F-0G-6A-15W-16C)
Aim: To provide core knowledge on the structure, principles of function and integrated control of
neuromuscular, blood and immune systems. To become familiar with the relevant core knowledge of the
structure and function of the human gastrointestinal system and blood. To equip students with relevant
core knowledge of the structure and function of the cardiovascular and respiratory systems of the human
body.
148 Health Sciences
Content: Homeostasis, Membrane, nerve and muscle physiology. Introduction to the functioning of the
nervous system, cardiovascular, respiratory, renal and gastrointestinal systems. Basic concepts of blood
and immunology. Endocrine and reproductive physiology.
Assessment: Coursework assessment: 3 class tests - each test will be 1 hour long. Each test will contribute
equally to the semester mark. If a student is absent from a test, a medical certificate must be produced
immediately on return to enable the student to be retested. A zero mark will otherwise be allocated. The
make-up test will be in the form of a viva. Examination assessment: 1 written 3 hour examination
DP Requirement: DP requirements: 40% obtained for the semester mark
HPHS221 W1 - Homeostasis
(52L-4T-33P-0S-41H-22R-0F-0G-8A-15W-16C)
Aim: On completion of this module students should be able to relate how the body maintains homeostasis
by use of the relevant bodily systems in health and disease. Students should also attain proficiency in
related practicals
Content: Structure and function of the components of the neuromuscular, respiratory, renal and
gastrointestinal system; Blood and body fluids, the regulation of extracellular fluid composition and
volume and in acid-base balance; Renal, respiratory and gastrointestinal adjustments in health and disease;
Metabolism of carbohydrates, proteins and lipids; Thermoregulation by physical and physiological
mechanism.
Practicals: Practicals: 1x3 hrs weekly
Assessment: Course work assessment: 2x1hr Theory test & 1x3hr practical test will constitute 40% of the
final module mark. If a student is absent from a test, a medical certificate must be produced immediately
on return to enable the student to be retested. A zero mark will otherwise be allocated. The make-up test
will be in the form of a viva Examination assessment: One 2 hr written paper will constitute 60% of the
final module mark
DP Requirement: 90% practical, 100% test attendance
HPHS222 W2 - Integration and Communication

(52L-4T-33P-0S-41H-22R-0F-0G-8A-15W-16C)
Aim: To study the integrated function of human organ systems in health and disease.
Content: A study of the anatomy and function of nerve cells, spinal cord, brain sympathetic and
parasympathetic nervous system; a study of the function of the special senses; disorders of the nervous
system. The structure of the heart and its function as a pump; the vascular system, blood composition and
function of its components; Blood pressure control and hypertension; Cardiovascular homeostasis in health
and disease. Structure of the endocrine glands, hormonal secretion and associated abnormalities.
Reproduction and hormonal control of sexual functions.
Practicals: 1x3hrs weekly
Assessment: Course work assessment: 2x1 hr theory tests and 1x3 practical test will constitute 4)% of the
final module mark. If a student is absent from a test, a medical certificate must be produced immediately
on return to enable the student to be retested. A zero mark will otherwise be allocated. The make-up test
will be in the form of a viva. Examination assessment: One 2 hr written paper will constitute 60% of the
final module mark
HPHS231 W2 - Foundations of Physiology

(52L-12T-78P-10S-140H-20R-0F-0G-8A-15W-32C)
Prerequisite: BIOL103W1, CHEM110W1, CHEM120W2, PHYS131W1, PHYS132W2, BIMI120W2
neuromuscular, gastrointestinal, blood and immune systems
Content: Homeostasis and homeostatic mechanisms; Cellular transport systems and chemical messengers;
Neuron structure and physiology, signal transduction, intraneuronal and interneuronal signal
transformation and transmission; muscle classification, structure, chemistry, physiological roles and
mechanisms of contraction; Autonomic nervous system: structure, components, chemistry and
physiological roles; Circulating body fluids; Haemostasis; Immune mechanisms in health and disease;
Health Sciences 149
Structure, function and regulation of the gastrointestinal system

Practicals: 2x3hrs weekly, 5x45 min lectures weekly
Assessment: Course work assessment: 2x1 hour theory tests and 2x 1 hour practical tests per semester will
contribute to 40% of final module mark. Examination assessment: One 2 hour written paper will constitute
60% of final module mark. If a student is absent from a test, a medical certificate must be produced
immediately on return to enable the student to be retested. A zero mark will be otherwise allocated. The
make-up test will be in the form of a viva. Duly performed requirements include a minimum of 40% year
mark, 90% practical attendance and 100% test attendance.
HPHS232 W2 - Cardiorespiratory and Renal Physiology

(52L-12T-78P-10S-140H-20R-0F-0G-8A-15W-32C)
Prerequisite: BIOL103W1; CHEM110W1; CHEM120W2; PHYS131W1; PHYS132W2; BIMI120W2
cardiovascular, respiratory and renal systems.
Content: Electrical and mechanical activity of the heart; haemodynamics: the vascular system,
microcirculation and lymphatics; the peripheral circulation and circulation through special regions;
cardiovascular regulatory mechanisms in health and disease; Structure, function and regulation of the
respiratory system. Structure and function of the renal system: Mechanism of urine formation and
micturation; Homeostatic role of the kidneys in body-fluid, electrolyte and acid-base regulation, renal
function in disease and drug handling.
Practicals: 2x3hrs weekly
Assessment: Coursework assessment: 2x 1 hour theory tests and 2x 1 hour practical tests per semester will
make-up test will be in the form of a viva.
DP Requirement: 90% practical, 100% test attendance. 40% obtained in the class mark
HPHS2NU - Physiology 2
(52L-0T-0P-0S-102H-0R-0F-0G-6A-15W-16C)
Aim: On completion of this module, students should be able to:- Understand the concept fluid and
electrolyte balance Be familiar with the cardiovascular and respiratory systems and to understand how
these mechanisms work in health and disease To understand the concepts of immunology and how
immunological mechanisms work To comprehend the pathophysiology of diabetes mellitus To appreciate
the role of nutrition in health and disease
Content: Case-based study of selected physiology themes such as immunity, cardiovascular and
respiratory systems, nutrition, fluid and electrolyte balance. Diabetes mellitus.
Assessment: Coursework assessment: 3 class tests – each test will be 1 hour long and contribute equally to
the semester mark Examination assessment: 1 written 3 hour examination paper Total module mark = 40%
semester mark + 60% Exam Mark
DP Requirement: 40% achieved in the semester mark
HPHS322 W2 - Human Genetics Applied Physiology

(52L-12T-78P-10S-140H-20R-0F-0G-8A-15W-32C)
Prerequisite: HPHS 231W1, HPHS 232W2, BIOC201W1, BIOC202W2
Aim: On completion of the module students will demonstrate : Knowledge and understanding of normal
body metabolism and thermoregulation and the adaptive physiological changes that occur during stress
due to environment, exercise and disease. Knowledge and understanding of chromosomal basis of
heredity, human and population genetics and genetic diseases. Knowledge and understanding of
immunological defence mechanisms
Content: To study the principles of genetic function and integrative body function. Content: Metabolism
during well-fed, fasting, starving and diseased states; Thermoregulation and the consequences of the
breakdown thereof; nutrition, malnutrition and the balanced diet; Environmental factors in health and
150 Health Sciences
disease; Stress; Exercise; regulation and interaction of multiple systems; Integrative and adaptive
mechanisms of physiological functions in health and disease; Chromosomal basis of heredity and
chromosomal disorders; Population genetics; Genetic diseases and their treatment.
Practicals: 2X3hrs weekly
Assessment: Coursework assessment: 2x 1 hour theory tests and 2x 1 hour practical tests per semester will
make-up test will be in the form of a viva.
DP Requirement: 90% practical, 100% test attendance.
HPHS331 W1 - Neuroendocrine Physiology

(52L-12T-78P-10S-140H-20R-0F-0G-8A-15W-32C)
Prerequisite: HPHS231W1, HPHS232W2, BIOC201W1, BIOC202W2
Aim: On completion of this module, students should be able to:- Demonstrate a knowledge and
understanding of the nervous system and its regulatory function, a knowledge and understanding of the
endocrine and reproductive systems and their function
Content: The peripheral nervous system, The somatosensory system and special senses, Spinal
organization of motor function and its control by the cerebral cortex, cerebellum and basal ganglia,
Reticular activating system and sleep, The autonomic nervous system and its control, The limbic system,
the cerebral cortex and higher functions of the nervous system. General principles of neuroendocrine
hormone regulation: synthesis, release, transport, mechanism of action and regulation of metabolism by
the thyroid gland, endocrine pancreas and the adrenal gland. Hormonal control of calcium and phosphate
metabolism. Development and function of the male and female reproductive system.
Practicals: 2 x 3 hrs weekly
Assessment: Coursework assessment: 2x 1 hour theory and 2x1 hour practical tests per semester will
contribute 40% of the final module mark. Examination assessment: 1 written 2 hour paper will constitute
60% of the final module mark. If a student is absent from a test, a medical certificate must be produced
make up test will be in the form of a viva
DP Requirement: 40% obtained in the semester mark; 90% practical attendance and 100% test attendance
HPHS701 W1 - Specialized Physiological Techniques

(15L-15T-100P-0S-30H-0R-0F-0G-0A-15W-16C)
Prerequisite: B. Sc or B Med Sc degree with minimum 60% pass in level 3 physiology.
Aim: On completion of the module the student has to be able to demonstrate a knowledge of the theoretical
and practical basis of electrolyte, trace element, blood pressure analysis and protein and lipid analysis.
Content: Radioisotope techniques; ELISA techniques; Electrolyte, protein and lipid analysis; Haematology
and Aggregometry, Atomic Absorption Spectrometry and trace metal analysis; Pharmacophysiological
Screening Tests; Animal diet formulation; Histological Techniques
Assessment: Entirely by continuous assessment. Summative : One 2 hour written paper will constitute the
final module mark.
DP Requirement: 100% practical attendance
HPHS710 - Ancillary research techn. for Life Sciences

(15L-15T-100P-0S-30H-0R-0F-0G-0A-15W-16C)
Content: On completion of this module the student should demonstrate a knowledge of core aspects of
scientific research such as statistics, scientific writing, and the use of different biological models in
research.
Assessment: Coursework: Practical reports and attendance and 1 X hr statistics test will form 40 % final
module mark Examination: One 2 hour written paper will constitute 60% of final module mark.
DP Requirement: minimum of 40% year mark, 90% practical attendance and 100 % test attendance
Health Sciences 151
HPHS711 W1 - Integrative Physiology

(20L-40T-0P-0S-78H-20R-0F-0G-2A-15W-16C)
Prerequisite: B.Sc or B. Med SC degree with minimum 60% pass in level 3 Physiology modules.
Aim: To provide an advanced integrated study of selected topics in exercise, respiratory and cardiovascular
physiology, cytology and neurophysiology.
Content: Selected essays on exercise, respiratory, cardiovascular physiology, cytology and
neurophysiology
Assessment: Coursework : Assessment of assignments will form 40 % final module mark Examination:
One 2 hour written paper will constitute 60% of final module mark.
DP Requirement: 100% assignment submission
HPHS721 W2 - Applied Physiology

(20L-20T-0P-0S-98H-20R-0F-0G-2A-15W-16C)
Prerequisite: BSc or B.Med S degree with minimum 60% pass in level 3 Physiology modules
Aim: On completion of the module the student has to be demonstrate a detailed knowledge of applied
aspects of immunology, endocrinology, gastrointestinal, renal and reproductive physiology
Content: To provide an advanced integrated study in applied aspects of immunology, endocrinology,
gastrointestinal, renal and reproductive physiology. It entails a review and presentation on selected topics
in Applied physiology.
Assessment: Coursework : Assessment of written seminar and presentation will form 40 % final module
mark Examination: One 2 hour written paper will constitute 60% of final module mark.
DP Requirement: 100% seminar submission and presentation
HPHS731 W2 - Pathophysiology
(20L-20T-0P-20S-80H-18R-0F-0G-2A-15W-16C)
Aim: On completion of the module the student has to be demonstrate a knowledge of selected aspects in
pathophysiology, neuroendocrine control mechanisms, nutrition and metabolism.
Content: It entails a review on selected topics in pathophysiology, neuroendocrine control mechanisms,
nutrition and metabolism.
Assessment: Continuous assessment (class record), 40%; one two-hour written paper, 60% of final mark.
DP Requirement: 100% assignment submission
HPHS741 W2 - Physiology Honours Research Project

(20L-60T-220P-60S-100H-20R-0F-0G-0A-26W-48C)
Aim: After completion of the module students will be expected to report on results they have obtained
during a research project and should be able to critically analyse data and compare their results to known
literature in the field
Content: Research project in any one of the following Physiology fields: Cardiovascular, Respiratory,
Exercise Physiology, Endocrinology, Renal, Environmental or Nutritional/Gastro-intestinal Physiology,
Neurophysiology and Immunology.
Assessment: Mini dissertation or project write-up (65% of final mark) Research performance during the
year (15% of final mark ) End of year presentation of results (20% of final mark )
HPHS8FY - Masters Research in Physiology
HPHS8SY - Masters Research in Physiology Subseq Yr
HPHS9FY - PhD Research in Physiology
HPHS9SY - PhD Research in Physiology Subseq Yr
MPH2NU1 M2 - Physiology (nursing??)

152 Health Sciences
Nursing
Offered in the School of Nursing
NURS100 HY - Fundamental Nursing

(0L-0T-64P-60S-112H-40R-44F-0G-0A-30W-32C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To provide students with an introduction to basic nursing care of individuals, groups and
ommunities.
Content: Deals with the self care needs/basic human needs/activities of living of individuals and families,
both healthy and sick of all ages. The focus of the course is the wellbeing of individuals, groups and
communities. Includes assessment of self care, analysis of need for assistance, formulation of a care plan,
implementation and evaluation of nursing interventions. Also focuses on professional writing skills.
Practicals: Assessment of self-care individuals and groups in settings for healthy persons, introduction to
hospitals. Clinical skills related to basic nursing care and the elderly. Personal safety as a health
practitioner is the focus of this course.
Assessment: 2 tests, 7 projects, 1 two and a half-hour examination paper and one practical examination
DP Requirement: Rule NURS4 (b) shall apply –candidates must attend at least 75% of all classes, 100% in
NURS101 HC - Portfolio Development

(16L-36T-50P-0S-54H-0R-0F-0G-4A-0W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: This module is aimed at people who want to develop a portfolio with a view to obtaining access to an
educational programme or credit in a specific programme.
Content: Process of Portfolio development (reflection on previous learning; selecting significant learning,
writing Formal Learning Outcomes; constructing a Summary transcript) Collecting evidence. Quality of
evidence to prepare for making a claim. Assembling the Portfolio
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: NONE
DP Requirement: Rule NURS4 (b) shall apply –candidates must attend at least 75% of all classes.
NURS102 H2 - Principles & Methods of Teaching & Evaluation

(52L-26T-10P-0S-48H-20R-0F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: Registration as a nurse
Aim: To introduce the student to different approaches to teaching.
Content: Teaching Theories. Teaching methods and technology. Design of an educational programme and
module. Classroom and clinical student evaluation. The practical implications of teaching principle, and
designing lessons...
Practicals: 10 teaching lessons and 5 clinical demonstrations
Assessment: One 2-hour paper.
NURS103 H2 - Theories of Learning for Health Professional

(52L-26T-0P-0S-56H-20R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: NURS102
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To expose students to current debates in nursing education.
Content: Exploration of current trends influencing health professional education such as NQF, Open and
Distance learning Technology in Higher Education , Quality Assurance in Higher Education, and special
didactics for specific disciplines.
Health Sciences 153
Practicals: 24 hours in clinical skills laboratory.

NURS110 HY - General Nursing 1

(104L-0T-52P-0S-56H-0R-428F-0G-0A-40W-64C)
Prerequisite: Enrolment as a nurse and fundamental nursing
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To upgrade the knowledge and skills of enrolled nurses in the area of general nursing and
professional practice.
Content: Nursing care of patients with common diseases or trauma along the development continuum
including children, adolescents and adults incorporating the elderly. Pharmacology, infection control,
professional practice and ethos of nursing are also incorporated throughout. This is based on case studies.
Practicals: 20 hours of individualised student accompaniment
Assessment: 4 tests, 1 clinical exam, 3-hour paper theoretical exam
NURS120 HY - Mental Health Nursing 1

(104L-8T-26P-0S-56H-20R-100F-0G-6A-30W-32C)
Prerequisite: Registration as a general nurse
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare nurses for community-based mental health care.
Content: Introduction to psychiatric mental health illness and comprehensive care. Psychiatric assessment
and treatment. Nursing care of clients with emotional and psychiatric problems in a Primary Health Care
setting. Psychopharmacology. Mental retardation and related nursing care.
Practicals: In community and primary health care settings
Assessment: One 3-hour paper. One practical examination.
NURS130 - Nursing Management 1

(104L-26T-0P-0S-112H-78R-0F-0G-0A-0W-32C)
Prerequisite: Must be a registered nurse.
Aim: To introduce middle level managers to the processes and structures involved in managing a clinic.
Content: This is a case based course, which centres on the role of a person managing a clinic. A
comprehensive study of aspects such as human resource management, quality assurance, community
outreach, problem-solving and conflict resolution, team and group dynamic, and communication is dealt
with in an integrative manner.
Practicals: Organise open day in community.
Assessment: Two tests, two assignments, one case study, on 3-hour exam.
DP Requirement: Rule NURS4 (b) shall apply –candidates must attend at least 75% of all classes, save
those from which they have been officially excused.
NURS200 HC - Mental Health Nursing 2

(104L-8T-26P-0S-112H-20R-44F-0G-6A-30W-32C)
Prerequisite: Registration as a general nurse
Aim: To prepare nurses for community-based mental health care.
Content: The principles and practice of psychosocial rehabilitation of people with a psychiatric disability.
Vocational, social, personal and educational aspects of rehabilitation. The problem of stigma. The primary
prevention of mental illness
Practicals: In community and primary health care settings
Assessment: Two 3-hour papers, of which one is an integrative paper covering both year courses. One
practical examination.
154 Health Sciences
the clinical setting, save those from which they have been officially excused
NURS201 HC - Service Learning in Nursing

(0L-8T-0P-0S-40H-0R-112F-0G-0A-0W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To enrich practice with intensive theoretical scrutiny.
Content: In this module students are given tasks in health services for the benefit of the service and the
community in a structured way to allow them to develop specific skills and knowledge. Tasks may be in
the field of education management or clinical practice.
Practicals: 100 hours in task completion.
Assessment: Written project report and portfolio.
NURS204 H2 - Oncological Conditions

(0L-0T-0P-26S-64H-20R-50F-0G-0A-13W-16C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To study the most common oncological conditions and their treatment.
Content: Cancer disorders of all body systems in all age groups. Treatment modalities and the nursing
implications. Pharmacology as applied to oncology and treatment side-effects. Common oncological
emergencies. Home-based, hospice and hospital based care. Special issues in paediatric oncology nursing.
Legal and ethical aspects of care. Principles of palliative care.
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: 1 two-hour paper
NURS205 H1 - Foundations of Oncology

(0L-0T-0P-26S-64H-20R-50F-0G-0A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: General Nursing 1 and 2
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To introduce nurses to the basic principles of oncology.
Content: The principles of cancer biology and pathophysiology. Epidemiology, staging and prevention.
Psychosocial and economic aspects of illness and care. Oncology in the formal and informal health
systems.
Practicals: NONE
NURS207 HC - Unit Management and Teaching

(40L-0T-14P-0S-0H-0R-106F-0G-0A-0W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare first line nurse managers
Content: This module focuses on the leadership role of the nurse as unit manager. It deals with the cardinal
aspects of first line management such as supervision, financial and human resource management and
clinical teaching. It also aims at improving the management of the health care information system at this
level.
Practicals: Assignments in work settings.
Assessment: One 2 hour paper and a unit portfolio
Health Sciences 155
NURS211 H2 - Critical Care Nursing A

(0L-16T-40P-28S-136H-20R-0F-0G-0A-13W-24C)
Prerequisite: General Nursing 1 and 2.
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare clinical nurse specialists in critical care.
Content: A case and competency based curriculum built around the competencies of the nursing process
(assessment, diagnosis, planning, implementation and evaluation) and the body systems of an individual
(respiratory, cardio-vascular, neuro, renal, fluid/electrolyte). The appropriate scientific foundations in
pathophysiology, pharmacology, microbiology and social sciences will be incorporated into the
competencies.
Practicals: Comprehensive, individualised nursing care of at least 12 patients in critical care settings
covering various disciplines
Assessment: 1two-hour paper and 1 practical examination.
NURS212 H2 - Critical Care Nursing B

(0L-16T-40P-28S-136H-20R-0F-0G-0A-13W-24C)
Prerequisite: General Nursing 1 and 2 and Critical Care Nursing A
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare clinical nurse specialists in critical care
Content: A case and competency based curriculum built around the competencies of the nursing process
(assessment, diagnosis, planning, implementation and evaluation) and the body systems of an individual
(respiratory, cardio-vascular, neuro, renal, fluid/electrolyte). The appropriate scientific foundations in
pathophysiology, pharmacology, microbiology and social sciences will be incorporated into the
competencies.
Practicals: Comprehensive, individualised nursing care of at least 13 patients in critical care settings
covering various disciplines.
Assessment: 1two-hour paper and 1 practical examination.
NURS217 HC - Nursing Research Theory

(6L-12T-0P-0S-90H-20R-15F-12G-5A-0W-16C)
Aim: To introduce students to the research process in nursing.
Content: The research process in nursing. Data collection methods and instruments. Research design and
sampling. Data analysis and description. Writing research reports. Evaluation research and quality control.
Assessment: one 2-hour paper.
NURS219 HC - Nursing Philosophy

(52L-26T-0P-0S-58H-20R-0F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce nurses to the philosophy of the profession.
Content: The characteristics of nursing and the professional nurse. Models, theories and philosophies of
nursing. The historical development of nursing as an academic discipline and a profession. Nursing ethics.
Assessment: 1 two-hour paper.
156 Health Sciences
NURS221 H1 - Curr Devel for Health Programmes

(52L-26T-10P-0S-56H-10R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: NURS103 and NURS102
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare a tutor competent in the process of developing a curriculum., and to introduce educators
to management of a college
Content: The process of curriculum development. Different types of curricula and their underlying
philosophy. The system of NQF and its implications for professional education. Introduction to
programme evaluation and quality improvement in higher education, and college administration.
Practicals: (A group project) and design a curriculum and 10 hours Educational Administration spent at an
approved Nursing Education Institution.
NURS223 HC - Advanced Clinical Practice

(40L-0T-10P-0S-0H-0R-110F-0G-0A-15W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To equip unit managers with advanced clinical skills
Content: This module addresses the advanced clinical skills which a generalist unit manager needs in order
to take the leadership in a unit. It has a compulsory component which focuses on high care and emergency
nursing, as well as aspects of community nursing. Students can then choose another component (mental
health or adult and child health). It gives additional knowledge and skills, without focusing on just one
specialty area.
Practicals: Assignments in work settings
Assessment: One 2-hour paper and clinical portfolio.
NURS224 H2 - Issues in Health Professional Education

(52L-26T-0P-0S-56H-20R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Aim: To expose students to current debates in nursing education.
Content: Exploration of current trends influencing health professional education such as NQF, Open and
Distance Learning Technology in Higher Education, Quality Assurance in Higher Education, and special
didactics for specific disciplines.
Practicals: 24 hours in clinical skills laboratory.
NURS230 HY - Preventative and Promotive Health

(0L-0T-65P-50S-50H-15R-140F-0G-0A-34W-32C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NURS100
Aim: To experience the process of entering a community for health promotion, illness prevention, and
implementing health promotion scientifically.
Content: The nature of nursing, health and illness. Health promotion and illness prevention in communities
and families. The process of community assessment and individual health screening, problem
identification and analysis through the life span with special emphasis on the young child, and community
involvement.
Practicals: Students are placed in communities, where they have to implement a health promotion/illness
prevention project. Students complete a compulsory course in HIV/AIDS counselling.
Assessment: 4 projects, 1 two and a half-hour theory exam, one practical project, and one problem-solving
examination.
Health Sciences 157
DP Requirement: Rule NURS4 (b) shall apply-candidates must attend at least 75% of all classes, 100% in
NURS231 HC - Primary Care 1

(104L-0T-52P-40S-0H-0R-124F-0G-0A-40W-32C)
Prerequisite: Community Development or Primary Health Care
Corequisite: See Prerequisite
Aim: To equip PHC nurses to diagnose and treat minor and common ailments in children and adults.
Content: Principles of health assessment, emergency care, diagnosis and treatment of minor , common and
chronic illnesses in adults and children. All systems as well as reproductive health and communicable
diseases will be dealt with. Pharmacology and the EDL will be integrated comprehensively. Ethical and
medico-legal aspects will be addressed.
Practicals: Supervised sessions in health services, and workbook completed in a PHC setting.
Assessment: Two 2-hour papers. One paper will deal specifically with pharmacology. One practical
examination.
NURS232 HC - Primary Care 2

(104L-0T-52P-40S-4H-0R-120F-0G-0A-40W-32C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To equip PHC nurses to diagnose and treat minor and common ailment sin children and adults.
Content: Principles of health assessment, emergency care, diagnosis and treatment of minor , common and
chronic illnesses in adults and children. All systems as well as reproductive health and communicable
diseases will be dealt with. Pharmacology and the EDL will be integrated comprehensively. Ethical and
medico-legal aspects will be addressed.
Practicals: Supervised sessions in health services, and workbook completed in a PHC setting.
Assessment: Two 2-hour papers. One paper will deal specifically with pharmacology. One practical
examination.
NURS233 HC - Foundations of Neonatology

(26L-0T-0P-0S-56H-0R-78F-0G-0A-15W-16C)
Prerequisite: Midwifery
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare midwives and critical care nurses to work with critically ill neonates.
Content: The principles of neonatal embryology and neonatal pathophysiology Epidemiology of neonatal
conditions. Common and serious conditions of body systems affecting the neonate: prevention, diagnosis,
treatment and care. Resuscitation of the neonate. Pharmacology for the neonate.
Practicals: Exposure to low-care, high-care, normal nursery and caesarean section theatre.
Assessment: One 2 hour paper and one practical examination.
NURS234 H2 - Trauma Nursing

(0L-16T-13P-13S-56H-20R-38F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Corequisite: Advanced cardiac life support / advanced paediatric life support
Aim: To prepare a trauma nurse specialist.
Content: The phases of work of a trauma nurse will be dealt with in this course: out-of-service assessment
and intervention; transport, triage in trauma unit, assessment, intervention and preparation for transfer. All
types of trauma and medical emergencies will be included, both in rural and urban settings.
158 Health Sciences
Practicals: Emergency nursing care of the client in the pre-hospital and hospital setting
Assessment: 1 two-hour paper and 1 practical examination
NURS235 HC - Neonatal Nursing

(26L-0T-0P-0S-56H-0R-78F-0G-0A-15W-16C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare a clinical nurse specialist in neonatal critical care.
Content: Creating a safe environment for the neonate, physically and psychosocially. Nutrition and fluid
and electrolyte balance in the neonate. Transporting of neonates. Ensuring continuity of care between
different service levels. Caring for the family of the high risk and dying neonate Management of a neonatal
unit. Consultation and teaching role of the neonatal nurse specialist.
Practicals: Exposure to low-care, high care, intensive care, nursery and labour ward.
Assessment: 1 two- hour paper and one practical examination.
NURS240 HY - Nursing Management 2

(104L-26T-0P-0S-150H-40R-0F-0G-0A-30W-32C)
Aim: To prepare mid-level managers who can manage a small hospital.
Content: This is a case based course, which centres on the role of a person in charge of a small hospital. A
comprehensive study is made of requisitioning a new facility, accreditation and inspection,participative
management, strategic planning and organisational climate and change. The teaching aspect of health
services and information systems are also dealt with.
Practicals: practical assignments and instruction in institutional and extra-institutional service - 90 hours,
assignment in a clinical setting, situational analysis in a hospital nursing management setting.
Assessment: 2 tests, 1 case study, 5 assignments, two 3-hour exams.
NURS250 HY - Advanced Mental Health Nursing 1

(25L-10T-20P-0S-221H-40R-0F-0G-4A-30W-32C)
Prerequisite: Mental Health Nursing 1 and 2.
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare a clinical nurse specialist with advanced skills and knowledge.
Content: The diagnosis, treatment, rehabilitation and care of complex psychiatric cases referred to them.
Deal with treatment and rehabilitation resistant conditions or clients. Consultancy to Primary Health Care
service providers Psycho-education and treatment and rehabilitation protocols. Community-based
rehabilitation of psychiatrically disabled people.
Practicals: Completion of assignments based in workplace.
Assessment: 1 three-hour paper. One practical examination.
NURS260 HY - General Nursing 2

(104L-0T-52P-0S-56H-0R-428F-0G-0A-40W-64C)
Prerequisite: General Nursing 1
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To complete the upgrading of enrolled nurses to professional nurses and teaches unit administration.
Content: Nursing Care of patients requiring intensive care. Disaster nursing. Ethos and Professional
Practice and unit administration is included.
Health Sciences 159
Practicals: 10 hours of individualised student accompaniment

Assessment: 4 tests, 1 clinical exam, three-hour paper theoretical exam
NURS262 HY - Community Health Nursing

(84L-0T-86P-54S-56H-4R-36F-0G-0A-30W-32C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare nurses for rendering aggregate care.
Content: A community and problem-based course. Environmental health care Infectious diseases
Individual and family focused primary health care Community assessment and planning Health care
systems Delivery of primary health care Epidemiology.
Practicals: 240 hours in various community settings
Assessment: Two 2-hour papers. One practical examination.
NURS300 HY - Advanced Midwifery

(0L-0T-0P-52S-228H-40R-0F-0G-0A-26W-32C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare midwives with additional skills and knowledge.
Content: The assessment, management and health education of women with high risk pregnancy, labour or
peuperium, and termination of pregnancy. Skills in referral, consulting and managing midwifery
programmes in urban and rural areas will be included. Epidemiology and context of such services and
ethical problems.
Practicals: Antenatal, labour, postnatal and neonatal units
Assessment: 1 two- hour papers and one practical examination.
the clinical setting, save those from which they have been officially excused
NURS301 H1 - General Nursing

(0L-0T-20P-156S-100H-12R-192F-0G-0A-15W-48C)
Prerequisite: Nursing 200Y, Anatomy, four social science courses.
Aim: To master the nursing care of clients in general hospitals with common illnesses.
Content: Problems of patients in all developmental stages in general nursing settings will be analysed
based on a theoretical framework. The physiological, pharmacological, social, psychological and other
implications will be explored and possible solutions suggested and tested. Mastery (of clinical procedures
needed in these clinical areas will be demonstrated. Application of research to clinical practice will be
done.
Practicals: Nursing care in all types of wards in general hospitals.
Assessment: 1st Semester. one practical examination and a problem solving examination.. 2nd Semester.
One 3-hour paper; one practical examination.
NURS303 H1 - Issues in Critical Care Nursing

(0L-0T-0P-26S-80H-0R-54F-0G-0A-15W-16C)
Aim: Expose the nurse to analysis of the context of critical care in SA.
Content: A care and competency based curriculum built around the contingency, task environmental
competencies of the Critical Care Nurse (family, team and services competencies, as well as community
and professional competencies). It will incorporate critical care issues in rural and urban settings, as well
160 Health Sciences
as all contextual factors.

Practicals: Work in various critical care settings analysing the context from which patients come
Assessment: 1 two-hour paper and one project.
NURS307 HC - Facilitation of Recognition of Prior Learning

(26L-20T-30P-26S-20H-32R-0F-0G-6A-0W-16C)
Prerequisite: An Education qualification
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: This module is aimed at preparing educators to facilitate the RPL process in an institution as an
administrator, advisor and/or assessor.
Content: Theoretical and Philosophical underpinings; Historical background, Benefits of RPL; Process of
RPL; RPL Policy Formulation (Institutional). Orientation of Exit Level Outcomes; Design an RPL
programme for a specific Target Group, Assessment methods; Portfolio Development process and product
and Portfolio Assessment; Quality Assurance in RPL.
Practicals: RPL advising and institutional policy development, RPL assessment and Own Portfolio
Development.
Assessment: 1 Two hour paper and 3 practical Case Presentations
NURS308 H2 - Research in Nursing

(0L-26T-0P-26S-56H-20R-27F-0G-5A-26W-16C)
Prerequisite: Nursing 230Y
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To allow students to work through the research process.
Content: This course uses an experiential approach to facilitate students understanding of the research
process, ability to carry out own research and the utilisation of research in nursing. The course is
implemented as an experience that takes the students through the activities carrying out a research project
from proposal to the reporting of a completed project.
Practicals: Complete a research project.
Assessment: One two-hour paper and one research project.
NURS310 HY - Advanced Mental Health Nursing 2

(25L-10T-20P-0S-221H-40R-0F-0G-4A-30W-32C)
Prerequisite: Advanced Mental Health Nursing 1.
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare a nurse specialist to give leadership in District Mental Health Care.
Content: The diagnosis, treatment and care of children and families with mental health problems. Service
planning and management. Programme evaluation. Planning, implementation and evaluation of primary
prevention programmes for mental illness in community and primary health care settings. Integrating
psychiatric/mental health care into the District Health Service.
Practicals: Completion of assignments based in workplace.
Assessment: 2 three-hour papers, of which one is an integrative paper covering the work of both years. one
practical examination.
NURS311 HC - International Nursing

(0L-18T-12P-0S-30H-0R-100F-0G-0A-0W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To involve nurses in comparative health.
Health Sciences 161
Content: In this module students will be exposed to the health care system of a foreign country, and
assisted in analyzing specific aspects of that system in comparison with their own. This will include
service delivery and human resource development (education) as well as the wider context of the service.
Students will be prepared for the international experience, given tasks to complete during the experience,
and assisted with analysis of information after the exposure.
Practicals: 72 hours in a foreign health service.
Assessment: Portfolio and written project.
NURS313 HC - Administration in Nursing Units

(0L-0T-0P-24S-20H-12R-20F-0G-4A-0W-8C)
Prerequisite: Nursing 301
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To enable learners to manage a health care unit, whether in a hospital or a community setting.
Content: Firstly line human and material resource management, managing ethical dilemmas, and
developing clients and staff.
Practicals: Placement in a unit as first line manager, with a mentor.
Assessment: An individual project.
NURS319 HC - Nursing Research Project

(8L-20T-0P-0S-288H-0R-0F-0G-0A-13W-32C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To allow students to practice their research skills
Content: Students are required to complete a mini research project individually or in small groups,
working with health services staff. They work through the total process from proposal to report stage.
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: A research project.
NURS330 HY - Oncological & Palliative Nursing

(0L-0T-0P-52S-148H-20R-100F-0G-0A-26W-32C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To produce a clinical nurse specialist in oncological and palliative care nursing.
Content: Planning and implementation of holistic and comprehensive specialized care for people with
Cancer and their families. Dealing with specific problems such as pain, nutrition,
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: 2 two-hour papers. One practical examination.
NURS331 H1 - Nursing 301

(0L-0T-20P-156S-100H-12R-192F-0G-0A-15W-48C)
Prerequisite: Nursing 200Y, Anatomy, four social science courses.
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To master the nursing care of clients in general hospitals with common illnesses.
Content: Problems of patients in all developmental stages in general nursing settings will be analysed
based on a theoretical framework. The physiological, pharmacological, social, psychological and other
implications will be explored and possible solutions suggested and tested. Mastery (of clinical procedures
needed in these clinical areas will be demonstrated. Application of research to clinical practice will be
162 Health Sciences
done.
Practicals: Nursing care in all types of wards in general hospitals.
Assessment: 1st Semester. one practical examination and a problem solving examination.. 2nd Semester.
One 3-hour paper; one practical examination.
DP Requirement: Rule NURS4 (b) shall apply-candidates must attend at least 75% of all classes,100% in
NURS341 - Managing Learning Organisations

(42L-0T-45P-0S-43H-0R-4F-26G-0A-14W-16C)
Prerequisite: Nursing (Clinical Specialisation or Education or Management) at NQF Level 5C. Computer
Literacy.
Aim: Learners credited with this module should be able to lead organisational learning in the health sector
and therefore contribute to enhanced personal and health sector organisation development for quality
patient outcomes.
Content: To demonstrate a critical understanding of learning organisation theories, principles and
approaches including emerging issues within the context of human resource management in the South
African health sector. To critically discuss the commonly cited key factors for successful building of a
learning organisation, and challenges facing learning organisation change agents within the current health
sector context.
NURS342 - Evaluation of Health Care Programmes

(39L-20T-15P-0S-30H-0R-0F-30G-26A-14W-16C)
Prerequisite: Registration as a professional nurse
Aim: Learners credited with this module are able to: conduct a systematic and comprehensive evaluation
of health programmes aimed at improving the health of the people.
Content: Analyse and evaluate models of progammes evaluation with specific reference to their relevance
for the South African health and social context. Plan and implement a locally driven evaluation of a health
care programme. Conduct a comprehensive review of literature related to global and local policy and its
influence on local health prolicies and programmes. Work with colleagues in the dissemination of
research-based evaluation data to relevant audiences.
Assessment: Seminars, projects (individual and group) to promote writing presentation and interpersonal
skills and group discussions on contextual variable affecting health care delivery.
NURS401 HC - Psychiatric Nursing

(0L-0T-65P-75S-84H-30R-226F-0G-0A-15W-48C)
Prerequisite: Nursing 301 and 302 and Physiology
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare students to assist clients and families with mental health problems.
Content: A study of problems of persons with psychiatric disorders and their families and community
based on clinical examples. The pharmacological treatment and psycho-social rehabilitation will receive
particular attention. The process of problem-solving will form the basis of course. A community based
experience will be used to study the problems and management of families and communities, and the role
of the community health nurse in address these problems in partnership with the community.
Practicals: Exposure to mental health care, mainly in community settings.
Assessment: 2 three-hour papers; two practical examinations, 2 problem-solving exams, 2 group projects, 2
individual projects.
NURS403 HW - Primary Health Care

(0L-22T-0P-0S-24H-6R-104F-0G-4A-6W-16C)
Prerequisite: Nursing 301 and 302
Health Sciences 163
Aim: To enable learners to manage health problems of individuals and families at Primary Health Care
settings, and work with a multi-sectoral team in such settings.
Content: Primary Health Care philosophy and implementation. Maternal and Child health care,
immunisation programmes, diagnosis and treatment of minor and common illnesses and the use of the
Essential Drug list, nutritional status assessment, health education, occupational health.
Practicals: Practice in Primary Health Care clinics and visit occupational health settings.
Assessment: One 2 hour paper and one practical examination.
NURS405 HC - Midwifery
(0L-0T-65P-75S-84H-30R-226F-0G-0A-15W-48C)
Prerequisite: Nursing 301 and 302 and Physiology.
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare students to care for a pregnant woman and her family during pregnancy, labour and the
post-natal period.
Content: A study of normal and abnormal pregnancy, labour, puerperium and the neonate, based on case
studies from clinical settings. Problems encountered will be analysed, drawing on biomedical and social
sciences. Mastery of midwifery procedures needed in these areas will be expected. Professional practice
will be studied in terms of ethical dilemmas, using ethical theory, and legal and professional guidelines.
The history and current issues facing the profession will be analysed.
Practicals: Exposure to and practice in antenatal, labour, post-natal care and neonatal units.
Assessment: 1 three-hour paper; one practical examination, a problem-solving examination and a year
mark
NURS700 HY - Nursing Management (Second Year)

(0L-26T-0P-0S-150H-40R-104F-0G-0A-30W-32C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare first line nurse managers.
Content: The health service of South Africa and its management. Major organisational theories as applied
to nursing management. The essence of nursing and quality assurance. Statutory and ethical basis of
nursing in SA. Methods and techniques of management as applied to nursing management, especially
human resource management. Planning and commissioning of health care facilities.
Practicals: Task assignments in management of health services
Assessment: 2 two-hour papers per module
NURS701 H1 - Philosophy of Nursing

(52L-26T-0P-0S-58H-20R-0F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To introduce students to the philosophy of the profession and the basics of the academic discipline.
Content: History, philosophy and theory of nursing, with special emphasis on the 19th and 20th centuries.
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: 1 three-hour paper.
NURS703 HC - Research Project

(0L-0T-0P-0S-119H-0R-200F-0G-1A-13W-32C)
164 Health Sciences

Aim: To develop beginning research skills.
Content: An approved project in the field of specialisation chosen by the student.
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: NONE
NURS704 HB - Nursing Education (First Year)

(56L-26T-18P-0S-184H-20R-0F-0G-16A-0W-32C)
Prerequisite: Basic degree in nursing
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To acquire knowledge and skills pertinent to teaching nurses and administration of a nursing college
Content: Administration of non-nursing support services. Philosophy and principles of nursing education.
The development of the learner in nursing, and modern theories of cognition. Curriculum development.
Teaching theories, methods and techniques. Classroom and clinical evaluation
Practicals: 8 hours clinical laboratory, 10 hours college administration
Assessment: One 3-hour paper
NURS707 HC - Specialised Nursing

(0L-0T-40P-4S-91H-20R-0F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To allow students to study areas of specialisation in which no specific modules are available.
Content: The student can choose a specialisation area in nursing in consultation with the Head of the
School.
Practicals: Placement in the specialisation area.
Assessment: 2 seminars and 2 papers, 1 examination paper. One course may be selected from post-
graduate courses offered in other schools in the faculty, with the permission of the relevant Head of
School.
NURS708 H2 - Nursing Research

(6L-12T-0P-12S-90H-20R-15F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare nurses to do research in the field.
Content: Principles and methods of social and nursing research, with special emphasis on recent trends.
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: 1 three-hour paper.
NURS709 HC - Nursing Education (Second Year)

(56L-26T-18P-0S-184H-20R-0F-0G-16A-0W-32C)
Prerequisite: Basic degree in Nursing
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To acquire knowledge and skills pertinent to teaching nurses and administration of a nursing college.
Content: Administration of non-nursing support services. Philosophy and principles of nursing education.
The development of the learner in nursing, and modern theories of cognition. Curriculum development.
Teaching theories, methods and techniques. Classroom and clinical evaluation.
Practicals: 10 hours Practice teaching
Assessment: One 3-hour paper
Health Sciences 165
NURS710 HY - Nursing Management (First Year)

(0L-26T-0P-0S-150H-40R-104F-0G-0A-30W-32C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare first line nurse managers.
Content: The health service of South Africa and its management. Major organisational theories as applied
to nursing management. The essence of nursing and quality assurance. Statutory and ethical basis of
nursing in SA. Methods and techniques of management as applied to nursing management, especially
human resource management. Planning and commissioning of health care facilities.
Practicals: Task assignments in management of health services
Assessment: 2 two-hour papers per module.
NURS711 - Introduction to HIV/AIDS

(0L-0T-12P-0S-28H-20R-69F-27G-4A-0W-16C)
Aim: To introduce post-graduate students to the disease HIV/AIDS, which is currently influencing the
work-life of people in all fields and disciplines.
Content: To learn the implications of the methods of infection by the HI Virus for prevention and
management of the disease. The epidemiology of the diseas in Africa will be analyzed and factors
influencing it explored. The role and problems of HIV counselling and testing in the overall management
of the epidemic is debated.
Practicals: Practical placement in HIV/AIDS services.
Assessment: 30% assignments, 5% test, 65% exam.
NURS712 HB - Psychiatric Nursing

(52L-0T-0P-0S-80H-0R-188F-0G-0A-0W-32C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To equip the nurse with basic mental health nursing competence.
Content: Psychiatric diseases and the nursing care of patients with these conditions, including mental
retardation. Comprehensive psychiatric service: needs assessment, planning and evaluation.
Practicals: Assignments in community and primary health care settings.
Assessment: One three-hour paper.
NURS720 HY - Community Health Nursing

(104L-0T-26P-0S-56H-0R-134F-0G-0A-30W-32C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To equip the nurse with basic competence in aggregate care.
Content: Environmental health care. Infectious diseases. Health care systems and primary health care.
Epidemiology. Community assessment and health care planning.
Practicals: Assignments in community and primary health care settings.
Assessment: One three-hour paper.
166 Health Sciences
NURS801 H1 - Advanced Midwifery Skills

(0L-0T-12P-27S-28H-10R-79F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare midwives who can render appropriate care in the absence of an obstetrician to ensure
safety of mother and baby
Content: This course deals with specialist skills involved in the management of high-risk pregnancy,
labour, postpartum and neonatal clients. It also covers transport of such clients and support skills, and
deals with maternal health in general and with factors that impact maternal health. Course to run in an
even year.
Practicals: The comprehensive care of high risk clients of different categories in a midwifery setting.
Assessment: One three-hour paper. one practical examination in November
NURS802 H2 - Applied Critical Care Nursing

(0L-0T-12P-27S-28H-10R-78F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare clinical nurse specialists in critical care nursing. Evaluation: One 3 -hour paper and one
project.
Content: In this course the theoretical framework for critical care is applied to clients across all of life and
with problems in all physiological systems. Course to run in an odd year.
Practicals: This includes the comprehensive nursing care of at least 12 clients in critical care settings with
problems across all physiological systems e.g. neurosurgery, neurology, pulmonology, general surgery
including relevant paediatrics
Assessment: One three-hour paper. one practical examination.
NURS803 H1 - Advanced Psychiatric Skills

(0L-0T-12P-54S-28H-10R-52F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: Registration as a psychiatric nurse.
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To equip the nurse with advanced assessment and therapeutic competencies.
Content: Family dynamics and family therapy models and theories. Group dynamics and group therapy
approaches. Individual counseling models and techniques. The use of family therapy, group therapy and
individual counseling in the prevention and treatment of psychiatric illness.
Practicals: This includes either the treatment or the management and rehabilitation of at least 6 psychiatric
patients of different categories. Course to run in an even year
Assessment: 1 three-hour paper, 1 practical exam at end of the second semester
NURS804 H2 - Child and Adolescent Health

(0L-0T-12P-54S-28H-10R-52F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare a clinician who is able to assess, diagnose and manage child and adolescent problems
Content: This course follows the physical and psychological development of children from six weeks to
eighteen years of age. A study is made of common physical and psychological ailments that the clinical
specialist will encounter in practice, the focus being on the development of skills to ensure diagnosis,
management, referral and rehabilitation. At all times the focus will be on holistic care. The course also
looks at trends in child and adolescent health Africa, as well as the rest of the worlds. in doing so, factors
Health Sciences 167
or issues that impinge on health of children and adolescents will be studied.

Practicals: Paediatric units and relevant primary health care clinics
Assessment: One 3-hour paper and one clinical examination.
NURS805 HV - Commun and Problem-based Education

(0L-0T-12P-42S-52H-20R-30F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare educators to develop and implement CBE and PBL.
Content: The theoretical basis for Community-Based and Problem-Based education for healthcare
professionals is explored, and the practical implementation of such programmes analysed.
Practicals: Observation of both types of teaching/learning.
Assessment: 1 three-hour paper and two projects.
NURS806 H2 - Community Health Nursing

(0L-0T-0P-54S-26H-10R-66F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To introduce the nurse to the theoretical and practical outline of the field.
Content: This course explores the theoretical basis of primary health care and community health care, and
the context of such health care. Aggregate health programme management and participative research is
dealt with and health policy and legislation addressed. Course to run in an even year.
Practicals: This includes assessment planning and implementation of different health related aspects in
CHN settings.
Assessment: Two three-hour papers. one practical examination
NURS807 H1 - Comparative Health Systems

(0L-0T-0P-27S-28H-0R-100F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To analyse health systems (structures and processes) by comparing policies and practices in different
countries.
Content: Comparison of health care systems, development of policies internationally and nationally. Issues
in international health, eg PHC , health promotion.
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: 2 projects, 1 three-hour paper.
NURS808 H2 - Evaluation of Health Care Systems

(0L-0T-0P-27S-28H-0R-100F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare health service managers in all aspects of evaluation: programmes, services, action plans,
policies and staff. Models of evaluation, the use of evaluation in management, quality assurance.
Content: NONE
Practicals: Four practical projects on different aspects of evaluation.
168 Health Sciences
NURS809 H1 - Cognitive Behaviour Therapy Skills

(0L-0T-12P-26S-52H-15R-52F-0G-3A-13W-16C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To equip psychiatric nurse specialists with counselling skills using the CBT approach.
Content: This module deals with the basic theory of cognitive and behaviour therapy, and deals with its
application to therapy for clients with anxiety and mood disorders. It teaches assessment for therapy,
initiating therapy, maintenance and termination. The ethical aspects of therapy are also covered.
Practicals: This includes witnessing therapy, and doing supervised therapy.
Assessment: one three-hour paper. one practical examination.
NURS811 H1 - Education Administration

(0L-0T-0P-39S-99H-16R-0F-0G-6A-14W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare educators in the health professions for 1st level management in educational institutions
such as nursing colleges & university nursing departments.
Content: Models of academic governance, theories of administration, organisational
climate,Organisational culture, motivation, leadership, organisational change and organisational
Practicals: conflict (with specific reference to academic institutions.
Assessment: 1 test, 1 assignment, 1 four-hour paper
NURS813 H1 - Epidemiology
(0L-0T-12P-27S-28H-20R-69F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Corequisite: See Prerequisite.
Aim: To equip the nurse with advanced epidemiological research skills.
Content: Major epidemiological concepts; Epidemiological and biostatistical methods; Sources, nature and
computation of epidemiological data; assess epidemiological techniques in own are of study; Conduct an
epidemiological study in own area of interest; Develop ability to write scientific study protocol. Course to
run in an odd year
Practicals: Epidemiological surveys and analyses
Assessment: One three-hour paper
NURS814 H2 - Psychiatric Programme Management

(0L-0T-0P-27S-28H-20R-81F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To enable the student to master the process of programme management.
Content: This course deals with theoretically based planning, implementation and evaluation of
programmes for individuals or groups with psychiatric problems.
Practicals: This includes the planning and implementation of an aggregate plan and 6 individual plans.
Course to run in an even year
Assessment: One three-hour paper. One practical examination
Health Sciences 169
NURS815 H1 - Essentials of Critical Care Nursing

(0L-0T-12P-27S-28H-20R-68F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: General nurse, working in ICU, ICU experience
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare clinical nurse specialists in critical care nursing
Content: This course deals with the conceptual framework for critical care and trauma nursing and the core
concepts dealt with in this field. It explores the context within which this care given. The critical nursing
care of clients with problems in two systems across all life stages. Course to run in an odd year.
Practicals: This includes the Comprehensive nursing care of at least 6 clients in critical care settings, with
cardiac and respiratory problems e.g. cardiothoracic, pulmonology, anaesthetics,
Assessment: One 3-hour paper, 1 practical exam
NURS816 H2 - Qualitative Research

(0L-0T-0P-4S-126H-0R-20F-0G-10A-26W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To guide students into a deeper understanding of qualitative research.
Content: This is a mixed mode module, which relies heavily on materials studied by the Student it is a
faculty module, selfdirected as well as computer supported learning.It leads the student through the
process of qualitative research, addressing different types of qualitative research sampling, data collection
and analysis, and report writing. It also deals with philosophical underpinnings and ethical issues.
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: Ten units to be completed and handed in, as well as one project.
DP Requirement: Please contact the course co-ordinator in February. Rule NURS4 (b) shall apply –
candidates must attend at least 75% of all classes, save those from which they have been officially
excused.
NURS817 H1 - Family Therapy

(0L-0T-12P-54S-28H-20R-42F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To equip nurses with beginning competency in assessing families and family counselling
Content: Family dynamics, applied to different nursing areas. Different approaches to family therapy, with
the emphasis on practice of one approach.
Practicals: Family assessments and counselling sessions.
NURS818 - HIV/AIDS Prevention and Management

(14L-0T-3P-51S-66H-20R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: None
Corequisite: None
Aim: To introduce HIV/ AIDS prevention and management to students
Content: Deals with the HI virus, the pathophysiology, the method of spread as well as prevention efforts.
Also covers issues around testing for HIV, classification and management of people with different stages
of HIV/ AIDS. Legal and psychosocial issues are also explored.
Practicals: At least three days or 24 hours of practica in a health care setting working with people living
with HIV/AIDS. The setting should be chosen in order to supplement the experience the student already
has. During this placement students are expected to complete a case study.
Assessment: Assignments for 30% and tests for 5%.Together this is 35% of the final mark. One written
examination which counts 65% completes the assessment.
170 Health Sciences
DP Requirement: Rule NURS4 (b) shall apply- candidates must attend at least 75% of all classes, save for
those that they have been officially excused.
NURS819 H1 - Fundamentals of Education

(0L-0T-0P-0S-138H-16R-0F-0G-6A-14W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To equip educators in the health professions with knowledge and skills pertinent to creating and
maintaining a learning-centred environment in the classroom and clinical teaching/learning settings.
Content: Learning theories: behavioural, cognitive, social and transformative learning theories, adult
development and its implications for teaching and learning, motivation and self-regulation in learning,
managing diversity in the classroom, co-operative learning.
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: 1 test, 1 assignment, 1 four-hour paper
NURS821 H1 - Primary Care

(0L-0T-12P-27S-28H-20R-69F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare the nurse with assessment, diagnostic and treatment skills for practicing in a PHC setting.
Content: This course runs with comprehensive management of minor and common medical and surgical
conditions across the lifespan in PHC settings. Family planning and STD management will also be
covered. Course to run in an even year
Practicals: This includes assessment, diagnosis and treatment of at different categories.
Assessment: one three-hour. One practical examination
NURS822 H2 - Advanced Practice Nurse Role

(0L-0T-0P-54S-103H-0R-0F-0G-3A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To explore the factors impacting on the role of an advance nurse practitioner in the S A context, to
enable specialist nurses to structure and fulfil their roles satisfactorily
Content: The module deals with specific role aspects such as consultation, administration, and education.
It also deals with the historical, health service, socio-economic and societal context of such roles in this
country.
Practicals: Individual projects.
Assessment: Individual projects and one three-hour paper.
NURS823 H1 - Progressive Educa for Health Professionals 1

(0L-19T-13P-39S-147H-16R-0F-0G-6A-14W-24C)
Prerequisite: Fundamental Education
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare health professionals’ educators who are able to (a) appreciate the importance of
educational philosophy in health professionals’ teacher education programmes (b) critically analyse
various conceptions concerning education, (c) critically analyse value orientations influencing curriculum
decisions with specific reference to implications for designing curriculum in the health professions.
Content: Philosophical Foundations of Education: conservative views of education, progressive education,
romantic and radical visions of education, health professionals education in the modern era, health
Health Sciences 171
professionals education in the post-modern era, content and process education, outcomes-based and
product-based education in the health professions.
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: 1 test, 2 assignments, 1 personal and academic development portfolio, 1 four-hour exam.
DP Requirement: Rule NURS4 (b) shall apply -candidates must attend at least 75% of all classes, save
NURS824 H2 - Progressive Educ for Health Professionals 2

(0L-19T-13P-39S-85H-16R-62F-0G-6A-14W-24C)
Prerequisite: Progressive Education for Health Professionals 1
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare educators in the health professions who are able to (a) design, implement, and evaluate
case and/or problem based and community-based learning programmes, (b) ensure relevance in designing
educational programmes, while taking into account the recommendations of international organizations
such as the WHO and the ICN and (c) understand the significance professional regulation and quality
assurance in professional education.
Content: International organizations and the education of health professionals, national policy and the
education of health professionals, experiential education (theoretical underpinnings and selected
approaches CBE, PBL, and service learning: reflective teaching practice, assessment and evaluation in
professional education, accreditation and quality assurance in professional education.
Practicals: Facilitating learning in (a) PBL groups and case based learning groups (b) community settings
and (c) the self-study clinical skills laboratory.
Assessment: Reflective Teaching Practice Record, 1 assignment, 1 project, 1 four-hour examination.
DP Requirement: Rule NURS4 (b) shall apply -candidates must attend at least 75% of all classes, save
NURS825 H1 - Trauma Nursing and Life Support

(0L-0T-12P-27S-28H-20R-68F-0G-5A-15W-16C)
Prerequisite: Advanced cardiac life support / Advanced paediatric life support
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare a trauma nurse specialist
Content: This course deals with the anatomy, physiology and pathophysiology underlying trauma and
emergency interventions. Emergency assessment and triage. Life support in cases of emergency care, as
well as, during transport of critically ill persons will be studied, including the scientific principles
underlying the problems and interventions.
Practicals: Emergency nursing care of the client in the pre-hospital and hospital setting.
Assessment: 1 three-hour paper. One practical examination.
DP Requirement: Rule NURS4 (b) shall apply -candidates must attend at least 75% of all classes, 100% in
NURS827 H1 - Women's Health

(0L-0T-12P-27S-28H-20R-69F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To prepare a clinician who can be an activist for women’s issues
Content: This course deals with sexuality, male/female roles and women's issues which impinge on health.
The empowerment of women is studied and empowerment programmes planned and implemented.
Practicals: The planning and implementation of an empowerment programme for women. Course to run
in an even year.
Assessment: One three-hour paper and a clinical examination.
172 Health Sciences
NURS831 HC - Nursing Research and Nursing Research Methods

(14L-0T-0P-54S-66H-20R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To enable learners develop research skills that are appropriate to nursing and nursing related field.
Content: This module deals with identifying and describing researches that are specific to nursing. It looks
at theories and theory development in nursing. Identifies current issues in nursing research, discusses and
describes methodologies appropriate for nursing researches grouped according to reasons for conducting
nursing research. It deals with aspects of proposal writing, writing for scholarly journals and managing
resources for nursing research. This module requires that the learner attends all graduate research seminars
in the School, and the candidate must organise and present at least one seminar during the semester.
Practicals: NONE
Assessment: One presented seminar, 2 assignments and one 3-hour paper
DP Requirement: Rule NURS4 (b) shall apply --candidates must attend at least 75% of all classes, save
NURS833 HC - Introduction to Cognitive Behaviour Theraph

(0L-0T-12P-0S-55H-10R-52F-26G-3A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: None
Aim: To equip psychiatric nurse specialists with counselling skills using the CBT approach.
Content: This module deals with the basic theory of cognitive and behaviour therapy, and deals with its
application to therapy for clients with anxiety and mood disorders. It teaches assessment for therapy,
initiating therapy, maintenance and termination. The ethical aspects of therapy are also covered.
Practicals: This includes witnessing therapy, and doing supervised therapy.
Assessment: One three-hour paper and one practical examination.
NURS835 H1 - Psychosocial rehabilitation

(0L-0T-12P-26S-52H-15R-52F-0G-3A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To equip psychiatric nurse specialists with the knowledge and skills to facilitate the rehabilitation of
people with serious and sustained mental illness.
Content: This module deals with theories of psychosocial rehabilitation and all four aspects of this process
(housing, education, socialization and work). Issues such as deinstitutionalization are also dealt with, and
the process of psychosocial rehabilitation counselling is taught.
Practicals: This includes witnessing PSR counselling, and dong supervised counselling.
Assessment: One three-hour paper and one practical examination.
DP Requirement: Rule NURS4 (b) shall apply--candidates must attend at least 75% of all classes, 100% in
Health Sciences 173
Pharmacology
Offered in the School of Pharmacy & Pharmacology
PHRM202 W2 - Pharmacology I
(48L-36T-0P-0S-44H-30R-0F-0G-2A-15W-16C)
Corequisite: HPHS221W1, ANAT101W1
Aim: To provide learners with an understanding of basic terms and principles of pharmacology with
special reference to pharmacodynamics and pharmacokinetics.
Content: Pharmacodynamics: Drug receptors and receptor theories, agonists, antagonists;
neurotransmitters and modulators; Therapeutic Index. Autonomic nervous system: Basic concepts.
Autonomic Nervous System (sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous systems). Introductory
Pharmacokinetics: Introduction to drug absorption, distribution, metabolism and elimination. Drug
Bioavailability, Volume of Distribution, Half-Life (t½), Kinetics of drug metabolism, etc.
Assessment: Formative: 60% of the average of 2tests + 40% of the tutorial tests. Summative: 1x 2-hour
paper60% of average of 2 tests + 40% of average of tutorial tests. Final Mark = 60% of Examination Mark
+ 40% of DP A 40% subminimum rule will apply.
PHRM301 W1 - Neuropharmacology and autocoid pharmacology

(48L-36T-0P-0S-44H-30R-0F-0G-2A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: PHRM202W2
Aim: To provide learners with an understanding of basic principles of Central Nervous System (CNS)
pharmacology, mechanisms and sequential effects of drugs acting centrally; the rational management of
certain CNS disorders; and to provide an understanding on the pharmacology of drugs affecting mediators
of inflammation.
Content: Autocoid pharmacology, with special reference to histamine, serotonin, prostaglandins,
leukotrienes, thromboxanes, kinins and vasoactive peptides. Treatment of pain, gout and other
inflammatory conditions with specific reference to non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs),
opioids, alcohols, general and local anaesthetics. Immunopharmacology. Central Nervous System (CNS)
pharmacology with specific reference to neurodegenerative disorders, antipsychotic drug therapy, affective
disorders, management of epilepsy, and treatment of headache and migraine.
Assessment: 60% of average of 2 tests + 40% of average of tutorial tests. Final Mark = 60% Exam Mark +
40%DP A 40% subminimum rule will apply.
PHRM302 W2 - Chemotherapy, Therapeutic Drug Monitoring, To

(48L-36T-0P-0S-44H-30R-0F-0G-2A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: PHRM202W2
Corequisite: PHRM301W1
Aim: To provide learners with an understanding of basic principles of chemotherapy, i.e., the mechanisms
by which anti-infective drugs act in the management and treatment of infectious diseases. Therapeutic
Drug Monitoring (TDM) will enable learners to understand the kinetics of various drug classes, thus
enabling them to easily interpret drug-blood levels which are valuable during the implementation of
dosage adjustments. Toxicology will enable learners to understand and address toxic chemicals and basic
drug overdosage scenarios.
Content: The pharmacology of antimicrobial agents with specific reference to antibacterial, antifungal and
antiviral drugs. Clinical chemistry, TDM, and toxicology.
Assessment: 60% of average of 2 tests + 40% of average of tutorial tests. Final Mark = 60% Exam Mark +
40%DP A 40% subminimum rule will apply.
174 Health Sciences
PHRM401 W1 - Systemic clinical pharmacology I

(48L-0T-0P-39S-16H-11R-44F-0G-2A-15W-16C)
Prerequisite: PHRM202W2, PHRM301W1, PHRM302W2
Aim: To provide learners with clinical pharmacological concepts used in the diagnosis, prevention,
treatment and management of diseases.
Content: Treatment and/or management of the following pathological disorders: GIT: Peptic ulcer disease,
Gastro-Oesophageal Reflux Disease (GORD), Inflammatory Bowel Disease (IBD), Irritable Bowel
Syndrome (IBS), Diarrhoea, Constipation, Hepato-billiary diseases, Nausea and Vomiting. Respiratory
System: Bronchial asthma, Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease (COPD) and other respiratory
disorders, including cough, pneumonia, congestion, rhinitis. Endocrine System: Growth hormone, anti-
diuretic hormone, osteoporosis, infertility (gonadal hormones, contraception, erectile dysfunction,
hormone replacement therapy). Anti-protozoals and Anthelmintics: Anti-infective drugs for malaria,
amoebiasis, intestinal helminths, trypanosomiasis, schistosomiasis. Anti-neoplastics: Principles of cancer
chemotherapy, cancer cell cycle kinetics, anti-metabolites, alkylating agents, antibiotics, microtubule
inhibitors, steroid hormone antagonists, monoclonal antibodies.
Assessment: 60% of average of 2 tests + 40% of ward-round presentation marks. Final Mark = 60% Exam
Mark + 40%DP A 40% subminimum rule will apply.
PHRM402 W2 - Systemic clinical pharmacology II

(48L-0T-0P-39S-16H-11R-44F-0G-2A-15W-16C)
Aim: To provide learners with clinical pharmacological concepts used in the diagnosis, prevention,
treatment and management of diseases.
Content: Treatment and/or management of the following pathological disorders: Cardiovascular system:
Myocardial infarction (MI), congestive heart failure (CHF), renin-angiotensin system and hypertension.
Cardiac arrythmias, angina pectoris, blood disorders (thrombosis, haemophilia and anaemia), vitamins and
vitamin supplements. Diabetes mellitus: Hyperlipidemia, diuresis, insulin and regulation of blood glucose,
obesity. Endocrine System: Hormones of the pituitary and thyroid glands (growth hormones,
gonadotropins and osteoporosis, hypothyroidism); adrenocorticosteroid hormones (glucocorticoids,
mineralocorticoids)
Assessment: 60% of average of 2 tests + 40% of ward-round presentation marks. Final Mark = 60% Exam
Mark + 40%DP A 40% subminimum rule will apply.
PHRM801 WY - Basic Research Methodology

(78L-48T-0P-48S-86H-56R-0F-0G-4A-13W-32C)
Prerequisite: B Pharm, MBChB, B Dentistry, B Vet Sc
Aim: At the end of this module, learners will be able to understand and define basic terms and concepts in
the principles of scientific research with special reference to: Critical evaluation of scientific literature
Interpretation and application of statistics in scientific literature Use of statistical programmes Design
research protocols Ethical considerations in health science research Clinical trial design
Content: Biostatistics and analytical methods which will include: Biostatistics Statistical tests Epi-Info,
SPSS, Excel and other statistical programmes Application Clinical Trial and Research Experimental
Design Types of clinical trial design Protocol design and development Evaluation of scientific literature
Appraisal of studies reported in scientific literature Ethical considerations in pharmacological/health
science research, particularly in human subjects. Elective Observation of and participation in, trials
conducted by staff in the department.
Assessment: 60% of examination mark+ 40% seminars 1x 4-hour written theory paper
Health Sciences 175
PHRM802 WY - Basic Principles of Pharmacology

(90L-48T-0P-48S-74H-56R-0F-0G-4A-15W-32C)
Prerequisite: B Pharm, MB CHB, B Dent, B Vet Sc
Aim: At the end of this module, learners will be able to understand and define basic terms and principles of
pharmacology with special reference to: Pharmacodynamics: Specify whether an antagonist is competitive
or irreversible; Compare the efficacy and potency of drugs on the basis of their dose-response curves; Give
examples of partial agonists, competitive and irreversible pharmacologic antagonists, and physiologic and
chemical antagonists. Name the methods by which drug-receptor signals bring about their biological
effects Pharmacokinetics: Compute the half-life of a drug based on its clearance and volume of
distribution; Calculate loading and maintenance dose regimens for oral or intravenous administrations of
drugs Understand the interrelationship between pharmacology and physiology of the autonomic nervous
system in terms of neurotransmitter chemistry. Describe the steps in the synthesis and the termination of
action of the major autonomic transmitters; Describe the organ-system effects of stimulation of the
parasympathetic and sympathetic systems.
Content: Introduction to pharmacokinetics, including: Absorption/distribution/metabolism/elimination of
pharmacological substances Pharmacokinetic concepts and equations Calculation of pharmacokinetic
parameters with given information Role of physiological/pathological variables in pharmacokinetics and
plasma concentration of drugs Prediction of pharmacokinetics due to clinical, genetic and other patient
factors Molecular/biochemical basis of drug action and receptor pharmacology, including: Basic receptor
pharmacology, terminology, concepts Dose/concentration-response relationships Agonists/antagonist
interactions Basic transcellular signalling mechanisms and the potential for drug manipulation
Chemotherapy, including: Classes of chemotherapeutic agents used in the treatment of diseases caused by
microorganisms Including bacteria, viruses,fungi and protozoa. This will include modes of action,
pharmacokinetics, indications/contraindications and precautions Assessment of therapeutic
strategies/protocols for various infectious diseases Cancer chemotherapeutic agents and treatment
protocols
Assessment: 60% of examination mark+ 40% of year mark (seminars) 1x 4-hour written theory paper
PHRM803 WY - Neuropharmacology and Autocoid Pharmacology

(78L-48T-0P-48S-86H-56R-0F-0G-4A-13W-32C)
Prerequisite: B Pharm, M B ChB, B Dent, B Vet Sc.
Aim: At the end of this module, learners should be able to understand and define basic terms and principles
of neuropharmacology, immunopharmacology, the role of these systems in disease processes and their
pharmacological manipulation, understand the interrelationship between pharmacology and physiology of
the autonomic nervous system in terms of neurotransmitter chemistry, describe the steps in the synthesis
and the termination of action of the major autonomic transmitters. Describe the organ-system effects of
stimulation of the parasympathetic and sympathetic systems.
Content: Neurohumoral transmission and neurotransmitter agents such as acetylcholine, noradrenaline,
adrenaline, dopamine and serotonin The potential for drugs to interact with the production, release, action
and termination of action of neurotransmitters Drugs and treatment protocols in disease states involving
the above systems, including: Autonomic Nervous System: asthma, hypertension, ocular diseases Central
Nervous System: Parkinson's disease, depression, schizophrenia and psychoses, neuroses, insomnia,
attention deficit disorder, drug abuse Somatic Nervous System: myasthenia gravis, drugs affecting
neuromuscular transmission, muscle relaxants Autocoids, Pain, Inflammation Immunity and
immunopharmacology Histamine, serotonin, eicosanoids, polypeptides Immunopharmacology, cytokines
Pharmacological manipulation of these systems with agonists and antagonists Drug/classes of drugs used
in treating conditions involving the above-mentioned systems/disorders. Evaluation of treatment protocols
involving pain and inflammation, migraine, rheumatoid arthritis, organ transplantation, nausea and
vomiting, amongst others
176 Health Sciences
PHRM804 WY - Systematic Clinical Pharmacology

(78L-48T-0P-48S-86H-56R-0F-0G-4A-13W-32C)
Prerequisite: B Pharm, MB ChB, B Dent, B Vet Sc.
Aim: At the end of this module, learners should be able to relate the pharmacology of drugs used in various
disease states, evaluate national and international guidelines, assess treatment protocols, develop
monitoring abilities, and adopt clinical approaches for the management of disease states.
Content: Cardiovascular Pharmacology including the treatment of angina pectoris, myocardial infarction,
congestive cardiac failure, cardiogenic shock, cardiac dysrhythmias, hypertension. Diuretics Anti-
hyperlipidaemic drugs Renal pharmacology Respiratory pharmacology Gastrointestinal tract
pharmacology Drugs acting on blood and blood forming organs Vitamins
PHRM805 WY - Therapeutic Drug Monitoring & Toxicology

(78L-48T-0P-48S-86H-56R-0F-0G-4A-13W-32C)
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To enable learners to perform and interpret therapeutic drug monitoring (TDM), and to understand
the general principles of toxicology and the management of poisoning.
Content: Therapeutic Drug Monitoring in theory and application. Pharmacokinetic and Pharmacodynamic
data analyses including non-compartmental analyses as applied to pharmacokinetics and bioavailability
assessment, pharmacokinetic-pharmacodynamic analyses and modelling, WINNONLIN/NONMEN.
Toxicology-general principles of toxicology, management of poisoning and evaluation of treatment
protocols for specific types of poisoning e.g. paracetamol, hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide etc.
Practicals: None. Tutorials 2hrs/week.
Assessment: Formative- 60% of examination mark+ 40% of year mark (seminars). Summative 1 x 6 hour
paper.
DP Requirement: NONE
PHRM806 WY - Short Dissertation

(0L-0T-0P-0S-960H-0R-0F-0G-0A-30W-96C)
Aim: Conduct research and submit a short dissertation (of publication standard) on an approved topic with
a clinical bias.
Content: As approved by department and as per protocol
Assessment: summative - 100%
Pharmacy
Offered in the School of Pharmacy & Pharmacology
PHRM212 W2 - Medicinal Chemistry 2

(21L-0T-18P-0S-18H-20R-0F-0G-3A-7W-8C)
Prerequisite: Students are expected to have attempted PHRM213 & PHRM211W1
Aim: To enable the student to understand the chemistry of functional classes and heterocyclic compounds
that are important in medicinal compounds and pharmaceutically relevant biomolecules.
Content: The physico-chemical properties of the functional classes and heterocyclic compounds that are
important in medicinal compounds with respect to their biological activities as well as to their in vitro and
in vivo stabilities and the stability, properties and functions of pharmaceutically relevant biomolecules
Health Sciences 177
Practicals: 6 practicals on identification of compounds The main course test is held during one practical
session The Practical Report Assessment Mark is calculated as follows: 1. Presentation + Format 10 2.
Theory 15 3. Method 15 4. Results + Discussion 40 5. References 10 6. Punctuality 10 All students are
required to submit individual practical reports even though they may work in pairs/groups in the
laboratory.
Assessment: 1 x 2 hour paper (Final mark = 60% of exam mark + 40% of the formative assessment mark )
A 40% sub minimum will apply.
DP Requirement: A student must obtain a CAM of ÿ40%. There must be a 100% attendance for all
fieldwork, tutorial classes, practical classes, ward rounds and externship visits except where the Head of
School /Programme Co-ordinator/Module lecturer has specifically excuse
PHRM213 W1 - Pharmaceutical chemistry

(21L-3T-15P-0S-19H-20R-0F-0G-2A-6.5W-8C)
Prerequisite: CHEM142W1, PHYS131W1, MATH133W1
Aim: A basic introduction for pharmacy students – covering the principles of pharmaceutical chemistry
which underpin the study of pharmacology, drug formulation and drug design.
Content: Acid – base properties of drug substances, ionisation, partition coefficient and biopharmacy,
introduction to drug kinetics and stability, drug purity.
Practicals: 5 (Practical reports form part of the formative assessment).
Assessment: Final mark = 60 % of exam mark + 40 % of formative assessment A 40% subminimum rule
will apply
DP Requirement: A student must obtain a CAM of > 40% and 100% attendance for all fieldwork, tutorial
classes, practical classes, ward rounds and externship visits except where the Head of School has
specifically excused the student from a particular session.
PHRM214 W2 - Pharmaceutical Analysis 1

(21L-3T-15P-0S-19H-20R-0F-0G-2A-6.5W-8C)
Aim: Students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and competency in the basic techniques used in
pharmaceutical analysis.
Content: Control of the quality of analytical methods. Introduction to drug analysis in accordance with
standards and requirements of the official compendia, using prescribed analytical methods: titrimetric and
chemical analytical methods, refractometry, polarimetry, introduction to spectroscopic methods.
Practicals: 5 practicals (reports form part of the formative assessment)
Assessment: 70 % of test + 30 % of practical marks Final mark = 60 % of exam mark + 40 % of formative
assessment A 40% subminimum rule will apply
DP Requirement: A student must obtain a CAM of > 40% and 100% attendance for all fieldwork, tutorial
classes, practical classes, ward rounds and externship visits except where the Head of School has
specifically excused the student from a particular session.
PHRM221 W1 - Physical Pharmacy

(17L-3T-15P-0S-22H-21R-0F-0G-2A-6.5W-8C)
Aim: To provide a physicochemical background (quantitative and theoretical) to the formulation,
manufacture and evaluation of pharmaceutical dosage forms.
Content: States of Matter, Diffusion and Dissolution, Disperse Systems, Unit Processes, Interfacial
Phenomena, Rheology
Practicals: 5 x 3 Hours Practicals (Practical reports form part of the formative assessment)
1.Determination of the surface tension of a liquid by means of a tensiometer and to determine the critical
micelle concentration of a given surfactant 2. Detemination of the optimal HLB value for the oil phase of
an emulsion 3. Comparison of the in vitro drug release profiles of a controlled release and a conventional
release tablet preparation 4. Determination of the viscosity of a viscous liquid using Stokes Method
(falling sphere method) 5.Determination of the rate of filtration of a suspension
Assessment: 70% of the test+30% of average of Practical Reports Final Mark = 60% Exam Mark +
178 Health Sciences
40%CAM A 40% subminimum rule will apply.

DP Requirement: A student must obtain a CAM of > 40%. There must be 100% attendance for all
School has specifically excused the student from a particular session.
PHRM222 W2 - Pharmaceutical Technology

(35L-5T-30P-0S-58H-30R-0F-0G-2A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: Students are expected to have attempted PHRM221W1
Aim: To provide an understanding of principles involved in the design, manufacture and evaluation of
pharmaceutical dosage forms.
Content: Dosage form design. Solutions, Suspensions, Emulsions, Powders and Granules, Tablets,
Capsules, Aerosols, Topical preparations, Suppositories and Pessaries.
Practicals: 10 x 3 Hours Practicals (Practical reports form part of the formative assessment) 1. Preparation
and evaluation of tablets by the direct compression method and by wet granulation. 2. Preparation of the
following creams: aqueous, cold, dimethicone, zinc, borax, coal tar and salicylic acid ointment 3.
Preparation of the following emulsions: acacia, white liniment, calamine lotion, benzyl benzoate
application 4. Preparation of starch enema 5. Preparation of gelatine supps 6. Preparation of magnesium
sulphate paste 7. Preparation of chloroxylenol solution, magnesium hydroxide mixture
Assessment: 70% of the average of 2 tests+30% of average of Practical Reports Final Mark = 60% Exam
Mark + 40%CAM A 40% subminimum rule will apply.
PHRM232 W2 - Introduction to Pathology

(21L-15T-0P-0S-17H-20R-4F-0G-3A-7W-8C)
Prerequisite: CHEM142W1, PHYS131W1, BIOL103W1
Corequisite: ANAT101W1, HPHS221W1, HPHS222W2
Aim: Providing the student with a good all round grounding of pathophysiology incorporating
microbiology and biochemistry so as to be able to understand diagnoses, laboratory results and other
clinical jargon in order to understand pharmacotherapy of the variety of conditions that they may
encounter in practice in all fields of pharmacy.
Content: The process of history taking and demonstrate a systematic application of that process (4
lectures) Major pathological processes in man: (4 lectures) Inflammation (Infection; Immunological
mediated processes; Physical trauma, toxins and radiation) Degeneration (Ischaemia) Neoplasia Inherited
pathologies Pathological basis and symptomatology of the listed common conditions in each of the
following major systems: (12 lectures) Cardiovascular (Hypertension; Cardiac Failure) Renal (Fluid and
electrolyte imbalances; Renal failure) Respiratory (Pneumonia; Asthma and chronic obstructive airways
disease) Gastro-intestinal and Liver (Hepatitis; Ulcers) Central Nervous System (Epilepsy; Headache)
Musculoskeletal and connective tissue (Arthritis; Pain) Endocrine (Diabetes) Integrate anatomy and
physiology principles with pathology. (4 lectures) Basic examination skills (4 Lectures)
Assessment: 2 x 40 min tests 1 x 2 hour paper A 40% subminimum rule will apply.
DP Requirement: A student must obtain a CAM of > 40%. A student must obtain 100% attendance for all
School has specifically excused the student from a particular s
PHRM241 W1 - Pharmaceutical Calculations I

(21L-15T-0P-0S-19H-21R-0F-0G-4A-7W-8C)
Prerequisite: CHEM142W1, MATH133W1, PHYS131W1
Aim: To train students in calculations based on the fundamental laws of pharmaceutical chemistry
Content: Pharmaceutical calculations based on the fundamental laws of chemistry, Methods of expressing
concentration, Calculations involving the mixing of liquids and semi-solids, Dosage calculations and
Volume, density, specific gravity and percentage calculations.
Health Sciences 179
Assessment: 70% of the test mark + 30% of the average of the tutorial marks 1 x 2 hour paper (Final mark
= 60% of exam mark + 40% of the formative assessment mark ) A 40% sub minimum rule shall apply
DP Requirement: A student must obtain a CAM of ÿ40%. There must be a 100% attendance for all
School /Programme Co-ordinator/Module lecturer has specifically excuse. Notes: Sub-discipline 1 =
Pharmaceutical Calculations I

(35L-5T-30P-0S-57H-30R-0F-0G-3A-13W-16C)
Corequisite: Pharmaceutical Analysis 2
Aim: To provide an understanding of the design and development of drugs.
Content: Development of enzyme inhibitors as drugs, antiviral drugs, biotechnology, analytical chemistry
in drug development, principles of drug design and discovery, drug development and clinical trials
Practicals: 12x approximately 3hour practicals The practical will take the format of miniprojects entailing
literature studies and computational chemistry Technical staff: Ms U Govinden, Mr S Chonco All students
are required to submit individual practical reports though they work in groups in the laboratory
Assessment: 70% of the average of 2 tests + 30% of the practical mark 60% of 1x3-hour paper + 40% of
formative assessment A 40% subminimum rule will apply
DP Requirement: A student must obtain a CAM of >/ 40%. There must be 100% attendance for all
PHRM313 W1 - Pharmaceutical Analysis II

(24L-0T-15P-0S-15H-20R-0F-0G-6A-7W-8C)
Prerequisite: Pharmaceutical Chemistry, Pharmaceutical Analysis I, Pharmaceutical Calculations I
Corequisite: Medicinal Chemistry III
Aim: To train undergraduate pharmaceutical science students in the techniques used in the analysis of
pharmaceuticals, particularly chromatographic techniques.
Content: Drug analysis in accordance with the standards and requirements of the official compendia, using
prescribed analytical methods: Chromatography ( HPLC, GC, TLC ), Infra-red spectroscopy, NMR, Mass
spectrometry, Capillary Electrophoresis, Extraction Methods in Pharmaceutical Analysis
Practicals: 5 (Practical reports form part of the formative assessment). Tutorials: 1
Assessment: Formative: 65% of test + 25% of the practical marks + 10% of assignment. Summative: 1x 2-
hour paper (final mark = 60% of exam mark + 40% of formative assessment)
DP Requirement: NONE. Notes: 1 assignment included in formative assessment. Sub-discipline 5 =
Pharmaceutical Analysis A LABORATORY FEE IS PAYABLE FOR THIS MODULE.
PHRM314 W2 - Applied Clinical Chemistry

(21L-18T-0P-0S-16H-20R-0F-0G-5A-7W-8C)
Prerequisite: PHRM211W1, PHRM212W2, HPHS221W1, HPHS222W2, PHRM311W1
Aim: To enable the student to understand the different biochemical processes that occur in the human body
and their interrelationships in the normal state and in the disease state and to understand the biochemical
changes that occur with the use of selected medicinal compounds.
Content: A review of pharmaceutically pertinent clinical correlations integrating the chemistry of
medicinal compounds with abnormal biochemical processes. The module encompasses a review of
Chemistry, a review of Bio molecules, Enzymes, Vitamins and Co-enzymes, Carbohydrate, Lipid and
Protein Biochemistry, Bioenergetics and Acid-Base Biochemistry
Assessment: 70% of the test mark [open book]+ 30% of the average of the tutorial marks. 1 x 3 hour paper
[open book] (Final mark = 60% of exam mark + 40% of the formative assessment mark ) A 40% sub
minimum rule will apply
DP Requirement: NONEA student must obtain a CAM of ÿ%. There must be a 100% attendance for all
School /Programme Co-ordinator/Module lecturer has specifically excu
180 Health Sciences

(17L-3T-15P-0S-22H-21R-0F-0G-2A-6.5W-8C)
Corequisite: Students are expected to have attempted Medicinal Chemistry 3 (PHRM311W1)
Aim: To provide an understanding of structure-activity relationships and drug design in drugs developed
for specific biological targets.
Content: Natural product chemistry and pharmacognosy, Effects of structural modifications on the
physicochemical properties of selected drug classes.
Practicals: 12x approximately3hour practicals The synthesis of Aspirin The isolation of an analgesic The
synthesis of paracetamol Preparation of methyl salicylate (part A) Preparation of methyl salicylate (part
B&C) Preparation of Benzocaine Technical staff: Ms U Govinden, Mr S Chonco All students are required
to submit individual practical reports tough they work in groups in the laboratory
Assessment: 70% of the average of 2 tests + 30% of the practical mark 60% of 1x2-hour paper + 40% of
formative assessment A 40% subminimum rule will apply
DP Requirement: A student must obtain a CAM of < particular a from student the excused specifically has
School of Head where except visits externship and rounds ward classes, practical tutorial fieldwork, all for
attendance 100% be must There 40%.>
PHRM321 W1 - Institutional Pharmaceutics

(43L-0T-36P-0S-37H-40R-0F-0G-4A-15W-16C)
Prerequisite: Physical Pharmacy, Pharmaceutical Technology
Corequisite: Institutional Pharmaceutics
Aim: To train students in the formulation and preparation of sterile pharmaceutical dosage forms and novel
drug delivery systems.
Content: Aseptic technique, sterility testing, intravenous therapy, formulation of injections, ophthalmic
products, radiopharmaceuticals, cytotoxics, immunological products and blood products. Modified release
drug delivery systems including oral, transdermal, intrauterine, intravaginal, parenteral and ophthalmic.
Practicals: 6 (Practical reports form part of the formative assessment)
Assessment: Formative: 70% of the average of 2 tests + 30% of the practical marks. Summative: 1x 2-hour
paper
Notes: 2= SUB DISCIPLNE – DRUG DELIVERY
PHRM323 W2 - Sterile Products

(17L-3T-15P-0S-22H-21R-0F-0G-2A-6.5W-8C)
Prerequisite: PHRM221W1, PHRM222W2
Aim: To train students in the formulation and preparation of sterile pharmaceutical dosage forms and
applicable quality assurance measures.
Content: Aseptic technique, sterility testing, intravenous therapy, formulation of injections, ophthalmic
products, radiopharmaceuticals, cytotoxics, immunological products and blood products.
Practicals: 7 x 3 Hours Practicals (For 3-7 reports to be handed in) 1. Aseptic Technique: Methods of
Reconstitution 2. Cytotoxic Reconstitution 3. Radiopharmaceuticals (Demonstration) and Sterility Test 4.
Lecture: Dialysis 5. Lecture: Total Parenteral Nutrition 6. Lecture: Intravenous Therapy 7. Lecture: Blood
Products
Assessment: 70% of the average of 1 tests +30% of average of Practical Reports Final Mark = 60% Exam
Mark + 40%CAM A 40% subminimum rule will apply.
Health Sciences 181
PHRM331 W1 - Pharmacy logistics,Economics & management

(21L-9T-0P-0S-16H-20R-12F-0G-2A-8W-8C)
Prerequisite: HLSC116W2
Aim: Aims to give student basic principles of drug supply management, as well as knowledge of financial,
operational, human resources and quality management. The student should also at the end of the course be
able to apply a knowledge of logistics, including both private and public sector aspects
Content: Health and Health Care (2 lectures) NDL/EDP/Drug Management cycle (2 lectures) Estimating
Drug Requirements (2 lectures) Procurement and Storage (4 lectures) Rational Drug Use (2 lectures)
Marketing Environment (2 lectures) Demand and Supply (2 lectures) Human Resources (2 lectures)
Financial Concepts (4 lectures) Role of Pharmacist (4 lectures)
Assessment: 2 x 1 hour tests 1 x 2 hour paper A 40% subminimum rule will apply.
PHRM332 W2 - Health Law & Ethics 1

(21L-3T-0P-0S-31H-20R-3F-0G-2A-8W-8C)
Aim: Aims to inform the student about all the relevant legislation as well as professional ethics which
should be adhered to
Content: Pharmacy Act. Medicines Act.
Assessment: 1 x 1 hour test; 1 x Assignment; Fieldwork evaluation 1 x 2-hour paper A 40% subminimum
rule will apply.
PHRM333 W1 - Pharmaceutical Care 1

(21L-0T-0P-0S-13H-20R-24F-0G-2A-8W-8C)
Prerequisite: HPHS221; HPHS221; ANAT101; PHRM232
Aim: To equip student to be able to provide responsible drug therapy in order to obtain optimal therapeutic
outcomes. This module concentrates on selected body systems for pharmacotherapeutic management (non-
drug and drug related).
Content: Pharmaceutical care (2 lectures) CNS (12 lectures) Ophthalmology (4 lectures) ENT (4 lectures)
Oral Health (4 lectures) URTI (2 lectures)
Assessment: 2 x 1 hour test; Fieldwork evaluation 1 x 2-hour paper A 40% subminimum rule will apply.

(21L-28T-0P-0S-9H-20R-0F-0G-2A-8W-8C)
Corequisite: PHRM302
Content: Lower respiratory tract infections (6 Lectures) Cardiovascular system (6 lectures)
Gastrointestinal tract (6 lectures) Organ systems (4 lectures) Blood (4 lectures) Revision (2 lectures)
Assessment: 2 x 1 hour test 1 x 2-hour paper A 40% subminimum rule will apply.
182 Health Sciences
PHRM421 W1 - Biopharmaceutics
(35L-30T-0P-0S-58H-35R-0F-0G-2A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: PHRM221, PHRM222
Aim: To provide an understanding of principles involved in drug discovery and drug research and the
influence of formulation on the availability of drugs.
Content: Absorption, Disposition, Relevant Pharmacokinetics, Dissolution, Bioavailability,
Bioequivalence, Medicines Registration, Pharmaceutical statistics, Factorial Designs, Products of
Biotechnology
Assessment: 70% of the average of 2 tests+30% of assignment marks Final Mark = 60% Exam Mark +
40%CAM A 40% subminimum rule will apply.
PHRM422 W2 - Advanced drug delivery

(17L-3T-15P-0S-21H-22R-0F-0G-2A-6.5W-8C)
Prerequisite: PHRM 221, PHRM 222
Aim: To provide a background to the formulation and design of modified release and novel drug delivery
systems
Content: Polymer Science, Modified Release drug delivery systems including oral, transdermal,
intrauterine, intravaginal, parenteral and ophthalmic
Practicals: 5 x 3 Hours Practical / Seminar sessions (Practical / Seminar reports form part of the formative
assessment)
Assessment: 70% of test + 30% of average of Practical /Seminar marks Final Mark = 60% Exam Mark +
40%CAM A 40% subminimum rule will apply
PHRM431 W1 - Health Law & Ethics 2

(21.5L-24T-0P-0S-11.5H-20R-0F-0G-3A-8W-8C)
Prerequisite: Pharmacy logistics, economics and management (PCY333T); Pharmaceutical Care I,
Pharmaceutical Care II for health law and Ethics I (PHRM332).
Corequisite: Pharmaceutical Care III, Pharmaceutical Care IV.
Aim: Aims to inform student about all the relevant legislation as well as professional ethics which should
be adhered to. Also aims to include all aspects of the law and ethics with regards to HIV/AIDS
Content: Application of Health Law and ethics including HIV/AIDS
Practicals: None. Tutorials: 15 X 1-hour tutorials
Assessment: Formative: 2 X 1hour tests. Summative: 1 x 2-hour paper
DP Requirement: NONE. Notes: 4= SUB-DISCIPLINE – HEALTH LAW AND ETHICS 2

(21L-24T-0P-0S-10H-20R-3F-0G-2A-7W-8C)
Corequisite: PHRM401
Content: Dermatology (6 lectures) Wound Care (2 lectures) Bones (4 lectures) Blood (4 lectures) Child
Health (12 lectures)
Assessment: 2 x 1 hour test; Fieldwork evaluation 1 x 2-hour paper A 40% subminimum rule will apply.
Health Sciences 183

(63L-103T-0P-0S-30H-38R-0F-0G-6A-14W-24C)
Prerequisite: PHRM333; PHRM334; PHRM331; PHRM332
Corequisite: PHRM433; PHRM402; PHRM431
Aim: Application of Pharmacotherapeutic Management to real life situations by means of case studies as
well as application of evidenced informed decision making and Pharmacoeconomic concepts and theory.
Content: Prescribing and Dispensing: Critical Skills for Pharmacists (6 lectures) Health Screening for
Pharmacists (6 lectures) HIV/AIDS and the Pharmacist (6 lectures) Quality Control and Quality Assurance
– Application in Practice (6 lectures) Nutrition: Preparation of Nutritional Products (8 lectures) Drug
Related Problems; (24 lectures) Pharmacoeconomics (24 lectures)
Assessment: 2 x 1-hour tests (70%)+ GCP Assignment + First Aid Training (30%) 2 x 2.5 hour paper + 1
hour Observational structured continuous examination A 40% subminimum rule will apply.
PHRM441 W1 - Research project

(0L-0T-0P-24S-36H-5R-120F-54G-1A-26W-24C)
Prerequisite: All year 1,2 and 3 courses for the programme
Corequisite: 4th Year courses
Aim: to provide knowledge and skills relevant to conducting research, especially for entry to higher degree
courses; to develop an advanced level of knowledge in the area of specialisation; to further develop verbal
and written skills relevant to advanced studies.
Content: The guided/supervised research process involves the formulation of a research question (related
to one of the majors of the Pharmacy programme), literature review, the development of a research
proposal, application for ethical clearance, application for funding, the research process using approved
methodologies, the analyses of results and the culmination of the process in the form of a protocol and
paper which includes an appropriate and relevant literature review, description of methodologies
employed, analyses and discussion of results, conclusions and recommendations (where applicable).
Through this, the graduate will have developed analytical techniques and problem-solving skills that can
be applied in many types of employment. The graduate will be able to evaluate evidence, arguments and
assumptions, to reach sound judgements, and to communicate effectively.
Assessment: Individual contribution and participation in the research process forms 15% and evaluation of
Research Day presentation forms 10% of final mark. Evaluation of protocol, paper + oral examination
(0.1 x average protocol mark) + (0.4 x average of the internal and external marks on the written report) +
(0.1 x mark obtained for School Research Day presentation) + (0.25 x the oral examination mark) + (0.15
x continuous assessment/individual contribut
PHRM442 W2 - Pharmaceutical Calculations 2

(21L-21T-0P-0S-16H-20R-0F-0G-2A-15W-8C)
Prerequisite: PHRM241
Corequisite: PHM434
Aim: To train students in calculations pertinent to clinical Pharmacy Practice
Content: Calculations pertinent to clinical Pharmacy Practice.
Assessment: 70% of the average of 2 tests + 30% of the tutorial marks 1x 2-hour paper A 40%
subminimum rule will apply.
184 Health Sciences
Optometry
Offered in the School of Physiotherapy, Sport Science & Optometry
OPTM112 W2 - Physical and Geometric Optics

(42L-18T-0P-0S-8H-10R-0F-0G-2A-14W-8C)
Prerequisite: MATH131W1, PHYS141W1
Aim: To develop the concepts of the optics sub-course of Physics for Optometry to the extent of mature
understanding of the principles involved in the behaviour of light. To provide the student with a
demonstrable understanding of thin and thick lens theory, lens aberrations and their amelioration, and the
concept of photometry, interference, diffraction and polarization.
Content: Introduction to geometric and physical optics Laws of reflection and refraction Prisms, Curved
refracting surfaces, Thin lenses, Cylindrical and spherocylindrical lenses, Thick lenses, Multiple lens
systems, Spectacle magnification
Assessment: Two 45 minutes tests, spot tests, all contributing 50% to the final mark of the module. The
format can include a combination of written/short and MCQ`S per paper, covering the sections done,
MCQ, short questions, negative marking for MCQ and may be applied to the true & false questions.
Students will be informed of the format of the paper prior to the assessment. Calculation of Marks The
CAM will comprise an average of the theory tests and a % of any spot tests given. Students will be
informed of the formula being used to calculate the CAM. One two-hour examination contributing 50% to
the final module mark Examination Guidelines: One 2-hour examination paper contributing 50% to the
final module mark. The format can include a combination of multiple choice questions and short
questions/calculations. Negative marking will apply to the multiple choice questions and may be applied to
true & false questions. The sub minimum for the theory paper will be 40%. Supplementary examinations :
as per College HS17.
DP Requirement: DP certification will require: A CAM of at least 40%
OPTM114 W2 - Introductory Optometry

(42L-0T-21P-0S-6H-8R-0F-0G-3A-14W-8C)
Aim: To afford students a brief overview of the profession of optometry and optometric concepts.
Furthermore, to provide introduction to visual science and clinical optometry.
Content: Basic principles of optometry: the dioptre, visual acuity, hemitropic, ametropia, presbyopia.
Basic ocular anatomy. Common ocular pathologies. Eyecare professions. Optical aids. Preliminary testing
procedures. Accommodation and convergence. Heterophorias and heterotropia. Optometric
instrumentation. Defining professionalism, qualities of a professional–professional letter writing –all of
which will help prepare the student for the clinical techniques module and other clinics.
Practicals: 1 per week. Clinical supervision: Yes
Assessment: Formative: Two 45 minute tests(test 1 and test 2), random spot tests and one assignment .
Test 1 and 2 will each comprise multiple choice questions with negative marking and possibly short
questions/calculations. The assignment topic will be announced. The outcome of the assignment will be to
develop the students’ ability to research and compile information in a clear and relevant way as well as to
educate them on the topic. Detailed information about each assessment, including the format, (theory and
practical) will be provided to the learner during the lecture or practical sessions. Additional information
about the assessment tasks will be put up on the department noticeboard, as well as, relayed to the students
via the module student representative.Calculation of marks CAM will be the average of Test 1, Test 2 and
average spot test mark. One assignment Final mark = 50% of CAM + 50% of exam mark Supplementary
examinations: College Rule HS17 will apply.
DP Requirement: A CAM of at least 40%. Attendance: SCPS3 shall apply
OPTM221 W1 - Ophthalmic Optics I

(16L-16T-28P-0S-7H-10R-0F-0G-3A-14W-8C)
Prerequisite: OPTM112W2, MATH131W1
Aim: This module is aimed at optimizing the adaptation of the science of optics to human vision problems,
Health Sciences 185
and to foster the recognition of ophthalmic optics as a primary core science within optometry.
Content: Spherical lenses, Sphero-Cylindrical lenses, Toric lenses, transposition, sphero-cylindrical forms
versus toric forms, lens thickness based on form of lenses, prisms – compounding and resolving prismatic
effects. Practically, hand neutralization of single vision and bifocal spectacles, vertometer reading of single
vision and bifocal spectacles.
Practicals: One 3-hour per week
Assessment: There will be two theory tests written during the semester, in addition to two/three practical
assessments. Random spot tests will also be given. The format of the test would include calculations,
multiple choice questions (with negative marking), True and False questions (negative marking may be
applied) and short questions. The assessment criteria will be determined on the information provided in the
module handouts and during the lecture and practical sessions. Detailed information about each assessment
(theory and practical) will be provided to the learner during the lecture or practical sessions. Additional
information about the assessment tasks will be put up on the department noticeboard, as well as, relayed to
the students via the module student representative.The CAM will be an average of Theory test 1 and 2,
practical assessments 1 and 2, and the average spot test mark. The CAM will contribute 50% of the final
mark for this module. Students will be informed of any deviation from this formula in the calculation of
the CAM. The mark obtained in the examination will contribute 50% to the final mark for this module.
Final mark = 50% of CAM + 50% of exam mark Examination: 1x3hour written paper, and 1x2hour
practical assessment, The sub-minimum for each of these components, i.e. The theory paper and the
practical assessment, will be 40%. The examination mark will contribute 50% of the final mark for this
module.
A Laboratory fee is payable for this module.
OPTM222 W2 - Ophthalmic Optics II

(22L-10T-28P-0S-7H-10R-0F-0G-3A-14W-8C)
Corequisite: OPTM221W1
Aim: To further optimise the adaptation of the science of optics to human vision problems, and to foster
the recognition of ophthalmic optics as a primary core science within optometry.
Content: Materials for ophthalmic lenses. Aberrations by spherical and aspherical surfaces. Multifocal
lenses. Protective lenses, prismatic effects and decentration. Practically, the identification of different
materials, tints, lens design, the lens clock, the tangent scale, and the calipers.
Practicals: One 2-hour per week. Clinical supervision: Yes
Assessment: There will be two theory tests written during the semester, in addition to two/three practical
assessments. Random spot tests will also be given. The format of the test would include calculations,
multiple choice questions (with negative marking), True and False questions (negative marking may be
applied) and short questions. The assessment criteria will be determined on the information provided in the
module handouts and during the lecture and practical sessions. Detailed information about each assessment
the students via the module student representative.The CAM will be an average of Theory test 1 and 2,
practical assessments 1 and 2, and the average spot test mark. The CAM will contribute 50% of the final
the CAM. The mark obtained in the examination will contribute 50% to the final mark for this module.
Final mark = 50% of CAM + 50% of exam mark Supplementary examinations: College Rule HS17 will
apply. The sub-minimum for each of these components, i.e. the theory paper and the practical assessment,
will be 40%. The examination mark will contribute 50% of the final mark for this module.
OPTM231 W1 - Clinical Techniques I

(40.5L-0T-63P-3S-24H-24R-0F-0G-5.5A-14W-16C)
Prerequisite: OPTM114W2
Aim: To be able to conduct various refractive techniques for the diagnosis of visual anomalies.
186 Health Sciences
Content: Case History. Externals. Visual acuity. Retinoscopy (static) Subjective refraction techniques. The
determination of spherical and astigmatic ametropia. Accommodative function. Presbyopia. Heterophoria's
and Heterotropias, Ophthalmoscopy. The integrated clinical routine. While the lectures will provide the
student with a theoretical understanding and background of the topics, practical component of this module
will equip the student with the appropriate clinical skills, associated with these topics, which are required
to perform many of the techniques. The above-mentioned topics are required for the performance of a
comprehensive eye examination.
Assessment: There will be two theory tests written during the semester, in addition to two practical
assessments. Random spot tests will also be given. The format of the test would include multiple choice
questions (with negative marking), True and False questions (negative marking may be applied) and short
questions. The assessment criteria will be determined on the information provided in the module handouts
and during the lecture and practical sessions, and the criteria to be used in the practical assessments will be
made available to the student before-hand. Any student found “copying” during any of the above-
mentioned assessments, will be referred to the Dean of Students, via the Head of School, for disciplinary
action. Detailed information about each assessment (theory and practical) will be provided to the learner
during the lecture or practical sessions. Additional information about the assessment tasks will be put up
on the department noticeboard, as well as, relayed to the students via the module student
representative.The CAM will be an average of Theory test 1 and 2, Practical assessments 1 & 2, and the
average the spot test mark. The CAM will contribute 50% of the final mark for this module. Students will
be informed of any deviation from this formula in the calculation of the CAM. The mark obtained in the
examination will contribute 50% to the final mark for this module. Final mark = 50% of CAM + 50% of
exam mark Supplementary examinations: College Rule HS17 will apply.
OPTM232 W2 - Clinical Techniques II

(42L-0T-63P-3S-24H-24R-0F-0G-4A-14W-16C)
Aim: To advance the clinical skills of the student obtained in OPTM231W1, to the level at which he/she
may completely carry out all procedures available to the clinician and make an appropriate diagnosis and
management decision.
Content: The accommodation-convergence relationship in clinical terms. Clinical facets of visual acuity.
Binocular refraction and balancing techniques. Analytical optometry. Patient management: the grief case,
special problems. Clinical aspects of the visual fields. Case studies. Tonometry, Fixation Disparity,
Clinical implications of heterophorias. Anisometropia.
Practicals: One of 3 hours per week. Clinical supervision: yes
Assessment: There will be two theory tests written during the semester, in addition to two practical
assessments. Random spot tests will also be given. The format of the test would include multiple choice
questions (with negative marking), True and False questions (negative marking may be applied) and short
questions. The assessment criteria will be determined on the information provided in the module handouts
and during the lecture and practical sessions, and the criteria to be used in the practical assessments will be
made available to the student before-hand. Any student found “copying” during any of the above-
mentioned assessments, will be referred to the Dean of Students, via the Head of School, for disciplinary
action. Detailed information about each assessment (theory and practical) will be provided to the learner
representative.The CAM will be an average of Theory test 1 and 2, Practical assessments 1 & 2, and the
average the spot test mark. The CAM will contribute 50% of the final mark for this module. Students will
be informed of any deviation from this formula in the calculation of the CAM. The mark obtained in the
exam mark Supplementary examinations: College Rule HS17 will applyThe sub-minimum for each of
these components i.e. the theory paper and the clinical assessment, will be 40%. The examination mark
will contribute 50% of the final mark for this module. DP Requirement: A CAM of at least 40%.
Attendance: SCPS3 shall apply. A Laboratory fee is payable for this module.
Health Sciences 187
OPTM234 W2 - Optical Dispensing

(28L-0T-28P-0S-8H-14R-0F-0G-2A-14W-8C)
Prerequisite: OPTM112W2, OPTM114W2
Corequisite: OPTM221W1, OPTM222W2
Aim: To describe the fundamental principles of ophthalmic lens design, performance, frame types and
materials and frame fitting.
Content: Basic visual problems and lenses & frames to solve them. Manufacturing processes. Fitting and
dispensing of spectacles Case studies. Problems encountered in dispensing. Pricing and ordering of
spectacles. Specific occupational and environmental needs.
Practicals: One 3-hour per week.
Assessment: Two theory tests and two practical tests are conducted during the semester. Format of the
theory tests can include short questions, matching, multiple choice questions (negative marking will
apply), true & false (negative marking may be applied) and case studies. The practical test will comprise
of the work covered during the semester. The format of the practical tests can include lens identification,
frame adjustment, marking of lenses and case studies. The CAM will comprise primarily of an average of
the 2 theory tests, and 2 practical tests. However, an assignment given during the semester and spot test,
when relevant, will be incorporated into the CAM. Student will be informed how the CAM will be
calculated and any deviation thereof. The final mark for the module will comprise 50% of the CAM and
50% of the examination mark. Supplementary examinations: College Rule HS17 will apply. The sub
minimum for each component i.e. the theory paper and the practical assessment will be 40%.
DP Requirement: A CAM of at least 40%.
OPTM241 W1 - Ocular Anatomy and Physiology

(21L-14T-0P-3S-21H-18R-0F-0G-3A-14W-8C)
Prerequisite: BIOL103W1
Aim: This module describes and discusses the anatomy of the eye in detail. The module intends to give
students a grasp of the anatomy of structures related to vision as a foundation for courses in Clinical
Techniques and Ocular Pathology
Content: Course Introduction , Gross Anatomy of the eye. Sclera , Limbus, Cornea, Conjunctiva, Eyelids,
Blood supply to the eye, Extra-ocular muscles, Choroid Iris and Ciliary Body, Anterior and Posterior
Chamber, Lens, Aqueous and Vitreous, Retina, Optic Nerve and Visual pathway, Cranial Nerves (from
neuro-anatomy), Overall linking of Ocular Anatomy to Clinical Techniques .
Practicals: 1x 2 hours per alternate week. Clinical supervision: Yes
Assessment: 1. 2 x 45 minute theory tests . one per term. 2. Students are expected to work in groups /teams
on an assignment : a. build a model eye . ( Try to show anatomy and physiology) b. choose one structure
of the eye. Build this structure, to resemble the eye,as closely as possible, showing anatomy, physiology
and function. c. Compare the eye to the camera. d. Link work learn’t in ocular anatomy to clinical
techniques and optics Students will be given a mark for the model eye. Students will be informed of the
format of the assessment prior to the assessment. Additional information about the assessment tasks will
be put up on the department notice board, as well as, relayed to the students via the module student
representative. Calculation of marks The CAM will comprise an average of the 3 marks obtained . (2 tests
plus 1 assignment). CAM contributes 50 % to the final module mark. The final exam contributes 50% to
the final module mark. Final Examination at end of semester : 1x 2 hour written MCQ and short questions,
matching , True/ False. Negative marking applies to MCQ and may be applied to the True & False
questions. Passmark is 50 %. A sub minimum of 40% will apply.
OPTM311 W1 - Public Health

(10L-0T-0P-11S-17H-40R-0F-0G-2A-14W-8C)
Aim: To equip the student with the necessary skills to understand and interact with the broader society and
to understand the impact of social, economic and environmental issues on the health of the patient.
Content: Community health vs Public Health, Primary care optometry, Epidemiology, Health Systems,
188 Health Sciences
Health Education and Promotion, Health Economics, The South African Health System, Regional Health
Policies, The District Health System, International Health. Ergonomics of work station, visual strain and
computer work, ocular hazards of UV and IR radiation; protective materials in industry, visual
requirements of different occupations.
Assessment: Two 45 minute tests which may comprise multiple choice questions (negative marking will
apply), true and false, matching, and short questions. The CAM will comprise an average of the theory
tests and any spot tests. The final mark for the module will comprise 50% of the CAM and 50% of the
examination mark. Supplementary examination: as per College Rule HS17.The examination will comprise
a two hour theory paper which may comprise multiple choice questions (negative marking will apply), true
and false (negative marking may be applied), matching, and short questions. Students will be informed of
the format of the examination prior to the examinations. The sub minimum of 40% will apply.
DP Requirement: CAM of at least 40%.
OPTM321 W1 - Physiological Optics I

(42L-42T-0P-0S-28H-44R-0F-0G-4A-14W-16C)
Prerequisite: OPTM112W2, OPTM231W1, OPTM221W1, OPTM 232W2, OPTM222W2
Aim: To develop a higher and more intensive level of understanding the effects of optical correction on the
human eye, its clinical, physiological and optical ramifications. In addition it also provides a firm
theoretical understanding of clinical issues relating to the assessment of human visual performance.
Content: The schematic Eyes, Emmetropia and Ametropia, Retinal image formation, Spectacle
magnification, Relative Spectacle magnification, Accommodation, Presbyopia, Accommodation and
Convergence, graphical analysis, clinical implications.
Practicals: One two hour tutorial every week. Clinical supervision: Tutors
Assessment: Two 1hr Class Tests: 50 % of CAM +/- 6 tutorial tests: 25% of CAM Random Spot Tests and
homework assignments: 25% of CAM Detailed information about each assessment (theory and practical)
will be provided to the learner during the lecture or practical sessions. Additional information about the
assessment tasks will be put up on the department noticeboard, as well as, relayed to the students via the
module student representative.Calculation of CAM: average of 2xclass test+average of tutorial tests/spot
test tests/ assignments. Final mark = 50% of CAM + 50% of exam mark Supplementary examinations:
College Rule HS17 will apply1x written theory paper, the format of the written examination will include
calculations, multiple choice questions (with negative marking), True and False questions and short
questions (negative marking may be applied). A sub-minimum of 40% will apply for the examination.
DP Requirement: DP certification will require a CAM of at least 40%.
OPTM322 W2 - Physiological Optics 2

(42L-42T-0P-0S-28H-44R-0F-0G-4A-14W-16C)
Aim: To develop a broader understanding of the optical and visuo-psychological entities comprising the
hierarchy of visual information processing.
Content: The Optical Space Sense, Monocular and Binocular Spatial Localization, The Horopter, Optical-
induced Spatial distortions, Aberrations of the human eye, Color Vision.
Practicals: One 2-hour tutorial per week
Assessment: Two 1hr Class Tests contributing 50 % of CAM 1x prac test 2x assignment + 2x seminar tests
50% cam Random Spot Tests and homework assignments: Detailed information about each assessment
the students via the module student representative. Calculation of CAM: average of 2xclass test+average
of PRAC tests/spot test tests/ASSIGNMENT/SEMINAR TEST Final mark = 50% of CAM + 50% of
exam mark Supplementary examinations: College Rule HS17 will apply.1x written theory paper, the
format of the written examination will include calculations, multiple choice questions (with negative
marking), True and False questions (negative marking may be applied) and short questions. An oral
examination will also be conducted. Students will be informed about the % contribution of the oral
examination to the examination mark. The sub-minimum of 40% will apply for the theory paper and the
oral examination
Health Sciences 189
DP Requirement: DP certification will require a CAM of at least 40%.
OPTM331 W1 - Contact Lenses I

(42L-0T-0P-0S-25H-10R-0F-0G-3A-14W-8C)
Prerequisite: OPTM 231W1; OPTM 232W2; OPTM 221W1; OPTM 222W2
Corequisite: BIOC200W1
Aim: To cover all aspects of modern contact lens practice with particular emphasis on dealing with
spherical lens fits and uncomplicated contact lens specifications.
Content: The anatomy and physiology of the anterior segment of the eye. Corneal topography
measurement and significance. The examination of the anterior segment; slit lamp biomicroscopy. Contact
lens history, materials, manufacturing methods, optics, design, instrumentation, lens verification. Fitting-
routine procedures, material-related problems, the special problems of astigmatism. Lens dispensing and
patient education; aftercare. The care and maintenance of rigid and soft contact lenses. Contact lens
solutions.
Assessment: Minimum of two tests per semester added towards the year mark. Assignment (if applicable)
will make up a % of year mark. The format of the tests and assignment will be discussed with the students
beforehand. Additional information will appear on the notice board. Examination Guidelines: Summative
Assessment. One final theory examination of 3 hours. The format of the examination can include multiple
choice questions (negative marking will apply), true and false (negative marking may be applied), filling
in the blanks and short questions. Students will be informed of the format before hand. A sub minimum of
40% will apply to this examination. Calculation of marks Tests and assignments (if applicable) are added
towards CAM. An average of two tests and an assignment (if applicable) will make up the CAM. The
CAM will constitute 50% of the final mark for the module and the exam constitutes the other 50% of final
mark. Minimum mark required to qualify for supplementary examination as per college rule HS 17.
DP Requirement: A CAM of at least 40%. Any changes to this will appear on the notice board and
students will be informed.
OPTM333 W1 - General and Ocular Pathology

(56L-0T-0P-0S-8H-13R-0F-0G-3A-14W-8C)
Prerequisite: OPTM241W1, OPTM231W1, OPTM232W2, HPHS222W2
Aim: To present a detailed description of the aetiology, pathogenesis, differential diagnosis, treatment and
management of major systemic diseases.
Content: General Health. The Diseases of the Neurological System, Musculo-Skeletal System,
Hematopoietic System, Immunologic System, Cardiovascular System, Endocrine/Metabolic System,
Infectious Diseases, Congenital/Hereditary Conditions, HIV/AIDS.
Assessment: Two theory tests which may comprise of Multiple Choice Questions (negative marking will
apply) and short questions. Detailed information about the format of each assessment will be provided to
the student during the lecture. Additional information about the assessment tasks will be put up on the
departmental notice board, as well as, relayed to the students via module student representativeThe CAM
will comprise an average of the theory tests. The final mark for the module will comprise 50% of the CAM
and 50% of the examination mark. Supplementary examination: as per College Rule HS17One two hour
examination contributing 50% to the final module mark. The format may comprise of Multiple Choice
Questions (negative marking will apply) and short questions. Students will be informed of the format of
the examination paper. The sub minimum for this paper will be 40%.
OPTM334 WY - Diagnosis and Management of Ocular Disease

(84L-0T-96P-0S-11H-44R-0F-0G-5A-28W-24C)
Prerequisite: OPTM232W2, OPTM241W1, HPHS221W1, HPHS222W2, ANAT103W1
Aim: To present a detailed description of the aetiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis,
treatment and management of posterior segment ocular disease.
Content: Abnormal conditions of the lids, cornea, conjunctiva, lachrymal apparatus, iris, sclera. The extra-
ocular muscles. Abnormal conditions of retina, vitreous, optic nerve, cones, ciliary body, lens, glaucoma
and systemic disease presentation in the eye. Diagnostics skills including contact tonometry, gonioscopy
190 Health Sciences
and dilated fundus examination.

Practicals: One 3-hour practical every week, visit to eye clinic once a month, Clinical supervision: yes
Assessment: There will be four theory tests written during the semester, in addition to four practical
assessments. Random spot tests will also be given. The format of the test could include multiple choice
questions (with negative marking), True and False (negative marking may be applied) questions and short
questions. Students will also be required to do presentations on assigned topics. Assignments may be
given. Detailed information about each assessment (theory and practical) will be provided to the learner
representative.The CAM will be an average of Theory tests , Practical assessments, average the spot test
mark, presentation and assignments. The CAM will contribute 50% of the final mark for this module.
Students will be informed of the formula in the calculation of the CAM. The mark obtained in the
exam mark Supplementary examinations: College Rule HS17 will applyOne theory paper – 3 hours
(MCQ’s, with negative marking, true and false (negative marking may be applied) and short questions can
be included. Students will be informed about the format of the examination. One practical assessment
which may include an oral exam. The sub-minimum for each of these components i.e. the theory paper and
the practical assessment, will be 40%. The examination mark will contribute 50% of the final mark for this
module.
A Laboratory & Transportation fee is payable for this module.
OPTM351 WY - General Clinic

(0L-0T-112P-0S-20H-24R-0F-0G-4A-28W-16C)
Prerequisite: OPTM231W1, OPTM232W2
Corequisite: OPTM334WY, OPTM353WY
Aim: The student will understand and acquire clinical expertise in ocular assessments and would be able to
examine patients more effectively. The student would be able to perform a complete ocular examination
with supervision.
Content: Full ocular assessments on volunteer patients - complete refraction, assessment of internal and
external ocular health. Record keeping. Supplementary tests used in clinical examinations. Problem
oriented examination. Differential diagnosis. Prescribing. Counselling. Tentative diagnosis. Full ocular
assessments on volunteer patients - complete refraction, assessment of internal and external ocular health.
Practicals: Two 3-hour per week. Clinical supervision: Yes
Assessment: Continuous assessment graded on each patient seen. 4 Formal clinical assessments – 1 per
term. Additional information about the assessment tasks will be put up on the department notice board, as
well as, relayed to the students via the module student representative.Calculation of CAM Continuous
assessment graded on each patient seen. 4 Formal clinical assessments – 1 per term. The average of
assessment marks and average of all patient marks will be used in the calculation of the CAM. The Final
mark for the module will constitute 50% of the CAM and 50% of the examination mark. The sub
minimum for the examination will be 40%.Same assessment format used during Term assessments Final
mark = 50% of CAM + 50% of Exam mark The sub minimum for the examination assessment will be
40%.
DP Requirement: A CAM of at least 40%. Attendance: SCPS3 and SCPS4 shall apply
OPTM353 WY - Contact Lens Clinic 1

(0L-0T-84P-0S-32H-40R-0F-0G-4A-28W-16C)
Aim: To provide the students with clinical experience in assessing the patient’s suitability for contact lens
wear, fitting spherical soft and rigid lenses and managing patients wearing these lenses
Content: Verification and modification of lenses, contact lens fitting, care and maintenance, contact lens
related complications, spherical contact lens fitting, aftercare and special topics. Enhancement of clinical
techniques, exposure to corneal topography and slit lamp attachments, verification and modification of
Health Sciences 191
rigid contact lenses.

Practicals: One 3-hour per week. Clinical supervision: yes
Assessment: The format of the tests will be discussed with the class prior to the assessment. All the test
results will be used to calculate the DP and tutorial work will be assessed in the clinical tests and
examinations. Practical reports will be graded and added to the test marks. The DP will make up 50% of
the final examination mark. Additional information will appear on notice board.Examination Guidelines:
Summative Assessment. 1 final clinical examination will form 50% of the final examination mark. Clinical
stations and one MCQ slide identification station with negative marking may be used. Students will be
informed of the format of the examination prior to the examination. The subminimum of 40% will apply to
this examination. Calculation of marks Average of 4 tests will be used towards the calculation of the
CAM. Tests and assignments/tutorial presentations(if applicable) are added towards the CAM. The CAM
will constitute 50% of the Final mark for the module, and the exam constitutes the other 50% of final
mark. Any changes to this formula will be discussed with students timeously. Minimum mark required to
qualify for supplementary examination as per college rule HS 17.
DP Requirement: A CAM of at least 40% and rule SCPS3 will apply.
OPTM412 WY - Research Publication

(4L-36T-0P-0S-39H-0R-0F-0G-1A-28W-8C)
Prerequisite: All 3rd level modules.
Aim: This course is aimed at the development of research skills. The student is afforded the opportunity to
carry out research in their own field of interest. It allows for innovative thinking that opens up the
possibility of exciting and valuable discoveries in optometry. Students would be introduced to the field of
research and research principles and would learn how to write papers and articles for publication.
Content: Literature surveys. Development of a research topic. Protocol writing. Review of Research
Methods. Statistical analysis of research data. Report writing.
Practicals: None. Clinical supervision: Research supervision
Assessment: The assessment of this module comprises continuous assessment of student input and
progress through the research study which including an assessment of the protocol. Detailed information
about module will be provided by the supervisor at the preliminary group meetings. Additional
information about the assessment tasks will be put up on the department notice board, as well as, relayed
to the students via the module student representativeThe protocol assessment mark, podium presentation,
poster presentation, dissertation and student’s contribution will all contribute to the final mark for this
module. Students will be informed of the % contribution of each aspect. In the final examination of this
module, students will be required to do a podium presentation of the research study findings, summarize
the research study in the form of a poster, and complete a research report all of which will be examined by
the external examiners for the module.
OPTM413 WY - Optometric Management & Jurisprudence

(56L-0T-0P-0S-11H-11R-0F-0G-2A-28W-8C)
Aim: To prepare students to play a meaningful role in the proper management of optometric services.
Content: The principles of accounting, funding of capital purchases, insurance, balance sheets and profit
and loss accounts, the Companies Act, Shops and Offices Act, Factories Act, Workmen's compensation,
Unemployment Insurance Act, trends in health care in South Africa, funding of health care, cash flow
management, financial controls in a practice environment, staff management, professional and personal
responsibilities, fundamentals of law, relevant statutory law, public and professional liabilities and
responsibilities in terms of the HPCSA.
Practicals: Field visit - one every four weeks
Assessment: Students will be informed of the assessment tasks by the relevant lecturers on commencement
of their sections. Detailed information about each assessment (theory and practical) will be provided to the
learner during the lecture periods. Additional information about the assessment tasks will be put up on the
department noticeboard, as well as, relayed to the students via the module student representative.The CAM
will be an average of the theory tests and assignments. The formula will be communicated to the student
192 Health Sciences
during the year. The mark obtained in the examination will contribute 50% to the final mark for this
module. Final mark = 50% of CAM + 50% of exam mark Supplementary examinations: College Rule
HS17 will apply. The sub-minimum will be 40%. The examination mark will contribute 50% of the final
mark for this module. DP Requirement: A CAM of at least 40%.
OPTM421 W1 - Neurophysiology of Vision

(42L-0T-0P-0S-15H-20R-0F-0G-3A-14W-8C)
Aim: To provide students with a knowledge and understanding of the neurological functioning and testing
of the visual system in relation to the ultra structure.
Content: Transduction, encoding and transmission of information by single neurons. Visual information
processing. Purposes of eye movements; directions of gaze; kinematics. EOM structure and physiology.
Sherrington's law; Hering's law; Cybernetics. Saccadic, smooth pursuit, VOS, OKS, vergence systems.
Neural control of conjugate movement and eye movement adaptation. Contrast sensitivity functions,
Fourier Analysis, MTF, Electrodiagnostic tests.
Assessment: There will be two theory tests for the module. The format of the test would include multiple
choice questions (with negative marking), True and False questions (negative marking may applied) and
short questions. The assessment criteria will be determined on the information provided in the module
handouts and during the lectures. Any student found “copying” during any of the above-mentioned
assessments, will be referred to the Dean of Students, via the Head of School, for disciplinary action.
Detailed information about each assessment (theory and practical) will be provided to the learner during
the lecture or practical sessions. Additional information about the assessment tasks will be put up on the
department noticeboard, as well as, relayed to the students via the module student
representative.Calculation of marks The CAM will be the average of the two theory tests written and will
contribute 50% of the final mark for the module. Students will be informed of any deviation from this
formula in the calculation of the CAM. Final mark = 50% of CAM + 50% of exam mark Supplementary
examinations: College Rule HS17 will apply. The sub-minimum for this paper will be 40%. This
examination mark will contribute 50% of the final mark for this module.
OPTM431 W1 - Contact Lenses II

(42L-0T-42P-0S-34H-34R-0F-0G-8A-14W-16C)
Prerequisite: OPTM331W1, OPTM353WY
Aim: To provide students with the necessary theory and clinical background for advanced contact lens
fitting.
Content: Toric contact lenses. Daily, extended and flexi-wear concepts. Ocular complications. Contact
lens fitting for presbyopia, aphakia, re-fitting former PMMA lens wearers, post-refractive surgery,
therapeutic lenses, cosmetic lenses, keratoconus. Advances in procedures and instrumentation. Contact
lenses for sport activities, special vocational environments, refractive surgery, scleral lenses and ocular
prosthetics. Contact lens practice management; economics, marketing, ethics and malpractice.
Assessment: 2 theory tests. Students will be informed of the format at the beginning of the semester.
Random spot tests at lectures – average taken as one additional theory test One practical
assessment.Calculation of the CAM The 2 highest marks, of the 2 theory tests and spot test average are
used to calculate the theory portion of the CAM (80%) The practical assessment contributes 20% of the
CAM. The final mark for the module will comprise 50% of the CAM and 50% of the exam mark.One 3
hour theory paper that contributes 80% of the exam mark, and a practical examination that contributes
20% to the exam mark. The format of theory examination may include short questions and/or case analysis
and/or drawing of diagrams and/or MCQ’s (with negative marking). The pass mark is 50%. The Clinical
examination will involve clinical assessments and /or a viva examination. The sub minimum for each of
the components i.e. the theory exam and the practical exam will be 40%. Minimum mark to qualify for
supplementary exam: As per college rule HS 17
DP Requirement: CAM of at least 40 %. Attendance compulsory for all clinics/practicals, seminars &
tutorials. . A Laboratory fee is payable for this module.
Health Sciences 193
OPTM433 W1 - Paediatric Optometry

(42L-0T-42P-0S-36H-36R-0F-0G-4A-14W-16C)
Prerequisite: OPTM351WY, OPTM322W2, OPTM334WY, PHRM312W2
Corequisite: OPTM435W1, OPTM437W1, OPTM451WY
Aim: To provide the students with the theoretical and clinical knowledge and skills to promote good
vision, screen, assess, diagnose and manage the vision of children and make appropriate referrals.
Content: Developmental milestones of gross and fine motor function, cognition, speech and
communication and vision development. Vision screening; vision examination, diagnosis and management
vision problems in the infant, toddler, preschooler, school aged child. Vision and school performance;
delayed development and vision therapy.
Assessment: There will be two theory tests and two clinical assessments during the semester. Random spot
tests will also be given. The format of the test can include multiple choice questions (with negative
marking), True and False questions (negative marking may be applied) and short questions. The
assessment criteria will be determined on the information provided in the module handouts and during the
lecture and practical sessions. Additional information about the assessment tasks as per notice board. The
CAM will be an average of Theory test 1 and 2 and assessment 1 and 2, and the average spot test mark.
The CAM will contribute 50% of the final mark for this module. Students will be informed of any
deviation from this formula in the calculation of the CAM. Final Mark = 50% of CAM + 50% of EXAM
MARK Minimum mark required to qualify for supplementary examination is 40% as per College rule
HS17.The sub-minimum for the written paper and the clinical assessment will be 40%
DP Requirement: Students must obtain a CAM of at least 40%. Attendance SCPS3 shall apply.
OPTM435 W1 - Binocular Vision

(42L-0T-42P-0S-34H-34R-0F-0G-8A-14W-16C)
Aim: At the end of the course the learner should have: a thorough knowledge of the binocular vision
system and it’s various non-strabismic and strabismic anomalies. the ability to use the relevant clinical
equipment competently and efficiently to arrive at the diagnosis and perform therapy on patients.
Content: Review of heterophorias, Review of Fixation Disparity and neurological pathway for binocular
vision Convergence Insufficiency, Grades of Binocular Vision, Aetiology of Strabismus, Diagnosis of
strabismus, ARC, EF, Suppression, Amblyopia, Microtropia, Inconcomitancy, Nystagmus, yclophorias ,
Principles of strabismus surgery, BV manifestations of systemic diseases, Muscle Palsies, Treatment &
Management of SOP/T & XOP/T, Case analysis
Assessment: 2 theory tests. Students will be informed of the format at the beginning of the semester.
Random spot tests at lectures – average taken as one additional theory test One practical assessment
Additional information as per 04 student notice boardThe 2 highest marks, of the 2 theory tests and spot
test average is used to calculate the theory portion of the CAM (80%) The practical assessment contributes
20% of the CAM The Final mark for the module will comprise 50% of the CAM and 50% of the
examination mark.One 3 hour theory paper that contributes 80% of the exam mark, and a practical
examination that contributes 20% to the exam mark. The format of theory examination will include short
questions and/or case analysis and/or drawing of diagrams and/or MCQ’s (with negative marking).
Students will be informed of the format of the examination paper prior to the examination. The pass mark
is 50%. A sub minimum of 40% will apply to each of components of the final examination i.e the theory
paper and the practical examination. Minimum mark to qualify for supplementary exam: As per college
rule HS 17. DP Requirement: A CAM of 40 % in addition to rule SCPS3.
OPTM437 W1 - Low Vision

(42L-0T-42P-0S-36H-36R-0F-0G-4A-14W-16C)
Prerequisite: PHRM312W2, OPTM351WY, OPTM322W2, OPTM334WY
Corequisite: OPTM451WY, OPTM433W1, OPTM435W1
194 Health Sciences
Aim: To equip the learner with the theoretical and clinical knowledge, and skills to assess, diagnose and
co-manage the visual and associated functional needs of the partially sighted patient and make appropriate
referrals.
Content: Definitions and epidemiology of low vision and blindness, functional losses, psychological and
sociological factors, the low vision examination and diagnosis, demonstration, trial and fitting/prescribing
assistive devices. Referrals and service organizations. Case presentations.
Assessment: There will be two theory tests and two clinical assessments during the semester. Random spot
tests will also be given. The format of the test can include multiple choice questions (with negative
marking), True and False questions (negative marking may be applied) and short questions The assessment
criteria will be determined on the information provided in the module handouts and during the lecture and
practical sessions. Students will be informed of the format of the assessment tasks in advance. Additional
information about the assessment tasks as per notice board. The CAM will be an average of Theory test 1
and 2 and assessment 1 and 2, and the average spot test mark. The CAM will contribute 50% of the final
the CAM Calculation of Final Mark Final Mark = 50% of CAM + 50% of EXAM MARK Minimum mark
required to qualify for supplementary examination is 40% as per College rule HS17. The sub-minimum for
the written paper and the clinical assessment will be 40%.
DP Requirement: Students must obtain a CAM of at least 40%. Attendance: SCPS3 shall apply.
OPTM451 WY - General Clinics Grand Rounds

(0L-0T-168P-28S-22H-20R-0F-0G-2A-28W-24C)
Prerequisite: OPTM351WY, OPTM334WY
Aim: To provide students with clinical experience using detailed step by step procedures for a
comprehensive battery of techniques used in the diagnosis & management of vision problems.
Content: Full refractions on patient’s. Assessment of internal and external ocular health. Record keeping.
Supplementary tests used in clinical examinations. Problem oriented examination. Differential diagnosis.
Prescribing. Counselling. Tentative diagnosis. Correct dispensing of spectacles. Fitting a high
myope/aphakic/special lenses.
Practicals: One 5 hour per week. Clinical supervision: yes
Assessment: There will be four clinical assessments during the course of this module. During the clinical
assessments the student will be expected to perform an appropriate eye examination on a patient, and
decide on an accurate diagnosis and appropriate management strategy. Student will write random spot tests
based on the content covered during the case presentations which will take place in the second semester.
The format of these spot tests will include short questions. Detailed information about each assessment
(theory and practical) will be provided to the learner during the lecture or practical sessions. The sub
minimum for each patient seen will be 40%. The CAM will be include marks obtained in the four clinical
assessments, case presentation and spot tests. Students will be informed of the formula to be used. The
CAM will contribute 50% to the final mark for the module. Final mark = 50% of CAM + 50% of exam
mark. Supplementary examinations: College Rule HS17 will apply.
DP Requirement: CAM of at least 40%. Attendance: SCPS3 and SCPS4 shall apply
OPTM452 W2 - Contact Lenses Clinic II

(0L-0T-42P-28S-3H-5R-0F-0G-2A-14W-8C)
Aim: To provide the students with clinical skills and experience in the fitting of all contact lenses from
basic to advanced.
Content: Verification and modification of lenses, contact lens fitting, care and maintenance, contact lens
related complications, special contact lens fitting and special topics. After care management of both hard
and soft lens patients. In addition, students undertake practical sessions in contact lens modification and
verification and advanced technology.
Practicals: One 3-hour practical, One 2-hour seminar, One 3-hour screening. Clinical supervision: yes
Assessment: The assessment for this course is largely formative. The CAM comprises 75% of the final
mark and the examination, 25%. Assessments during the semester (CAM) comprises of: Prac test (20%)
Health Sciences 195
case presentations(10%) case records(25%) – 3 cases written up 1 theory test (25%) Slides 20% Any
deviation from the above formula will be communicated to the students. A penalty of 20% will apply for
assignments/case reports handed in after due date but within one week. The final mark for the module will
comprise 75% of the CAM and 25% of the examination mark. Attendance compulsory for ALL
clinics/practicals & seminarsSub-minimum of 40% will apply. Minimum mark to qualify for
supplementary exam: As per college rule HS 17
DP Requirement: A CAM of at least 40 %. Attendance: Rule SCPS3 and Complete fitting of 5 RGP and
10 Soft lens patients (or as otherwise indicated by the module co-ordinator).
OPTM454 W2 - Paediatric Clinic

(0L-0T-42P-28S-2H-5R-0F-0G-3A-14W-8C)
Aim: To provide students with clinical experience in the assessment, diagnosis and management of
children’s vision.
Content: Vision assessment of children: i.e. case history, external examination, VA , refractive status,
colour vision, accommodation, binocular status; ocular health, developmental status; therapy, follow up
and referrals.
Practicals: One 3-hour per week, 2-hour seminar, 3-hour screening. Clinical supervision: yes
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks: Two formal clinical assessments, clinical assessments on
patients, spot tests and case presentations all contributing 50% to the final mark of the module. The student
must be able to demonstrate the ability to assess the vision of children i.e. conduct a case history, external
examination, record VA, assess the refractive status, colour vision, stereopsis, accommodation, binocular
status; ocular health, developmental status of children and manage appropriately. Additional information
about the assessment tasks as per notice board.30% assessment 1 + 30% assessment 2 + 30% assessment
on patients + 10% case presentation. Any deviation from this formula will be communicated in advance to
the student. Final Mark = 50% of CAM + 50% of EXAM MARK Minimum mark required to qualify for
supplementary examination is 40% as per College rule HS17.One examination assessment, 50 %
contribution to the final mark. The assessment criteria will be determined on the information provided
during the practical sessions. The sub-minimum for the clinical assessment will be 40%.
DP Requirement: Students must obtain a CAM of at least 40%. Students are required to assess at least 5
patients unless otherwise specified by the module co-ordinator. Attendance: SCPS3 shall apply.
OPTM456 W2 - Binocular Vision

(0L-0T-42P-28S-3H-5R-0F-0G-2A-14W-8C)
Aim: To provide the students with the necessary clinical skills for the diagnosis and management of
binocular vision anomalies.
Content: The diagnosis, management (with lenses, prisms or therapy) and long term application of therapy
for patients with both non strabismic and strabismic binocular anomalies. In addition, students undertake
projects and case analyses for identified binocular vision skills, related to vocational/recreational activities.
Practicals: One 3-hour per week , 2-hour seminar, 3-hour screening. Clinical supervision: yes
Assessment: The assessment for this course is largely formative. The CAM comprises 75% of the final
mark and the examination 25%. Assessments during the semester (CAM) comprises of: slides (20%) 1
practical test (25%), case presentation (10%) patient record submission (20%) – 2 cases written up 1
theory test (25%) The end of semester examination will make up 25% of the final mark. This will
comprise of a viva voce as well as a clinical component. A clinical examination that contributes 25% to
the final mark. The format of examination will involve clinical assessments and /or a viva examination.
The assessment for this course is largely formative. The end of semester examination will make up 25% of
the final mark. This will comprise of a viva voce as well as a clinical assessment component. A Sub
minimum of 40% will apply to the examination.
DP Requirement: CAM 40 % Attendance: Rule SCPS 3 & Minimum of 5 BV patients (or as determined
by the module co-ordinator) to be seen
196 Health Sciences
OPTM458 W2 - Low Vision Clinic

(0L-0T-42P-28S-2H-5R-0F-0G-3A-14W-8C)
Aim: To provide students with clinical experience in the assessment, diagnosis, and co-management of the
partially sighted patient
Content: Observational assessment; case history; VA; external examination; binocular status assessment,
eye movements, refractive status, determination and verification of the add, contrast sensitivity, visual
fields, colour vision, ocular health, demonstration, trial, selection and training of assistive devices, referral
to service organisations. Participation in a low vision assignment related to low vision.
Practicals: One 3-hour per week, 2-hour seminar, vocational assessment of patients. Clinical supervision:
yes
Assessment: Formative assessment: Clinical assessment on patient contribute 33 percentage towards CAM
Two clinical assessment contribute 33 percentage towards CAM Case presentation contribute 33
percentage towards CAM RECORD CARD Calculation of marks: Calculation of CAM: As indicated in
the formative assessment above. Any deviation from this formula will be communicated to the class.
Examination Guidelines Student will have 2 hour clinical assessment. The format will be communicated to
students prior to the examination. The sub minimum for the exam will be 40%.
DP Requirement: Students must obtain a CAM of at least 40% Attendance: Rule SCPS3 will apply.
A Laboratory & Transportation fee is payable for this module.
Physiotherapy
PHTH101 W1 - Introduction to Physiotherapy Science

(40L-0T-10P-0S-21H-6R-0F-0G-3A-15W-8C)
Aim: To introduce students to basic anatomical structures related to human movement. To assess changes
related to swelling/inflammation. To assess joint motion and muscle strength.
Content: Anatomical terminology. Introduction to the musculo-skeletal system (osteology,
muscles/tendons/joints). Surface anatomy. Methods of measurement of joint range and muscle testing and
application of these tests.
Assessment: There will be I x presentation (groupwork as will be assigned by lecturer on muscular
system). Guidelines for presentations to be provided. Assessment criteria to be negotiated with students
(either group or individual allocation of marks). 1 x theory test for 1 hour 1 x OSPE (to cover all practical
techniques learnt) All 3 above will carry equal weighting and the average of the 3 will constitute the CAM
of 60 1 x theory paper 1 hour (short questions to cover both theoretical and practical aspects of module) 1
x OSPE
DP Requirement: Attendance is compulsory. Min CAM of 50% is required to take final examination.
PHTH102 W2 - Massage and Manipulation

(100L-5T-36P-0S-10H-0R-0F-0G-9A-14W-16C)
Aim: The student is introduced massage techniques and general sequences of massage to the upper& lower
limb, back &neck. The student is introduced to relaxed passive movements of the upper limb, lower limb
and spine, and to techniques of relaxation.
Content: Massage: history, definition of massage, classification, general uses, contra-indications.
Application of a general sequence of massage to the upper limbs, lower limbs and back. Theory of passive
movements. General sequence of passive movements to the upper limbs, lower limbs, and neck. Local and
general relaxation techniques
Assessment: Formative = One theory test and two practical tests, all contributing 60% to the final mark for
the module. Summative =One X 1hour theory paper and one OSPE , together contributing 40% to the final
module mark
Health Sciences 197
DP Requirement: 75% attendance of lectures, of tutorials and of practical classes, and / or students must
achieve a CAM of at least 40%
PHTH104 W2 - Physiotherapy Selected Competency Skills

(50L-0T-20P-0S-0H-0R-0F-0G-10A-13W-8C)
Aim: The module provides students with basic knowledge and skills in first aid, nursing, and
electrotherapy. The module also introduces students to ethics for physiotherapy practice and research.
Content: Nursing- first aid, nursing skills, CPR, infection control, bandaging and splinting Electrotherapy-
Indications, contra-indications, precautions and therapeutic value of ice, hot packs, wax, moist packs, IRR,
contrast baths Ethics in physiotherapy- Principles of Batho Pele, the Rights of a patient, confidentiality,
The Bill of Rights
Assessment: 2x 60min Theory tests 2x practical tests = (nursing and electrotherapy
DP Requirement: 75% attendance of lectures and of practical classes, and /or students must achieve a
CAM of at least 40%
PHTH111 W1 - Kinesiology for Physiotherapy

(66L-6T-30P-0S-15H-20R-0F-11G-12A-14W-16C)
Aim: Kinesiology for Physiotherapy provides the foundation for movement based skills and techniques. It
is a core module for physiotherapy practice that uses a selection of the principles and theory of physics to
explain the biomechanics of human movement and exercise therapy.
Content: The physical principles of movement, axes and planes, derived and fundamental starting
positions, wheel-chair ergonomics and wheel-chair activities, kinetic handling, bed mobility and transfer
methods, gait re-education, walking aids, the principles of treatment in water, theory and practice of
group-exercise therapy
Assessment: One 60minute theory test (LO1, LO4, LO6, LO7), one written assignment (LO1, LO2, LO3,
LO4, LO5, LO7) and two OSPE’s (LO1, LO2, LO4, LO6), all contributing to the continuous assessment
mark (CAM) of the module. Detailed information about each assessment task will be provided during the
scheduled contact sessions.
DP Requirement: 75% attendance of lectures and practical classes, and students must achieve a continuous
assessment mark(CAM) of at least 40%.

(50L-0T-15P-0S-6H-6R-0F-0G-3A-15W-8C)
Prerequisite: PHYS131W1, PHTH101W1
Aim: To introduce students to joint mobilization and strengthening techniques as well as progression of
exercises
Content: Physiology of exercise. Assessment of movement in terms of mechanics, muscle kinematics and
kinetics of joints and bones. Joint motion: methods of maintaining and increasing joint range applied to
contractile and non-contractile structures. Muscle strength: methods of strengthening. Posture: causes of
postural problems, assessment of posture, re-education of posture. Exercise prescription. Exercise
Progression. Basic principles and uses of PNF; upper and lower limb, bilateral symmetrical and
asymmetrical patterns.
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks: One X 1hour theory test and one practical test Summative
Examination- 1 x 2 hour written theory paper, half-hour practical examination
DP Requirement: 75% attendance of lectures and of practical classes, and /or students must achieve a
CAM of at least 40%
PHTH203 W1 - Massage & Manipulation

(50L-0T-10P-0S-3H-4R-0F-0G-3A-14W-7C)
Prerequisite: All level-1 modules
Aim: To introduce the student to a sequence of massage to specific neuromuscular conditions. To
introduce the student to the specific manipulations used in chest physiotherapy. To introduce the student to
respiratory conditions and breathing exercises
Content: Specific sequence of massage for the following conditions: Bell’s palsy, bowel incompetence,
198 Health Sciences
stress/insomnia, adherent scar, haematoma, indolent ulcer, chronic oedema of upper and lower limb,
massage to neck and shoulders. Transverse frictions Myofascial release and an introduction to trigger point
therapy Definition, therapeutic effects and descriptions of general and localized breathing exercises.
Postural drainage (theory and practical)
Assessment: Examination Guidelines: Summative Assessment. Examination- 1 x 2 hour written theory
paper, half-hour practical examination = 50%. Calculation of marks Calculation formula of CAM: each
assessment task that constitutes the formative assessment (CAM) has equal weighting. The CAM is
calculated by obtaining an average mark of the three assessments. Calculation formula of exam mark: each
assessment task that constitutes the summative assessment has equal weighting. The exam mark is
calculated by obtaining an average of the two assessments. Calculation formula of the final module mark:
60% of CAM + 40% of exam mark Each examination component of this module must have a sub-
minimum mark of 40%. The pass mark for this module is 50%, provided that the sub-minima required in
the assessment procedures have been met (Rule HS18). A student who fails this module with a mark of
40% or more shall be awarded a supplementary examination (Rule HS17).
assessment mark (CAM) of at least 40%.
PHTH207 W2 - Kinesiology for Neurology

(39L-0T-8P-0S-17H-7R-6F-0G-3A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: All level-1 modules
Aim: To introduce students to the neurological basis for motor development.
Content: Introduction to child development. Motor development from first trimesters and in first year.
Normal postural mechanism. Practical facilitation to the trimesters. Fieldwork-venues: William Clark
Garden orphanage home Normal development and HIV infected Babies Sparks Estate Cheshire Home-
Reflexes and deviation from normal. Importance of early Intervention. Reunion School for introduction to
Cerebral Plasy.
Assessment: One x 1hour theory test. I OSPE Group presentation Calculation formula of CAM: each
calculated by obtaining an average mark of the three assessments. Calculation formula of exam mark: each
assessment task that constitutes the summative assessment has equal weighting. The exam mark is
calculated by obtaining an average of the two assessments. Calculation formula of the final module mark:
60% of CAM + 40% of exam mark Each examination component of this module must have a sub-
minimum mark of 40%. The pass mark for this module is 50%, provided that the sub-minima required in
the assessment procedures have been met (Rule HS18). A student who fails this module with a mark of
PHTH208 W2 - Community Rehabilitation & Development Physio

(50L-0T-8P-0S-6H-7R-6F-0G-3A-15W-8C)
Prerequisite: All level-1 modules.
Aim: To introduce students to the principles of primary health care and community health rehabilitation.
Content: Terminology: health, community, development, impairment, disability, rehabilitation, handicap
Principles of Rehabilitation: rehabilitation models, consumers of rehabilitation services, medical model of
care versus primary heal th care model Policies: The White Paper for the Transformation of the Health
system in South Africa (1997), White Paper on an Integrated National Disability Strategy (1997), World
Health Organisation Declaration of Alma-Ata (1978). Process of Rehabilitation: disability prevention,
identification and management Physiotherapy as part of community-based rehabilitation: levels of service
provision, indications for intervention, intervention strategies, skills transfer, administrative and ethical
issues
Assessment: One X 2-hour theory paper Calculation of marks Calculation formula of CAM: each
calculated by obtaining an average mark of the two assessments. Calculation formula of exam mark: The
exam mark is the mark obtained in the assessment. Calculation formula of the final module mark: 60% of
Health Sciences 199
CAM + 40% of exam mark Each examination component of this module must have a sub-minimum mark
of 40%. The pass mark for this module is 50%, provided that the sub-minima required in the assessment
procedures have been met (Rule HS18). A student who fails this module with a mark of 40% or more shall
be awarded a supplementary examination (Rule HS17).
assessment mark (CAM) of at least 40%.
PHTH211 W2 - Selected Competency Skills

(0L-0T-0P-0S-27H-0R-50F-0G-3A-15W-8C)
Aim: Introduction of students to clinical practice in various clinical settings. Assessment of patients
(subjective and objective – written and practically implemented, development of interviewing skills,
integration of assessment findings to develop problem list and treat).
Content: Musculoskeletal assessment and treatment. Chest assessment and treatment. Progression of
exercises. Classwork. Postural assessment. Supervised clinical practice
Assessment: Formative assessment: There will be weekly competency evaluations per checklist (refer
clinical record book). End of block mark will be weighted as an average of the weekly assessments.
Summative assessment: 100% CAM (continuous evaluations in each of 3 clinical sites). Final mark is
average of all marks obtained at the 3 clinical facilities Calculation of marks End of block continuous
evaluation as per competency checklist. Final mark: Average of 3 marks obtained from each clinical
placement.
DP Requirement: Due performance requirement - 100% attendance at all clinical sites. SCPS9 Due
performance rules HS11 & HS13 applies. Conduct- rule HS22 Unacceptable behavior, . Minimum CAM is
50% and minimum requirement to pass is 50%.
PHTH212 W2 - Electrotherapy for Physiotherapy

(36L-0T-28P-0S-6H-7R-0F-0G-3A-13W-8C)
Aim: To develop students’ electrotherapy skills in the application of ultrasound, faradic current,
interrupted direct current, direct current, UVR and TENS. Students should be able to apply these skills in
their Physiotherapy clinical practice.
Content: Ultrasound – theory of application, therapeutic effects and contra-indications. Faradic current,
Interrupted direct current and direct current - theory of application, effects and therapeutic effects and
contra-indications. UVR and TENS - theory of application, therapeutic effects and contra-indications.
Assessment: Formative Assessment One theory test and one OSPE (equal weight) – constituting the
semester mark (CAM) Summative Assessment One two-hour theory paper and one OSPE examination
(equal weight) – constituting the final examination. The final mark for the module will be based on 60% of
the CAM and 40% of the final examination.
DP Requirement: 100% attendance of lectures and of practical classes.
PHTH321 W1 - Electrotherapy for Physiotherapy

(36L-0T-28P-0S-6H-7R-0F-0G-3A-14W-8C)
Prerequisite: PHTH212W2
Aim: To develop students’ electrotherapy skills’ in the application of medium to high frequency currents.
Students should be able to apply these skills in their Physiotherapy clinical practice
Content: Medium frequency currents (Interferential) – Theory of application, therapeutic effects and
contra-indications. Laser - Theory of application, therapeutic effects and contra-indications. Shortwave
diathermy - Theory of application, therapeutic effects and contra-indications.
Assessment: Formative Assessment One theory test and two OSPE’s. Summative Assessment One two-
hour theory paper and one OSPE examination (equal weight) – constituting the final examination.
Calculation formula of CAM: each assessment task that constitutes the formative assessment (CAM) has
equal weighting. The CAM is calculated by obtaining an average mark of the three assessments.
Calculation formula of exam mark: each assessment task that constitutes the summative assessment has
equal weighting. The exam mark is calculated by obtaining an average of the two assessments. Calculation
200 Health Sciences
formula of the final module mark: 60% of CAM + 40% of exam mark Each examination component of
this module must have a sub-minimum mark of 40%. The pass mark for this module is 50%, provided that
the sub-minima required in the assessment procedures have been met (Rule HS18). A student who fails
this module with a mark of 40% or more shall be awarded a supplementary examination (Rule HS17).
PHTH322 W2 - Physiotherapy in Orthopedics & Sport

(40L-0T-10P-0S-16H-7R-0F-4G-3A-14W-8C)
Prerequisite: All level one and two modules
Aim: The module provides students with a theoretical and practical framework in musculoskeletal
conditions .
Content: 4.1. Aetiology of overuse injuries, grading of muscloskeletal overuse injuries, grading of
ligament and muscle strain injuries 4.2. Principles of treatment of overuse injuries 4.3. Principles of
physiotherapy management of fractures, dislocations, fracture-dislocations, arthroplasties, and soft tissue
injuries
Assessment: Formative: 1x2 hour theory tests 1 presentation of a paper case (practical) 1 Practical test
Feedback on Assessment Tasks Structured feedback will be provided to the group during a discussion
session that corresponds with the date for return of marked assessments. Individual discussion with
students will be accommodated on request. Procedure for Missed Tests/ Assessment Tasks An alternate
date for a missed test/assessment task will be negotiated if the Head of School and/or programme co-
ordinator granted the student permission to be excused, in advance of the test, or if the student produces a
medical certificate that explains his/her absence from the test/assessment task.
DP Requirement: Calculation formula of CAM: each assessment task that constitutes the formative
assessment (CAM) has equal weighting. The CAM is calculated by obtaining an average mark of the three
assessments. Calculation formula of exam mark: The exam mark is the mar

(50L-0T-8P-0S-6H-7R-6F-0G-3A-14W-8C)
Prerequisite: PHTH207W2, PHTH201W1, ANAT101W1, ANAT102W2, ANAT104W2, ANAT109W1
Aim: To introduce students to the application of specialised kinesiology therapeutic skills
Content: Normal gait, abnormal gait patterns, Gait analysis. Balance and co-ordination: causes of
disturbance of balance and inco-ordination, re-education of balance and co-ordination. Spinal mobility.
Re-education of movement for amputees. Re-education for specific circulatory conditions. Matwork and
special PNF techniques (scapular, pelvic and trunk patterns). Transfers. Wheel-chair specifications,
orthotics and prosthetics.
Assessment: Formative = 2 X practical tests and one X 2-hour theory test, contributing 60% to the final
mark of the module. Summative = One X 2-hour theory paper and an OSPE, contributing 40% to the final
mark of the module. Calculation formula of CAM: each assessment task that constitutes the formative
assessment (CAM) has equal weighting. The CAM is calculated by obtaining an average mark of the three
assessments. Calculation formula of exam mark: each assessment task that constitutes the summative
assessment has equal weighting. The exam mark is calculated by obtaining an average of the two
assessments. Calculation formula of the final module mark: 60% of CAM + 40% of exam mark Each
examination component of this module must have a sub-minimum mark of 40%. The pass mark for this
module is 50%, provided that the sub-minima required in the assessment procedures have been met (Rule
HS18). A student who fails this module with a mark of 40% or more shall be awarded a supplementary
examination (Rule HS17).
A laboratory fee is for this module.
Health Sciences 201
PHTH324 W2 - Principles of Physio Practice for Neurology

(39L-0T-8P-0S-20H-7R-3F-0G-3A-13W-8C)
Aim: The student will be equipped with the key knowledge and skills pertaining to physiotherapy
management of a variety of paedatric and adult neurological conditions at all the rehabilitation outcome
levels
Content: Principles of physiotherapy assessments, treatment and rehabilitation for: patients with disorders
of the peripheral and central nervous systems, both medical and surgical in, adults and children.
Hypertonus, hypotonus, cerebellar ataxia, athetosis, stroke ,head injuries, Spinall cord injuries, Parkinsons
disease, Multiple Sclerosis,Spina Bifida and Hydrocephalus,peripheral Nerve injuries, HIV related
conditions. Class teaching. The neurological problems related to HIV is on the increase across Kwa-Zulu
Natal.The is a great need for undergraduate and post graduate studies in this field. The content will
exposure the students to a regional and cover all age groups.
Assessment: Students to hand in: I assessment and treatment of an Adult neurology patient, 1 Assessment
of an Paedatric Cerebral palsy & 1 Assessment of HIV related condition. 1-2hour written paper, 1 practical
test, 40% towards exam mark 60% of CAM, 40% of final exam, Subminimum of 40% for supplelementary
DP Requirement: 100% attendance of lectures and practicals unless excused I hour theory test. I practical
test Assessments(X3) 60% towards exam mark
PHTH326 W2 - Principles of Physiotherapy Practice in Neur

(46L-0T-18P-0S-6H-7R-0F-0G-3A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: PHTH207W2, PHTH201W1, PHTH203W1
Aim: To provide students with a theoretical and practical framework in the specific conditions/fields as
listed below.
Content: A review of the pathology of rheumatological conditions (Rheumatoid arthritis, osteo-
arthritis,SLE, JCA); Pulmonary conditions; General surgery (including burns); Gerontology; Obstetrics
and Gynaecology (Ante-natal, perinatal and post natal Physiotherapy care; Stages of labour, coping skills,
Gynaecological conditions treated by Physiotherapy). The application of the principles of Physiotherapy
assessment, treatment and rehabilitation associated with these conditions
Assessment: Formative Assessment One theory test and one practical examination (equal weight) –
constituting the semester mark. Summative Assessment One two-hour theory paper based on clinical
presentations of patients as per the module. The final mark for the module will be based on 75% of the
CAM and 25% of the final examination.
DP Requirement: DP: Requires 100% attendance but absence by prior permission at the discretion of the
programme co-ordinator. At least 75% attendance and a semester mark of at least 40%.
PHTH327 W2 - Peripheral Manipulations for Physiotherapy

(40L-0T-10P-0S-16H-7R-0F-4G-3A-13W-8C)
Aim: The module provides students with a theoretical and practical framework in manipulative therapy. It
also exposes students to an eclectic approach to manipulative therapy in the examination, assessment and
treatment of neuromusculoskeletal dysfunction of the upper and lower limbs using assessment and
treatment techniques of Maitland, Butler, Cyriax, McConnell, Richardson, Sahrman
Content: 4.1. Introduction to the Maitland concept, definition of terms, ( irritability, severity, grades of
movement, rhythm, clear, joints, comparable sign, endfeel, active movements, etc.) 4.2. The subjective
examination ( aims and step-by-step recording) 4.3. The objective examination ( aims and step- by- step
recording) 4.4. Subjective and objective examination of the glenohumeral, elbow wrist and hand, hip, knee
and ankle joints 4.5. Accessory and passive physiological movements for the glenohumeral, elbow, wrist
and hand, hip, knee and ankle joints ( Maitland ** and *** techniques) 4.6. Selection of passive
movements 4.7. Principles of application of passive movements
Assessment: 60% of CAM + 40% of exam mark Each examination component of this module must have a
sub-minimum mark of 40%. The pass mark for this module is 50%, provided that the sub-minima required
in the assessment procedures have been met (Rule HS18). A student who fails this module with a mark of
202 Health Sciences
PHTH343 WY - Physiotherapy Clinical Practice, (Cardiopulm

(0L-0T-0P-5S-27H-8R-175F-10G-15A-24W-24C)
Aim: To promote Physiotherapy clinical problem solving and organizational skills in Cardiopulmonary,
Surgery, Paediatrics, Orthopaedics, Obstetrics and Gynaecological conditions. Students should be able to
apply these skills in their Physiotherapy clinical practice.
Content: Pathology and Clinical practice in patients with Cardio-pulmonary, Surgery, Paediatrics,
Orthopaedics, Obstetrics and Gynaecological conditions.
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSMENT OF MODULE The module consists of TWO blocks. Students
in each block will be assessed as follows: A portfolio for the period of the block 1 case presentation of a
patient 1oral presentation of a patient At the end of each block students will have a summative assessment
which will be an oral presentation and treatment of an assessed patient. The formative and summative
assessments in EACH block will all carry equal weight and be added together to constitute the CAM for
the module. SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT OF MODULE At the end of year, students will be subjected
to a summative assessment of an oral presentation and treatment of an assessed patient (randomly selected
by student and externally moderated). The final mark for the module will be 60% CAM and 40% of the
summative assessment (externally moderated) for the module.
DP Requirement: 100% Attendance. Missed clinical periods must be made up by the equivalent time. In
accordance with the faculty rule for clinicals.
PHTH345 WY - Physiotherapy Clinical Practice (Neurological

(0L-0T-0P-5S-27H-8R-175F-10G-15A-24W-24C)
Aim: To promote Physiotherapy problem solving clinical and organizational skills in Neurological
conditions and Community Physiotherapy. Students must be able to apply these skills in their
Physiotherapy clinical practice.
Content: Clinical practice in Neurology and Community Physiotherapy
Assessment: FORMATIVE ASSESSEMENT OF MODULE The module consists of TWO blocks.
Students in each block will be assessed as follows: A portfolio for the block 1 Case presentation of a
patient 1 oral presentation of a patient At the end of each block students will have a summative assessment
which will be an oral presentation and treatment of an assessed patient. The formative and summative
assessments in EACH block will all carry equal weight and be added together to constitute the CAM for
the module. SUMMATIVE ASSESSEMENT OF MODULE At the end of year, students will be subjected
to a summative assessment of an oral presentation and treatment of an assessed patient (randomly selected
by student and externally moderated). The final mark for the module will be 60% CAM and 40% of the
summative assessment (externally moderated) for the module.
DP Requirement: 100% Attendance. Missed clinical periods must be made up by the equivalent time. In
accordance with the faculty rule for clinicals.
PHTH361 W1 - Research Design

(50L-0T-0P-3S-9H-7R-2F-7G-2A-13W-8C)
Aim: This module develops critical enquiry and research skills which are important in the practice of
physiotherapy and to encourage lifelong learning and research
Content: All topics have been chosen with the intent to enable the learner to successfully complete a
research project at the next level. Namely, terminology in research, research problem identification,
measurement scales, critical analysis of scientific literature, , a literature review, approaches to, types of
and designs in research, research ethics, writing a research proposal, sampling, instrumentation, scientific
communication.
Assessment: Details of Formative Assessment Tasks Type weight Info provided Due date Assignment
(O2) 20% On module outline and in class Week 3 Assignment (O6) 40% “ Week 6 Assignment (O9) 20%
“ Week 12 Take home Test 20% “ Week 5 Return of Assessment Tasks All assignments will be returned
in class at least a week after the submission date.
DP Requirement: Require 100 % attendance but absence by prior permission or evidence based illness will
Health Sciences 203
be accepted as per University rule. DP requirement = 1. At least 75% attendance, semester mark of at least
40 percent.
PHTH400 WY - Physiotherapy Clinical Practice A

(0L-0T-177P-0S-0H-0R-128F-0G-15A-27W-32C)
Prerequisite: All level one, two, and three modules
Aim: This module develops students’ skills in evaluating individuals, situations or a community in the
context of the health system and their application of appropriate intervention skills in a curative,
rehabilitative, preventative and promotive manner
Content: Supervised clinical practice with emphasis on cardiopulmonary and orthopaedic conditions
Assessment: A portfolio for the block must be kept and handed in by the student at the end of the block.
The portfolio will serve as a record of all the clinical work done by the student during the period of the
block. Formative per clinical block: A continuous assessment of student performance throughout the
clinical block ( student professional manner and application of clinical skills) This will contribute 50%
toward the end of block mark Summative per clinical block: Assessment and treatment of an unseen
patient or assessment of an unseen patient and presentation of a prepared patient. This will contribute 50%
toward the end of block mark. The CAM for the module will be the average of the formative and
summative evaluations of the student for the 2 clinical blocks Semester mark (CAM) of at least 50%
Summative for the module: The final examination mark will constitute 50% of the CAM and 50% of the
end of module examination. The end of module examination ( external examination) will be either an
assessment of an unseen patient or treatment of a prepared patient. The choice and area of the examination
will be by random selection by the student.
DP Requirement: Requires 100% attendance. Should a student miss hours of clinical work due to illness or
other circumstances then he/she must make prior arrangements with the respective clinical site at which
the clinical education is being done to complete the outstandi
PHTH401 WY - Principles of Physiotherapy

(80L-0T-20P-10S-20H-13R-0F-8G-9A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: All level one, two courses and HLSC 304W2, HLSC303W1, HLSC 302W2, HLSC301W1,
PHTH322W1, PHTH326W2
Aim: This module develops the students’ understanding of the different approaches to the physiotherapy
management of: patients who are critically ill ( ICU); manual therapy in spinal conditions and those who
have had joint replacement surgery; patients presenting with stroke, traumatic brain injuries, cerebral palsy
and other related conditions;
Content: Principles of Physiotherapeutic management in joint replacement surgery of the hip, knee and
shoulder. Subjective examination, objective examination of the cervical and lumbar spine. Physiotherapy
management principles for cervical lumbar syndromes. Physiotherapy for post-surgical spines.
Neurodynamics and introduction to mobilization of the nervous system. Physiotherapy for paediatric and
adult intensive care. (Neurological and cardiac ICU), cardiac and thoracic surgery, neurology and trauma.
Assessment, management and rehabilitation to achieve functional outcomes in patients with brain
disorders resulting in postural and movement dysfunctional, including patients with stroke, traumatic head
injury, cerebral palsy and related conditions (as available and appropriate to physiotherapy practice).
Assessment: Formative: 3 x 2hour integrated theory tests , 1 OSPE The average of the theory tests and the
OSPE will constitute the CAM. The CAM will contribute 50% toward the final exam mark Calculation
formula of CAM: each assessment task that constitutes the formative assessment (CAM) has equal
weighting. The CAM is calculated by obtaining an average mark of the four assessments. Calculation
formula of exam mark: The mark obtained for the summative assessment will constitute the exam mark.
Calculation formula of the final module mark: 50% of CAM + 50% of exam mark Each examination
component of this module must have a sub-minimum mark of 40%. The pass mark for this module is 50%,
provided that the sub-minima required in the assessment procedures have been met (Rule HS18). A
student who fails this module with a mark of 40% or more shall be awarded a supplementary examination
(Rule HS17).
204 Health Sciences
PHTH403 W2 - Physiotherapy Ethics & Practice Management

(0L-0T-88P-0S-0H-0R-72F-0G-0A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: All level one, two and three courses
Aim: This module enhances the students’ therapeutic and problem solving skills in a clinical area of their
choice outside the prescribed areas in the undergraduate training and it promotes communication between
students and staff at other institutions
Content: Supervised clinical training in varied settings such as in an approved public hospital, special
school, Community Centre or rural setting within or outside the Country. Supervisors / Clinicians should
consider the following aspects when supervising students’ clinical work: general preparation and approach
to patient; assessment skills; effectiveness of treatment ( including safety and precautions); follow-up
/advice to patient; knowledge of conditions treated; record keeping; professional aspects ( punctuality,
dress, reliability, responsibility); professional manner and efficiency in organizing own work.
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks The supervisor/s /Head of the Institution will be required to
evaluate the student on a standardized evaluation form provided by the Department All completed forms
must reach the Department one week after completion of the elective. This will constitute the only
evaluation for the module Summative Assessment There is no final examination in this module. The CAM
is 100%. Students must obtain at least 50% in the continuous assessment in order to pass the module
the elective is being done to complete the outstanding hours
PHTH404 W2 - Physiotherapy Clinical Elective

(0L-0T-88P-0S-0H-0R-72F-0G-0A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: All level one, two and three courses
Aim: This module strengthens the students’ therapeutic and problem solving skills in a clinical area of their
choice outside the prescribed areas in the undergraduate training and it promotes communication between
students and staff at other institutions
Content: Supervised clinical training in varied settings such as in an approved public hospital, special
school, Community Centre or rural setting within or outside the Country. Supervisors / Clinicians should
consider the following aspects when supervising students’ clinical work: general preparation and approach
to patient; assessment skills; effectiveness of treatment ( including safety and precautions); follow-up
/advice to patient; knowledge of conditions treated; record keeping; professional aspects ( punctuality,
dress, reliability, responsibility); professional manner and efficiency in organizing own work.
Assessment: Formative Assessment: The supervisor/s /Head of the Institution will be required to evaluate
the student on a standardized evaluation form provided by the Department All completed forms must reach
the Department one week after completion of the elective. This will constitute the only evaluation for the
module Summative Assessment: There is no final examination in this module. The Semester mark is the
final evaluation in this module. CAM is 100% Students must obtain at least 50% in the continuous
assessment in order to pass the module
the elective is being done to complete the outstanding hours
PHTH405 WY - Physiotherapy Research

(40L-15T-0P-0S-27H-0R-75F-0G-3A-27W-16C)
Prerequisite: PHTH361W1
Aim: At the end of this module students should be able to undertake a research project and communicate
the findings in an oral and written form
Content: Choice of topic after feasibility tests Preparation of proposal following guidelines Collect and
analyse data Prepare final written thesis Oral presentation of findings
Assessment: Formative Research proposal marked by the supervisor will constitute the CAM. This will
constitute 40% of the final mark Summative Presentation of the research project will constitute 20% of the
final mark. The oral presentation will be externally examined. Examination of the soft bound copy will
Health Sciences 205
constitute 40% of the final mark. The soft bound copy will be examined by the supervisor and the external
examiner. An average of the marks will be taken. Students will be required to make the necessary
corrections/ changes before submitting the hard bound copy. Students will only obtain the final mark once
the hard bound copy of the research project has been submitted Final Mark = 40% ( CAM) + 20% (oral
presentation) + 40% ( marked written soft bound thesis) If a student obtains between 40% to 49% in the
exam then he/she qualifies for a supplementary exam
DP Requirement: Confirmation by the supervisor that the student has applied himself / herself with
sufficient diligence to the project
PHTH410 WY - Physiotherapy ClinicalPractice B

(0L-0T-177P-0S-0H-0R-128F-0G-15A-27W-32C)
Prerequisite: All level one, two, and three modules
Aim: This module develops students’ skills in evaluating individuals, situations or a community in the
context of the health system and their application of appropriate intervention skills in a curative,
rehabilitative, preventative and promotive manner
Content: Supervised clinical practice with emphasis on neurology and community development and
rehabilitation
Assessment: Assessment: The module will constitute 2 clinical blocks. A portfolio for the block must be
kept and handed in by the student at the end of the block. The portfolio will serve as a record of all the
clinical work done by the student during the period of the block. Formative per clinical block: A
continuous assessment of student performance throughout the clinical block ( student professional manner
and application of clinical skills) This will contribute 50% toward the end of block mark Summative per
clinical block: Assessment and treatment of an unseen patient or assessment of an unseen patient and
presentation of a prepared patient. This will contribute 50% toward the end of block mark. The CAM for
the module will be the average of the formative and summative evaluations of the student for the 2 clinical
blocks Semester mark (CAM) of at least 50% Summative for the module: The final examination mark will
constitute 50% of the CAM and 50% of the end of module examination. The end of module examination (
external examination) will be either an assessment of an unseen patient or treatment of a prepared patient.
The choice and area of the examination will be determined by random selection by the student.
the clinical education is being done to complete the outstandi
PHTH800 WY - Mini Thesis

(0L-0T-0P-70S-570H-0R-0F-0G-0A-30W-64C)
Aim: This module will enable the learner to undertake and complete a research project independently.
Content: Research topic identification, proposal preparation, data collection, data analysis, production of a
thesis, preparation or publication of a paper.
Assessment: Examination of the dissertation.
DP Requirement: Confirmation by the supervisor that the student has applied him- or herself with
sufficient diligence to the project.
PHTH801 W1 - Biofunctional Analysis: Neuromuscular

(55L-0T-0P-30S-25H-0R-30F-0G-20A-15W-16C)
Aim: This module is designed to promote understanding of principles of advanced neuromuscular
physiology in relation to exercise and human performance.
Content: Covers application of concepts in the neuromuscular system, metabolism and environmental
physiology. Neuromuscular adaptations to disease, aerobic and endurance exercise, exercise in the heat
and cold, hyperbaric and hypobaric conditions, and gender effects on human performance.
Assessment: Semester mark (70%) – One test and two assignments Final examination (30%) – one 2-hour
written examination
DP Requirement: 75% attendance of lectures
206 Health Sciences
PHTH802 W1 - Functional Assessment

(40L-0T-0P-30S-0H-0R-70F-0G-20A-15W-16C)
Aim: To introduce learners to the objective measurement of function
Content: Conceptual framework for examining disability, Instrumentation - defining levels of
independence, scoring, validity, reliability, precision and feasibility, types of instruments, functional
assessment in research in clinical practice viz., traumatic brain injured patients, stroke patients, spinal cord
injured patients, arthritic patients, geriatrics, paediatrics, development of an instrument.
Assessment: Semester mark (100% of final mark) – two clinical assignments and one paper.
PHTH803 W1 - Biofunctional Analysis: Cardiopulanory or

(55L-0T-0P-30S-25H-0R-30F-0G-20A-15W-16C)
Aim: This module is designed to promote understanding of principles of advanced cardiopulmonary
physiology in relation to exercise and human performance.
Content: Oxidative and non-oxidative metabolism, fuel sources in exercise, endocrine and neural control
of metabolism, Statics, dynamics and energetics of the respiratory system, gas exchange, respiratory
muscles, control of breathing, assessment, cardiac pressures and ECG, control of the heart during exercise,
length tension relationship, factors limiting exercise, cardiac adaptations to exercise, exercise in the heat
and cold, hyperbaric and hypobaric conditions, and gender effects on human performance
Assessment: Semester mark (70%) - one test and two assignments, Final examination (30%) -One 2-hour
written examination.
DP Requirement: 75% attendance of lectures.
PHTH804 W2 - Critical Analysis of Physical Agents

(40L-0T-0P-30S-0H-0R-70F-0G-20A-15W-16C)
Aim: This module is designed to enable the learner to understand the importance of evidence based
practice.
Content: Problem solving approach to the understanding of physical agents in physiotherapy, Critical
review of published work on electrical stimulation, electrodiagnosis, high frequency currents, ultrasound,
laser and the electromagnetic spectrum.
Assessment: Semester mark(100% of final mark) –two assignments, one paper
DP Requirement: 75% attendance of lectures.
PHTH805 W1 - Principles of Measurement and Evaluation

(55L-0T-0P-30S-25H-0R-30F-0G-20A-15W-16C)
Aim: This module is designed to promote and develop skills in appropriate laboratory techniques and
measurement in order to undertake scientifically viable research.
Content: Electrical safety and instrument hazards, properties of biological signals, measurement theory,
instrument errors, instrument theory and practice, signal detectors, signal conditioners, display devices,
computers, running an experiment, maintenance and repair, operating or purchasing instruments
Assessment: Semester mark (70%) – One test, two laboratory-based assignments. Final examination (30%)
–One 2-hour written examination.
DP Requirement: 75% attendance of lectures and of practical classes
PHTH806 W2 - Independent Study

(0L-0T-0P-40S-70H-0R-30F-0G-20A-15W-16C)
Prerequisite: NONE
Corequisite: NONE
Aim: To promote independence in research.
Content: Ability to choose and follow up 2 research topics, on clinical and one laboratory through the
process of proposal writing, ethical clearance, data collection, data processing and paper or presentation
preparation
Practicals: NONE. Assessment: Semester mark (100% of the final mark) –one research project, one
paper. DP Requirement: 75% attendance of seminar presentations, completion of research project
Health Sciences 207
PHTH807 W1 - Elements of Research

(70L-0T-0P-30S-0H-0R-45F-0G-15A-15W-16C)
Aim: To promote an understanding of research principles
Content: What is research-terminology in research, research problem identification, supervisor
identification and requirements, measurement scales, critical analysis of the scientific literature, literature
search, types of research and designs, quantitative and Qualitative, ethical considerations in research,
writing a research proposal, sampling, validity and reliability in research, instrumentation in research-hard
and soft, including questionnaire design, computers in research, converting research into output.
Assessment: Semester mark (70%) – two laboratory projects, one paper; final examination (30%) – one 2-
hour written examination
PHTH808 W2 - Directed Reading

(0L-30T-0P-75S-35H-0R-0F-0G-20A-15W-16C)
Aim: To promote focused appreciation of the literature on selected topics.
Content: Research topic identification, proposal preparation, data collection, data analysis, production of a
thesis, preparation or publication of a paper.
Assessment: Semester mark (100%) – Critical review paper
DP Requirement: Must produce a review paper.
PHTH810 W2 - Contemporary issues in Geriatric Populations

(0L-0T-0P-70S-25H-0R-45F-0G-20A-15W-16C)
Aim: This module is designed to introduce the learner to introduce the learner to literature and research as
related to contemporary issues in geriatric populations.
Content: Anatomical and physiological changes associated with aging, diseases common to this sector of
the population, geriatric disease, health and distribution profiles., factors affecting geriatric health e.g.,
nutrition, education, access, residential facilities, impact of family and socioeconomic structures, exercise
effects, evaluation of function.
Assessment: mark (100%) – Five oral and written assignments. (No final examination).
Sport Science
SSBR111 - History & Adapted Physical Education

(33L-6T-0P-0S-60H-54R-5F-0G-2A-15W-16C)
Aim: To provide learners with knowledge of the history and foundations of sport science, which will
provide a basis for later modules. Learners are also given an understanding of certain disabilities, allowing
them to provide disabled individuals access to physical activity
Content: History and Foundations of Sport Science The development of formalised movement education,
sport and recreation during selected historical periods; the influence of national and international politics
in South Africa’s sport participation. Foundation principles of sport science include definitions, aims and
categories of sport science. Also including application of these principles to daily living. Adapted Physical
Activity An introduction to the education and treatment of selected exceptional learners.
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks 1) History of Sport Science (25% weighting) 1 Assignment (50
marks) 1 45 minute test (50 marks) 2) Foundations of Sport Science (25% weighting) 2 45 minute tests (50
marks each) 3) Adapted Physical Education (50% Weighting) 2 45 minute tests (50 marks each)
Calculation of Marks 1. CAM - History of Sport Science Test + Assignment = 25% of CAM - Foundations
208 Health Sciences
of Sport Science Tests (2) = 25% of CAM - Adapted Physical Education Tests (2) = 50% of CAM 2.
Exam Mark - Only written exam mark included 3. Final Mark • The CAM contributes towards 40% of the
final mark for the module (Formative Assessment) • The exam contributes 60% to the final mark
(Summative Assessment) • A final mark of 50% is required to gain credit for the module. To qualify for a
supplementary examination a student must achieve a minimum mark of 40% in the final examination.
DP Requirement: A 75% attendance of lectures and practical classes and a continuous assessment mark
(CAM) of at least 40% is required for a student to qualify for a DP
SSBR112 - Elements of Human Anatomy

(30L-10T-9P-0S-46H-54R-0F-9G-2A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce students to the basic concepts of human anatomy. This module is critical to the: •
Understanding of how the structures of the body are designed to work in an integrated manner in sport and
exercise. • Understanding of sports injuries and the rehabilitation thereof. • Designing of exercise
programmes.
Content: A general introduction to the structure of tissues and the different types of connective tissue. The
skeletal system: bone types, functions, structure of joints and the classification thereof. Muscular systems:
structure and organisation of skeletal muscles tissue and the description of major muscles in the body. The
above content covers aspects related to the sport science student specifically, as a huge focus is on the
musculoskeletal system and its functioning. There is integration between theoretical and practical aspects
during study on the muscular system. To have a clearer understanding of the muscles origins’, insertions
and actions, exercises that engage the muscle as prime movers are demonstrated by learners.
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks 2 x one hour tests (each test contributes 40% to CAM) multiple-
choice, short questions and diagrams Sections to be covered in the test will be given in class 1 x poster
presentation on a designated muscle from the muscular system (20% to CAM) Information to be presented
on the poster and a demonstration of the exercises engaging that muscle. Topics, details and aspects to be
covered on the poster will be explained in class. All other details pertaining to assessments will be
explained in class. Summative Assessment. • 1 x 2 hour examination paper • A portion of the examination
paper will comprise of multiple-choice questions. • The other portion will comprise of short questions and
diagrams. Calculation of marks • Test 1 and Test 2 = 40% each towards CAM • Poster presentation = 20%
towards CAM • The CAM contributes 40% to the final mark for the module (Formative Assessment) • The
exam contributes 60% to the final mark (Summative Assessment) • A final mark of 50% is required to
gain credit for the module. To qualify for supplementary examination a student must achieve a minimum
mark of 40% in the final examination.
Biology as a matriculation subject provides a good foundation for this module.
SSBR113 - Principles of Coaching & Conditioning

(54L-17T-26P-10S-28H-13R-10F-0G-2A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce the students to the basic tenets of scientific conditioning techniques for sport and the
general population groups.
Content: Important principles for exercise prescription, fitness testing, science of strength training, power
training, speed power, endurance agility and flexibility. Practical application of all the above mentioned
principles, periodization, hazardous exercise.
Practicals: 20 one-hour sessions in a health and fitness facility.
Assessment: 2 x 1 hour tests 1 x major assignment Practical presentations Summative assessments 1 x 2
hour paper Short questions Essay questions Calculation of marks 2 tests adding 40%towards CAM, 1
assignment adding 20% towards CAM and practical presentations will be used to calculate the
DP(formative) 40 % DP and 60 % exam mark final(summative) Minimum mark to qualify for a
supplementary examination is 40 %
DP Requirement: 75% attendance of lectures and practicals and a continuous assessment mark of 40% is
required for a student to qualify for D.P
Health Sciences 209
SSBR114 - Kinesiology & Health Education

(54L-17T-26P-10S-28H-13R-10F-0G-2A-13W-16C)
Aim: Kinesiology To introduce the students to the basic tenets of scientific movement of the body in
relation to the latest published norms. Health education To introduce students to the health risks and
hazards not only in sport but in a general scenario and to make them aware of the preventative methods
and solutions
Content: Kinesiology The recent methods in body movement in the relation to Sport and Science
Movement in prevention of injury. Health education Current concerns in the world with regards to health
awareness and strategies in prevention and solution.
Assessment: Formative assessment: 2 x 1 hour tests 1 x major assignment Practical presentations
Summative assessments: 1 x 2 hour paper Short questions Essay questions Calculation of marks: 2 tests
adding 40%towards CAM, 1 assignment adding 20% towards CAM and practical presentations will be
used to calculate the DP(formative) 40 % DP and 60 % exam mark final(summative) Minimum mark to
qualify for a supplementary examination is 40 %
DP Requirement: 75% attendance of lectures and practicals and a continuous assessment mark of 40% is
required in both component within the module for a student to qualify for D.P
SSBR115 W2 - Practical Component

(0L-0T-30P-0S-28H-16R-0F-0G-6A-13W-8C)
Aim: Swimming Learners will be introduced to swimming techniques and conditioning and coaching
techniques specific to swimming Conditioning To introduce the students to the basic tenets of scientific
conditioning techniques for sport and the general population groups in a practical scenario Softball
Learning and playing aspects of softball with training regimes added in extending knowledge towards the
game.
Content: Swimming Students are divided groups depending on ability Advanced group focus on stroke
correction Intermediate group focus on stroke correction and new stroke acquisition Beginners group focus
on basic swimming technique Conditioning Important principles for exercise prescription, fitness testing,
science of strength training, power training, speed power, endurance agility and flexibility. Practical
application of all the above mentioned principles, periodization, hazardous exercise. This is carried over
from the theory lectures of principles of coaching and conditioning and progression is a key. Softball
Prescription, testing and exercise training with the different positions of the game.
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks Swimming 1 Assignment (50% of CAM) 1 Practical Evaluation
(50% of CAM) Conditioning and Softball 1 x major assignment (60% to CAM)on the exercise principles
from knowledge gained from the first year and applied towards a sport in the assignment Practical
presentations (40% to CAM) – all aspects of strength and conditioning that has been lectured on must be
presented practically by the student in a given scenario. Summative Assessment. Swimming 1 x 2 Hour
Practical and Oral Exam Practical and oral exam will include components of: Conditioning Technique
correction Teaching basic swimming techniques Conditioning and Softball 1x 2 Hour Practical Exam
Students will be required to demonstrate and explain the practicals that were lectured to them in a provided
scenario.
(CAM) of at least 40% in each component of the module, is required for a student to qualify for a DP.

(6L-0T-30P-0S-26H-14R-0F-0G-4A-13W-8C)
Aim: Netball: Acquisition of Sports skills and coaching techniques for selected codes of sport. Soccer:
Students will be introduced to the rules of the game, as well as concepts of tactical play, and principles of
conditioning and skills acquisition Conditioning: To introduce the students to the basic tenets of scientific
conditioning techniques for sport and the general population groups in a practical scenario
Content: Netball • Theoretical knowledge of sport codes. • Practical, “hands-on” experience of various
sporting codes. • Coaching and conditioning for various sports. Soccer • The rules of the game • Basic
tactics including formations • Comprehensive conditioning protocols • Biomechanics of the kicking action
Conditioning: Important principles for exercise prescription, fitness testing, science of strength training,
power training, speed power, endurance agility and flexibility. Practical application of all the above
210 Health Sciences
mentioned principles, periodization, hazardous exercise. This is carried over from the theory lectures of
principles of coaching and conditioning and progression is a key.
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks Netball: 1 Practical Assessment – Practical Assessment of the
different skills and drills related to netball 1 Assignment: 40% of practical assessment and 60% of
assignment will be used in the computation of CAM Soccer: 1 Written Test (10% of CAM), 1 Written
Assignment (50% of CAM), 1 Practical Evaluation (40% of CAM) Conditioning: 1 x major assignment
(60% to CAM)on the exercise principles from knowledge gained from the first year and applied towards a
sport in the assignment Practical presentations (40% to CAM) – all aspects of strength and conditioning
that has been lectured on must be presented practically by the student in a given scenario. Summative
Assessment. Netball: 1 X 2 Hour Practical Exam Practical assessment – will focus on game evaluation.
Marks will be allocated for technique and competencies of skills. The Learner must be able to have a basic
understanding of the principles to administer a coaching session, The assessment will also involve an oral
exam. Soccer: 1x 2 Hour Practical Exam The practical assessment will include the following aspects: •
The rules of the game • Basic tactics including formations • Comprehensive conditioning protocols •
General skills and game play Conditioning: 1x 2 Hour Practical Exam Students will be required to
demonstrate and explain the practicals that were lectured to them in a provided scenario
(CAM) of at least 40% in each component of the module, is required for a student to qualify for a DP.
SSBR211 - Evaluation, Statistics & Measurement of Sport

(39L-4T-9P-0S-47H-50R-0F-9G-2A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce the student to basic testing procedures and the use of equipment. To introduce basic
statistical concepts for making sense of and analysing data.
Content: Statistics: Descriptive statistics, including methods for organizing and presenting data,
summarizing or describing data and comparing two or more groups of subjects or conditions.
Measurements: The evaluation of physical performance and individual physiological characteristics. All
the major fitness components and their relevant tests are covered. These include aerobic, anaerobic, speed,
power, explosiveness, strength, endurance, flexibility and posture.
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks Statistics 2 x 1 hour tests 50% of the average of these two test
marks will be used in the computation of CAM Measurements 2 x test (each test will count for 30% of the
final measurement mark) 1 x assignment which will count for the remaining 40% 50% of all these marks
will be used for the computation of CAM Examination Guidelines: Summative Assessment. 1 x 2½ hour
paper Problem based questions in statistics 50 marks of the examination paper is allocated to statistics 50
marks of the examination paper is allocated to measurements Calculation of marks Statistics: • 50% of the
average of Test 1 and Test 2 will contribute to CAM. • The CAM contributes 40% to the final mark for the
module (Formative Assessment) • The exam contributes 60% to the final mark (Summative Assessment) •
A final mark of 50% is required to gain credit for the module. To qualify for supplementary examination a
student must achieve a minimum mark of 40% in the final examination.
(CAM) of at least 40% is required for a student to qualify for a DP. A penalty of 5% per working day for
late assignment
SSBR212 - Sport Organisation & Management. Legal Aspect

(39L-13T-0P-0S-41H-52R-13F-0G-2A-15W-16C)
Aim: To present an introduction to the organization and management of sports events, sport bodies and
competitions as well as aspects of the laws affecting sport.
Content: Sport Management – The management process in relation to sports events. Basic principles of
planning organizing, directing and control. Organisation of sporting associations, meeting procedures and
duties of officials. Legal Aspects of Sport – The role of law in sport and physical activity. Negligence
prevention and avoidance of negligence suits. Risk management planning, legal liability in sport and
recreation. Protective legal documents
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks 2 x 45 minute Tests – Sport Management 2 X 45 minute Tests –
Legal Aspects of Sport An average of these 4 tests will be used to compute the CAM mark. All details
pertaining to assessments will be explained in class. Examination Guidelines: Summative Assessment. 1 x
Health Sciences 211
2 hour Exam Paper – Sport Management: 50 Marks Legal Aspects of Sport: 50 Marks Short questions,
True/False questions, Application questions Calculation of marks • CAM mark will be the average of the
four tests – 2 Sport Management and 2 Legal Aspects of Sport • The CAM contributes 40% to the final
mark for the module (Formative Assessment) • The exam contributes 60% to the final mark (Summative
Assessment) • A final mark of 50% is required to gain credit for the module. To qualify for supplementary
examination a student must achieve a minimum mark of 40% in the final examination.
DP Requirement: A 75% attendance of lectures and practical classes in each component of the module and
a continuous assessment mark (CAM) of at least 40% in each component of the module is required for a
student to qualify for a DP.
SSBR213 - Biomechanical Principles of Sport Science

(36L-3T-14P-3S-57H-40R-0F-5G-2A-13W-16C)
Aim: Introduce the student to the analysis of sporting activities. Along with Kinesiology & Anatomy it
forms the foundation to Sport Injuries. It is vitally important for the learner to analyze human movement.
Content: Basic introductory concepts. Linear and angular kinematics. Linear and angular kinetics.
Analysis of selected physical activities and sport skills. The literature is updated and focuses on the latest
techniques used by sportspersons. The literature is then applied in a practical setting.
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks Orthopaedic rehabilitation 2 x Tests (each counting 30%
towards CAM) 1 x Poster (sport specific-counting for the remaining 40% of CAM) All other information
pertaining to assessments will be explained in class. Summative Assessment. 1 x 2 hour exam paper 100
marks The questions will be in the form of short questions, defining terms and an in depth analysis of
certain movements. Calculation of marks • The CAM contributes 40% to the final mark for the module
(Formative Assessment) • The exam contributes 60% to the final mark (Summative Assessment) • A final
mark of 50% is required to gain credit for the module. To qualify for supplementary examination a student
must achieve a minimum mark of 40% in the final examination.
(CAM) of at least 40% is required for a student to qualify for a DP.
SSBR214 - Exercise Biochemistry, Sport Injuries & Firs

(42L-5T-5P-5S-48H-48R-0F-5G-2A-13W-16C)
Aim: An introduction to exercise biochemistry, enabling the learner to apply principles to nutrition and
exercise. An introduction to defining and managing common sports injuries The first aid course is an
elementary course, introducing the learner to concepts of first aid management
Content: Exercise Biochemistry • Basic principles of chemistry • Cell structure and functioning • Basic
principles of nutrition • Fuel metabolism • Principles of supplementation Sport Injuries • Acute and
Overuse injuries • Classification of injuries • Common sports injuries • Biomechanics • Core stability •
Principles of diagnosis • Principles of treatment • Principles of rehabilitation First-Aid - Completion of an
elementary course in first-aid • Injury scene management • Management of specific injuries • Principles of
strapping, splinting and bracing
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks 1.Exercise Biochemistry: - 2 x 45 minute tests (50 marks each) -
1 written assignment (50 marks) - 1 Journal Research Feedback Presentation (25 marks) 2. Sports Injuries
- 2 x 45 minute tests (50 marks each) - 1 Poster Presentation (50 marks) 3. First Aid - 1 Written Test (25
marks) Calculation of Marks 1. CAM - Exercise Biochemistry = 45% of CAM - Sports Injuries = 45% of
CAM - First Aid = 10% of CAM 2. Exam Mark - Only written exam mark included 3. Final Mark • The
CAM contributes towards 40% of the final mark for the module (Formative Assessment) • The exam
contributes 60% to the final mark (Summative Assessment) • A final mark of 50% is required to gain
credit for the module. To qualify for a supplementary examination a student must achieve a minimum
mark of 40% in the final examination
SSBR215 - Practical Component level 2A

(0L-0T-39P-0S-14H-12R-9F-0G-6A-13W-8C)
Aim: Acquisition of sport skills and coaching techniques for selected codes of sport.
212 Health Sciences
Content: Theoretical knowledge of sport codes. Practical, “hands-on” experience of various sporting
codes. Coaching and conditioning for various sports.
Assessment: Assessment Tasks Volleyball 1 Practical Assessment – Practical Assessment of the different
skills and drills related to volleyball 1 Assignment 40% of practical assessment and 60% of assignment
will be used in the computation CAM Conditioning: 1 x major assignment on the exercise principles from
knowledge gained from the first year and applied towards a sport in the assignment Practical presentations
– all aspects of strength and conditioning that has been lectured on must be presented practically by the
student in a given scenario. Swimming 1 Assignment (50% of CAM) 1 Practical Evaluation (50% of
CAM) Summative Assessment. 1 X 2 Hour Practical Exam Volleyball Practical assessment – will focus on
game evaluation. Marks will be allocated for technique and competencies of skills. The Learner must be
able to have a basic understanding of the principles to administer a coaching session, The assessment will
also involve an oral exam. Conditioning: Students will be required to demonstrate and explain the
practicals that were lectured to them in a provided scenario. The assessment will also involve an oral exam
Swimming A practical and oral exam including the following components: - Conditioning - Stroke
correction - Teaching swimming technique Exam mark : 40% Oral Exam and 60% Practical assessment.
The CAM contributes 40% to the final mark for the module (Formative Assessment) The exam contributes
60% to the final mark (Summative Assessment) A final mark of 50% is required to gain credit for the
module. To qualify for supplementary examination a student must achieve a minimum mark of 40% in the
final examination.
(CAM) of at least 40% in each components in a module is required for a student to qualify for a DP
SSBR216 - Practical Component level 2B

(0L-0T-39P-0S-16H-10R-13F-0G-2A-13W-8C)
Aim: Conditioning To introduce the students to the basic tenets of scientific conditioning techniques for
sport and the general population groups in a practical scenario Rugby Acquisition of sports skills and
coaching techniques for rugby.
Content: Conditioning Important principles for exercise prescription, fitness testing, science of strength
training, power training, speed power, endurance agility and flexibility. Practical application of all the
above mentioned principles, periodisation, hazardous exercise. This is carried over from the 1st year of
studies and progression is a key. Rugby Theoretical knowledge and a practical “hands-on” experience of
rugby. Coaching and conditioning of rugby will be included
Assessment: Formative assessment tasks 1 x major assignment Practical presentations. Rugby 1 x group
presentation on a specific component of rugby (40%) 1 x theory test (60%) All other information
pertaining to assessments will be explained in class Examination guidelines: Summative assessments 1st
semester practical examinations- 28 May 2007 Rugby 1 x practical examination – The student will be
tested on a practical component of rugby. Calculation of marks 1 assignment and practical presentations
will be used to calculate the DP(formative) • The CAM contributes 40% to the final mark for the module
(Formative Assessment) • The exam contributes 60% to the final mark (Summative Assessment) • A final
mark of 50% is required to gain credit for the module. To qualify for supplementary examination a student
must achieve a minimum mark of 40% in the final examination.
(CAM) of at least 40% in each component is required for a student to qualify for a DP
SSBR311 - Sport Psychology

(40L-11T-30P-0S-27H-30R-0F-20G-2A-13W-16C)
Aim: Sport Psychology is an important aspect of the programme. It helps the student in understanding
mental skill training, helps with performance enhancement techniques, helps in overcoming psychological
problems and gives and understanding of motor learning and variables that may affect motor learning.
Content: A study of the theoretical basis for Sport Psychology. Mental Skill Training. Performance
enhancement techniques. Psychological problems. Nature of Motor Learning. Learning variables which
may affect Motor Learning. Learning situations and their effect on Motor Skill Acquisition.
Assessment: Assessment Tasks There will three tasks. • Seminar 1 will be presented during the lecture
periods. Seminar evaluation will be based on the content of the seminar as well as the presentation. • All
Health Sciences 213
other details pertaining to assessments will be explained in class. Examination Guidelines: Summative
Assessment. 1 x 2 hour Exam Paper. Short questions, and essay type questions. Calculation of marks CAM
allocation: • Seminar – 40% • Test 1 – 30% • Test 2 – 30% • The CAM contributes towards 40% of the
final mark for the module (Formative Assessment) • The exam contributes 60% to the final mark
(Summative Assessment) • A final mark of 50% is required to gain credit for the module. To qualify for
supplementary examination a student must achieve a minimum mark of 40% in the final examination
SSBR312 - Recreation
(36L-13T-3P-6S-40H-43R-12F-5G-2A-13W-16C)
Aim: To impart a basic knowledge of leisure and recreation services as well as administrative aspects of
recreation.
Content: Administrative aspects of recreation for different populations (aged, youth, prisoners, juvenile
delinquent, etc) and therapeutic aspects of recreation. Recreation and sport development in South Africa.
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks • 2 x 1 hour tests • Assessment of seminar – evaluation will be
based on the content as well as the presentation of the seminar. • 1 assignment • All details pertaining to
assessments will be explained in class. Summative Assessment. 1 x 2 hour Exam Paper Application and
Essay type questions Calculation of marks • CAM mark will be the average of the following:- Test 1 +
Test 2 + 20% Camp assignment + 80% Seminar • The CAM contributes 40% to the final mark for the
SSBR313 - Applied Exercise Physiology

(39L-30T-26P-10S-29H-14R-10F-0G-2A-15W-16C)
Aim: To provide the learner with sound scientific knowledge regarding research in exercise physiology
and its application to Sport Performance
Content: Lectures and to read up information to re-inforce what is lectured in class. Explain difficult
aspects and points Theoretical knowledge of Physiology from an exercise perspective
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks: Seminar presentations, two tests, one major assignment, 4
minor assignments. Test will be 1 hour long The average of all assessments are calculated for the CAM
Marks will be available 9 days after paper has been written Summative Assessment: 1 x 2 hour written
paper Questions will include both short questions and essay question, with essay type questions
constituting 80% of the paper. Marks are awarded for application to the given question in a logical order of
occurrence. Calculation of Marks The average of all assessments are calculated for the CAM The CAM
contributes towards 40% of the final mark for the module (Formative Assessment) The exam contributes
60% to the final mark (Summative Assessment) A final mark of 50% is required to gain credit for the
module. To qualify for a supplementary examination a student must achieve a minimum mark of 40% in
the final examination.
SSBR314 - Rehabilitation Science

(39L-30T-26P-8S-27H-10R-10F-7G-3A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce the student to the basic tenets of rehabilitation. It is extremely important for the learner
as it provides him/her with a holistic approach to rehabilitation. The rehabilitation of injuries forms a focal
point for biokinetics.
Content: Phases of healing, aqua therapy, basic yoga and Tai Chi (affects and techniques), isokinetic
evaluation, flexibility and rehabilitation. The content is continually updated and there is an emphasis on
applying the theory in a practical manner. This forms a solid foundation for post-graduate work in the
biokinetic field.
214 Health Sciences
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks 1 x Test (25% of CAM) 2 x posters (Both posters will account
for 25% of CAM) 1 x Practical exam (50% of CAM) Summative Assessment. 1 x 3 hour exam paper Case
studies and short questions Calculation of marks • The CAM contributes 40% to the final mark for the
student must achieve a minimum mark of 40% in the final examination. All other information pertaining to
assessments will be explained in class

(9L-0T-30P-0S-52H-50R-13F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Aim: Acquisition of sports skills and coaching techniques for selected codes of sport. Introduce the learner
to basic scientific conditioning techniques for swimming and cricket. Conditioning The student will be
facilitated in researching techniques for conditioning athletes involved in specific sporting codes, and will
be required to apply previously learnt principles of conditioning to specific sporting codes
Content: Theoretical knowledge of sports codes. Practical, “hands-on” experience of various sporting
codes. Coaching and conditioning for various sports.
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks Conditioning • Practical presentation (50% of CAM) • Written
Assignment (50% of CAM) Swimming • 1 x major assignment (60% of CAM) • Practical presentations
(40% of CAM) Cricket • 1 x major assignment (60% of CAM) • Practical presentations (40% of CAM)
Summative Assessment. Conditioning • 1 X 2 Hour Practical Exam • Oral exam – assessment based on
various conditioning techniques covered in the presentations. Swimming • 1 X 2 Hour Practical Exam •
Practical Assessment - Stroke analysis in the following strokes: Freestyle, Backstroke, breaststroke,
butterfly Cricket • 1 X 2 Hour Practical Exam • Practical assessment – Technical work and tactical
assessment. Calculation of marks Conditioning CAM – constitutes 50%Practical presentation + 50%
Written Assignment. Swimming CAM – constitutes 60% Assignment + 40% Practical Assessment.
Cricket CAM – constitutes 60% Assignment + 40% Practical Assessment. The CAM for the module
constitutes: 50% Conditioning + 25% Swimming + 25% Cricket • The CAM contributes 40% to the final
mark for the module (Formative Assessment) • The exam contributes 60% to the final mark (Summative
Assessment) • A final mark of 50% is required to gain credit for the module. To qualify for supplementary
examination a student must achieve a minimum mark of 40% in the final examination. All details
pertaining to assessments will be explained in class.
a continuous assessment mark (CAM) of at least 40% in each component of the module is required for a

(0L-0T-39P-0S-54H-50R-13F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Aim: Acquisition of sport skills and coaching techniques for selected codes of sport.
Content: Theoretical knowledge of sport codes. Practical, ‘hands-on’ experience of various sporting codes.
Coaching of sports.
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks Dance • 1 Practical Assessment on 4 folk dances The
assessment will be used towards the CAM. Conditioning • Practical assessment (50% of CAM) • 4 Written
assignments (25 marks each)(50% of CAM) Lifetime Activities • Attendance to the different activities
(10% of CAM) Summative Assessment. Dance 1 X 2 Hour Practical Exam Practical Assessment – Student
may choose one dance form and develop their own dance sequence. Conditioning • 1 X 2 Hour Practical
Exam • Oral exam – assessment based on various conditioning techniques covered in the presentations.
Calculation of marks Dance CAM - 100% of practical assessment Conditioning CAM – constitutes
50%Practical presentation + 50% Written Assignment. Lifetime Activities CAM – 10% of attendance to
activities • The CAM constitutes: 50% Conditioning + 40% Dance + 10% Lifetime Activities • The CAM
contributes 40% to the final mark for the module (Formative Assessment) • The exam contributes 60% to
the final mark (Summative Assessment) • A final mark of 50% is required to gain credit for the module.
To qualify for supplementary examination a student must achieve a minimum mark of 40% in the final
Health Sciences 215
examination. All details pertaining to assessments will be explained in class.

a continuous assessment mark (CAM) of at least 40%in each component of the module is required for a
SSBR701 - Research Methods & Statistics

(26L-13T-0P-0S-52H-66R-0F-0G-3A-15W-16C)
Aim: To introduce the student to research methods and research tools, and to ways of analysing data for
research.
Content: The module investigates various research methodologies, which are presented in sufficient detail
so that it could be applied in research projects. Statistical methods and techniques are taught for the
purpose of the analysis of research data.
Assessment: Class mark: Assessment of seminar presentations; final examination: one 3-hour written
paper.
DP Requirement: Satisfactory attendance of scheduled meetings, and a class record mark of 40% or more.
SSBR702 - Research Project

(0L-10T-0P-20S-250H-0R-39F-0G-1A-30W-32C)
Aim: To provide the student with an opportunity to demonstrate competence in applying research methods
and data analysis through the formulation and presentation of a research project.
Content: This will be based on the student’s field of specialization. The topic must be approved by the
Discipline and the Faculty REHDC committee.
Assessment: Examination Guidelines: Summative Assessment. Students must hand in two copies (1 soft
and 1 hard bound) of the project by the due date. Due Date: 26 October 2007 Calculation of marks The
research project will be examined on the following guidelines: • Content: 50% • Presentation: 10% •
Analytical analysis: 25% • Technical Details: 15%
SSBR703 - Exercise Science

(26L-0T-30P-15S-36H-40R-10F-0G-3A-13W-16C)
Aim: To give learners an understanding of the scientific principles of exercise testing and prescription. To
provide them with competence in conducting fitness assessments as well as planning and designing and
executing exercise programmes for various populations. To equip the learner with skills and knowledge on
advanced testing methods and exercise prescription. To encourage research into current trends of exercise
testing and exercise prescription.
Content: Scientific principles related to exercise testing and prescription for various populations.
Aetiology and risks related to various chronic diseases and how exercise may positively impact on each
disease state as well as the exercise prescription thereof.
Practicals: As per lecturer schedule Practical application of scientific principles for exercise testing and
prescription. Each session in the lecture schedule will be accompanied by a practical session relating to the
topic covered. Lecturer: Mr M J Azmuth Practical sessions are used at the beginning of the semester to re-
iterate basic standardized fitness test batteries, as a refresher to equip students to engage in testing of sports
teams and gym members. Practical sessions are incorporated during the semester in conjunction with the
theoretical aspects. The mode of delivery includes lectures, seminars and practicals. Attendance = 75%
Learners are expected to research current literature especially journal articles, in groups, for seminar
presentations. Learners can expect: • Input and assistance during the preparation and planning of the
seminar presentations. • Individual assistance if required, outside lecture time
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks 1 x one hour test (60% contribution to CAM) 1 x seminar
presentation (20% contribution to CAM) 1 x assignment (20% contribution to CAM) Seminar evaluation
will be based on the content of the seminar as well as the presentation. All other details pertaining to
assessments will be explained in class. Summative Assessment. 1 x 3 hour Exam Paper Case study
presentations Essay Questions Calculation of marks • CAM: Test – 60% contribution, Assignment – 20%
contribution, Presentation – 20% contribution • The CAM contributes 40% to the final mark for the
216 Health Sciences
Students selecting Exercise Science will be required to complete an internship of at least 120 hours.
SSBR704 - Exercise Physiology

(40L-8T-0P-17S-82H-10R-0F-0G-3A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce students to advanced research in exercise physiology and its application to Sport
Performance
Content: Effects of exercise on the body. Environmental changes, hormonal responses, to exercise. Gender
differences in sport Resistance training and exercise Physiological effects nutrition, drugs, aging in sport
Assessment: Formative Assessment Tasks 3 mini assignment and 1 test of 2 hours The average of all
assessments are calculated for the CAM Marks will be available 9 days after paper has been written
Summative Assessment 1 x 3 hour written paper Questions will include both short questions and essay
question, with essay type questions Constituting 80% of the paper. Marks are awarded for application to
the given question in a logical order of occurrence. Calculation of Marks The average of all assessments
are calculated for the CAM The CAM contributes towards 40% of the final mark for the module
(Formative Assessment) The exam contributes 60% to the final mark (Summative Assessment) A final
mark of 50% is required to gain credit for the module. To qualify for a supplementary examination a
SSBR705 - Motor Learning

(26L-13T-8P-10S-50H-50R-0F-0G-3A-15W-16C)
Aim: To achieve in the student a detailed understanding of how learning and the performance of motor
skills occurs.
Content: A detailed study of learning variables which may affect motor learning. A comprehensive
background to research in the field.
Practicals: Gymnasium work and laboratory training.
Assessment: Class mark: Seminar presentations; final examination: one 3-hour written paper.
DP Requirement: Satisfactory attendance of scheduled meetings, and a class record mark of 40% or more
SSBR706 - Adapted Physical Activity

(26L-13T-13P-10S-41H-44R-10F-0G-3A-15W-16C)
Aim: A detailed knowledge of exceptional learners and current research trends.
Content: Current research trends in Adapted Programmes. Detailed research reviews of selected
disabilities. Measurement and appraisal. Affective considerations, perceptual motor development and
assistive devices.
Practicals: Teaching techniques through practical experiences with disabled children.
SSBR707 - Sport Psychology

(30L-14T-10P-10S-40H-45R-8F-0G-3A-15W-16C)
Aim: To achieve a detailed understanding of psychological principles applicable to sport.
Content: Detailed understanding of theoretical basis for sport psychology. Performance enhancement with
a detailed study of the research. Psychological problems.
Practicals: Practical laboratory work and relaxation techniques.
Health Sciences 217
SSBR708 - Biokinetics 1
(45L-0T-45P-4S-28H-28R-0F-6G-4A-15W-16C)
Aim: To make students competent in diagnosing and rehabilitating patients with orthopaedic problems. To
equip students with skills in the field of administration, chronic disease, sport injuries and orthopaedic
rehabilitation.
Content: Administrative concerns with respect to biokinetic practices. The principles of rehabilitation for
chronic diseases. Aspects of sport injuries and orthopaedic rehabilitation.
Practicals: 45 hours in a clinical setting. Practical – 4 hours per week for 13 weeks.
Assessment: Seminar presentations; final examination: one 3-hour written paper.
SSBR709 - Biokinetics 2
(45L-0T-44P-3S-30H-28R-0F-6G-4A-15W-16C)
Aim: To make students competent in diagnosing and rehabilitating patients with orthopaedic problems.
Content: The principles of the diagnosis and rehabilitation of patients with orthopaedic problems.
Practicals: 45 hours in a clinical setting. Practical – 4 hours per week for 13 weeks.
Assessment: Class mark: Seminar presentations and an assignment; final examination: one 3-hour written
paper.
SSBR710 - Leisure Services

(26L-0T-0P-6S-31H-34R-60F-0G-3A-15W-16C)
Aim: Detailed in-depth knowledge of and skills in recreation services.
Content: The leisure service profession, its structures and providers of recreation. Community recreation,
sport and socialisation process. Therapeutic recreation services in ethical behaviour in sport and recreation.
Current trends in the leisure and recreation movements.
Assessment: Class mark: Seminar presentations and evaluation of 120 hours of internship; final
examination: one 3-hour written paper.
SSBR711 - Leisure Management

(26L-0T-0P-6S-31H-34R-60F-0G-3A-15W-16C)
Aim: Detailed study of the organisation and administration of leisure agencies, the philosophy of
recreation and policies that govern recreation and leisure delivery.
Content: Facilities development and maintenance, public relations and programme planning and
implementation. Marketing of leisure services, legal aspects concerning leisure, e.g. accidents and
negligence claims.
Assessment: Class mark: Seminar presentations and evaluation of 120 hours of internship; final
examination: one 3-hour written paper.
SSBR712 - Internship
(0L-30T-60P-10S-87H-45R-85F-0G-3A-30W-32C)
Aim: To equip students with the skills to apply the theoretical knowledge and the principles of exercise
prescription and testing to varied populations and disease states as well as orthopaedic rehabilitation
principles.
Content: Practical internship at sites in the community, with supervision of progress. Students will be
trained in the practical application of knowledge learnt related to orthopaedic rehabilitation, chronic
disease rehabilitation and exercise prescription and design for healthy and chronic-disease patients.
Practicals: This is essentially a practical/clinical module, with students being supervised on an ongoing
basis.
Assessment: A 3-hour practical examination.
218 Health Sciences
SSBR8FY - Masters Research in Sport Science
SSBR8SY - Masters Research in Sport Science
SSBR9FY W0 - PhD - Research in Sport Science
SSBR9SY - PhD Research in Sport Science Subseq Yr
PLEASE CONTACT THE DISCIPLINE OF SPORT SCIENCE FOR INFORMATION

ON THE COURSE-WORK MASTERS MODULES.
MODULES FROM OTHER FACULTIES
In the Faculty of Science & Agriculture
Biochemistry
Offered in the School of Biochemistry, Genetics, Microbiology & Plant Pathology
BIMI120 P2 W2 - Introductory Biochemistry and Microbiology

(36L-10T-36P-0S-55H-17R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: 40% in CHEM110.
Aim: To introduce students into the world of biochemistry and microbes.
Content: Major organic compounds of living organisms. Factors involved in biochemical reactions:
thermodynamics, redox potential and enzymology; energy requirements for living organisms. Genes and
their influence on the organism. Discovery of micro-organisms. Definitions, scope, principles and concepts
in Bacteriology, Mycology, Virology and Microbial Biotechnology. Microbiological methods: from
aseptic techniques to microscopy. Microbial growth. Role & applications of microorganisms in
Agriculture, Industry and the Environment.
Practicals: Introduction to practical aspects of Biochemistry and Microbiology.
Assessment: Tests, reports and other class assignments (50%), 3 h exam (50%).
DP Requirement: Class mark of 40%, attendance at 80% of tutorials and practicals.
Offered in Semester 2.
BIOC200 W1 - Biochemistry for Optometry

(39L-10T-0P-0S-20H-5R-0F-0G-6A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: CHEM110, 120, BIOL101.
Aim: To provide an overview of Biochemistry to Optometry students.
Content: Chemistry and metabolism of carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids and proteins. Porphyrins,
vitamins and cofactors. Introductory enzymology and kinetics. Protein synthesis, nucleic acids and
introduction to genetic engineering. Selected clinical correlations.
Assessment: Theory test (50%), 3 h exam (50%).
Health Sciences 219

Offered in Semester 1. For students in the Faculty of Health Sciences only.
BIOC201 P1 W1 - Introduction to Biomolecules

(39L-10T-39P-0S-48H-18R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: BIMI120 or BIOL101, CHEM110, CHEM120.
Aim: To provide an insight into the molecular diversity in living systems.
Content: Hierarchy of chemical structures in prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells. Chemistry of carbohydrates,
amino acids, peptides and proteins. Introductory enzymology and kinetics. Structure and function of
vitamins and cofactors. Nucleic and biochemistry and protein synthesis.
Practicals: Analyses of carbohydrates, amino acids, proteins and vitamins.
Assessment: Theory tests (25%), practical test and reports (25%) and 3 h exam (50%).
BIOC202 W2 - Bioenergetics and Integrated Metabolism

(39L-10T-39P-0S-48H-18R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: BIMI120 or BIOL101, CHEM110, CHEM120.
Aim: To introduce students to integrated biochemical pathways.
Content: The biosynthesis and oxidation of simple and complex lipids, lipid storage disorders. The
metabolism of carbohydrates, amino acids, porphyrins, nucleotides and one-carbon fragments. Clinical
correlations resulting from aberrations in individual metabolic pathways. Bioenergetics, regulation and
control of metabolic pathways.
Practicals: Spetrophotometric techniques, electrophoresis and chromatography of serum and other
metabolites.
Assessment: Theory test (25%), practical test and practical reports (25%) and 3 h exam (50%).
Microbiology
Offered in the School of Biochemistry, Genetics, Microbiology & Plant Pathology
MICR182 W2 - Microbiology for Optometry

(39L-6T-6P-0S-23H-0R-0F-0G-6A-13W-8C)
Prerequisite: CHEM110, BIOL101.
Corequisite: CHEM120.
Aim: To provide an overview of the basic concepts of microbiology and the role of microbes in ocular
disease.
Content: History of microbiology. Infection and prevention of infection. Basic characteristics of bacteria,
fungi, viruses and protozoa. Bacterial cell structure and function. Bacterial growth, nutrition and control.
Bacterial, viral, fungal, protozoan and helminth infections of the eye. Basic immunology and
immunological disorders of the eye.
Practicals: Ubiquity of Microbes. Microscopic observation of bacteria and fungi. Aseptic Technique. Skin
disinfection. Antibiotic sensitivity. Sterilisation and disinfection.
Assessment: Theory test (50%), 2 h exam (50%).
DP Requirement: 40% class mark, 80% attendance at practicals.
220 Health Sciences
MICR213 P1 W1 - Bacteriology
(36L-6T-36P-0S-53H-24R-0F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: CHEM110, BIMI120 or BIOL101.
Aim: To provide a strong foundation in the field of bacteriology.
Content: Morphology and ultrastructure of bacteria; relationship of cellular structure to function.
Physiological-nutritional groups among the bacteria. Cultivation of bacteria and elementary aspects of
control of microorganisms. Introduction to microbial ecology and habitat specific species. Basic aspects of
environmental microbiology. Metabolic pathways of industrial importance. Introduction to classification
of bacteria. Basic bacteriological aspects of immunology.
Practicals: Handling bacteria; aseptic technique; cultural practices; staining procedures; microscopy.
Assessment: Tests, assignments, prac reports (33%), 3 h exam (67%).
DP Requirement: 40% in coursework and 80% attendance at practicals.
MICR216 W1 - Mycology
(39L-9T-39P-0S-54H-6R-6F-0G-7A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce students to fungi and their importance.
Content: General characteristics of fungi. Principles and practice of fungal taxonomy. Importance of fungi.
Fungal diseases of plants and humans. Symbiotic relationships - mycorrhizae and lichens.
Practicals: Microscopy. Fungal succession. Isolation, purification and identification of fungal cultures.
Assessment: 2 theory tests (25%), 2 practical tests, laboratory and practical reports (25%), 3 h exam (50%).
MICR218 W2 - Microbial Metabolism and Ecology

(39L-9T-39P-0S-61H-6R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce the fundamental aspects of microbial ecology & metabolism.
Content: Energy needs for microbial cells, energy yielding sources for micro-oganisms. Energy utilization
for biosynthetic processes. Bacterial enzymes & their regulation. Biogeochemical cycling of elements.
Microbe & microbe-host interactions. Micro-organism in their natural habitat. Techniques for the study of
microbial ecosystems.
Practicals: Winogradski column. Sauerkraut fermentation. Bacterial associations. Viscometric
determination of enzyme activity. Protein determination; the Folin-Lowry method. Manometry.
Determination of cellulase, dehydrogenase & protease activities.
Assessment: Theory tests (25%), Prac tests, lab & report writing (25%), 3 h exam (50%).
DP Requirement: 40% in coursework, 80% attendance at practicals.
MICR311 W1 - Advanced Bacteriology

(39L-9T-39P-0S-61H-6R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: MICR213, 218.
Aim: To introduce students to advanced topics in bacteriology.
Content: Bacterial taxonomy and the principles and practice of bacterial classification. Study of bacterial
prokaryotic diversity and techniques involved in elucidating their diversity. Detailed study of prokaryotic
cell structure and function. Archeabacteria.
Practicals: Identification of unknown bacterial cultures by use of dichomatous keys and API kits.
Antibiotic sensitivity testing. Electron microscopy.
Assessment: Theory tests and assignments (25%), Practical tests and laboratory and report writing
performance (25%), 3 h exam (50%).
Health Sciences 221
MICR312 W2 - Virology and Immunology

(39L-9T-39P-0S-51H-16R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce viruses, viral diseases & control.
Content: Structure, chemical composition & classification of viruses. Generalised life cycle of viruses.
Multiplication cycles of selected viruses. RNA and DNA tumour viruses. Prevention and control of viral
infections. Innate and acquired immunity. Antigens and immunogenicity. Immunoglobulin structure.
Development of cells of the immune system. The major histocompatibility complex. Humoral and cell-
mediated immune response. The function of complement. Immune disorders.
Practicals: Culture of viruses. Haemagglutination & Haemagglutination Inhibition tests. Bacteriophage
preparation & titration. Field trips.
Assessment: Tests (20%), Assignment (5%), Laboratory and report-writing (25%) and 3 h exam (50%).
MICR313 W2 - Advanced Mycology

(39L-9T-39P-0S-53H-13R-0F-0G-7A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: MICR216.
Aim: To introduce advanced topics in mycology.
Content: Fungal taxonomy & classification. Physiology & biochemistry of fungal cells. Environmental
factors in growth, & reproduction. Fungal genetics: mechanisms of variability, gene-for-gene hypothesis,
breeding for resistance, pathological alterations. Applied mycology: field fungi, storage fungi & crops of
economic importance, mycotoxins, fungal diseases.
Practicals: Colonisation of buried cellophane, environmental factors in growth of F. oxysporum;
Mycostasis using T. roseum; Isolation, identification of fungal cultures from seeds; Measurement of
Amylase & Invertase in leaf tissues.
Assessment: 2 theory tests & assignments (25%), 2 practical tests, projects & prac reports (25%), 3 h exam
(50%).
MICR314 W2 - Biotechnology
(39L-9T-39P-0S-55H-6R-6F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Aim: To provide concepts and applications in industrial & food microbiology.
Content: Principles of microbial genetics in biotechnology. Food microbiology: microbial spoilage, food
preservation. Industrial microbiology: fermentation & technology, products of microbial dissimilation &
synthesis. Environmental microbiology: waste & water management, biodegradability, bioremediation &
biocontrol. Mineral & energy recovery.
Practicals: Analysis of river water: Membrane filtration & most probable number techniques. Analysis of
foods. Design of fermentation equipment. Yeast biomass production by aerobic fermentation. Field trips.
Assessment: Theory tests & assignments (25%), prac tests, lab & report writing (25%). 3 h exam (50%).
222 Health Sciences
Biological Sciences
Offered in the School of Biological & Conservation Sciences
BIOL103 W1 - Introductory Biology for Health Sciences

(39L-10T-39P-0S-61H-4R-0F-0G-7A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce students to a range of biological topics pertinent to the health sciences.
Content: This module comprises three themes: history and diversity of life, cytology and genetics. Where
possible students are shown how these topics apply to real-life situations.
Practicals: Viruses, Archaea, Bacteria, Eukaryotes, Protista, Fungi, Rhodae, Stromenopilae, spore-
producing and seed-producing Plantae, biomolecules, mitosis and meiosis, membrane structure and
function, structure of plant and animal cells, Hardy-Weinberg principle.
Assessment: Theory tests (20%), assignment (5%), practical reports (10%), 3 h practical exam (25%), 3 h
theory exam (40%).
DP Requirement: Class mark of 40%; attendance at 80% of lectures and 100% of tutorials and practicals.
Service module for Faculty of Health Sciences, not available in the Faculty of Science and Agriculture.
Subminimum to pass: 40% in each exam and 50% in two of the class mark, practical exam and theory
exam.
BIOL203 P2 W2 - Population Ecology

(31L-5T-45P-0S-58H-15R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: 64 C at Level 1 including BIOL102.
Aim: To introduce principles and concepts of population ecology, and their practical application, in
relation to single-species populations and two-species population interactions.
Content: Determinants of species distributions and abundances. Abiotic conditions, consumable resources.
Population demography - growth, growth models, limits to growth; Intra-specific competition; inter-
specific competition, predation, and host-parasite interactions and controlling influences. Application of
population ecology principles to species harvesting and/or pest control and/or species conservation.
Practicals: Skills covering the above concepts; field trip(s).
Assessment: Tests (20%), practical reports (30%); 3 h exam (50%).
DP Requirement: Class mark of 40%; attendance at 80% of lectures and 100% of tutorials and practicals.
Offered in Semester 2. Subminimum to pass: 40% in exam. Students may be required to contribute to the
cost of the field trips.
BIOL204 P1 W1 - Plant and Animal Ecophysiology

(27L-3T-36P-0S-73H-15R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: 64C at Level 1 including BIOL101, 102.
Aim: To provide a basic understanding of major physiological processes of plants and animals, and their
relevance, in relation to environmental fluctuations.
Content: Topics from, but not restricted to: Plants: physical environment; growth; photosynthesis; mineral
nutrition; water relations; stomatal physiology. Animals: Homeostasis & control theory; thermoregulation;
osmoregulation, excretion; circulation; respiration; energy metabolism; endocrinology, nervous system.
Application of key concepts to society.
Practicals: Skills covering the above concepts.
Assessment: Tests (12%), practical assessments, practical reports and scientific reports (38%); 3 h exam
(50%).
DP Requirement: Class mark of 40%; attendance at 100% of tutorials and practicals.
Offered in Semester 1. Subminimum to pass: 40% in exam. Credit may not be obtained for BIOL204 and
BIOL216.
Health Sciences 223
Chemistry
Offered in the School of Chemistry
CHEM110 P1 W1 - General Principles of Chemistry

(36L-9T-36P-0S-44H-30R-0F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce the principles and practice of chemistry.
Content: Introduction to: quantitative chemistry, types of reaction, atomic spectroscopy, electronic
configuration, bonding, gases, thermochemistry, kinetics, and gas and solution equilibria.
Practicals: Volumetric analysis, measurement of physical quantities, shapes of molecules.
Assessment: Tests (8%), practical reports (25%), 3 h exam (67%).
DP Requirement: Class mark 40%, 80% attendance at practicals.
Offered in Semester 1. Credit may not be obtained for CHEM110 and CHEM161.
CHEM120 P2 W2 - Chemical Reactivity

(36L-9T-36P-0S-44H-30R-0F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: At least 40% in CHEM110.
Aim: To present the physical and descriptive inorganic and organic aspects of introductory chemistry.
Content: Phase equilibria and colligative properties, buffers, electrochemistry, nomenclature, reactions,
main group elements, solid state structures, acid/base behaviour of oxides, and industrial chemistry of
sulfur, phosphorus, nitrogen and the halogens.
Practicals: Physical measurements, qualitative analysis, organic techniques.
DP Requirement: Class mark 40%, 80% attendance at practicals.
Offered in Semester 2. Credit may not be obtained for CHEM120 and CHEM171.
CHEM142 W1 - Chemistry for Health Sciences

(36L-9T-36P-0S-44H-30R-0F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce the principles and practice of chemistry for health sciences.
Content: Introduction to: quantitative chemistry, types of reaction, atomic structure, electronic
configuration, bonding gases, thermochemistry, kinetics, and gas and solution equilibria, buffers and
electrochemistry. Applications.
Practicals: Volumetric analysis, measurement of physical quantities.
DP Requirement: Class mark 40%; attendance at practicals 80%.
Offered in Semester 1. For students in the Faculty of Health Sciences only.
Mathematics
Offered in the School of Mathematical Sciences
MATH131 H1 P1 - Mathematics 1A (Eng)

(39L-39T-0P-0S-56H-20R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: Higher Grade C or Standard Grade A for Matric Mathematics.
Aim: To introduce basic mathematical concepts of differential and integral calculus.
Content: Elements of logic and set theory. Functions and their graphs, limits and continuity.
Differentiation. Application of derivatives to optimisation and curve sketching, linear and quadratic
approximation, Newton’s method. Indeterminate forms. Inverse trigonometric and other transcendental
functions. Indefinite integrals, basic techniques of integration. Definite integrals. Approximate integration.
224 Health Sciences
Applications in geometry, physics and engineering.

Assessment: Class tests and/or assignments (20%), 3 h exam (80%).
DP Requirement: Class record 40%. 80% attendance at lectures and tutorials.
Offered in Semester 1. For students in the Faculty of Engineering. Credit may not be obtained for
MATH131 and any of MATH104, 130, 133, 134, 137 or 195. For students in the Faculty of Engineering.
MATH133 P1 W1 - Mathematics & Statistics for Natural Sciences

(39L-39T-0P-0S-56H-20R-0F-0G-6A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: Higher Grade E or Standard Grade C for Matric Mathematics.
Aim: To introduce students to the fundamental principles, methods, procedures and techniques of
mathematics and statistics as the language of Science.
Content: Mathematics (2/3): Basic functions. Solving equations and inequalities. Curve sketching.
Binomial theorem. Definition and techniques of differentiation; concavity; the second derivative test;
maxima, minima. Matrices. Solving systems of equations. Statistics (1/3): Problem solving using
descriptive statistics and probability concepts.
Assessment: Class tests and/or assignments (33%), 3 h exam (67%).
DP Requirement: Class record 40%. 80% attendance at lectures and tutorials.
Offered in Semester 1. Credit may not be obtained for MATH133 and any of MATH104, 130,131, 134, 137
or 195.
Physics
Offered in the School of Physics
PHYS131 P1 W1 - Intro Physics for Life Sciences & Agriculture

(39L-9T-36P-0S-56H-15R-0F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce basic concepts in mechanics, geometrical optics, and thermal physics.
Content: Mechanics: fundamental units, vectors, scalars, kinematics, particle dynamics, gravitation, work,
energy, momentum, simple harmonic motion, equilibrium of rigid bodies, wave fundamentals, rotational
motion, angular momentum, hydrostatics, elastic properties of materials, surface tension. Geometrical
Optics: reflection, refraction, thin lenses, mirrors, prisms, optical instruments, the eye. Thermal Physics:
temperature, heat, calorimetry, thermal expansion, conduction, radiation, ideal gases, thermodynamics.
Assessment: 3 h exam (70%), tests (25%), practical reports (5%).
DP Requirement: Class mark 40%, 100% attendance at tests and practicals, 80% attendance at lectures and
tutorials.
Offered in Semester 1. Note: For the purposes of serving as prerequisite for other modules, a result of
60% or more will be regarded as equivalent to PHYS110.
PHYS132 W2 - Electromagnetism & Modern Phys. for Life Sci.

(39L-9T-36P-0S-56H-15R-0F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: PHYS131 or PHYS110.
Aim: To introduce the basic concepts of electricity, magnetism, physical optics and modern physics.
Content: Electricity and Magnetism: charge, Coulomb's law, electric field, Gauss' law, electric potential,
capacitance, resistance, Ohm's law, dc circuits, Kirchhoff's rules, ammeters, voltmeters, Ampère's law,
Faraday's law, inductance. Waves: transverse, longitudinal, travelling, standing, beats, Doppler effect.
Physical Optics: interference, diffraction, polarisation. Modern physics: photoelectric effect, Bohr model
of hydrogen atom, nucleus, radiation, elementary particles, aspects of astronomy and cosmology.
Assessment: 3 h exam (70%), tests (25%), practical reports (5%).
DP Requirement: Class mark 40%, 100% attendance at tests and practicals, 80% attendance at lectures and
tutorials.
Health Sciences 225
Offered in Semester 2. Note: For the purposes of serving as prerequisite for other modules, a result of
60% or more will be regarded as equivalent to PHYS120.
PHYS139 W1 - Physics for Optometry

(39L-9T-36P-0S-57H-15R-0F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce basic concepts in mechanics, geometrical optics, and physical optics.
Content: Mechanics: Scalars and vectors, 1-D kinematics, equilibrium and dynamics, 2-D kinematics,
rotational motion, work, energy, power, momentum, simple harmonic motion, spring systems. Optics:
Reflection and refraction of light, image production, lens maker’s equation, defects of the eye, myopia,
hypermetropia, wave optics, polarization, interference, diffraction, thin lenses, optical instruments.
Assessment: 3 h exam (80%), class mark (20%).
DP Requirement: At least 40% class mark. Attendance at all tests and practicals. At least 80% attendance
at lectures and tutorials.
Offered in Semester 1. Offered to students in the Faculty of Health Sciences only.
In the NRM School of Medicine
Therapeutics & Medicines Management
Offered in the School of Family & Public Health
TAMM21N MY - Pharmacology
(MPG2NUY) (29L-10T-39P-0S-76H-0R-0F-0G-6A-0W-16C)
Aim: The course introduces students to the main concepts in clinical pharmacology. Although the course is
offered by the pharmacists and physicians (with post graduate training in clinical pharmacology), focus is
on practical and clinical pharmacology relevant to nurses.
Content: Topics covered include; general pharmacology principles (pharmocokinetics and
pharmacodynamics), dosage calculations, drugs used for management of diseases affecting main systems
(cardiovascular, respiratory, gastrointestinal tract, central and peripheral nervous, reproductive, etc.),
antimicrobials, anthihelminthics, cytotoxics, antidiabetic agents, steroids and drug legislations relevant to
nurses.
Practicals: None
Assessment: Assessment is in a form of; (1) Formative assessments (tutorials); Lecturers provide tutorials
from time to time for students. These tutorials are not complusory and do not contribute towards DP or
Exam. (2) Two class tests; The first test is written in May and the second one in August/September. Test 1
contributes 10% towards final exam mark. Test 2 contributes 20% towards final exam mark and it is
cumulative; meaning, the work covered in test 1 is also assessed in test 2. (3) Project (assignment). An
assignment is aimed mainly at helping students with more practical work; dosage calculations and/or
handling of injectable antibiotics in the wards. This project contributes 10% towards final mark, if the
mark obtained is higher than that obtained in test 1. (4) Examinations; Examination, which contributes
70% towards the final mark, is written at the end of the year (November) and covers all topics done during
the year. (5) Supplementary Examination; This is written by students who qualify to write supplementary
examinations in accordance with rule R18(1)(a)(2): 2003
DP Requirement: Rule NURS4 (b) shall apply - candidates must attend at least 75% of all classes, 100%
in the clinical setting, save those from which they have been officially excused.
226 Health Sciences
In the Faculty of Humanities, Development & Social

Sciences
Isizulu Studies
Offered in the School of Isizulu Studies
ZULM103 H1 W1 W2 - Bridging IsiZulu A

(39L-10T-0P-0S-102H-5R-0F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: Competent IsiZulu speakers who have little or no experience with IsiZulu grammar, reading
or writing.
Aim: To bridge the gap between spoken competence and shortcomings in writing and reading IsiZulu.
Content: Grammar lectures; highly structured reading programme with written reinforcement.
Assessment: Class work: 40% Examination: 60%
DP Requirement: Students must submit of all written work on time and must comply with the attendance
requirements for the School of IsiZulu Studies.
ZULN101 H1 P1 WB - Basic IsiZulu Language Studies A

(39L-10T-19P-0S-74H-5R-6F-0G-7A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: Open to students who have not written an Nguni mother tongue Grade 12 examination.
Aim: To achieve elementary fluency in both the oral and the written language through intensive training
with audio-visual programmed material.
Content: This module introduces basic grammar, history and culture of the amaZulu. Lectures combine an
academic study of IsiZulu with the use of a communicative method of language learning.
Assessment: Class work: 40% Examination: 60%
DP Requirement: Students must submit of all written work on time and must comply with the attendance
requirements for the School of IsiZulu Studies.
Core module for the major in IsiZulu Studies
English Language Development
Offered in the School of Language, Literature & Linguistics

ELDV100 HB PB WB - English Language Development B
(59L-0T-0P-0S-92H-4R-0F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Aim: The purpose of this module is to develop further the English language proficiency of students
selected for the Access Programme in the Humanities and the Social Sciences. It is also available to
mainstream English second-language students who have done English as a second language for Grade 12.
Content: This module builds on the skills developed in English Language Development A. The focus is on
intermediate English grammar, reading of discursive and extended texts, comprehension of typical
academic spoken English, essay writing and oral presentations.
Assessment: One 3-hour examination: 33%: Cumulative 67%
DP Requirement: 90% attendance; Completion of all assessment tasks
Offered as part of the Humanities Access Programme.
Health Sciences 227
Psychology
Offered in the School of Psychology
PSYC101 H1 P1 W1 - Introduction to Psychology A

(30L-10T-0P-0S-60H-56R-0F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Aim: A general introduction to the discipline: Part One
Content: A selection of topics from: Schools of thought in Psychology; Biological bases of behaviour;
Cognition inter alia: perception; learning and memory; thinking and language; intelligence; psychological
research; organisational psychology.
Assessment: Cumulative assessment (40%) Examination (60%)
DP Requirement: As per School of Psychology rules
PSYC102 H2 P2 W2 - Introduction to Psychology B

(30L-10T-0P-0S-60H-56R-0F-0G-4A-13W-16C)
Aim: A general introduction to the discipline: Part Two
Content: A selection of topics from: Human development; Personality theories; Social Psychology;
Community Mental Health; Health, Risk and Copying; Psychopathology.
PSYC201 H1 P1 - Introduction to Research

(20L-0T-20P-0S-60H-55R-0F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Aim: To introduce students to basic principles of qualitative and quantitative research design and analysis
for the social sciences.
Content: The module introduces students to perspectives in social science research including issues of
research design, research ethics and quantitative and qualitative methods of analysis. The statistics
component of the syllabus explores a variety of elementary graphical and mathematical statistical
procedures, including, inter alia, frequency displays, measures of central tendency and variability,
sampling distributions, two-group inferential tests and measures of association.
PSYC202 H1 P1 - Social Psychology

(18L-0T-0P-0S-37H-21R-0F-0G-4A-6W-8C)
Aim: An introduction to social psychology, broadly defined, focusing on social, psychological and political
aspects of inter-group relations, conflict and violence, and social change.
Content: The course explores a variety of ways of understanding the relationship between psychology and
social context with reference to current problems in South Africa. The various explanatory models are
assessed in terms of their relative success and failure in helping us develop a truly social psychology – one
that is able to link the understanding of individuals and groups to the social and cultural context in which
they exist. These theoretical frameworks are developed in relation to a contemporary social issue: either
race and inter-group relations, or violence and conflict.
PSYC203 H1 P1 W1 - Developmental Psychology

(20L-6T-0P-0S-30H-20R-0F-0G-4A-6W-8C)
Aim: To introduce learners to child and adult psychosocial development with the objective of acquiring a
critical and informed knowledge base from which to apply child development themes, theories and
methodologies within the South African context.
Content: An understanding of the processes of psychosocial changes over the life span especially during
228 Health Sciences
childhood and adolescence will be the major focus, enabling the learner to contextualise other studies of
human behaviour within a developmental time frame. It draws on several theories of development to
introduce learners to some of the conceptual and research issues within developmental psychology.
PSYC331 W2 - Applied Research Methods for Health Sciences

(20L-6T-0P-0S-30H-20R-0F-0G-4A-6W-8C)
Aim: To introduce students to the basic principles of qualitative and quantitative research design and
analysis for the health sciences.
Content: The module introduces students to perspectives in health science research including issues of
research design, research ethics and quantitative and qualitative methodologies. The data analysis
component of the syllabus introduces students to elementary forms of statistical analysis, including, inter
alia, elementary statistics, quantitative measures of association and an introduction to qualitative data
analysis methods.
Service course for the Faculty of Health Sciences. Not offered in 2007.
PSYC332 W2 - Managing Health Behaviour

(20L-6T-0P-0S-30H-20R-0F-0G-4A-6W-8C)
Aim: To provide students with an understanding of the psychosocial determinants of health and illness,
adjustment to health problems and treatment adherence as well as to develop communication skills to
enhance the clinical relationship.
Content: The module covers the biopsychosocial model of illness; understanding social and cultural
influences on health; models of health behaviour; dynamics of health behaviour (i.e. issues of
adherence/non-adherence); understanding the fundamentals of clinical communication; as well as
developing skills to enhance the clinical relationship.
Service course for the Faculty of Health Sciences
PSYC333 H1 - Community Psychology

(8L-0T-3P-0S-35H-31R-0F-0G-3A-6W-8C)
Content: The module will cover the historical development ad various theories and approaches within
community psychology. In addition, community-based interventions are critically explored.
PSYC335 H1 - Psychopathology
(19L-0T-0P-0S-37H-21R-0F-0G-3A-6W-8C)
Aim: To equip students with theoretical knowledge for the counselling situation.
Content: Introduction and overview of the various theoretical approaches to individual and group
counselling; the varying counselling contexts and populations.
Health Sciences 229
Social Work
Offered in the School of Social Work & Community Development

SOWK111 - Psychosocial orientation for Health care
(0L-0T-0P-0S-160H-0R-0F-0G-0A-0W-16C)
In the Faculty of Management Studies
Information Systems & Technology
Offered in the School of Information Systems & Technology

ISTN100 WB, PB - End User Computing
(29L-8T-20P-0S-26H-72R-0F-0G-5A-13W-16C)
Prerequisite: None
Aim: To emphasise the use of computers as integrated productivity tools and introduce end-user computing
definitions and concepts.
Content: Basic end-user computing concepts. Computer hardware (input, processing, output and storage).
Theory and application of systems software (operating systems) and applications software (word
processing, spreadsheets, presentation graphics, database, internet and email). Information networks and
data communications. Databases and database management systems.
Practicals: Computer-based exercises on the above topics.
Assessment: 2 h exam (50%), tests & assignments (50%).
DP Requirement: Students must obtain a class record of at least 40%.
Management
Offered in the School of Management

MGNT101 W1 - Management 110
(39L-12T-0P-0S-90H-12R-0F-0G-7A-13W-16C)
Content: This course takes current business practice as a basis for developing basic business knowledge,
critical thinking, and effective language skills within an integrated, interdisciplinary core module.
Assessment: Tests and/or Assignments (33%); 3hr Exam (67%)
MGNT102 P2 W2 - Management 120

(39L-12T-0P-0S-90H-12R-0F-0G-7A-13W-16C)
Content: The aim of this module is to provide learners with an introduction to the development of
management theory and the work of managers.
Assessment: 1 Test and 1 Assignment (33%); 3hr Examination (67%)
DP Requirement: Refer to Course Material

Fac 45 Handbook 2007

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fac 45 Handbook 2007

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fac 45 Handbook 2007

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FACULTY OF HEALTH SCIENCES

Dean: Professor S Y Essack

Tel: 031- 260 8019

Dean’s Assistant: K E Holland

Tel: 031- 260 7402

Tel: 031 – 260 8019

Principal Faculty Officer V. Govender

Tel: 031 – 260 7925

Principal Faculty Officer S. Reddy

Tel: 031 – 260 7209

Faculty Officer J Mey

Tel: 031 – 260 2375

Admissions Officer V. Singh

Tel: 031 – 260 7933

FACULTY OF HEALTH SCIENCES

Dean’s Message to students ........................................................................................ 1

Dean’s Message to students

HS13 (See GR16 and GR17) – Duly Performed Certification

FHEL3 Duly Performed requirements

HS20 (see GR 30) Academic exclusion

HS20 Academic Exclusion

HS21 (See GR 31) Academic exclusion – Right of Appeal

GR23 Special examinations

HS23 Ethical approval

HS22 Unacceptable Behaviour

The following are important dates and deadlines in 2007:

Aug Wed, 01 Aug Final date for registration for second

Very important exams results notice:

1. The official printed result sheet sent to your registered address

To initiate the SMS facility

The reply received

Results for Student 123456789 Year 2006 Month 11 : LLB301S : Results

In the case of fee balances the reply will read as follows:

An explanation of the Modules Codes

Special Events in the Faculty and University

GENERAL RULES FOR THE COLLEGE OF HEALTH

HS1 Changes in rules

HS3 Matriculation (cf University Rule BR2)

HS4 Eligibility (cf University Rule GR7)

HS5 Application to study (cf University Rule GR5)

HS6 Selection (cf University Rules GR6, GR7)

HS7 Selection for postgraduate studies (cf University Rule GR7)

Senate, is adequate for the purpose of postgraduate studies or research, may be

HS9 Recognition of attendance (cf University Rules BR4, HR3, CR5)

HS10 Payment of fees (this is University rule GR10)

HS11 Attendance and performance requirements (cf University Rules GR30,

HS12 Prerequisite and corequisite modules (cf University Rule GR14)

HS13 Due-performance (DP) certification (cf University Rules GR16, GR17)

HS15 Examination scripts (this is University Rule GR20)

HS16 Examination sessions (this is University Rule GR21)

HS17 Supplementary examinations (cf University Rules GR22, GR24, GR25)

HS18 Pass mark (this is University Rule GR27)

HS19 Award of Degree Cum Laude (cf University Rule BR6)

HS20 Academic exclusion (cf University Rule GR30)

HS21 Academic exclusion - right of appeal (this is University Rule GR31)

HS22 Unacceptable behaviour Students who are required by their curricula to

HS23 Ethical approval (cf University Rule CR7 (d))

ADDITIONAL RULES FOR HONOURS DEGREES IN THE COLLEGE

HS24 Admission (cf University Rule HR2)